23B-046 (224) MIR
no
w
.N., LIGHTING FIXTURES
Section 16510 - Page 1
SECTION 16510
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Interior luminaires and accessories.
B. Exterior luminaires and accessories.
C. Lamps.
D. Ballasts.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Specifications: Painting.
1 .03 REFERENCES
A. NEMA LE 2-H- I-D Lighting System Noise Criterion (LS-NC)
Ratings.
'Y 1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Include outline drawings, lamp and ballast data, support
!► points , weights , and accessory information for each
A
" luminaire type.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver , store and protect products under provisions of
General Conditions.
B. Handle metal poles carefully to prevent breakage and
damage to finish .
L 16510 - 1
am
MOTOR CONTROL
Section 16480 - Page 4
..
on
B. Select and install heater elements in motor starters to
match installed motor characteristics. ,o
C. Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor
starter enclosure door identifying motor served, nameplate
horsepower , full load amperes , code letter, service
factor, and voltage/phase rating.
END OF SECTION
.r
16480 - 4
MOTOR CONTROL
Section 16480 - Page 3
B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starter : NEMA ICS 2; AC
general purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage
controller for fractional horsepower induction motors,
with thermal overload unit , and toggle operator .
C. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6; Type 1.
2.03 MAGNETIC -MOTOR STARTER
A. Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2; AC general-purpose
Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in
horsepower .
B. Full Voltage Starting: Non-reversing type.
C. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz.
D. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS 2, bimetal.
Air
E. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1.
F. Combination Motor Starters: Combine motor starters with
disconnecting means, type as scheduled.
S. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2; two and field convertible
contacts in addition to seal-in contact .
H. Pushbuttons: NEMA ICS 2; START/STOP in front cover .
I . Selector Switches : NEMA ICS 2; HAND/OFF/AUTO in front
cover.
J. Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
K. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary capacity
as scheduled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install motor control equipment in accordance with
manufacturer ' s instructions.
16480 - 3
4k
ON
MOTOR CONTROL
ow
Section 16480 - Page 2
B. Provide product data on motor starters and combination
motor starters, relays , pilot devices, and switching and
overcurrent protective devices.
C. Submit manufacturers ' instructions under provisions of
General Conditions.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of
Section 01730.
B. Include spare parts data listing : Source and current
prices of replacement parts and supplies, and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section
01610.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section
01620. Store in a clean, dry place.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MOTOR STARTERS
A. Square D
B. Westinghouse
C. Allen-Brady
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.
2.02 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A. Manual Motor Starter : NEMA ICS 2; size as required on
Drawings, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated
non-reversing , full-voltage controller for induction
motors rated in horsepower , with overload relay , low
voltage protection , red pilot light, auxiliary contact_ ,
and toggle operator .
16480 - 2
MOTOR CONTROL
Section 16480 - Page 1
SECTION 16480
MOTOR CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Manual motor starters.
B. Magnetic motor starters.
C. Combination magnetic motor starters.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16190: Supporting Devices
1.03 REFERENCES
00 A. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and
Systems.
40 B. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
C. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit
and Service .
D. FS W-P-115 - Power Distribution Panel.
E. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box , Enclosed, Surface Mounted.
F. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
G. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
Section 01340.
go
16480 - 1
rl�r
PANELBOARDS
■
Section 16470 - Page 3
C . Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit
panelboard . Revise directory to reflect circuiting
changes required to balance phase loads.
D. Stub two (2) empty one-inch (1" ) conduits to accessible
location above ceiling out of each recessed panelboard.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard
feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard between
phases exceed 20 percent (20%) , rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads within twenty
percent (20%) . Take care to maintain proper phasing for
multi-wire branch circuits.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical
damage, proper alignment, anchorage and grounding. Check
r proper installation and tightness of connections for
circuit breakers, fusible switches and fuses.
C. Contractor to balance all of the circuit loading on each
power leg of the electrical panel .
4. END OF SECTION
ft
X0
of
16470 - 3
PANELBOARDS
Section 16470 - Page 2
1 .04 SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish two (2) each to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS- PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS
A. Square D
2.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS ..
A. Branch Circuit Panelboards : NEMA PBl ; circuit breaker
type , FS W-P-115, Type 1, Class 1 , with forty-two ( 42)
circuit capacity.
B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1 ; Type 1, Cabinet Size: 5-3/4" deep ,
20" wide.
C. Provide flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps,
concealed hinge and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in
manufacturer 's standard grey enamel.
D. Provide panelboards with aluminum bus , ratings as
scheduled. Provide copper ground bus in all panelboards.
E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10 ,000 amperes
rms symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards .
F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB1, FS W-C-375; Bolt-
on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers , with
common trip handle for all poles . Provide circuit
breakers UL-listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits .
Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit
breakers where scheduled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
am
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards recessed and plumb , and flush with so
wall finishes, in conformance with NEMA PB 1 . 1.
B. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
16470 - 2
w
PANELBOARDS
Section 16470 - Page 1
W SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
so
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Connect all required new branch circuits to panels
indicated.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, Branch Circuit
and Service.
B. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
C. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
D. NEMA PB 1 . 1 - Instructions for Safe Installation ,
Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts
or Less.
E. NEMA PB 1 . 2 - Application Guide for Ground-Fault
Protective Devices for Equipment .
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices
under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage,
main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating ,
circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
16470 - 1
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Section 16440 - Page 2
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.
2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES ...
A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: FS W-S-865 quick-make, quick-
break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with
externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening
front cover with switch in "ON" position. Handle lockable
in "OFF"- position. Fuse Clips: -FB W-F-87H Designed to- ..,
accommodate Class R fuses.
B. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1, Type 1, as indicated on Drawings.
2 .03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Bussman ..
B. Gould Shawmut
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. �.
2.04 FUSES
A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK1 as
indicated on Drawings. Dual element current limiting ,
time delay, one-time fuse, 250 volt. „
B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C . Install as per manufacturer ' s recommendations and as per
codes.
END OF SECTION
16440 - 2
■
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
w
Section 16440 - Page 1
SECTION 16440
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
air
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Disconnect switches.
B. Fuses.
C. Enclosures.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
B. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge
Fuses) .
C. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box, (Enclosed) , Surface-Mounted.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Include outline drawings with dimensions and equipment
ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower , and short
circuit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Square D
B. Westinghouse
C. General Electric
16440 - 1
w
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Section 16195 - Page 2
PART 3 EXECUTION ,
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and tape ..
labels.
B. Install nameplates and tape labels parallel to equipment
lines.
— C.--Secure"-nameplates to equipment Tronts--using- $crews-,--rivets
or adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed
panelboard doors in finished locations.
D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application .
3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard
gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes , and at
load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder
number for power and lighting circuits, and with control
wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection
diagrams equipment manufacturer ' s shop drawings for
control wiring.
3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING
A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution
and control * equipment, and loads served. Letter Height :
1/4 " for individual switches and loads served , 1/2"
distribution and control equipment identification .
B. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches and Motor Starters
in Panelboards, Switchboards , and Motor Control Centers : ••
1/8" identify circuit and load served, including location.
C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches and Motor
Starters : 1/8" identify load served.
3.04 CONDUIT COLOR CODING SCHEDULE
A. Use colored tape.
E. Fire Alarm System: Rod.
END OF SECTION
so
16195 - 2
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Section 16195 - Page 1
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
No PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
g' A. Nameplates and tape labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Conduit color coding.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Specifications - Painting.
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions off Section 01340.
B. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
++ A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic , black
letters on a white background.
B. Tape Labels : Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16" white
letters on black background.
C. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or
tubing type.
u
16195 - 1
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Section 16190 - Page 4
4. Details for steel frames to be used in connection with
the isolation and seismic restraint of the items .
E. Seismic Zone 2A is to be used as a base reference.
END OF SECTION
.�s
na
W*
w.
16190 - 4
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Section 16190 - Page 3
2. The manufacturers of the seismic restraints for
conduit shall submit shop drawings for review prior to
installation of piping . The shop drawings shall
indicate the location and loading of each restraint.
3. Restraint of rigidly mounted conduit shall conform to
"SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of
Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Systems" , SMACNA
ob latest edition. Calculations need not be submitted
for restraint systems conforming to these guidelines.
B. Isolated Conduit:
1. All conduit 3" and over shall be protected in all
planes by cable restraints designed to accommodate
thermal movement as well as restraint seismic motion.
Locations shall include, but not be limited to:
a. All drops to equipment connections.
b. Changes in direction of conduit.
C. At Horizontal Runs of Pipe Up to 3" Pipe: Twenty-
five feet (251 ) .
C. Seismic Conduit Connectors:
1. Use flexible conduit.
D. Submittals:
1. The seismic restraint manufacturer shall determine the
number , size , and type of anchor bolts , cable
restraints , etc. , for each piece and groups of pipes.
2. Complete engineering calculations and drawings for
seismic requirements for all piping.
3. Details for all the seismic bracing with snubbers
proposed.
16190 - 3
9A
SUPPORTING DEVICES to
Section 16190 - Page 2
AN
No
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten hanger rods , conduit clamps , and outlet and •
junction boxes to building structure using expansion
anchors, preset inserts and beam clamps.
B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow
masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls ;
expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry
walls ; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on
concrete surfaces ; sheet metal screws in sheet metal
studs; and wood screws in wood constructions .
C. Do not fasten supports to piping , ductwork , mechanical ..
equipment , or conduit.
D. Do not use powder -actuated anchors without specific
permission.
E. Do not drill structural steel members without specific --
permission.
F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel ,
rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance.
Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all
nuts .
G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with a
minimum of four ( 4 ) anchors . Provide steel channel
supports to stand cabinet one inch (1" ) off wall.
H. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support
flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls .
3.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS
A. Requirements:
1. Pipes shall be supported and braced per the SMACNA
"Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical
Systems and Plumbing Systems" , "Superstrut Seismic ..
Restraint System" for pipes and conduits , the "Kin-
Line Seismic Restraint System" for pipes and conduits,
only.
16190 - 2
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Section 16190 - Page 1
SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Contract.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Fastening hardware.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
+A1�t
A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment
and conduit , including wiring, which they carry.
40 PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel.
B. Hardware: Corrosion resistant.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS - SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. B-Line Systems, Franklin Park, Illinois
B. ITT Grinnell
C . Super Strut
D. Kin Line
16190 - 1
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
Section 16180 - Page 3
a
C. Install prefinished cord set where connection with
attachment plug is indicated or specified , or use
attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps.
D. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections
to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.
E. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring
compartment of- -prewired--equipment- n accordance- wi th-- -
manufacturer ' s instructions. Provide interconnection
wiring where indicated.
F. Install disconnect switches , controllers , control
stations , and control devices such as limit switches and
temperature switches as indicated. Connect with conduit
AIR and wiring as indicated.
3.04 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS - See Drawings
END OF SECTION
�w
16180 - 3
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
Section 16180 - Page 2
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630.
2.02 CORDS AND CAPS
A. Straight-Blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 1. FS W-C-596.
B. Locking-Blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 5.
.w
C. Attachment Plug Configuration : Match receptacle
configuration at outlet provided for equipment .
D. Cord Construction : Oil-resistant thermostat insulated
Type SJO multi-conductor flexible cord with identified
equipment grounding conductor , suitable for hard usage in
damp locations. .�
E. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and
rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION �-
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection,
wiring and energization. AM
3 .02 PREPARATION
A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and am
electrical rough-in. Verify location, size and type of
connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections
with supplier and installer. ow
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for so
temperatures encountered in heat-producing equipment.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible
conduit . Use liquid-tight flexible conduit in damp or wet
locations.
16180 - 2
■
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
Section 16180 - Page 1
,o SECTION 16180
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other
Sections.
1 .02 --RELATED WORK
A. General Specifications - Owner-Furnished Equipment
B. Heating and Ventilating Specifications - Motors
" C. Section 16111 : Conduit
D. Section 16120: Wire and Cable
E. Section 16130 : Boxes
1 .03 REFERENCES
A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector , Plug, Receptacle,
and Cable Outlet.
B. NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.
C. NEMA WD 5 - Specific Purpose Wiring Devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CORDS AND CAPS
A. Hubbell
B. Bryant
16180 - 1
WIRING DEVICES
Section 16141 - Page 4
I . Install devices and wall plates flush and level.
too
.R
END OF SECTION
rw
.R»
am
16141 - 4
WIRING DEVICES
w
Section 16141 - Page 3
r�
2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL PLATES
A. Hubbell , Arrow-Hart and Bryant .
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of General Conditions.
2.86 WALL PLATES
A.' Decorative Cover- Plate: - Smooth stainless steel--in- all-
finished areas. Galvanized steel plates in unfinished
areas. Jumbo size plates on masonry walls.
r B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged
gasketed device covers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall switches 48" above floor , "OFF" position
down.
B. Install wall dimmers 48" above floor ; derate ganged
dimmers as instructed by manufacturer ; do not use common
neutral.
C. Install convenience receptacles 18" above floor , 4" above
counters, backsplash, grounding pole on top.
D. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on
Contract Drawings.
wee E. Drill opening, for poke-through fitting installation in
accordance with manufacturer 's instructions.
F. Corridor Convenience Receptacles: Hospital Grade.
G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle and blank
outlets in finished areas using jumbo size plates for
outlets installed in masonry walls.
H . Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and
junction boxes in unfinished areas , above accessible
ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets.
16141 - 3
WIRING DEVICES
Section 16141 - Page 2
w�
2 .02 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits and Motor Loads Under ..
1/2 HP: NEMA WD 1 ; FS W-S-896; AC general use snap switch
with toggle rocker handle, rated 20 amperes and 120-277
volts AC. Handle: Ivory plastic.
B. Pilot Light Type : Lighted handle. Pilot strap in
adjacent gang.
C. Locator Type: Lighted handle.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES
A. Hubbell
2.04 RECEPTACLES
A. Normal Power Convenience and Straight-Blade Receptacles:
NEMA 5 - 20R, 20 amp, ivory color, Hospital Grade, duplex
receptacle, (8200 Series) by Hubbell.
B. Emergency Power Convenience and Straight -Blade
Receptacles : NEMA 5 - 20R, 20 amp, red color , Hospital
Grade, duplex receptacle , (8200 Series) by Hubbell.
C. Surge Protection Convenience and Straight-Blade
Receptacles : NEMA 5 - 20R, 20 amp, blue color, Hospital
Grade, single receptacle, (8200 Series) by Hubbell.
D. Specific-Use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1 or WD 5 ;
type as indicated on Drawings , grey plastic face .
Hospital Grade, (8200 Series) by Hubbell.
■A
E. GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle, Hospital
Grade, duplex receptacle (8200 Series) by Hubbell .
16141 - 2
WIRING DEVICES
Section 16141 - Page 1
SECTION 16141
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install wall switches.
B. Furnish and install receptacles.
C. Furnish and install device plates and box covers.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. FS WW-C- 596 - Electrical Power Connector , Plug ,
* Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.
B. FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle.
C. NEMA WD 1 - General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
D. NEMA WD 2 - Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps.
40
E. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General
so
Conditions.
B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes,
dimensions, and manufacturer 's instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES
A. Hubbell
16141 - 1
BOXES
"
Section 16130 - Page 3
w
F. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.
G. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets
mounted above counters, benchep and backsplashes.
H. In inaccessible ceiling areas , position outlets and
junction boxes within 6" of recessed luminaire, to be
accessible through luminaire ceiling opening.
w I. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure
boxes to interior wall and partition studs , accurately
". positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use
stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow
stud wall , and adjustable steel channel fasteners for
flush ceiling outlet boxes.
J. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats ,
and similar devices.
K. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior locations exposed to
the weather and wet locations.
3 .03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible
ceilings or in unfinished areas.
B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit .
END OF SECTION
go
16130 - 3
BOXES
Section 16130 - Page 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS
A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on the Drawings and as
required for splices , taps , wire pulling equipment »
connections and code compliance.
B. Electrical boa locations--shown on-Zontract Drawings are_ -- -
approximate unless dimensioned. Verify location of floor
boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to
rough-in .
C. Locate and install boxes to allow access . Where
installation is inaccessible , coordinate locations and
sizes of required access doors with General
Specifications.
D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a
neat appearance. "
3.02 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION
A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide
minimum 6 " separation , except provide minimum 24 "
separation in acoustic-rated walls.
B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of
masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to
achieve neat openings for boxes. �*
C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.
D. Support boxes independently of conduit , except for cast
boxes that are connected to two rigid metal conduits, both
supported within 12" of box.
E. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one device are
mounted together ; do not use sectional boxes . Provide
barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems. � .
16130 - 2
BOXES
Section 16130 - Page 1
SECTION 16130
BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
' B. Pull and junction boxes.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 16141: Wiring Devices - Service fittings and fire-
rated poke-through fittings for floor boxes.
1 .03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes ,
Covers and Box Supports.
B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum) .
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes : ANSI/NEMA OS 1 ; galvanized
steel, with 1/2" male fixture studs where required.
B. Cast Boxes: Aluminum, cast feralloy, deep type, gasketed
cover , threaded hubs.
C. Cast Metal Boxes for Wet Location Installations: NEMA
250; Type 4 and Type 6 , flat-flanged , surface-mounted
junction box , UL listed as raintight. Galvanized cast
iron cast aluminum box and cover with ground flange ,
neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws.
16130 - 1
WIRE AND CABLE
Section 16120 - Page 4
F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under
provisions of General Conditions.
—^
B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper
-connection: --- -
---- _ ---- — - — �_--
C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to
manufacturer 's recommended values.
D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch
circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections.
3 .06 WIRE AND CABLE -INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
B. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
C. Wet or Damp Interior Locations : Building wire in
raceways.
D. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
E. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceways.
Mob
so
END OF SECTION
am
.■
so
16120 - 4
WIRE AND CABLE
Section 16120 - Page 3
3 .02 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use
UL listed wire pulling lubricate for pulling 4 AWG and
larger wire.
B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has
been physically protected from the weather and all
mec�isn3ca� work-Tikely fo injure- conductors
-has - been--
completed.
C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before
installing conductors.
3 .03 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to
damage.
B. Support cables above accessible ceilings; do not rest on
ceiling tiles. Use spring metal clips or plastic metal
cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling
suspension system. Include bridle rings or drive rings.
C. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
3 .04 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.
B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers
for copper wire splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller . For
10 AWG and smaller , use insulated spring wire connectors
with plastic caps.
C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and
taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and
connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the
insulation value of conductor.
D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and
connectors.
E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity
of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.
on
16120 - 3
WIRE AND CABLE
Section 16120 - Page 2
..e
2.02 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE
A. Control Cable for Class I Remote Control and Signal
Circuits : Copper conductor , 600 volt insulation , rated 60
degrees C . , individual conductors twisted together ,
shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket, an aluminum
sheath , an interlocked aluminum steel armor with an
overall PVC jacket.
B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and
Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation ,
rated 60 degrees C . , individual conductors twisted
together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket , UL
listed.
C. Plenum Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and ...
Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation ,
rated 60 degrees C . , individual conductors twisted
together , shielded, and covered with a nonmetallic jacket;
UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces r.
used as ducts, and plenums.
PART 3 EXECUTION 4M
3 .01 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting MR
circuits, an-d no smaller than 14 AWG for control wiring.
B. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere , 120 volt branch "`
circuit home runs longer than 75 ' and for 20 ampere, 277
volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 ' .
go
C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a
circuit in same raceway or cable.
D. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.
E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and
panelboards.
F. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.
16120 - 2
WIRE AND CABLE
■
Section 16120 - Page 1
w
go SECTION 16120
WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
40
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Building wire.
4M B. Cable.
C. Wiring connections and terminations.
1 .02 REFERENCES
A. NEMA WC 3 - Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the
Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
B. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the
Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BUILDING WIRE
A. Thermoplastic-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5.
B. Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 6 AWG: Copper ,
stranded conductor , 600 volt insulation , THHN or THWN.
C. Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper
conductor , 600 volt insulation, THHN or THWN, 6 and 8 AWG,
stranded conductor; smaller than 8 AWG, solid conductor .
D. Control Circuits : Copper , stranded conductor 600 volt
insulation, THW.
16120 - 1
CONDUIT
w
Section 16111 - Page 5
I . where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors ,
provide mechanical fire-stop fittings with UL listed fire
rating equal to wall or floor rating.
-- ------- - --- - - - - -- END OF SECTION
aiw
�1
16111 - 5
on
CONDUIT
Section 16111 - Page 4
D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree
bends between boxes .
E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, and
maintain exposed conduit tight to corners.
Oft
F. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows
for bends in conduit larger than 2" size-
---- - -- --—------------- ---------- - — ---
G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable,
provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low
point.
H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit
against entrance of dirt and moisture.
I . Provide No . 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull
string in empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples.
J. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building
expansion joints.
3 .03 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Underground Installations More Than Five Feet (51 ) From
Foundation Wall : Rigid steel conduit .
B. Installations In or Under Concrete Slab or Underground
Within Five Feet (5 ' ) of Foundation Wall : Rigid steel .�
conduit.
C. In Slab Above Grade: Rigid steel conduit.
D. Exposed Outdoor Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
E. Wet Interior Locations: Intermediate metal conduit.
F. Exposed Dry Interior Locations : Intermediate metal
conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
G. Final Connections to Motors and Recessed Ceiling-Mounted
Light Fixtures and Movable Equipment , Dry Locations :
Flexible metal conduit.
H . Final Connections to Motors and Movable Equipment, Wet
Locations : Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit .
16111 - 4
w
CONDUIT
w
Section 16111 - Page 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT
A. Size conduit for conductor type installed, 1/2" minimum
size.
B. Arrange exposed conduit to maintain headroom and present a
- --
neat appearance= - -Dse- conduit fitfings to change -
directions and to maintain conduit tight to corners.
Keep conduit tight to finished surface.
C. Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible
ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent
piping.
D. Maintain 6" c-learance between conduit and piping .
Maintain 12" clearance between conduit and heat source
such as flues , heating pipes, and heating equipment.
E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of
alignment by wire pulling operations . Fasten conduit
using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hanger , clevis
hangers or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers.
F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use
conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit
straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional
conduit .
G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps.
Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during
construction, before conductors are pulled.
3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut
ends.
B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings
and fasten securely.
,�. C. Use conduit hubs or scaling locknurs for fastening conduit
to cast boxes , and for fastening conduit to sheet metal
boxes in damp or wet locations.
16111 - 3
CONDUIT
Section 16111 - Page 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 .
2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS
-
A. Conduit: Galvanized steel.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; use fittings
and conduit bodies specified above for rigid steel
conduit.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS
A. EMT: ANSI C80. 3 , galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies : ANSI/NEMA FB 1 ; steel or .�.
malleable iron, compression type.
2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS (HOSPITAL GRADE)
(Where Allowed by Code Only for Lighting Systems Whip
Connections Off of Main Conduit Runs , and Where Necessary
Due to Tight Physical Constraints)
A. Conduit : FS WW-C-56 ; steel.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FS 1.
2.05 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.06 CONDUIT SUPPORTS .
A. Conduit Clamps, Straps and Supports: Steel or malleable
iron. **�
16111 - 2
CONDUIT
w
Section 16111 - Page 1
SECTION 16111
CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
e..
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Rigid metal conduit and fittings.
B. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings.
C. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.
D. Flexible metal conduit and fittings.
E. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit and fittings.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Cutting and Patching
1 .03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80. 1 - Rigid Steel Conduit , Zinc-Coated.
B. ANSI C80. 3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated.
C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and
Cable Assemblies.
D. FS WW-C-563 - Electrical Metallic Tubing.
E. FS WW-C-566 - Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit.
F. FS WW-C-581 - Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit.
16111 - 1
!�w
w
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 16001 - Page 3
1 .12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Install work in locations shown on Drawings , unless
prevented by project conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all new electrical work in complete conformance
with all applicable codes and regulations.
END OF SECTION
?�e
wie
no
16001 — 3
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 16001 - Page 2
approved design, erected and removed by experienced stage
builders and shall have all accident prevention devices
required by State and Local Laws .
B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all required
hoisting for this project.
1.86 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Remove all existing items as shown on the Contract
Documents.
B. Provide new wiring, conduit connections and devices to new
electrical and mechanical items as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
C. Connect to new and existing building and power
distribution system.
D. All material and work to be provided under Electrical
Sections 16001 through Section 16721 inclusive.
E. Install temporary lighting system at jobsite to meet
applicable O.S.H.A. regulations .
F. Obtain all necessary electrical permits and inspections;
coordinate the inspection process by applicable local
Inspectors.
G. Complete all electrical work items shown in the Contract
Documents.
1 .10 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT LITERATURE
A. Submit shop drawings and product literature in accordance
with the General Conditions.
1.11 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Electrical Code, with Massachusetts Electrical
Code Amendments.
16001 - 2
■
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Section 16001 - Page 1
s
SECTION 16001
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING ITEMS TO BE REMOVED
A. The existing electrical items requiring demolition are
generally shown on the Demolition Sheet of the Contract
Drawings . The Contractor , however , will be responsible
for the demolition of all equipment components , even if
they are not specifically shown on the Contract Documents.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements.
B. Section 09900: Painting
1 .03 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic electrical requirements specifically applicable to
Division 16 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General
Requirements.
1 .04 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Install work in phases to accommodate Owner 's occupancy
requirements . During the construction period, coordinate
electrical schedule and operations with
Architect/Engineer . See General Requirements.
1.05 STAGING, SCAFFOLDING AND HOISTING
A. Except as otherwise indicated, the Electrical Contractor
shell furnish , erect and maintain all staainq and
scaffolding (interior) `for his use during the construction
of the building. Staging and scaffolding shall be of
16001 - 1
so
W.
TESTING AND BALANCING
00
SECTION 15991 - PAGE 2
Record data and location. Use manufacturer's .,
rating and calculations.
h. Adjust all diffusers and grilles to minimize
drafts in all areas.
i. Test and record all air temperatures - supply,
return, mixed, outside air including dry and
wet bulb.
j . Verify that all Temperature Controls are
operating.
B. The Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of new ..
sheaves and belts if it becomes necessary to change the
drives during balancing of system.
C. The Contractor shall submit four (4) sets of all balance ..
data to Architect/Engineer's office. Data shall include
location of reading, velocity, correction factor, test
CFM and required CFM shown on Plans and temperatures.
All data shall be typed on A.A.B.C. forms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The air side system balancing shall be accomplished under
the supervision of a registered professional engineer in
the Contractor's employ. ,
B. Coordinate system balancing requirements with electrical
contractors and temperature controls subcontractor.
C. The testing and balancing work is to be done by a
contractor certified by Associated Air Balance Council
(A.A.B.C. ) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau
(N.E.B.B. ) . Submit certification and list of 10 past
projects completed in the last two years along with the
qualifications resume of the technicians assigned to the
project.
END OF SECTION
15991-2 ,�
■
w
TESTING AND BALANCING
SECTION 15991 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15991
TESTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Testing and balancing of air side of heating,
ventilation, and air conditioning system.
40
PART 2 - GENERAL
2 . 01 PROCEDURES
A. Air System Balancing.
r. 1. The air side of the system shall be balanced -both
supply and exhaust using the following as a guide:
a. Test and adjust fan RPM to design
requirements.
b. Test and record motor full load amperage.
C. Check all fans for correct rotation.
d. Test and record system static pressures,
suction and discharge.
e. Test and adjust system for design outside air
`" and recirculated air quantities.
f. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts
e and zones to proper design CFM.
g. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and
40 register to within 5% of design requirements.
Record data and location. Use manufacturer's
rating and calculations.
15991-1
00
M
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15974 - PAGE 10
3 . 07 EXHAUST FANS
A. See the schedule on the drawings for control
requirements on occupied cycle.
3 .08 GENERAL
A. Temperature control components which are to be mounted on
insulated ductwork, shall be mounted after the insulation
has been applied.
B. All work is to be done in a neat and workmanlike manner
and is to be entirely satisfactory to the
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
3 . 09 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE
A. Contractor shall further guarantee to maintain the
temperature at the instruments within one degree above or
below the setting of the instruments, provided there is
sufficient heating or cooling media available and there
are not uncontrolled sources of heat.
B. Furnish to Architect/Engineer detailed submittal °
drawings showing all controls and interlock wiring of all
equipment such as air handling units, condensing units.
and exhaust fans.
END OF SECTION
.X
dw
..
15974-10
■
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15974 - PAGE 9
3 . 03 BOOSTER COILS
A. In areas served by booster coils, a pneumatic room
thermostat shall control the booster coil. On a call for
heat the control valve serving the booster coil shall
modulate open.
B. In the system unoccupied mode, each thermostat shall
automatically be set back to 60 degrees F.
C. All booster coil thermostat settings to be routed back to
averaging type cumulator to control unit discharge
temperature.
3 .04 FINNED TUBE RADIATION
A. A dual room thermostat shall modulate the control valve
to maintain the space temperature. In the unoccupied
mode each thermostat shall automatically be set back to
60 degrees F.
3 . 05 CABINET UNIT HEATER CONTROL
A. A dual temperature cabinet heater thermostat shall
modulate 2-way coil valve and cycle fan to maintain space
temperature, occupied and unoccupied modes. When.
overhead door opens, fan to run continuously.
3 .06 CATSCAN ROOM AIR CONDITIOENR
A. A wall mounted thermostat shall cycle the refrigerant
coil and condensing unit to maintain cooling setpoint in
occupied cycle.
B. In a heating mode, the thermostat shall cycle reheat coil
to maintain heating setpoint in occupied cycle.
w C. Supply fan to run continuously in occupied position and
cycle intermittently in unoccupied position to maintain
a 50 setup temperature and 100 lower temperature in
40 heating mode.
D. A wall mounted humidistat shall energize unit mounted
humidifier to maintain relative humidity setpoint:
PW
15974-9
00
an
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 1.5974 — PAGE 8
temperature, and discharge air temperature. Provide
pilot light indication for occupied cycle and the
switches.
3 . 02 CONTROL SEQUENCES - AIR HANDLING UNIT
A. Air Handling Unit - AC-1 ^
I. Furnish and install a discharge air thermostat; a
discharge temperature transmitter with its .,
associated indication gage and submaster receiver
controller; outside air, and return air dampers and
modulating positioning type damper operators; two
PE switches for "occupied-unoccupied" control; and
a freeze protection thermostat.
2 . The control shall function so that the outside air **�
dampers shall open to their minimum position after
the fan starts on the "occupied" cycle. The
discharge air thermostat shall readjust the set
point of the submaster receiver controller. The
submaster receiver controller shall sequence the
outside air, and return air dampers and cooling
coil and condensing unit to maintain the required
unit discharge temperature.
3 . The two PE switches shall run the fan motor
continuously when the time clock is in the
"occupied" position and they shall cycle the
fan motor intermittently with the outside air
dampers closed when the time clock is in the
"unoccupied" position.
4 . The outside air damper and exhaust fan shall close *
whenever the unit fan motor is off. See exhaust
fan schedule on plans.
5. The freeze protection thermostat shall stop the .�
unit fan motor whenever the coil discharge
temperature drops below 40 degrees F.
6. Provide smoke detectors in R.A. and S.A. duct at
air handling unit. The smoke detectors shall shut
off the supply air fan and signal Master Control
Panel in Maintenance Department.
15974-8
w
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15974 - PAGE 7
5. All controls inside of .panels are to be tagged with
plastic tape to match control drawings
identification numbers.
J. Timeclocks
1. Timeclocks shall be seven (7) day electronic
programmable with 15 amp switch for 120 volt
operation. Powered by Electrical Contractor. HVAC
40 to wire contacts. Locate in Mechanical Equipment
Room 14.
2 . Manufacturer: Paragon EC71/18S.
3. Provide individual clocks for:
a) Air Handling Unit.
b) Catscan Air Conditioner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 AIR HANDLING UNIT
A. General - the supply fan shall operate continuously
during the occupied cycle and shall be inoperative
during the unoccupied cycle. The occupied/unoccupied
changeover shall be automatic through a 7-day program
clock. Whenever the unit is started on the occupied
cycle, the outdoor air damper shall be placed in its
minimum open position one hour after occupied cycle
start.
B. Freeze Protection Control - On a decrease in mixed air
temperature below the setpoint of freeze thermostat,
freeze thermostat shall stop the supply fan, close the
outdoor air dampers and signal the Maintenance Department
Monitoring System.
C. Provide a mixed air controller to limit the mixed air
temperature to a minimum of 50 degrees F (adjustable) .
D. Provide control panel to house the components for the
sequence described. On the face of the panel provide
indication of return air temperature, mixed air
15974-7
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15974 - PAGE 6
field adjusted from direct to reverse acting, receiving
their control signal from a field mounted pressure or
temperature transmitter.
G. Pneumatic submaster receiver controller shall
incorporate the features of the above receiver
controllers with the exception that they shall have the
capability of receiving their control signals from two
field mounted pressure or temperature transmitters and
provide a ratio of change between two input signals. The
submaster receiver controller shall be capable of
receiving one input from a remote re-adjustment switch.
H. Low limit thermostats shall be electric two-position type
with 20 foot bulb and manual reset. String capillary
tube across inlet face of coil. It shall be capable of
operating thermostat circuit if any 1-foot section of ••
bulb is subjected to a temperature below setpoint. Each
thermostat shall have two circuits, one to shut down
fan, another for alarm. All freezestats shall be wired
to override starter circuits regardless of position.
I. Local Control Panels:
1. To be totally enclosed, made of extruded aluminum
alloy with fluted surfaces. All corners shall be
securely riveted and supported on an internal angle
bracket. The cabinet face panel and the inside
sub-panel shall be removable from the cabinet for
each in mounting of equipment. The face panel and
sub-panel shall be made of aluminum bonded on both
sides with a marine plywood core. A piano type
hinge shall run the entire length of the cabinet to
support the door.
2 . Provide a key locking latch on the door for
security purposes.
3 . Each panel shall have all instruments and
indicators clearly identified by means of removable
bakelite engraved name plates. ••
4 . Where electrical equipment shall be mounted in the
control panel, it shall be U.L. approved.
15974-6
s
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15974 - PAGE 5
elements for measuring air flow. Air flow averaging type
elements shall be long enough to be strung across the
entire air stream in order to obtain an average air flow
temperature.
C. Pressure transmitters shall be one pipe instrument with
external restrictors incorporating pneumatic feedback and
a proportional relationship between the measured pressure
and transmitted signal.
D. All room thermostats shall be of the two pipe, non-bleed
or "relay" type design. They shall be fully
proportional with adjustable throttling range and
tamper-proof locking settings. Thermostats shall be
dual temperature, direct acting or reverse acting as
detailed in the sequence of operations.
Dual temperature thermostats shall conserve energy by
automatically changing over from a normal setting to a
lower unoccupied setting. Unoccupied temperature shall
be set by means of a separate concealed calibrated dial.
A manual reset button shall be provided for return to
normal temperatures during unoccupied cycles. Button
shall reset to normal during the next cycle of operation.
For checkout and observation purposes either quick
connect test plug for checking branch pressure
(accessible by removal of the thermostat cover) or
permanently mounted pressure gauges at each control
device supplied by the thermostat branch signal.
Covers shall be metal or high impact plastic
satisfactory for institutional use.
E. Pneumatic pressure and temperature indicators in 2-1/2"
and 3-1/2" sizes shall provide continuous visual
indication of the pressure or temperature of its
associated transmitter. The indicator shall have a
recalibration screw on the face of the dial and the range
shall be sized to incorporate only the span of the
temperature being measured. Ranges shall be as
necessary for required service.
F. Pneumatic receiver controllers shall be two pipe
proportional relay type instruments, capable of being
15974-5
uis
an
go
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
am
SECTION 15974 — PAGE 4
test performed per ASTM D-1693-60T. All individual tube
polyethylene or multitube instrument tubing harness must
be classified as flame retardant and must be rated as
self extinguishing when tested under ASTM D-635
flammability test.
D. All non-metallic tubing run in mechanical or finished
spaces where other tubing is exposed shall be run within
adequately supported rigid metallic raceway, E.M.T. pipe
or duct. Terminal single lines shall be hard drawn
copper to armored non-metallic tubing, except if the run
is less than 12" flexible polyethylene may be used.
E. Non-metallic tubing may be installed in concealed
locations such as pipe chases, suspended ceilings or
within walls in a neat and workmanlike manner. Multi-
tube instrument harness (bundle) may be used in place of -�
single tube where a number of tubes run to the same
points. Tubing shall be placed to avoid contact with hot
piping or other surfaces. Avoid crimping tubing. r.
Tubing installed inside or behind control panels may be
number coded polyethylene. The tubing must be neatly
tied and supported.
F. Extend compressed air piping from the Hospital's existing
control air system.
2 .04 GAUGES
A. Furnish air pressure gauges where required, to indicate
at all times the position of the equipment to be
controlled. The gauges shall be furnished in each line
connection for all duct and insertion thermostats. The
gauge faces shall be marked with the range of the units +�»
being controlled.
2.05 THERMOSTATS AND CONTROLLERS
.w
A. Capillary temperature transmitters shall be one pipe
instruments with external restrictors incorporating
pneumatic feedback and a proportional relationship ow
betwen the measured temperature and transmitted signal.
B. Liquid filled capillaries shall be supplied with bulb ow
type elements for measuring liquids and averaging type
15974-4
w
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15974 - PAGE 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 DAMPER OPERATORS
A. All damper operators are to be either fully proportional.
The operators shall be of piston type, incorporating
direct thrust without lever type linkages.
2. 02 VALVES
A. All control valves shall be with cast-brass bodies and
stainless steel stems. All valves 2-1/2" and over are to
be the flange type, valves 2" and smaller can be either
screwed or union connections as required. All valves for
this control system shall be suitable for the medium
being controlled. Where valves are operate in sequence
with other valves or dampers, they are to be equipped
with pilot positioners with adjustable ranges for both
throttling range and starting point. All control valves
shall be furnished by the automatic temperature control
sub-contractor but shall be installed by the Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Contractor.
. ► 2.03 AIR PIPING SYSTEM
A. Complete air piping to be provided for the pneumatic
control system, adhering to the highest standard of
quality and appearance and subject to the approval of the
Architect/Engineer.
B. Pipe shall be of seamless copper tubing or non-metallic
tubing as specified below. All piping shall be concealed
except in mechanical rooms or areas where other piping is
exposed. Hard drawn tubing will be used in all exposed
areas and either hard drawn or annealed if concealed.
Where copper tubing is run exposed, each tube is to be
securely fastened at regular intervals and run parallel
to the lines of the building. Only tool made bends will
be acceptable. Fittings for copper tubing shall be brass
of copper solder joint type except at connection to
apparatus, where brass compression type fittings shall be
used.
C. Non-metallic tubing shall be virgin polyethylene, ASTM
Type 1, Grade 5, Class B or C; meeting the stress crack
15974-3
w
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15974 - PAGE 2
8. Air Handling Unit
9. Exhaust Fans
10. Booster Coils
11. Cabinet Heaters *�*
12. Wall Fin Radiation
13 . Catscan Room Air Conditioner
1. 03 WIRING
A. All low voltage control and line voltage control wiring
required for the control system shall be installed by
this contractor. Both line and low voltage wiring are to -'
be run in thin wall conduit in exposed areas and in rigid
conduit when installed in concrete or underground areas.
B. Line voltage power wiring from supply or exhaust fan .A
motors to manual or magnetic starters, pushbutton
stations, selector speed switches, etc. is to be done by
Electrical Contractor. -�
C. All line voltage control and/or low voltage control
wiring within the temperature control panels shall be ...
installed by this Sub-Contractor.
1. Starters: Wiring to and from starter contacts is
by the Electrical Contractor. Coil wiring for HVAC
equipment is by the HVAC Contractor.
2 . Freezestats and Damper Motors: Wired by HVAC.
3 . Manual Starters, Toggle Switches, Timers: Wiring
by Electrical Contractor.
4. HVAC Control Timeclocks: Contacts wired by HVAC.
5. General: The HVAC Contractor is responsible for
all control wiring not identified on the electrical
plan.
15974-2
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SECTION 15974 - PAGE 1
w
SECTION 15974
TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
w
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 PRODUCTS AND INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install a pneumatic system of automatic
temperature controls in strict accordance with the
following detailed specifications.
B. All work shall be installed by mechanics directly
employed by this manufacturer who shall be responsible
for the proper installation and operation of the control
equipment.
C. The control contractor shall furnish all necessary
components whether or not specifically itemized inorder
to install a complete system within the intent of the
W Specifications.
D. The control system is to include, but not be limited to
on the following:
1. Wiring
2 . Damper Operators
3 . Valves
4 . Pneumatic Piping and Tubing
5. Gauges
6. Thermostats and Controllers
7 . Control Diagrams including Wiring
15974-1
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SECTION 15936 - PAGE 4
E. Paint with two coats of baked enamel, color as selected .�
by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers`
instructions.
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary
adjustments in position to conform with architectural
features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Provide
plaster frames in walls and plaster or sheet rock
ceilings.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers,
and grilles and registers regardless of whether dampers
are specified as part of the diffuser or grille and
register assembly.
E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets
matte black.
F. HVAC Contractor to coordinate installation of wall ..
louvers with General Contractor.
G. Touch-up paint of all damaged painted surfaces such as
grilles, diffusers, louvers, etc.
END OF SECTION
15936-4
■
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SECTION 15936 - PAGE 3
D. Provide radial opposed blade damper and multi-louvered
equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser
face.
2 . 03 CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers.
B. Fabricate one inch margin frame with countersunk screw
mounting or lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings.
Provide plaster frame for sheetrock, plaster and other
hard surface ceilings. See Room Finish Schedule on
Architectural Plans.
C. Fabricate of aluminum with factory white finish.
D. Provide integral, gang-operated opposed blade dampers
with removable key operator, operable from face.
2. 04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL LOUVERS
A. American Warming & Ventilating
B. Arrow
C. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
2 .05 LOUVERS
A. Construction
1. Anodized Aluminum - 6" deep.
2 . Frame - Aluminum 12 GA ( .08111) .
3 . Blade - Stationary, drainable at 35 degrees -
Aluminum 12 GA ( .08111) .
4 . Aluminum 18/14 mesh insect screen on inside or
outside face.
B. Maximum free area velocity 1100 fpm. Pressure drop
0. 19" .
C. AMCA certified for air and water penetration.
D. Frame type to suit wall construction.
15936-3
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SECTION 15936 - PAGE 2
B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with
AMCA 500.
1. 05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A.
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General
Requirements.
B. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type,
size, location, application, air flow, pressure drop, and
accessories. ..
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under
provisions of General Conditions. .
D. Submit color selection charts with submittal drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CEILING DIFFUSERS *�
A. Metalaire
B. Kreuger
C. Titus
2 . 02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Rectangular, adjustable pattern, stamped, multicore type
diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with
sectorizing baffles where indicated.
B. Provide inverted T-bar type frame. In plaster, or
sheetrock, or other hard surface ceilings, provide
plaster frame and ceiling frame. See Room Finish
schedule on Architectural plans.
C. Fabricate of aluminum with baked enamel finish, color as
selected by Architect.
so
15936-2
o..
w
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
w
SECTION 15936 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15936
AIR OUTLETS AND .INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
• 1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Diffusers.
B. Registers/grilles.
C. Wall Louvers.
1. 03 REFERENCES
A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.
B. AMCA 500 - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
C. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
D. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
E. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow
Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
ww F. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard.
1. 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
40 A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in
accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE
go 70.
15936-1
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15910 - PAGE 5
D. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust
ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.
E. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning
before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers,
at fire dampers and elsewhere as indicated. Provide
minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch
size for shoulder access and as indicated. On face of
door, mark the usage with a red or black magic marker to
assist maintenance, i.e. "Fire Damper" .
F. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for
testing and balancing purposes.
END OF SECTION
40
No
on
15910-5
40
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15910 - PAGE 4
B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air ..
tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended
neck fittings to clear insulation.
2 . 08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIRE DAMPERS
A. Prefco
B. National Controlled Air
C. Vent Products
D. Greenheck
2 . 09 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as
indicated. *�
B. Fabricate curtain type dampers of galvanized steel with
interlocking blades. Provide closure springs and latches ..
for horizontal and vertical installations. Configure
with blades out of air stream.
C. Fusible links, UL 33, shall separate at 160 degrees F.
Provide adjustable link straps for combination
fire/balancing dampers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. .»
B. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure
supply, return and exhaust systems where branches are
taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing.
Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
C. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated, where ducts
and outlets pass through fire rated components and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install
with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, .6
breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs,
bearings, bushings and hinges.
15910-4
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
s�
SECTION 15910 - PAGE 3
2 . 04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct
Construction Standards and as indicated.
B. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated, woven glass
fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 20 oz. per sq.
yd. , approximately 2 inches wide, crimped into metal
edging strip.
2 . 05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Cesco
B. Advanced Air
**�
C. Vent lok
2 . 06 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct
Construction Standards and as indicated.
B. Review locations prior to fabrication.
C. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized
steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking
devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one
inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured
with sash locks.
on E. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18
inches square, three hinges and two compression latches
with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48
w
inches. Provide an additional hinge for larger sizes.
F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not
acceptable.
2. 07 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Cut or drill temporary test .holes in ducts as required.
Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs or
threaded or twist-on metal caps.
ws
15910-3
.w
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15910 - PAGE 2
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
General Conditions for fire dampers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct
Construction Standards, and as indicated.
B. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x
30 inch.
C. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern
with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch. Assemble center ■-
and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized
channel frame with suitable hardware.
D. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide
end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-
impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
E. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single
and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30
inches provide regulator at both ends.
F. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off
mounting brackets, bases or adapters.
2 . 02 AIR TURNING DEVICES
A. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to .�
pivoting frame and bracket, steel or aluminum
construction.
2 . 03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. General Environment Corporation
B. Thermaflex
C. Johns Manville
15910-2
w
w
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SECTION 15910 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15910
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Volume control dampers.
B. Air turning devices.
C. Flexible duct connections.
D. Duct access doors.
E. Duct test holes.
F. Fire Dampers
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15890 - Ductwork.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
B. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
C. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire Protection
Service.
D. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
15910-1
Mill
DUCTWORK
SECTION 15890 - PAGE 6
between the edges of the sleeve and duct shall be sealed , .
tight with loose fiberglass insulation and fireproof
caulking for sound and fire-smoke integrity. Refer to
Architectural plans for sound and fire walls.
3 .05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean Duct system and force air at high velocity through
duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient
air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment
which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary
filters, or bypass during cleaning, OR
B. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines.
Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt
with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide
adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
END OF SECTION
15890-6 ...
DUCTWORK
SECTION 15890 - PAGE 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to
accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot
tube openings where required for testing of systems,
PP complete with metal can with spring device or screw to
ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided
in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside
a metal ring.
B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to
allow normal operating and maintenance activities.
C. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts
with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. Hold in
place with strap or clamp.
D. During construction provide temporary closures of metal
or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent
construction dust from entering ductwork system.
3 . 02 DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL
Low Pressure Supply Steel
!! System with Cooling Coils w/insulation
Return and Relief Steel
General Exhaust Steel
Outside Air Intake Steel with 2 " rigid
insulation
3 . 03 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Seal air tight with "hard cast" or United McGill Uni-
Grip.
3 . 04 SOUNDWALL AND FIREWALL PENETRATIONS
A. All ducts through soundwalls and firewalls, if insulated,
shall be insulated through the opening. A flanged metal
sleeve is to be installed in the wall opening. The space
15890-5
DUCTWORK
SECTION 15890 - PAGE 4
H. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round *�*
duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of
air flow.
I. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod
supports. Provide rubber-in shear vibration isolators on
ducts with vibration transmission as directed by
Architect/Engineer.
J. Bracing shall be galvanized steel angles and conform to
the following sizes and spacings:
Maximum Duct Size Sizes of Bracinas & Spacings
Up to 24" None
25" to 48" 1" x 1" x 1/8" angles, 4 ' from joint --
49" to 60" 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" angles, 4 '
from joint
2 . 04 SPIRAL ROUND DUCT
A. Constructed of ASTM A525 galvanized steel sheet.
B. Wall Thickness - 3 to 14 inch - diameter 28 GA, 15" - 26"
- 26 GA.
C. Maximum 3" W.G. static positive pressure.
D. Fittings to be appropriate for mating with sections of
duct, equipment, and terminal outlets. Elbows may be die
formed, pleated, or mitered types, welded lapped and spot
welded, standing seam or adjustable seam type. Gauge to •»
match supply ducts. Seal all joints airtight.
E. Install volume dampers as required and specified.
F. Suspend from building construction with rod and band
straps. Use rubber-in-shear isolators for vibration
attenuation where directed by Architect/Engineer. *^
G. Exposed ducts to be cleaned and prepared for finish
painting.
15890-4 *R
DUCTWORK
SECTION 15890 - PAGE 3
2 . 03 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA Low
Pressure Duct Construction Standards and ASHRAE
handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material,
gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures
indicated.
Weights of sheet shall be as follows:
Maximum Size U.S. Standard Gauge
Up to 12" 26
13" to 30" 24
31" to 48" 22
49" to 60" 20
Elbows and transformation pieces, etc. shall be one to
two gauges heavier, depending on size. Ratio of width of
individual air passages to total width of elbow shall be
one (1) to four (4) .
B. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts
in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular
and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or
sizes permitted except by written permission.
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less
than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not
possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide
double wall turning vanes.
D. Use 450 entry branch takeoff connects unless noted on
plans.
` E. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees
divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of
equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence
downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees.
F. Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts
with piping and structure. Where easements exceed 10
percent duct area, split into two ducts maintaining
original duct area.
G. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
15890-3
DUCTWORK
SECTION 15890 - PAGE 2
G. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air
Conditioning Systems.
H. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
I. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1. 05 DEFINITIONS +*�
A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions.
1. 06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. U.S. Steel
B. Republic Steel
C. Armco Steel Corporation
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements
for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181.
B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 galvanized steel sheet, lock-
forming quality, having zinc coating of 1. 25 oz. per
sq.ft. for each side in conformance with ASTM A90.
C. Insulated Flexible Ducts: Flexible duct wrapped with
flexible glass fiber insulation, enclosed by seamless
aluminum pigmented plastic vapor barrier jacket; maximum
0.23 K value at 75 degrees F.
D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. ..
E. Sealant: Water resistant and fire resistive, similar to
"hard cast" or United McGill Uni-Grip. r*
F. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends,
threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
15890-2 "�"
DUCTWORK
SECTION 15890 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Low pressure ducts.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15290 - Duct Insulation.
B. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories.
C. Section 15936 - Air Inlets and Outlets.
D. Section 15990 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ASHRAE - Handbook 1981 Fundamentals; Chapter 33 - Duct
Design.
B. ASHRAE - Handbook 1983 Equipment; Chapter 1 - Duct
Construction.
C. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Iron or Steel Articles.
D. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-
Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process.
E. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by
Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality.
F. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
15890-1
AIR CLEANING
SECTION 15885 — PAGE 4
D. Install filter gage static pressure tips upstream and
downstream of duct filters. Mount filter gage on wall
next to control panel. Adjust and level.
E. Install access doors on entering side of filter as
necessary to service filters.
oft
END OF SECTION
15885-4 ""
■
AIR CLEANING
SECTION 15885 - PAGE 3
2 .04 FILTER FRAMES
A. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting
structures of extruded aluminum T-section construction
with necessary gasketing between frames and walls.
B. Standard Sizes: Provide for interchangeability of filter
media of other manufacturers; filter media, minimum 2
inches thick.
C. Side servicing Housings: Flanged for insertion into
ductwork, of reinforced 16 gage galvanized steel; access
doors with continuous gasketing and positive locking
devices on both sides; extruded aluminum tracks or
channels for primary filters with positive sealing
gaskets.
2 . 05 FILTER GAUGES
A. Direct Reading Dial: 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm
actuated dial in metal case, vent valves, black figures
on white background, front recalibration adjustment,
range 0-2. 0 inch WG 2 percent of full scale accuracy.
B. Accessories: Static pressure tips with integral
compression fittings, 1/4 inch tubing, 2-way or 3-way
vent valves.
C. Provide alarm light for filter replacement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
+ . B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with
rubber or neoprene gaskets.
C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or
permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used
during construction.
15885-3
AIR CLEANING
SECTION 15885 - PAGE 2
1. 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and protect products under provisions of General
Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Cambridge
B. American Air Filter
C. Farr
2 . 02 PANEL FILTERS - PRE-FILTER (FURNISHED WITH AC-1)
A. Media: 2 inch thick fiber blanket, factory sprayed with
flameproof, non-drip, non-volatile adhesive.
B. Rating: 500 FPM face velocity, 0. 15 inch WG initial
resistance, 0.50 inches WG recommended final resistance.
30% efficiency.
C. Holding Frames: 20 gage minimum galvanized steel frame
with expanded metal grid on outlet side and steel rod
grid on inlet side, hinged with pull and retaining .
handles.
D. Provide two (2) spare replacement sets of filters for
each air handling unit filter section. "
E. Equal to FARR 30-30.
2 . 03 AIR FILTERS - 90% EFFICIENCY - DUCT MOUNTED
A. Air filters shall be high efficiency, extended surface,
self-supporting, 12" mini-pleat type. Each filter shall
consist of a rigid ultra-fine glass fiber media pack,
securely bonded to a double wall enclosing frame. Each
filter shall be furnished with a holding frame equal to
AAF Varicel.
B. Provide two (2) spare replacement sets of filters.
15885-2 .,
.A
AIR CLEANING
■r
SECTION 15885 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15885
AIR CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Disposable panel filters.
B. High efficiency filters.
C. Filter frames.
D. Filter gages.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15855 - Air Handling Units with Coils.
B. Section 15890 - Ductwork.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
B. ASHRAE 52 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used
in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.
1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Filter media shall be ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class 1 or
Class 2, as approved by local authorities.
B. Provide all filters as product of one manufacturer.
C. Assemble filter components to form filter banks from
products of one manufacturer.
15885-1
POWER VENTILATORS
SECTION 15870 - PAGE 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mount fans level. Adjust base for roof pitch.
END OF SECTION
40
15870-3
ON
POWER VENTILATORS
SECTION 15870 - PAGE 2
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. ..�
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
General Conditions.
B. Provide product data on cabinet fans. *
C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly
plotted.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under
provisions of General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Greenheck
B. Loren Cook
C. Acme
2 . 02 CABINET EXHAUST FANS
A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven, with
galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch acoustic
insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft
damper in discharge.
B. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in
housing for thermal overload protected motor.
C. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored ••
to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch
motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with
sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning
pre-lubricated ball bearings.
D. Wall Louvers by Fan Supplier.
15870-2
POWER VENTILATORS
SECTION 15870 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15870
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Cabinet inline exhaust fans.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15890 - Ductwork.
B. Section 15910 - Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating
Purposes.
C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air
Moving Devices.
E. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard.
1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the
AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300.
15870-1
40
AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
SECTION 15855 - PAGE 6
D. See Section 15885 for Final Filters.
2 . 08 DAMPERS
A. Provide mixing box section as shown on the drawings.
2 . 09 GENERAL
A. Brake horsepower and coil face velocity shall not be more .R
than 5% higher than scheduled.
B. Magnetic starter with H.O.A. switch for each unit to be
furnished by Electrical Contractor.
C. Duct Mounted Smoke Detector: NFPA 72E; ionization type �+
with auxiliary SPDT relay contact, key-operated NORMAL-
RESET-TEST switch, duct sampling tubes extending width of
duct, and visual indication of detector actuation, in
duct-mounted housing. Four-wire detector with separate
power supply and signal circuits. Faraday 9495 w/DH-22
duct housing or equal by Simplex.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION ow
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and in conformance with ARI 435.
B. Install unit on vibration isolators.
C. Install smoke detector in return air duct. Coordinate
with Electrical Contractor to fit into Fire Alarm Control
System and connect to remote test switch.
D. Spare filters to be turned over to owner at time of
substantial occupancy. Contractor to obtain signed
receipt from owner for materials. WK
END OF SECTION aw
A.
15855-6 M
.e
AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
SECTION 15855 - PAGE 5
2 . 05 FANS
A. Provide fan section'with forward curved or air foil type
fan.
B. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or roller
bearings with lubrication fittings extended to exterior
of fan casing with tube and zerk fitting rigidly attached
to casing.
C. Mount motor drive and belt guard on integral casing frame
work on interior of casing. Mount casing on vibration
isolators.
2 . 06 MOTORS AND DRIVES
A. Motors: Premium high efficiency type similar to Gould
Type E or equal by Baldor, Marathon, or G.E.
B. Bearings: ANSI/AFBMA 9, L-50 life at 100, 000 hours,
heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-
lubricated ball bearings, or ANSI/AFBMA 11, L-10 life at
120, 000 hours pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-
lubricated roller bearings.
C. Shafts: Solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished,
with key-way, and protectively coated with lubricating
oil.
D. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically
balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed. Variable and
adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under
selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at
mid-position.
2 . 07 FILTERS
A. Provide filter box of galvanized steel with filter
guides, access doors from both sides, for side loading.
B. Provide high capacity arrangement with 2 inch deep
galvanized frames with hinged panel and renewable media
panels.
C. Provide filter gauges 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm
actuated dial in metal case, 2 inch with static pressure
tips. Provide alarm light for filter replacement.
15855-5
M
AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
SECTION 15855 - PAGE 4
D. Witt
2 . 02 GENERAL
A. Fabricate draw-thru type air handling units suitable for
low pressure operation.
B. Fabricate units with fan or fan and coil section plus
accessories, including filter mixing section, cooling
coil section as shown on plans.
C. Factory fabricate and test air handling units of sizes,
capacities and configuration as indicated and specified.
D. Base performance on sea level conditions.
2 . 03 CASING
A. Construct of galvanized steel on channel base or drain
pan. Fabricate channel base of welded steel coated
externally with zinc chromate, iron oxide, or phenolic
resin paint.
B. Insulate casing sections with one inch thick, 3/4
lbs/cu.ft. density, neoprene coated, glass fiber
insulation, "K" value at 75 degrees F maximum 0.26
Btu/inch/sq.ft. /degrees F/hr. , applied to internal
surfaces with adhesive. Unit to have double wall
construction.
C. Construct double wall drain pans from galvanized steel
with welded corners. Cross break and pitch to drain
connection. Provide drain pans under cooling coil
section. Drain connections on both sides of unit.
D. Provide structure to brace casings for suction pressure .w
of 2 .5 inch wg with maximum deflection of 1 in 200.
2 . 04 REFRIGERANT COOLING COIL MW
A. Coil to have an equalizing type vertical distributor for
use with R-22.
B. Coil to be tested at 300 psig air pressure under water
and dehydrated and sealed with a holding charge of dry
nitrogen.
15855-4 ..
w
AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
SECTION 15855 - PAGE 3
D. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly
plotted.
E. Submit sound power levels for both fan outlet and casing
radiation at rated capacity.
F. Submit product data of filter media, filter performance
data, filter assembly, and filter frames.
G. Submit electrical requirements for power supply wiring
including wiring diagrams for interlock and control
wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-
installed wiring.
1. 07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of
General Conditions.
B. Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement,
motor and drive replacement, spare parts lists, and
wiring diagrams.
1. 08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in factory fabricated protective
containers, with factory installed shipping skids and
lifting lugs and store and protect products under
"M provisions of General Conditions.
B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and
construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage
to components, enclosures, and finish.
1. 09 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide two additional sets of filters, type as
specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Trane
" B. Carrier
C. McQuay
15855-3
AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
SECTION 15855 - PAGE 2
G. ANSI/UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
H. ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating
Coils.
I. ARI 430 - Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling
Units.
J. ARI 435 - Standard for Application of Central-Station
Air-Handling Units.
K. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems.
L. SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
1, 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fan Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear
the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
C. Filter Media: ANSI/UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II,
approved by authorities.
D. Air Coils, Certify capacities, pressure drops, and
selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410.
E. Air Handling Units: Product of manufacturer regularly
engaged in production of components who issues complete
catalog data on total product. ,,
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of w.
General Conditions.
B. Shop drawings shall indicate assembly, unit dimensions,
weight loading, required clearances, construction
details, and field connection details.
C. Product data shall indicate dimensions, weights, .�
capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical
characteristics, and gages and finishes of materials.
15855-2 ,�
w
AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
w
SECTION 15855 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15855
AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Packaged air handling units.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15290 - Ductwork Insulation.
B. Section 15885 - Air Cleaning.
C. Section 15890 - Ductwork.
D. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories: Flexible duct
connections.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating
Purposes.
C. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
D. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air
Moving Devices.
E. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball
Bearings.
F. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller
Bearings.
15855-1
N wow
w
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
SECTION 15835 - PAGE 4
B. Locate finned tube radiation on outside walls and run MM
cover wall-to-wall unless otherwise indicated. Center
elements under windows. Install wall angles where units
butt against walls. Contractor or supplier to field
verify all cabinet and element dimensions, install end
covers, trim strips and corners to conceal all piping,
valves, traps, accessories. -
C. Install cabinet unit heaters as indicated. Coordinate to .�
assure correct recess size for recessed units.
D. Protect units with protective covers during balance of
construction.
3 . 03 CLEANING "M
A. Clean work under provisions of General Conditions.
B. After construction is completed, including painting,
clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils and
inside of cabinets.
C. Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished
cabinets, using finish materials furnished by
manufacturer.
D. Install new filters.
3 . 04 SERVICE ACCESS .r
A. Install units so access covers can be removed for service
of valves, traps, and/or filters without interference
from pipes, conduit, walls, floors, or ceilings.
END OF SECTION
15835-4 „�,
■
w
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
SECTION 15835 - PAGE 3
2 . 02 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded
to copper tubes, designed for 100 psi and 220 degrees F
for use on low pressure steam.
B. Cabinet: 18 gauge steel with exposed corners and edges
rounded, easily removed panels with camlock Allenhead
fasteners, glass fiber insulation and integral air outlet
and inlet duct collars.
C. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels,
statically and dynamically balanced, direct driven.
D. Motor: 120/60/1, sleeve bearings, resiliently mounted.
E. Control: Multiple speed switch, factory wired, located
in cabinet.
F. Filter: Easily removed one inch thick permanent washable
type, located to filter air before coil.
G. Capacity: See Plans for schedule.
H. Manufacturers: Trane or equal as approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and
opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and
instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper
location, and ready for use.
" C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts
existing surfaces.
M. 3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer' s instructions.
Im
15835-3
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
SECTION 15835 - PAGE 2
1. 05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operations and maintenance data under provisions
of General Conditions.
B. Include manufacturers descriptive literature, operating
instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and
repair data, and parts listings.
1. 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site and store and protect products .�
under provisions of General Conditions.
B. Protect units from physical damage by storing in
protected areas and leaving factory covers in place.
C. Install radiation and cabinet heaters after walls and .�
ceiling are finished and painted. Avoid damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS -
2 . 01 FINNED TUBE RADIATION
A. Heating Elements: Steel tubing mechanically expanded
into evenly spaced steel fins, suitable for soldered
fittings. See schedule.
B. Element Hangers: Quiet operating, ball bearing cradle
type providing unrestricted longitudinal movement, on
enclosure brackets.
C. Enclosures: 16 gauge steel - provide easily jointed
components for wall to wall installation. Support ,,
rigidly, on wall mounted brackets at least 3 feet on
center maximum. Maximum length of cabinet to be 4 feet.
D. Finish: Factory applied baked enamel of color as
selected on visible surfaces of enclosure or cabinet.
E. Capacity: See Plans for schedule.
F. Manufacturers - Trane, Sterling or Vulcan.
15835-2 ,�
w
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
SECTION 15835 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15835
TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Finned tube radiation.
B. Cabinet unit heaters.
1. 03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1. 04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating cross section of
cabinets, grille, bracing and reinforcing, and typical
elevation.
C. Submit product data indicating typical catalog of
information including arrangements.
D. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures typically
indicating length and number of pieces of element and
enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access
doors, and comparison of specified heat required to
actual heat output provided. Identify by room location.
E. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and
requirements, specifically indicating deviations from
indicated products.
15835-1
STEAM DUCT COILS
SECTION 15791 - PAGE 3
C. Support coil sections independent of piping on steel
channel or double angle frames and secure to casings.
Provide airtight seal between coil and duct or casing.
D. Protect coils to prevent damage to fins and flanges.
Comb out bent fins.
E. Make connections to coils with unions and flanges.
END OF SECTION
g
15791-3
STEAM DUCT COILS
SECTION 15791 - PAGE 2
B. Protect coils from entry of dirt and debris with pipe
caps or plugs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Trane, Carrier, McQuay
2 . 02 FABRICATION
A. Tubes: 1 inch OD seamless copper with internal steam
tube arranged in parallel, expanded into fins, brazed
joints.
B. Fins: Aluminum continuous plate type with full fin
collars or individual helical finned tube type wound
under tension.
C. Casing: Die formed channel frame of galvanized steel .
with mounting holes on 3 inch centers. Provide tube
supports for coils longer than 40 inches.
D. Capacity: As scheduled. am
2 . 03 STEAM HEATING COILS
A. Headers: Cast iron with tubes expanded into header,
seamless copper tube with silver brazed joints, or prime
coated steel pipe with brazed joints.
B. Testing: Air test under water to 200 psig for working
pressure of 200 psig 220 degrees F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and plan detail.
B. Install in ducts and casings in accordance with SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible. ..
15791-2 "'
■
STEAM DUCT COILS
SECTION 15791 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15791
STEAM DUCT COILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Steam coils.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
B. Section 15526 - Steam Specialties.
C. Section 15890 - Ductwork: Installation of duct coils.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ARI 410 - Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-
Heating Coils.
B. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and
Flexible.
1. 05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating coil and frame
configurations, dimensions, materials, rows, connections,
and rough-in dimensions.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site and store and protect products
under provisions of General Conditions.
w 15791-1
s
CATSCAN ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
SECTION 15785 — PAGE 5
B. Coordinate installation of Catscan Room air conditioning
units with ceiling contractor.
C. Provide adequate drainage connections for condensate and
humidifier system.
END OF SECTION
15785-5
CATSCAN ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
SECTION 15785 - PAGE 4
2 . 10 HUMIDIFIER ..�
A. Evaporative Pad Type: Stainless steel pan and cover,
serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or
electrical connections; pre-piped with stainless steel or ,.
brass float valve mechanism; electric heating coil and
low water cut-off switch; with flush cycle timer and
solenoid drain valve. .�
2 . 11 ELECTRICAL PANEL
A. Service Connections, Wiring, and Disconnect Requirements.
B. Control Cabinet: UL listed, with piano hinged door,
grounding lug, magnetic starters with overload relays,
circuit breakers and cover interlock, and fusible control
circuit transformer.
C. Disconnect Switch: By Electrical Contractor.
2 . 12 ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Solid state with start-stop switch, temperature control,
and humidity control.
B. Location: Remote Wall Mounted.
C. Coordinate with pneumatic control system - Section 15974 .
2 . 13 CAPACITY - See Plans
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ceiling system is ready to receive work and
opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that proper power supply is available.
3. 02 INSTALLATION ..�
A. Install unit in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
15785-4
00
CATSCAN ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
SECTION 15785 - PAGE 3
2 . 05 COMPRESSORS
A. Hermetic with suction gas cooled motors, vibration
isolators, thermal overloads, oil sight glass, manual
reset high pressure switch, 1750 rpm.
B. Compressors shall be individually serviceable without
dismantling other components.
2 .06 EVAPORATOR COILS
A. Split face circuits, direct expansion cooling coils of
seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins in
vertical flat face configuration.
B. Thermal expansion valve with external equalizer, liquid
line filter-drier, refrigerant sight glass with moisture
indicator, service shut-off valves and charging valves.
C. Mount coil assembly in stainless steel drain pan.
2 . 07 CONDENSERS
A. Air Cooled: Air cooled refrigerant condenser consisting
of corrosion resistant cabinet, copper tube aluminum fin
coils direct drive fan with permanently lubricated ball
bearing. Single phase motor with internal overload
40 protection.
2 .08 FILTERS
A. Media: Pleated, lofted, non-woven, reinforced cotton
fabric; supported and bonded to welded wire grid;
enclosed in cardboard frame; one inch nominal thickness.
2 . 09 HEATING COIL - REHEAT
A. Heating Coil: Enclosed fin electrical elements arranged
40 A.
minimum of two stages.
B. Circuit Protection: Primary and secondary thermal
4" cutouts, differential air pressure switch, and manual
reset overload protection, ' branch circuit overcurrent
protection.
15785-3
a.
MW
CATSCAN ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
so
SECTION 15785 - PAGE 2
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance
and repair data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Liebert
B. Approved equal
2 . 02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Provide packaged, air-cooled, factory assembled, pre-
wired and pre-piped unit, consisting of cabinet, fans
filters, humidifier, controls.
2 . 03 CABINET AND FRAME
A. Structural Frame: 14 GA welded steel suitably braced for
rigidity, capable of supporting compressors and other
mechanical equipment and fittings.
B. Doors and Access Panels: 20 GA steel with polyurethane
gaskets, hinges to allow removal of panels, and concealed
fastening devices.
C. Insulation: Thermally and acoustically line cabinet
interior with one inch thick acoustic duct liner.
D. Finish of Exterior Surfaces. FS TT-C-490 prepared,
baked-on textured vinyl enamel; color as selected.
2 . 04 EVAPORATOR FANS AND MOTORS
A. Fans: Double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fans,
statically and dynamically balanced on steel shaft with .®
self-aligning permanently lubricated ball bearings,
directly driven.
B. Motor: Drip-proof permanently lubricated ball bearing WM
motor with built-in current and overload protection.
15785-2
MW
�a
CATSCAN ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
SECTION 15785 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15785
CATSCAN ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air conditioning units.
B. Controls and control panels.
1. 03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code.
B. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilation Systems.
C. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured
products and assemblies required for this project.
B. Indicate water, drain, electrical rough-in connections on
shop drawings or product data.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under
provisions of General Conditions.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
++ A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of
General Conditions.
15785-1
..
MW
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 15671 - PAGE 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. M"
B. Provide for connection to electrical service.
C. Install units on vibration isolation.
D. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and
evaporators. Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15.
3 . 02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Provide initial and cooling season start-up, and winter
season shut down during first year of operation,
including routine servicing and check out.
C. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each
refrigerant circuit. Replace losses of refrigerant and
oil.
D. Inspect and test for refrigerant leaks during first year
of operation.
END OF SECTION
w�
15671-6 *
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 15671 - PAGE 5
7 . Charging valve.
8. Discharge line check valve.
9. Compressor discharge service valve.
10. Condenser pressure relief valve.
2 . 08 CONTROLS
A. On unit, mount weatherproof steel control panel, NEMA
250, containing power and control wiring, factory wired
with single point power connection.
B. For each compressor, provide across-the-line starter,
non-recycling compressor overload, starter relay, and
control power transformer or terminal for controls power.
Provide manual reset current overload protection. For
each condenser fan, provide across-the-line starter with
starter relay.
C. Provide the following safety controls arranged so that
operating any one will shut down machine and require
manual reset:
1. High discharge pressure switch (manual reset) .
2 . Low suction pressure switch (automatic reset) .
3 . Oil Pressure switch (manual reset) .
D. Provide the following operating controls:
1. Five minute off timer prevents compressor from
short cycling.
2 . Periodic pump-out timer to pump down on high
evaporator refrigerant pressure.
3 . Head pressure control for low ambient control down
to 0° F.
15671-5
aw
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
am
SECTION 15671 - PAGE 4
under water to 425 psig, and dehydrate.
B. Coil Guard: Expanded metal.
2 . 05 FANS AND MOTORS
A. Vertical discharge propeller. type condenser fans with fan
guard on discharge.
B. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, 3 phase,
with permanent lubricated ball bearings and built in
thermal overload protection. '
2 . 06 COMPRESSORS
A. Construction: Semi-hermetic reciprocating type with heat
treated forged steel or cast iron shafts, aluminum alloy
connecting rods, automotive type pistons, rings to ..
prevent gas leakage, suction and discharge valves, and
sealing surface immersed in oil.
B. Mounting: Statically and dynamically balance rotating
parts and mount on vibration isolators.
C. Motor: constant speed rpm suction gas cooled with •
electronic sensor . and winding over temperature
protection, designed for across-the-line starting.
Furnish with starter.
2 . 07 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
A. Provide each unit with one refrigerant circuit,
refrigerant circuits, factory supplied and piped.
B. Provide the following for each refrigerant circuit:
1. Filter dryer.
2 . Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.
3 . Thermal expansion valve for maximum operating
pressure.
4 . Insulated suction line.
5. Suction and liquid line service valves.
6. Liquid line solenoid valve.
15671-4 *�!
rw
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 15671 - PAGE 3
e, C. Protect units on site from physical damage. Protect
coils.
1. 08 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for refrigerant compressors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Trane, Carrier, McQuay.
2 . 02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and
pre-wired units suitable far outdoor use consisting of
cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral
sub-cooling coil, controls, liquid receiver, and screens.
B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI
210/240. Testing shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 14.
C. Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not
less than prescribed by ANSI/ASHRAE 90A.
2 . 03 CASING
A. House components in steel panels with weather resistant,
baked enamel finish.
B. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof
panel provided with full opening access doors. Provide
mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door is
opened.
C. Provide removable access doors or panels with quick
fasteners.
2 . 04 CONDENSER COILS
A. Coils: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless
copper tubing. Provide sub-cooling circuits. Air test
'" 15671-3
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 15671 - PAGE 2
D. ANSI/UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and
Accessories, Non-Electrical.
E. ANSI/UL 303 - Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning
Condensing, and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment.
F. ANSI/UL 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners.
G. ARI 520 - Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors,
Compressor Units and Condensing Units.
H. ASHRAE 14 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive �.
Displacement Condensing Units.
I. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
1. 05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of General
Conditons.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly,
dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances,
and location and size of field connections. Include
schematic layouts showing condensing units, cooling *
coils, refrigerant piping, and accessories required for
complete system.
C. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights ..
specialties and accessories, electrical nameplate data,
and wiring diagrams.
1. 06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of
General Conditions.
B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance instructions,
parts lists, controls, and accessories.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site and store and protect products
under provisions of General Conditions.
B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for
rigging, unloading, and transporting units.
15671-2 ••
ON
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
SECTION 15671 - PAGE 1
t SECTION 15671
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 SECTION INCLUDED
�s
A. Condensing unit package.
B. Charge of refrigerant and oil.
C. Controls and control connections.
D. Refrigerant piping connections.
E. Motor starters.
F. Electrical power connections.
1. 03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
B. Section 15536 - Refrigeration Piping and Specialties.
C. Section 15855 - Air Handling Units with Coils.
D. Section 15974 - Controls and Instrumentation.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration.
w
B. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in new Building
Design.
C. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
15671-1
04
ON
w�
REFRIGERATION PIPING
SECTION 15536 - PAGE 5
E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and
access to valves and fittings.
F. Insulate piping, refer to Section 15260.
G. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately
downstream of evaporator on suction line.
H. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves
with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator.
I. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after
testing.
J. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves.
3 . 03 APPLICATION
A. Provide line size moisture-liquid indicator in main
liquid line to refrigerant coil.
B. Provide solenoid and expansion valves in liquid line and
filter drier of line size and system capacity.
3 . 04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field testing will be performed under provisions of
General Conditions.
B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ANSI/ASME
B31. 5.
C. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig.
Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig
using electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.
END OF SECTION
' '"
15536-5
REFRIGERATION PIPING
SECTION 15536 - PAGE 4
B. Coil Assembly: UL listed replaceable with molded ..
electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with
surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral
junction box.
2 . 06 EXPANSION VALVES
A. Angle or Straight Thru Type: ARI 750; design suitable
for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external
equalizer, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable
inlet strainer, with non-replaceable capillary tube and
remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well.
B. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through
system to determine available pressure drop across valve.
Select valve for maximum load at design operating
pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to
avoid being undersized at full load and excessively ..
oversized at part load.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before
assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or
unions. .�
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with ..
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Route piping in orderly manner parallel to building
structure, and maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space and not
interfere with use of space.
D. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections when
joining dissimilar metals.
15536-4
"•
e �
REFRIGERATION PIPING
+wr
SECTION 15536 - PAGE 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 PIPING
A. Copper Tubing ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn or
annealed.
1. Fittings ANSI/ASME B16. 22 wrought copper.
2 . Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder Grade 95TA.
3 . Joints: AWS A5.8, silver solder.
B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ANSI/ASTM B88,Type K,
annealed.
1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.26 cast copper.
2 . Joints: Flared.
2 . 02 REFRIGERANT
A. Refrigerant : ANSI / ASHRAE 34 , R- 22 :
Monochlorodifluoromethane.
2. 03 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS
A. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or
brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, color
coded paper moisture indicator with removable element
cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum working pressure
of 430 psi and maximum temperature of 200 degrees F.
on
2 . 04 FILTER-DRIERS
A. Permanent Straight Thru Type: ANSI/ARI 710, UL listed,
steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, for
maximum working pressure of 350 psi.
2 . 05 SOLENOID VALVES
A. Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass body and
internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and
plunger assembly, with flared, solder or threaded ends;
for maximum working pressure of 500 psi. Stem shall,
permit manual operation in case of coil failure.
15536-3
no
REFRIGERATION PIPING
SECTION 15536 - PAGE 2
F. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. „
G. ANSI/UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves.
H. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.
I. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile
Refrigerants. �.
J. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
K. MIL-V-23450C - Valves, Expansion, Thermostatic,
Refrigerant 12 and Refrigerant 22 .
1. 05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of General -.
Conditons.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating schematic layout of
system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and
sizes.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under
provisions of General Conditions.
D. Submit data indicating pipe sizing.
E. Submit Test reports indicating results of leak test, acid
test.
1. 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site. Store and protect products
under General Conditions.
B. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping
containers with labelling in place.
C. Protect piping and specialties from entry of
contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in
place until installation.
15536-2
"w
REFRIGERATION PIPING
SECTION 15536 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15536
REFRIGERATION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping.
B. Refrigerant.
C. Moisture - liquid indicator.
D. Filter-driers.
E. Solenoid valves.
F. Expansion valves.
1. 03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
B. Section 15671 - Air Cooled Condensing Units.
1. 04 REFERENCES
W A. ANSI/ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers.
B. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration.
C. ANSI/ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants.
D. ANSI/ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared
Copper Tubes.
E. ANSI/ASME B31. 5 - Refrigeration Piping.
+.a 15536-1
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15526 - PAGE 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer' s
instructions.
�** B. Install float and thermostatic traps to drain condensate
from heating coils and direct steam injected humidifiers.
C. Size steam traps to handle minimum of two times maximum
condensate load of apparatus served.
D. Traps used on steam mains and branches shall be minimum
3/4 inch size.
E. Install steam traps with union or flanged connections at
both ends.
F. Provide gate valve and strainer at inlet, and gate valve
at discharge of steam traps.
G. Provide minimum 10 inch long dirt pocket of same pipe
sizes as apparatus return connection between apparatus
and steam trap.
H. Remove thermostatic elements from steam traps during
1W temporary and trial usage, and until system has been
operated and dirt pockets cleaned of sediment and scale.
END OF SECTION
15526-3
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15526 - PAGE 2
B. Submit shop drawings and product data for manufactured ..�
products and assemblies required for this project.
C. Include product description, model, dimensions, component
sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and
finishes.
D. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, �**
size, location, rated capacity, and features for each
specialty.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under
provisions of General Conditons.
1. 07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of
General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - STEAM TRAPS
A. Armstrong .�
B. Trane
C. Dunham-Bush
D. Sarco
2 . 02 FLOAT AND THERMOSTATIC TRAPS
A. ASTM A126, cast iron or semi-steel body and bolted cover
for 125 psig WSP; provide access to internal parts
without disturbing piping; with bottom drain plug,
stainless steel bellows type air vent, stainless steel
lever and valve assembly.
2 . 03 THERMOSTATIC TRAPS
A. Bi-metallic type with ASTM A105 forged steel body and
cover, for 300 psig WSP, bi-metal element with stainless
steel components, integral Type 304 stainless steel
strainer screen.
15526-2 ..
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15526 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15526
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Steam traps.
B. Strainers.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
B. Section 15520 - Steam and Steam Condensate Piping.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code.
B. ASTM A105 - Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping
Components.
C. ASTM A126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings.
1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide
components by same manufacturer throughout.
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
General Conditions.
! ► 15526-1
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 15520 - PAGE 5
3 . 04 LEAK TESTING
A. Inspect all joints and connections for leaks and
workmanship and make corrections as necessary, to the
satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Tests may be
either of those below, or a combination, as approved by
the Architect/Engineer.
1. An operating test at design pressure.
2 . A hydrostatic test at 1. 5 times design pressure.
Factory tested equipment (coils, etc. ) need not be
field tested. Avoid excessive pressure on
mechanical seals and safety devices.
3 . 05 FLUSHING AND CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Steam, Condensate and Vent Piping: No flushing or
chemical cleaning required. Accomplish cleaning by
pulling all strainer screens and cleaning all scale/dirt
cur
legs during start-up operation.
3 . 06 FIRESTOPPING
A. Fill openings around uninsulated piping penetrating
floors or fire walls, with firestop material. For
firestopping insulated piping refer to Section,
INSULATION.
END OF SECTION
* 15520-5
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 15520 - PAGE 4
C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction
without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
D. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and
access to valves and fittings.
E. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
Aw
F. Slope steam piping one inch in 40 feet (0.25 percent) in
direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers to maintain
bottom of pipe level. ..
G. Slope steam condensate piping one inch in 40 feet (0.25
percent) . Provide drip trap assembly at low points and
before control valves. Run condensate lines from trap to
nearest condensate receiver. Provide loop vents over
trapped sections.
H. Where pipe support members are welded to structural
building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat
of zinc rich primer to welding.
I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for
finish painting.
J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not
inverted.
K. Escutcheons shall be provided around all exposed
insulated or bare pipe passing through walls,
partitions, ceilings, and floors. Escutcheons shall be
of sufficient outside diameter to cover the sleeve
opening and shall fit snugly around the insulated or bare
pipe and to the wall, partition floor, or ceiling.
3 . 03 APPLICATION
A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or
apparatus connections. Install dielectric unions where
joining dissimilar materials.
B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper
piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe.
C. Install valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment,
part of systems, or vertical risers.
15520-4 **
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 15520 - PAGE 3
e®A 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16. 3 , malleable iron Class
125, or ASTM A234 , forged steel Class 125.
2 . Joints: Screwed, or ANSI/AWS D1. 1, welded.
2 .02 LOW PRESSURE STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 80, black.
1. Fittings, : ANSI/ASTM B16. 3, malleable iron Class
125, or ASTM A234 , forged steel, Class 125.
2 . Joints: Screwed, or ANSI/AWS D1. 1, welded.
2 . 03 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 150 psig malleable iron
unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze unions for
copper pipe, soldered joints.
B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 150 psig forged steel slip-on
flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper
piping; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end
ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before
assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or
unions.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to
es building structure, and maintain gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space and not
interfere with use of space, other work, or equipment.
15520-3
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 15520 - PAGE 2
F. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc coated, •••
Welded and Seamless.
G. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated
(Galvanized) , Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9.
1. 06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked
on valve body.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: conform to ANSI/ASME
SEC 9 and applicable state labor regulations.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC
9.
1. 07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General
Conditions. -M
B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and
accessories.
C. Include welders certification of compliance with
ANSI/ASME SEC 9.
1. 08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site and store and protect products MW
under provisions of General . Conditions.
B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with
labeling in place. �"
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ON
2 . 01 LOW PRESSURE STEAM PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40, black. .�
15520-2 ""'
W,
0►
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 15520 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15520
STEAM AND STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, includng
40 General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Steam piping system.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15100 - Valves.
B. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors.
C. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
D. Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.
E. Section 15526 - Steam and Steam Condensate Specialties.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
B. ANSI/ASME B16. 3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class
150 and 300.
C. ANSI/ASME B31. 1 - Code for Power Piping.
D. ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
�w
E. ANSI JAWS D1. 1 - Structural Welding Code.
w� 15520-1
..
DUCTWORK INSULATION
SECTION 15290 - PAGE 4
Plenums - Exhaust Fans, Relief B 2
Hoods
Supply Ducts From Fans to Air A 1 so
Inlet/Outlet or Terminal
(Cooling System)
n.
3 . 03 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All insulation installed under this section of the work
shall be installed in accordance with the MICA
"Commercial and Industrial Standards" manual.
sop
END OF SECTION
no
..
15290-4
war
..
euw
DUCTWORK INSULATION
SECTION 15290 - PAGE 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PREPARATION
A. Install materials after ductwork has been tested and
approved.
B. Clean Surfaces for adhesives.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
e B. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed
may be below ambient temperature.
C. External Duct Insulation (Type A or B) Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and
seal jacket.
2 . Secure insulation without vapor barrier with
staples, tape, or wires.
3 . Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use
adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to
prevent sagging. Seal vapor barrier penetrations
by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier
adhesive. Stop and point insulation around access
doors and damper operators to allow operation
4" without disturbing wrapping.
D. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through
on penetrations.
SCHEDULE
go DUCTWORK TYPE INSULATION THICKNESS
Inch (mm)
00 Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft. of A 1
Exterior Openings & Exhaust
Ducts Exposed to Outdoor Air
Ma
Outside Air Intake Ducts B 2
15290-3
so
no
DUCTWORK INSULATION
SECTION 15290 - PAGE 2
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Include product description, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION
A. Owens Corning
B. Manville
C. Knauf
2 . 02 MATERIALS
A. Type A: Flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612 ; commercial
grade; "k" value of 0. 29 at 75 degrees F, 0. 002 inch foil
scrim facing for air conditioning ducts.
B. Type B: Rigid glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C612 , Class 1; "k"
value of 0. 24 at 75 degrees F 0. 002 inch foil scrim
facing for outside air ducts.
C. Adhesives: Waterproof fire-retardant type.
D. Indoor Jacket: 6 oz . /sq. yd. canvas. Resized glass
cloth, minimum 7 .8 oz/sq. yd.
E. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84 , NFPA 255,
UL 723 .
F. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage, self-adhesive
pad.
G. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.
H. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
ww
15290-2
..
am
DUCTWORK INSULATION
SECTION 15290 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15290
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Ductwork insulation.
B. Insulation jackets.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
t A. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
B. Section 15890 - Ductwork.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt
? !! Insulation.
B. ANSI/ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation.
C. ASTM E84 , NFPA 255, and UL 723 - Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation
application with three years minimum experience.
B. Materials: UL listed; flame spread/fuel
contributed/smoke developed rating of 50/50/25 in
accordance with ASTM E84 , NFPA 255, UL 723 .
15290-1
PIPING INSULATION
SECTION 15260 - PAGE 4
G. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and
interruptions.
H. Jackets:
MW
1. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated pipes
conveying fluids above ambient temperature shall
have standard jackets, with or without vapor am
barrier, factory-applied or field-applied.
Insulate fitting, joints, and valves with
insulation or like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe, and finish with glass cloth and am
adhesive. PVC jackets may be used. Seal all
exposed joints watertight at fittings, valves, and
equipment. -•
2 . Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated dual-
temperature pipes or pipes conveying fluids below
ambient temperature shall have vapor barrier
jackets, factory-applied or field-applied.
Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded
insulation of like material and thickness as
adjacent pipe, and finish with glass cloth and
vapor barrier adhesive. Seal all exposed joints
watertight at fittings, valves, and equipment. MW
3 . Indoor, Exposed Applications: For pipe exposed in
mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces,
insulate as for concealed applications. Finish am
with canvas jacket; size for finish painting.
SCHEDULE .f
PIPING TYPE THICKNESS PIPE SIZE
1) Refrigerant Suction C 2" All ON
2) Steam-Low Pressure A 12 To 2"
211 22_811
3) Condensate Return A 12" All
END OF SECTION
MW
15260-4
PIPING INSULATION
SECTION 15260 - PAGE 3
C. Insulating Cement: ANSI/ASTM C195; hydraulic setting
mineral wool.
D. Finishing Cement: ASTM C449 .
�w
E. Fibrous Glass Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq. yd.
F. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PREPARATION
A. Install materials after piping has been tested and
approved.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in
least visible locations.
WA C. on insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping
conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate
flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends
of insulation at such locations.
D. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings,
valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections,
and expansion joints.
E. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through
penetrations.
F. Provide an insert, not less than 6 inches long, of same
thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between
support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket,
on piping 2 inches diameter or larger, to prevent
insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall
be cork or other heavy density insulating material
suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory
fabricated inserts may be used.
+ads
15260-3
an
PIPING INSULATION "'
SECTION 15260 - PAGE 2 so
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and installation instructions under .w
provisions of General Conditions.
B. Include product description, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
no
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
40
A. Owens Corning, Knauf, Manville and Armstrong.
2 . 02 INSULATION •
A. Type A: Glass fiber insulation; ANSI/ASTM C547; "k"
value of 0. 28 at 75° F noncombustible.
B. Type C: Cellular foam; flexible, plastic; "k" value of
0. 28 at 75° F.
2 . 03 JACKETS
A. Interior Applications: ..
1. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor
barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints.
2 . PVC Jackets: One piece, 20 mil. thick, premolded
type, including elbows and tees, similar to Zeston
2000. �•
3 . Canvas Jackets: UL listed treated cotton fabric, 6
oz/sq. yd.
2 . 04 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation Bands: 3/4 inch wide; 0. 015 inch thick ""
galvanized steel 0. 007 inch thick aluminum.
B. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0. 015 inch thick so
aluminum.
15260-2
PIPING INSULATION
SECTION 15260 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15260
PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
+ Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Piping insulation
B. Jackets and accessories.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors.
B. Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement.
B. ANSI/ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation
C. ASTM E84 , NFPA 255 and UL 723 - Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
D. ANSI/ASTM C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation.
1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation
application with three years minimum experience.
B. Materials: Flame 50 spread/fuel
n acordance withuASTME84 smoke
NFPA25
rating of 25/50/ 5,
UL 723 .
war
15260-1
in
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 15190 - PAGE 3
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Plastic Nameplates: Install with corrosive-resistant
mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
B. Plastic or Metal Tags: Install with corrosive-resistant
chain.
C. Stencil Painting: Apply in accordance with
Manufacturer's Requirements.
D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with
manufacturer' s instructions.
E. Equipment: Identify air handling units and condensing
units.
F. Controls: Identify control panels and major control
components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
G. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with
tags.
H. Piping: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with
plastic pipe markers. Tags may be used on small diameter
piping. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight
runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve
and "T" , at each side of penetration of structure or
enclosure, and at each obstruction.
I . Ductwork: Identify ductwork in Mechanical Rooms.
Identify service and flow into and out of equipment.
3 . 03 VALVE CHART AND SCHEDULE
A. Provide valve chart and schedule in aluminum frame with
clear plastic shield. Install at location as directed.
END OF SECTION
15190-3
w1�
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 15190 - PAGE 2
B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with
engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color.
C. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with
engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
D. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum
1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
E. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of
following size:
OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF LENGTH OF SIZE OF
INSULATION OR PIPE COLOR FIELD LETTERS
3/41 - 1-1/411 811 1/211
1-1/2 - 211 8" 3/411
2-1/2 - 611 1211
F. Stencil Paint: Semi-gloss enamel.
G. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible,
semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering; minimum information indicating flow direction
arrow and fluid being conveyed. *-
H. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape
with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings. �.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for
identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces per Manufacturer 's Requirements for
stencil painting.
15190-2
on
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 15190 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
+ * Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Identification of mechanical products installed under
Division 15.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09900 - Painting: Identification painting.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A13 . 1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems.
1. 05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color
coding for mechanical identification.
C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag
number, location, function and valve manufacturer' s name
and model number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MATERIALS
A. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform with
ANSI/ASME A13 . 1.
15190-1
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
SECTION 15140 - PAGE 5
walls, floors, and roofs.
3 .05 SLEEVES
A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing
around sleeves.
B. Extend sleeves through inch
and providenfloor
floor level. Caulk slee ves full depth
plate.
C. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling,
or
wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent
work with ff t fitting metal
Provide close collar or escutcheon covers
at both sides of penetration.
D. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished
surfaces.
M END OF SECTION
w
e�w
15140-5
.w
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
SECTION 15140 - PAGE 4
so
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for
inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
an
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide
inserts to be flush with slab surface.
..
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab
from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square
steel plate and not flush with top of slab.
■
F. All pipe hangers are to be external of pipe insulation.
3 . 02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ..
A. Support horizontal piping as follows:
PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING HANGER DIAMETER
1/2 TO 1-1/4 Inch 616" 3/8"
1-1/2 to 2 Inch 1010" 3/8"
2-1/2 to 3 Inch 1010" 1/2"
4 to 6 Inch 1010" 5/8"
MW
B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between
finished covering and adjacent work.
C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
E. Support vertical piping at every floor.
F. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at
same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.
G. Support riser piping independently of connected
horizontal piping.
3 . 03 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for
mounting and anchoring equipment.
3 . 04 FLASHING `
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterf lashing where
piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed
15140-4
M"
on
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
SECTION 15140 - PAGE 3
2 . 04 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form
with 18 gage galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls,
Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Form with steel
pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive
Floors and Walls, and Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire
rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
D. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
E. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized
steel or wood.
F. Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-
combustible.
+ G. Caulk: Acrylic sealant similar to G. E. Silicone. Verify
manufacturer's instructions for each application.
2 . 05 FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to
expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous
insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper
piping or sheet lead packing between hanger or support
and piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced
concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
15140-3
am
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
SECTION 15140 - PAGE 2 .�
1. 18 Gauge galvanized steel shield over insulation in
180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe
support.
2 . Calcium silicate insulation, 100 psi average
compression strength with galvanized steel, two
piece jacket. Similar to Pipe Shields Inc. , Model
A-1000.
G. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger
(except Cold Water Piping) - Hangers to be external of
pipe insulation: ..r
1. Pipe covering protective saddles.
2 . Calcium silicate insulation, 100 psi average
compression strength with galvanized steel, two
piece jacket. Similar to Pipe Shields Inc. , Model
A-1000.
H. Shields for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger -
Hangers to be external of pipe insulation:
1. Hard block non-conducting saddles in 90 degree
segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness
same as insulation thickness.
2 . Calcium silicate insulation, 100 psi average
compression strength with galvanized steel, two �•
piece jacket. Similar to Pipe Shields Inc. , Model
A-1000.
2 . 02 HANGER RODS
A. Steel Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end,
or continuous threaded.
2 . 03 INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell
and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral
adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for
attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger "
rods.
15140-2 .,�.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
" SECTION 15140 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15140
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
ON
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe, duct, and equipment hangers, supports, an
associated anchors.
B. Sleeves and seals.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 15520 - Steam Piping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron
adjustable swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches Carbon steel,
adjustable, clevis.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded
spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for hot
pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
D. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
w. E. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable,
copper plated.
F. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller -
Hangers to be external of pipe insulation:
�w
15140-1
w.
0M
VALVES
on
SECTION 15100 — PAGE 3
Unions are not required on flanged devices.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above
the center of the pipe.
go
3 . 02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing - After piping systems have been tested and put
OR into service, but before final adjusting and balancing,
inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing
to stop leaks; replace valve if leak persists.
END OF SECTION
IF
0
ON
on
on
One
4
15100-3
OR
ON
VALVES
SECTION 15100 - PAGE 2
2 . 03 GATE VALVES
A. 2 Inch and Smaller - MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and
bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze, threaded or solder ends,
solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing
gland, Teflon" impregnated packing and malleable iron
handwheel. Class 50 valves meeting the above shall be
used where pressure requires.
THREADED SOLDER
MANUFACTURER NRS RS NRS RS
Powell 507 500 1822 1821
Stockham B-103 B-100 B-104 B-108
Milwaukee 105 148 115 149
B. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger - MSS SP-70; Class 125 iron body, ..
bronze mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM
A 126 Class B, flanged ends, and "Teflon" impregnated
packing and two-piece backing gland assembly.
MANUFACTURER OS&Y RS NRS
Crane 465 - 1/2 461 �*
Stockham G - 623 G-612
Powell 1793 1787
Nordstrom 143
Powell 2201
Milwaukee F2885M F2882M
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General Application - Use gate valves for shut-off duty.
Refer to piping system specifications section for
specific valve applications and arrangements.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate
support where necessary. •*
C. Install valves and unions for each fixture, item of
equipment, part of systems or vertical risers in a manner
to allow equipment removal without system shut-down.
15100-2
VALVES
SECTION 15100 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15100
RM
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
�e. 1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most
mechanical piping systems.
B. Valves tags and charts are specified in Division 15000,
Section: Mechanical Identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers - subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering valves which may be
incorporated in the work including, but are not limited
to, those listed.
2 . 02 VALVE FEATURES
A. General - Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services
piping, and ASME B31. 1 for power piping.
B. Sizes - Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of
same size as upstream pipe size.
1. Solder-Joint - comply with ANSI B16. 18.
CAUTION: Where soldered end connections are used,
use solder having a melting point below 840° F for
gate.
15100-1
.■
wo
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
oft
SECTION 15010 — PAGE 12
E. Submittals:
No
1. The seismic and vibration control manufacturer
shall determine the number, size, and type of
anchor bolts, cable restraints, etc. for each piece ••
and groups of pipes.
2 . Complete engineering calculations and drawings for
all vibration and seismic requirements for all
piping.
3 . Details for all the seismic bracing with snubbers
proposed.
4 . Details for steel frames to be used in connection
with the isolation and seismic restraint of the
items.
END OF SECTION
.a
15010-12 WM
.m
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 11
B. Requirements:
1. Pipes shall be supported and braced per the SMACNA
"Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical
Systems and Plumbing Systems" , "Superstrut Seismic
Restraint System" for pipes and conduits, the "Kin-
line Seismic Restraint System" for pipes and
conduits, only.
2 . The manufacturers of the seismic restraints for
piping shall submit shop drawings for review prior
*' to installation of piping. The shop drawings shall
indicate the location and loading of each
restraint.
3 . Restraint of rigidly mounted piping and ductwork
shall conform to "SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic
Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing
Systems" , SMACNA latest edition. Calculations need
not be submitted for restraint systems conforming
to these guidelines.
4W
C. Isolated Piping:
1. All piping 1 1/2" and over shall be protected in
all planes by cable restraints designed to
accommodate thermal movement as well as restraint
seismic motion. Locations shall include but not be
limited to:
a. All drops to equipment connections.
b. Changes in direction of pipe.
C. At horizontal runs of pipe.
1) Up to 3" pipe: 251 .
.. 2) 3 1/2" to 611 : 301 .
3) 8" to 1211 : 351 .
d. On both sides of flexible connectors.
! " D. Seismic Pipe Connectors:
1. Steel Piping: Provide stainless steel hose covered
with stainless steel wire braid with NPT steel
nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges, welded to hose.
15010-11
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 10
B. Submittal drawings shall indicate hi-efficiency motor
data as a minimum.
C. Failure to provide this information with the original
shop drawings will result in automatic rejection of the
drawings.
D. The contractor shall provide, after bidding, separate
line item costs for energy saving equipment so Utility
company can establish a rebate amount. The line item
costs shall include, but not be limited to: .�
1. Setback/Setup thermostats
2 . Air cooled Condensing units
3 . Premium High Efficiency Motors
3 . 12 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Visit building and become thoroughly familiar with all
conditions affecting this section of the work. Ignorance
of field conditions affecting work will not be considered
as reason for additional cost of work above contract
price. See Instructions to Bidders.
B. Remove/relocate all existing HVAC equipment including
piping, ductwork, wiring, supporting bases, frames, etc.
not required for this Project.
3 . 13 TEMPORARY HEAT
A. Refer to General Specifications and provide as required.
3 . 14 CONTRACTOR NOTE:
Do not install ductwork or piping above or within 3 feet
of the vertical face of any electrical panel or
switchboard. Coordinate installation with Electrical
Contractor.
3 . 15 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturer: ITT Grinnell, Super Strut, Kin Line, B-
Line, or approved equal.
15010-10 '"""
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 9
D. Submit drawings for the following items and also see the
requirements in each Section:
1. Valves
2 . Heating Coils
3 . Wall Fin Radiation
4 . Air Cooled Condensing Units
5. Cooling Coils
6. Refrigerant Specialties
7 . Temperature controls
8 . Dampers and Louvers
9 . Grilles, Registers and Diffusers
10. Exhaust Fans and Curbs
11. Air Handling Units
12 . Cabinet Unit Heaters
13 . Insulation - Pipe and Duct
3 . 10 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. Whenever a particular manufacturer' s product is named, it
is named for descriptive purposes, to indicate the type,
quality and function of the item which will meet the
intent of the Specification. See General Provisions of
Division 1.
B. In multiple name products, it is the responsibility of
the Contractor and Equipment Supplier to verify
compliance with the plans and specifications, physical
!!! dimensions to fit, electrical characteristics, as well as
capacity equal to or greater than scheduled on plans.
Contractor to coordinate with all contractors and
Architect on any items on accepted shop drawings that
differ from plan and spec items.
C. Manufacturers not specified shall submit sufficient
information for approval at least seven (7) days before
bid date.
3 . 11 ENERGY REBATE PROGRAMS
A. Local utilities require assistance from the HVAC
Contractor to provide the necessary efficiency
information of all equipment that would comply with the
Utility' s Program. This shall include but not be limited
to: electric air conditioners and temperature controls.
15010-9
wee
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 8
D. Lubricate all bearings as recommended by the
manufacturer.
E. Belt drives and belts shall be properly adjusted.
3 . 08 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's representative •.f
on the operation and maintenance of the heating,
ventilating, air conditioning and exhaust system for a
minimum of eight (8) hours as well as provide four (4)
sets of bound instructions and parts lists on all major
mechanical equipment to the Owner before final payment
will be authorized. A written acknowledgment is to be
filed with Architect/Engineer.
B. Each piece of mechanical equipment is to have written
maintenance instructions fastened to the inside cover or
enclosed in a plastic cover and mounted on or adjacent to
the unit.
C. Instructions shall be inserted in a three-ring binder
tabbed division sheets.
1. Address sheet with each equipment manufacturer,
including phone number and local representative.
2 . All mechanical equipment. .�
3 . Temperature controls.
3 . 09 CERTIFIED SUBMITTAL DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall check and approve and submit eight (8)
sets of Certified Drawings with operating and maintenance
instructions and parts lists showing physical dimensions,
gauges, capacities, finish, electrical characteristics,
wiring diagrams and any other detailed information
required by Architect/Engineer.
B. Each equipment item shall be identified with the
corresponding plan tagging, room number, and name.
C. Note: Supplier shall indicate expected delivery time of
each product after approval and release by contractor.
Failure to do so will be cause for rejection of submittal
drawings.
15010-8 '"""
"®
on
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
ON
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 7
3 . 05 MOUNTING OF EQUIPMENT
- A. Equipment to be level, plumb, straight, true with walls,
floors and ceilings.
B. Equipment suspended from ceilings, roof joists, steel or
concrete to be supported with suitable hangers, steel
0111 angle and rods and spring vibration isolators.
C. Roof Mounted Equipment - Roof curbs are to be provided
and mounted on roof by Mechanical Contractor. Building
and Mechanical Contractor to coordinate these
installations. Flashing by Roofing Subcontractor.
3 . 06 WARRANTY, CHECK, TEST AND START
A. The HVAC Contractor shall be responsible for complete
test, check and start-up of all equipment that is to be
installed by the HVAC Contractor.
B. A copy of the completed check, test and start-up report
shall be placed on file with the Architect/Engineer' s
office for all equipment noted above.
C. The Contractor is to leave the entire Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning System in mechanically
proper working order. The Contractor shall correct and
replace any defective material or faulty workmanship
without additional charge to Owner for a period of two
(2) years from date of final approval for all equipment.
D. This limited guarantee is to include replacement of any
refrigerant charge lost during the guarantee period, and
all service calls on the heating and air conditioning
system.
3 . 07 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE
*" A. All ductwork and piping shall be cleaned and all filters
replaced at the time the system is accepted by the Owner.
B. All equipment shall be wiped clean with all traces of
oil, dust, dirt, or paint spots removed.
C. Touch-up paint damaged equipment surfaces to
Architect/Engineer' s satisfaction.
■* 15010-7
a*
04
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
..
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 6
B. The Mechanical Contractor to furnish necessary controls, a
wiring diagrams and instruction sheets and coordinate his
work with that of the Electrical Contractor to assure
proper connection and operation of the controls and
equipment for the HVAC System. we
C. The Mechanical Contractor is to mount damper motors,
etc. , and other devices requiring connections on ow
mechanical equipment. Wiring by Mechanical Contractor.
D. The Mechanical Contractor to be responsible for the ,W
operating of the system, temperature, safety and other
controls on the work during installation and guarantee
period.
E. Magnetic starters and/or manual starters, push button
stations, pilot lights, etc. , to be furnished by the HVAC
Contractor. See Electrical Plan Motor Schedule and
Heating Equipment Schedules. Minimum size magnetic
starters is Size 1. All magnetic starters to have 3 leg
overload protection. Provide hand-off-auto selector
switches where specified.
F. Disconnect switches, fused disconnects, capped safety
switches, etc. , to be furnished and installed by the
Electrical Contractor.
G. Each motor shall be provided with a suitable disconnect,
properly identified. It is the responsibility of the
Mechanical Contractor to see that all such labels or
other means of identification are delivered to the
Electrical Contractor.
H. Flexible metal Greenfield cable, of 1/2" or larger size,
in lengths not to exceed 36" shall be used for final •
connections to all motorized equipment such as fans and
condensing units, etc.
I . Electrical work shall be done in accordance with the
requirements of the electrical specification, National
Electrical Code, all State and Local Codes, and in
accordance with the requirements of the NFPA. All
electrical apparatus shall bear the seal of approval of
the Underwriters ' Laboratories.
15010-6 '"""
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 5
Refer to Architectural Plans for fire and sound walls.
See Cutting and Patching in architectural specifications.
* E. The cutting and patching of holes through NEW materials
larger than 12" shall be by the material supplier and/or
trade that would apply or construct the material
requiring the opening. It shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor requiring said opening to assure that such
openings are on both Architectural and Mechanical plans
and to co-ordinate and co-operate with the trade or
material supplier constructing the material surface
requiring the opening.
F. In the event the required opening is NOT detailed on the
Architectural and/or Mechanical drawings, the Contractor
requiring the opening(s) shall notify the Architect so
the opening is placed and properly headered on the new
materials shop drawings. Again, it shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor requiring said opening
to assure that such openings are placed on the material
suppliers shop drawings and to co-ordinate and co-operate
with the trade or material supplier constructing the
material surface requiring the opening.
G. In the event the Contractor requiring openings larger
than 12" are not detailed on the Architects and/or
Mechanical drawings, does NOT notify the Architect and
the material is fabricated and/or installed, the
Contractor requiring said un-coordinated opening shall be
back charged for the field cutting, headering, etc. of
said opening at time and materials as established in
Section 01151, Change Orders. If the Contractor
requiring the un-coordinated opening(s) larger than 12"
is able to demonstrate his capacity to cut, header and
properly patch openings, it may be accomplished by him at
no cost to the Owner or other Contractors.
3 . 04 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Line voltage wiring (115 volts and over) required for the
connection of heating, ventilation and air conditioning
equipment to be completed by the Electrical Contractor.
Low voltage wiring (below 115 volts) to be installed by
the Mechanical Contractor.
15010-5
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 4
equipment.
C. Special care shall be taken to keep open ends of pipes, •
ducts, etc. , closed while in storage or during progress
of the installation.
3 . 02 PAINTING
A. All equipment such as radiation, grilles, fans, heating-
cooling units, etc. , will be shipped with factory finish.
Heating Contractor to be responsible for touching up all
paint surfaces damaged during construction or in transit
from factory to job site, except items to be finish .,
painted at the job site by the Painting Contractor.
3 . 03 OPENINGS - CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General Contractor is required under his contract to
leave chases, recesses, and openings in his work,
provided that this Contractor furnish him full
information as to locations and dimensions of same in all
new construction. Failing to give General contractor the
proper information at the time required, such cutting and
patching shall be done by this Contractor.
B. This contractor shall set all sleeves and anchors in such
time as to cause no delay in the work of the General
Contractor. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed
work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor.
C. All cutting and patching done shall be subject to the
direction and approval of the Architect/ Engineer. This
Contractor shall not endanger the stability of the ,
structure by cutting or digging or otherwise, and shall
not at any time cut or alter work of any other contractor
without Architect/Engineer's consent and approval.
D. Seal all openings between pipe and sleeve at each end
with fiberglass and caulk opening with sealant.
At fire rated wall, floor, or roof, provide "Thunderline"
or equal seals at one end of sleeve.
All duct openings at fire rated or acoustical walls to be
sleeved and sealed around the full perimeter of duct at
opening with fire rated or acoustical fiberglass
insulation. Seal perimeter with escutcheon and caulking. ■W
15010-4
M"
po
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 3
is signed. If this condition is not complied with, it
will be assumed that the system is satisfactory to the
Contractor, and he shall be held bound to his guarantee.
1 . 06 JURISDICTION OF WORK
A. Whenever it becomes necessary for the complete
*' fulfillment of this work for a contractor to furnish
labor or material other than that which is generally
accepted by trade agreement of general practice to belong
to his particular trade or branch of work, the contractor
shall sublet same to a contractor engaged in the trade or
branch of work involved, to the end that there shall be
no delay to or stoppage of work due to infringement of
alleged infringement of trade agreements as to
jurisdiction.
1. 07 CODES, FEES AND PERMITS
A. Contractor shall provide himself with the latest copy of
the Heating and Ventilating Code, Energy Code, ASHRAE,
National Electric Code, National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) , and copies of Employer's Liability
and Lien Laws which shall apply to heating, ventilating,
and air conditioning work and the installation of same in
building.
B. Obtain all permits and pay for all fees associated with
HVAC work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PROTECTION OF MECHANICAL SYSTEM
A. Contractor shall be entirely responsible for apparatus,
equipment and appurtenance furnished by him or his sub-
contractors in connection with this work and special care
shall be taken to protect parts thereof in such manner as
may be necessary or directed.
B. Protection shall include covers, crating, sheds or other
means to prevent dirt, grit, plaster or other foreign
substances from entering working parts of machinery or
15010-3
4"
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 2
indicated on the drawings, shall be furnished and ..
installed as if so specified or indicated.
1. 04 INSPECTION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall thoroughly inspect the
General Plans and Specifications to familiarize himself
as to class of building construction in general, kinds of •
floors, walls, roof, ceilings, etc. In addition, review
the plumbing, fire protection - sprinkler and electrical
plans to coordinate with HVAC plans. ,
B. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications and all
other Drawings in the set in addition to those listed in
this Section for requirements which affect work under
this Section whether or not such work is specifically
mentioned in this Section.
1. 05 DRAWINGS
A. The heating plans show amount and kinds of ducts,
radiation, piping and equipment required. Heating
Contractor shall check over outlets, ductwork, radiation,
piping, etc. , and their locations and may submit
suggestions for layout of any portion of the work that ..
may appear to improve the efficiency of the system before
contract is signed only. If such changes are approved,
they shall become part of the contract after approval in
writing. Such approval is limited to approval for
conformity with general requirements of drawings and
specifications and does not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for proper operation of the system.
B. Follow as closely as possible construction conditions of
other trades. Make minor changes requiring additional
pipe, ducts, bends, or fittings necessary to meet
conditions actually existing without additional cost to
the Owner. Allow other contractors reasonable access to
their work.
C. Should Contractor, in going over the drawings, recognize
any points which seem to him to be insufficiently or
improperly cared for, or any necessary items or equipment
omitted to the extent of jeopardizing the system or the
guarantee which is required of him, he shall state such
conditions or situations immediately in writing to the
Engineer, stating what must be done before the contract
15010-2 ""'
00
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 15010 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15010
HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 DEFINITIONS
A. The terms "Contractor" , "Heating Contractor" and
"Mechanical Contractor" wherever used in the Contract
Documents shall be understood to mean the contractors to
this division of work.
B. N. I.C. - "Not in Contract" - Indicates item not to be
included by this contractor.
C. "Furnish" - Means contractor is to furnish and install
the item in working order.
D. "Install" - Means Contractor is to furnish and install
the item in working condition.
E. "Provide" - Means contractor is to furnish and install
the material in operating condition in the system.
1. 03 WORK INCLUDED
A. The work is to include a complete heating, ventilating
and air conditioning system in accordance with these
Specifications accompanying Drawings and the Commonwealth
of Massachusetts and Local Codes pertaining to the work,
in acceptable working order in the building, including
labor, and materials, equipment and services necessary
for, and incidental to manufacture, delivery and
installation according to and which is shown on the
Drawings, enumerated in contract and herein specified.
B. Minor items and accessories reasonably inferred as
necessary for the completion and successful operation of
the work, whether or not herein definitely specified, or
15010-1
ow
PLUMBING FIXTURES �.
SECTION 15440 - PAGE 6 '*
B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
C. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws.
Lead flashing is not intended to hold fixture in place.
ON
END OF SECTION
am
,.R
15440-6
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 15440 - PAGE 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSPECTION
� . A. Plumbing contractor to review millwork shop drawings.
Confirm location and size of fixtures and opening before
rough-in and installation.
B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in
work of this Section.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for
servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies from
wall to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and
escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. All fixtures shall be securely fastened to wall/floor
construction or supported by chair carriers. Anchor the
bottom holes on lavatories and hand tighten. All floor
bolts in shoe of floor mounted supports shall be
securely anchored.
**" E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as
specified in General Construction.
F. All fixtures and accessory trim shall be installed as
recommended by manufacturer.
G. All vents shall be graded with proper pitch to avoid
trapping of condensation. All revents are to be recessed
in wall.
H. Maintain fixtures to the heights above finished floor per
fixture schedule on plans or by state and local
requirements.
3 . 03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to
fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.
�r 15440-5
so
PLUMBING FIXTURES
me
SECTION 15440 - PAGE 4
,R
C. Pipe Wrap: Provide protection on traps and all exposed
piping under lavatories.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Brocar "Trap Wrapkit" or go
Armstrong "Armaflex 2000" .
D. Wall Mounted Carrier: ANSI A112 . 6. 1; cast iron and steel '"
frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall
attachment, threaded studs for fixture hanger, concealed
arm supports, bearing plate and studs. Verify wall 40
construction.
2 . 08 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - STAINLESS STEEL SINKS
A. Elkay
B. Just
2 . 09 SINK - (S-1)
A. Bowl: ANSI A112 . 19 . 3 ; single compartment, 18 gauge
thick, Type 316 stainless steel, self-rimming with
undercoating, 3 1/2 inch (90 mm) crumb cup and stainless
steel drain, ledgeback drilled for trim.
B. Trim: ANSI A112 . 18 . 1; chrome plated brass supply with
gooseneck spout, water economy aerator, indexed
wristblade handles; chrome plated, 17 gauge (1. 3 mm) , ..
brass P-trap with cleanout plug and arm with escutcheon.
2 . 10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SERVICE SINKS
A. Kohler
B. American Standard
C. Eljer
2 . 11 SERVICE SINK (SS-1)
A. Bowl: 20 x 22 x 13 inch deep white vitreous china, trap
mounted with ten inch high back, stainless steel rim
guards. Enameled - inside trap with strainer and
cleanout.
B. Trim: ANSI A112 . 18 . 1; exposed sink fitting with 4"
wristblade handles, raised vacuum breaker, hose end spout
and two double pipe supports.
15440-4
we
go
PLUMBING FIXTURES
on
SECTION 15440 - PAGE 3
2 . 03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BRASS ACCESSORIES
A. Frost
B. Brasscraft
C. Wolverine Brass
D. Keeney
E. Kohler
2 . 04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLUSH VALVES
A. Sloan
B. Chicago Faucet
C. Delaney
w.r 2 . 05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURE CARRIERS
A. Jay R. Smith
B. Wade
C. Zurn
D. Josam
2 . 06 WATER CLOSETS - (WC)
A. Bowl: ANSI A112 . 19 . 2 ; floor mounted siphon jet vitreous
china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch spud,
china bolt caps.
B. Flush Valve: ANSI A112 . 18 . 1; exposed chrome plated,
diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon, seat
bumper, integral screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker.
C. Seat: Solid plastic, open front, extended back, self-
sustaining hinge, brass bolts, without cover.
2 . 07 LAVATORY (LAV)
A. Basin: ANSI A112 . 19.2 vitreous china or ANSI A112 . 19 . 1;
porcelain enamelled cast iron wall-hung lavatory,
drillings on 4 inch centers, basin with splash lip and
front overflow.
B. Trim: ANSI A112 . 18 . 1; chrome plated metered mixing
faucet with wristblade handles, aerator spray and
coverplate, open grid strainer, chrome plated 17 gage
(1. 3 mm) brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with
escutcheon. Faucet to run 15 seconds - maximum.
+ ! 15440-3
w
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 15440 - PAGE 2
D. ANSI A112 . 19 . 5 - Trim for Water-Closet
1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fixtures: By same manufacturer for each product .•
specified throughout.
B. Trim: By same manufacturer for each product specified
throughout. "
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Include fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility
sizes, trim, and finishes.
1. 07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of
General Conditions. *•
B. Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts
lists.
1. 08 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year manufacturer's warranty under provisions
of General Conditions.
.ft
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURES
4W
A. American Standard
B. Kohler
C. Eljer
2 . 02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FIXTURE TRIM
A. Chicago Faucet
B. American Standard
C. Kohler
D. Symmons '
E. Elkay
15440-2
WA
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 15440 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
�s 1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Water closets
B. Lavatories
C. Sinks
D. Service sinks
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. General Construction - Finished Carpentry: Preparation
of counters for sinks.
B. General Construction - Joint Sealers: Seal fixtures to
walls and floors.
C. General Construction - Toilet and Bath Accessories:
Lavatory tops.
D. Section 15410 - Plumbing Piping.
E. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A112 . 6. 1 - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing
+ Fixtures for Public Use.
B. ANSI A112 . 18. 1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing
�w Fixture Fittings.
C. ANSI A112 . 19 . 1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
15440-1
w
NO
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
00
SECTION 15430 - PAGE 5
E. Install trap primer valve per manufacturer's
instructions.
3 . 03 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Install per manufacturer's recommendations and State
Plumbing code.
B. Extend drain connection to nearest floor drain.
END OF SECTION
4P
15430-5
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
,.
SECTION 15430 - PAGE 4
2 . 09 HOSE BIBBS/HYDRANTS
A. Interior - Bronze or brass, replaceable hexagonal disc,
hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed to
interior. `
B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Woodford.
.M
2 . 10 TRAP PRIMER VALVES
A. Provide trap primer valve, size and capacity shown on ow
plans.
B. Valve to incorporate the vacuum breaker and the backflow
preventer in operation.
C. Valve to open with a 3 p.s. i. pressure drop and have an
operating range of at least 35 to 75 p.s. i.g. •
D. Acceptable Manufacturers: Precision Plumbing Products,
or approved equal. .0
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate cutting, forming of roof, floor construction
to receive drains to required invert elevations.
3. 02 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions to permit intended performance.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface.
Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of
graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout
for rodding of drainage system.
C. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible
isolation valve.
D. Conceal piping to hose bibbs in wall, insulate, and
provide manual shut-off valve in an accessible location.
Verify wall thickness for hose bibb installation.
15430-4 """
on
"
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15430 - PAGE 3
2.06 CLEANOUTS
A. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Lacquered galvanized cast
iron, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping collar, and adjustable
nickel-bronze strainer, round with scoriated cover in
service areas and square with depressed cover to accept
floor finish in finished floor areas; similar to Zurn ZN-
1400.
�. B. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered
cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and
round stainless steel access cover secured with machine
screw; similar to Zurn Z-1446.
C. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Caulked or
threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on
vertical rainwater leaders; - similar to Zurn Z-1400.
2.07 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. For Humidifiers: Code approved backflow
pp preventer with
intermediate atmospheric vent; similar to Watts 9DM3
Series.
B. Manufacturer - Watts -Regulator Company.
2.08 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Reduced pressure backflow preventer to incorporate the
"Air-in/Water-out" principle.
B. Assembly to consist of two springloaded check valves with
a pressure differential relief valve located between the
two check valves. Ball valves or gates valves to be
included on both sides of check valve.
C. Relief valve to open automatically when a pressure
differential exists across the first check valve or when
either check valve is damaged or fouled.
D. Install per manufacturer's instructions (Unit to be State
approved) .
E. Manufacturers: Watts, Zurn, Hersey and Apollo
!M 15430-3
on
no
no
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
00
SECTION 15430 - PAGE 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ROOF DRAINS
A. Zurn.
B. Josam.
C. Wade.
2 . 02 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof Drains: ANSI A112 .21.2; lacquered cast iron body
with sump, removable cast iron dome strainer, membrane
flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop,
with adjustable underdeck clamp, roof sump receiver,
waterproofing flange, controlled flow weir levelling
frame, adjustable extension sleeve (for insulation) , and
perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension.
Similar to Zurn ZC-100-E-R-C. And no-hub collar, Zurn Model •�-
ZC-100-NH-C-E-A-R.
2 . 03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLOOR DRAINS
A. Zurn
B. Josam
C. Wade
2 . 04 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Standard Type: ANSI A112.21. 1; lacquered galvanized cast
iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep
holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable
nickel-bronze strainer; Zurn ZN-415 with strainer, Type
"B" .
B. Indirect Waste Type: ANSI A112.21. 1; lacquered
galvanized cast iron two piece body with double drainage •w
flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and
polished bronze funnel or anti-splash rim type strainer;
Zurn ZN-415 with strainer, Type "E".
an
2 . 05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CLEANOUTS
A. Zurn „w
B. Josam
C. Wade
15430-2
on
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 15430 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15430
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
e�w 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Roof and floor drains.
B. Cleanouts.
C. Hose bibbs hydrants.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 07531: Roofing and Roof Drains.
B. Section 15410: Plumbing Piping.
C. Section 15440: Plumbing Fixtures.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A112.21. 1 - Floor Drains.
B. ANSI A112.21.2 - Roof Drains.
1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide
components by same manufacturer throughout.
1. 06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
General Conditions.
B. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service
sizes, and finishes.
15430-1
PW
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 11
PW
B. Use hard copper piping with soldered joints in exposed
' locations and above accessible ceilings .
C. Inn concealed locations, use soft copper piping without
joints .
D. Install reducer at outlet connection.
E. See Plan for pipe sizes.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Install all equipment as recommended by manufacturer.
3.05 TESTING
A. Test all piping and systems operation and verify
compliance with codes . Provide three ( 3) copies of
Certification Reports to Hospital Engineering Staff and
Architect/Engineer . Place system in operating
condition for the Hospital.
B. Acceptable Testing Agencies:
OR
1. Gas Monitoring Inc. , P.O. Box 1285, Cary, NC 27512-
1285; Telephone: 1-800-438-1152.
2. Other as approved by Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
w�
15411 - 11
M
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS an
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 10
NOTE: Some BAg Series filler metals contain
cadmium, which, when heated during brazing,
can produce toxic fumes.
3. While being brazed , joints shall be continuously
purged with an inert gas such as dry nitrogen or
carbon dioxide to prevent the formation of scale
within the tubing.
4. A visual inspection of each brazed joint shall be
made to assure that the alloy has flowed completely
in and around the joint and, where flux has been
used, that hardened flux has not formed a temporary
seal that holds test pressure. The outside of all
fluxed joints shall be washed with hot water after
assembly to remove excess flux for clear visual
inspection of brazed connections. �*
5. The outside of all tubes , joints , and fittings
shall be cleaned by washing with hot water after „
assembly.
E. Threaded joints in piping systems shall be tinned or
made up with polytetrafluorethylene (such as Teflon) "`
tape or other thread sealants suitable for oxygen
service. Sealants shall be applied to the male threads
only.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space and not
interfere with use of space. +
C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction
without stressing pipe, joints , or connected equipment .
D. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not
inverted.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Install valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment ,
part of systems , or vertical risers .
15411 - 10 -"
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 — PAGE 9
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3. 01 INSTALLATION AND TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Before installation, all piping, valves, fittings, and
other components for all nonflammable medical gas
e systems shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil, grease, and
other readily oxidizable materials as if for oxygen
service . After cleaning , particular care shall be
exercised in the storage and handling of such material.
Such material shall be temporarily capped or lu
p gged to
prevent recontamination before final assembly. Just
prior to final assembly , such material shall be
examined internally for contamination and shall be
recleaned if necessary.
B. Piping , valves , fittings and other components may be
especially prepared in a facility equipped to clean ,
rinse and purge the material, or may be prepared on
the job site in accordance with NFPA-99.
C. Piping, valves, fittings, and other components prepared
at the job site shall be cleaned by washing in a hot
e alkaline cleaner-water solution , such as sodium
carbonate or trisodium phosphate (proportion of one
pound to three gallons of water) . Scrubbing shall be
employed where necessary to ensure complete cleaning.
After washing, the materials shall be thoroughly rinsed
in clean, hot water.
D. All brazed joints in the piping shall 'be made up using
brazing filler alloys that bond with the base metals
being brazed and that comply with Specification for
Brazing Filler Metal , ANSI/AWS A5.8.
1. Copper-to-copper joints shall be made up using a
copper-phosphorous brazing filler alloy (BCuP
Series) without flux.
2. Dissimilar metals such as copper and brass shall be
jointed using an appropriate flux with either a
copper-phosphorous (BCuP Series) or a silver (BAg
Series) brazing filler alloy. Apply flux sparingly
and in a manner to avoid leaving any excess inside
of completed joints . Use of prefluxed rod is
acceptable.
15411 - 9
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 8
,w.
I . All piping installed under this Section of the
Specifications shall be independently supported from
the building structure and not from the piping ,
ductwork , or conduit of other trades . All
supplementary steel , including factory-fabricated
channels , required to meet the requirements specified
herein, shall be furnished and installed by the Piping
Contractor.
J. Safety straps shall be installed with all beam clamps. **
K. All hangers shall be secured to approved inserts or
expansion shields wherever possible and practical .
Drilling where required shall be done by the Piping
Contractor .
2.11 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS ""
A. The Piping Contractor shall furnish and set pipe
sleeves and inserts for all work under this Section and ...
shall be responsible for their proper and permanent
location.
B. All pipes passing through floors, walls, or partitions
shall be provided with sleeves having an internal
diameter 1-1/2" ( 3/4" annular space) larger than the
outside diameter of the pipe. ..
C. Sleeves passing through lightproof or soundproof walls,
floors, and partitions, and through firewalls shall be
made tight using approved caulking materials.
D. Sleeves for all pipes through walls , beams and
partitions shall finish flush with the finish line of
the walls, beams and partitions.
E. Sleeves through interior masonry partitions shall be of
22-gauge galvanized sheet steel .
F. Escutcheons shall be provided around all exposed
insulated or bare pipe passing through walls ,
partitions, ceilings and floors. Escutcheons shall be
of sufficient outside diameter to cover the sleeve
opening and shall fit snugly around the pipe and to the
wall , partition, floor, or ceiling.
15411 - 8
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 7
2. 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. All piping shall be supported from the building
structure by means of approved hangers and supports .
Piping shall be supported to maintain required grading
and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and to
secure piping in place, and shall be so arranged as to
provide for expansion and contraction.
B. Maximum spacing of hangers on runs of pipe having no
concentrations of weight shall be as follows :
1. 3/8" - 1/211 : 6 ' on center.
2. 3/4" - 111 : 8 ' on center.
C. Hangers, in general , for all horizontal piping shall be
factory-applied, plastic-coated, steel clevis hangers.
D. All vertical drops and runouts shall be supported by
extension type split ring type hangers. These hangers
shall be plastic coated when used on uncovered copper
tubing.
E. Field painting or spraying of hangers in lieu of
plastic coating will not be accepted.
F. All horizontal piping shall be suspended from the
building by mild steel rod connecting the pipe hanger
to inserts•, beam clamps, angle brackets, and lag screws
as required by the building construction in accordance
with the following:
Pipe Size in Inches :
1) 3/4 - 2: Use 3/8" rods.
G. Remove rust from all ferrous hanger equipment (hangers,
rods and bolts) and apply one coat of zinc chromate
immediately after erection.
H. Piping at all equipment and control valves shall be
supported to prevent strains or distortions in the
connected equipment and control valves . Piping at
equipment shall be supported to allow for removal of
equipment , valves, and accessories with a minimum of
dismantling and without requiring additional support
after these items are removed.
15411 - 7
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 6
F. Removable Assemblies: Terminal (inlet) assemblies, as .�
furnished by manufacturers , shall be legibly marked
"VACUUM" or "SUCTION" so that , in their state of
disassembly for hookup to the vacuum system, proper
identification is not lost.
2.08 SHUT-OFF VALVES
A. Shut-off valves accessible to other than authorized
personnel shall be installed in valve boxes with
frangible or removable windows large enough to permit
manual operation of valves.
B. The main supply line shall be provided with a shut-off *�
valve so located as to be accessible in an emergency.
Verify existing valves.
C. Each existing riser is supplied from the main line with .�
a shut-off valve adjacent to the riser connection.
2.09 WARNING SYSTEMS
A. An automatic pressure switch , which will actuate a
visual and audible alarm when the line pressure drops �.
below or increases above normal line pressure, shall be
connected to each main supply line within a single
treatment facility. The automatic pressure switch
shall be installed downstream of any main supply line
shut-off valve.
B. A warning system shall be installed in each single ►
treatment facility served by the supply system. The
warning system shall be comprised of an audible and
noncancellable visual signal , and shall be installed to
be heard and seen at a continuously attended location
during the time of operation of the facility.
C. Refer to NFPA-99 , Paragraph 4-4 . 1 . 1 . 2 Master Alarm
Systems and 4-4. 1. 1. 3 Area Alarm Systems for additional
information.
D. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor and Hospital
Engineering Staff.
15411 - 6 ,�.,
uw
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 5
w
D. Station outlets on walls shall be located at an
appropriate height above the floor to prevent physical
damage to equipment attached to the outlet. They may
be recessed or otherwise
protected from damage.
E. When multiple wall outlets are installed, including
► those for vacuum, there must be sufficient spacing
between outlets to permit the simultaneous use of
adjacent outlets with any of the various types of
therapy equipment that may be required.
F. Pressure gauges and manometers for medical gas piping
systems shall be cleaned and degreased.
G. Provide a slide at all vacuum outlets for bottle
holding.
2.07 VACUUM TERMINALS (INLETS)
A. General : Each terminal ( inlet) for vacuum shall be
equipped with a valve mechanism of a type not
interchangeable with other systems (such as oxygen,
etc. ) and either a threaded connection or quick
coupler.
B. Threaded Connections: Valves with threaded connections
shall conform to the Diameter-Index Safety System as
described in the Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet
CGA V-5.
C. Secondary Check Valves : Vacuum terminals ( inlets)
shall not incorporate a secondary check valve.
D. Physical Protection : Terminals (inlets) shall be
located so as to avoid physical damage to the valve or
attached equipment.
*" E. Physical Spacing: Careful consideration shall be given
to provide adequate spacing between the terminals
(inlets) and adjacent medical gas outlets.
15411 - 5
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 4
.w.
war
2.04 VACUUM (SUCTION) PIPING
A. Copper Tubing : ASTM B88 , Type L , hard drawn .
Fittings : ANSI/ASME B16. 29, wrought copper. Joints :
ANSI/ASTM B CuP silver braze.
2.05 MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER
A. Ohio Medical or Chemetron
2.06 STATION OUTLETS
A. Each station outlet for medical gases, whether threaded
or non interchangeable quick-coupler , shall be gas
specific , and shall consist of a primary and a
secondary (or assembly) . The secondary valve (or unit)
shall close automatically to stop the flow of medical �^
gas when the primary valve (or unit) is removed. Each
outlet shall be legibly identified with the name or
chemical symbol of the gas contained. Where chemical
symbols are used , they shall be in accordance with
Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet P - 2 ,
Characteristics and Safe Handling of Medical Gases.
Where supplementary color identification is used, it
shall be in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-9, Standard
Color Marking of Compressed Gas Cylinders Intended for
Medical Use.
B. Threaded outlets shall be noninterchangeable
connections complying with CGA Pamphlet V-5, Diameter- .�
Index Safety System - Non-Interchangeable Low Pressure
Connections for Medical Gas Applications .
C. Each station outlet, including those mounted in ceiling
tracks or other special installations , shall be
designed so that parts or components that are required
to be gas specific for compliance with NFPA-99 cannot
be interchanged between station outlets for different
gases .
1. The use of common parts such as springs, 0-rings ,
fasteners , seals , and shutoff poppets is
permissible.
..
15411 - 4 an
ON
OR
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 3
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves
+�. and accessories.
C. Certification Test Reports on all systems.
1 .08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of General
Conditions.
C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with
labeling in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BALL VALVES
A. Apollo
B. Chemetron
C. Milwaukee Butterball
D. Ohio Medical
2.02 BALL VALVES
A. Up to Two Inches (2") : Bronze steel body, stainless
steel ball , stuffing box ring , lever handle and
balancing stops, solder ends, suitable for pressure and
gas type.
2.03 OXYGEN PIPING
A. Copper Tubing : ASTM B88 , Type K, hard drawn or
seamless ACR ASTM B280. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16 . 23
cast brass , or ANSI/ASME B16 . 29 , wrought copper .
Joints: ANSI/ASTM B CuP silver braze.
u 15411 - 3
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 2
1 .04 DEFINITIONS
A. Breathing Gas: Gas tested to be pure and contain fewer
contaminants than standards outlined in the following:
1. Oxygen: CGA Grade D: USP.
B. USP : United States Parmacopeia/National Formulary
(USP) Standards
1 .05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer 's name and pressure rating marked
on valve body. ..�
B. Standards for Design and Installation of Medical Gas
Systems : NFPA 50, 56A, 56B, 56C, 56F and CGA pamphlet
P2. 1 , as applicable.
C. Standards for Breathing Gas: CGA/USP/CSA.
D. Standards for Testing Systems : NFPA 56B, and 56F, CGA
P-2.1 and DHEW-HRA-14500.
E. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer, or reputable,
established organization regularly engaged in supplying
medical gas and servicing hospital medical gas systems ,
including providing engineering services.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications : Independent of the
facility or contractor suppliers.
1. Specializing in testing medical gas systems.
2. Show five ( 5) years minimum experience in such
testing.
3. Approved by Architect/Engineer .
1.06 RELATED WORK
A. Division 16000 - Wiring for final connections to alarm
panels - power panels.
15411 - 2 *■
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
SECTION 15411 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15411
GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division
1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1 .02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Vacuum system.
D. Oxygen system.
E. Hangers and supports.
F. Sleeves and escutcheons.
G. Connections to existing medical gas systems.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities - Latest Edition - and
related NFPA sections by reference.
B. ANSI /ASME Section 9 - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications.
C. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
! D. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Tube.
E. ASTM B280 - ACR Copper Tubing.
F . AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
"" 15411 - 1
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 14
B. Insulation inserts shall be 22 GA galvanized sheet metal ,
and not less than 10" in length.
END OF SECTION
15410-14
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 13
instrumentation services on the property. Damage
as a result 'of failure to obtain identification
shall be repaired at the contractor's expense.
3 .05 INSULATION - GENERAL
A. All insulation shall be installed in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be
applied by a qualified insulation contractor.
B. Insulation shall not be applied on any apparatus or
piping until the apparatus and piping have been
thoroughly cleaned, tested and accepted as tight.
3 . 06 INSULATION - PIPING
A. Piping insulation, where vapor barrier jacket is
,- required, shall be installed with vapor barrier jackets
drawn tight and firmly sealed to assure a positive vapor
seal.
B. End joints shall be covered with 4" wide butt strips of
material identical to vapor barrier jackets, and they
shall be drawn tight and securely sealed.
C. The use of staples, bands, etc. , to secure insulation
where vapor barrier jacket is required, will not be
acceptable.
D. Pipe insulation where no barrier is required shall be
secured with flare type staples.
3 . 07 INSULATION - FITTINGS AND VALVES
A. Cement or molded insulation on fittings and valve bodies
shall be same thickness as adjacent covering and
finished neatly to match the adjacent pipe insulation.
3 .08 INSULATION - HANGERS AND SADDLES
A. Special high density inserts of 7-1/4 pcf calcium
silicate, cellular glass or other approved material of
the same thickness as adjacent insulation shall be
installed at points of hanger support.
OW 15410-13
rw
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 12
D. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate *
equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
E. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual
flow control services.
F. Copper piping - Joints shall be made with 95% tin and 5%
antimony solder, or silver solder as approved by the
local plumbing code. The use of self-cleaning or self-
tinning flux is prohibited.
3 . 04 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavating: As required to lay drains, sewers and water
supplies inside and outside of building. Remove all
surplus earth of trench excavations from within building
and site. Trenches must be left open until all piping
has been approved by Plumbing Inspector. Barricade in ■-
strict accord with governing ordinances.
B. Backfilling: After drains, sewers and water supplies are
laid and approved, backfill as follows:
1. Within building area and below paved areas: *�*
Backfill with 8" layers of gravel, soaked and
tamped, to 95% Proctor.
2 . For earth and lawn areas: Backfill with 12" of
sand over pipe and balance to new grade of
excavated natural earth, compacted by soaking and
tamping, to 95% Proctor.
3 . Street areas: Patch street and road areas as
required by Local Government Authorities.
4 . Protierty Area: Repair and patch to match any
removal of existing concrete or blacktop roads,
parking lots, sidewalks, etc.
5. Any Damage: To Existing piping, electrical wiring
and conduit, telephone cable, etc. above or below
grade shall be repaired as promptly as possible.
6. Local Utility: Shall be contacted to identify
location of buried water, sanitary, storm, gas,
power, telephone, Cable TV, or special
15410-12
OR
w
PLUMBING PIPING
w
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 11
G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
Coordinate size and location of access doors with General
Contractor.
H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.
I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the
40 building to ensure cover to prevent freezing or insulate
per code.
J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural
' " building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat
of zinc rich primer to welding.
40 K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, -and accessories not
prefinished, ready for finish painting.
L. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage per
plans. Maintain gradients.
M. Excavate in accordance with General Specifications for
work of this Section.
N. Backfill in accordance with General Specifications for
work of this Section.
O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not
inverted.
Q. Install vent piping with proper pitches per code.
Terminate at vent thru roof size as shown on plans.
3 . 03 APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in
accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or
apparatus connections.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper
piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe.
w.
�wr 15410-11
PLUMBING PIPING
ow
SECTION 15410 — PAGE 10
underside of roof drain and vertical drops from
roof drain to offset and elbow at end of the
horizontal run 1" thick with vapor barrier.
2 . 16 FINISH
A. Concealed: vapor barrier jacket on all water piping
shall not be punctured or disturbed. All service jackets
shall be furnished. Pre-sized glass cloth jacket may be
used on hot water piping. Fittings shall be finished
with pasted canvas or pre-sized glass cloth jacket. ..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end
ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before
assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or
unions.
3 . 02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide non-conduction dielectric connections wherever
jointing dissimilar metals.
B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. *■
C. Install piping to conserve building space and not
interfere with use of space. Leave room for insulation
to be installed so that insulation does not touch.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction
without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and
access to valves and fittings.
15410-10
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 9
except where located in concealed pipe spaces they shall
be of 22-gauge galvanized sheet steel.
H. Sleeves through interior masonry partitions shall be of
22-gauge galvanized sheet steel.
I. Sleeves for piping to receive insulation shall be large
•• enough to allow continuous insulation through sleeves.
J. Spacing between, or location of, pipe sleeves in floor
slabs, structural beams, or structural walls shall be
subject to the Architect/Engineer's approval.
K. Escutcheons shall be provided around all exposed
insulated or bare pipe passing through walls,
partitions, ceilings, and floors. Escutcheons shall be
of sufficient outside diameter to cover the sleeve
opening and shall fit snugly around the insulated or bare
pipe and to the wall, partition floor, or ceiling.
2 . 14 INSULATING MATERIALS - FIBERGLASS
A. The following materials are specified:
1. Pipe insulation - fiberglass.
2 . Fittings and valves insulation:
a. Hydraulic setting combination insulating and
finishing cement.
b. Molded or fabricated fitting covers of equal
thickness and identical in composition to
adjacent pipe insulation.
3 . All materials, including vapor barrier jackets,
glass cloth jackets, adhesives, etc. , shall be fire
retardant.
2. 15 INSULATION THICKNESS - FIBERGLASS
A. The piping, fittings and valves shall be insulated with
the following minimum thicknesses:
1. Water piping - 1" thick.
2 . Horizontal rain water conductors, including
15410-9
ow
■.
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 — PAGE 8
prohibited. .�
2. 13 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS
A. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and set pipe .�
sleeves and inserts for all work under this section and
shall be responsible for their proper and permanent
location.
B. All pipes passing through floors, walls, or partitions
shall be provided with sleeves having an internal .,
diameter 1-1/2" (3/4" annular space) larger than the
outside diameter of the pipe or insulation covered
lines, except as otherwise specified herein.
C. Sleeves passing through lightproof or soundproof walls,
floors, and partitions and through firewalls shall be
made tight using approved .caulking materials.
D. Sleeves for all pipes through walls, beams, and
partitions shall finish flush with the finish line of the
walls, beams and partitions.
E. Sleeves for all piping shall extend 2" above finish floor
(except where under partitions, the sleeves shall be
flush with the bottom of the partition) and after the
installation of pipe shall be packed and made watertight
with fire retardant sealant.
F. Where pipes pass under footings and exterior concrete
walls, and through exterior walls, sleeves shall be of
galvanized iron pipe and shall be not less than 2"
larger than the pipe being sleeved. Sleeves shall be
made watertight where passing through waterproofed
surfaces, exterior by means of a steel slip-on welding
flange, continuously welded at the center of the sleeve
and shall be painted with one coat of bitumastic paint
inside and outside. The space between sleeve and pipe
shall be packed with oakum to within 2" of each face of
the wall (to within 2" of top of sleeve at floors) . The
remaining space shall be packed and made watertight with
waterproof mastic. Mechanical watertight sleeves shall
be provided as required by job conditions.
G. Sleeves through floors or interior masonry walls shall be
of galvanized iron pipe or wrought iron pipe size,
15410-8 ""'
Im
w•
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 7
specified.
F. Where three or more pipes are running parallel to each
other, factory fabricated gang type hangers with pipe
saddle clips or rollers may be used in lieu of the
hereinbefore specified clevis hangers. These hangers
shall be sized to provide for insulation protectors as
hereinbefore specified. Pipe saddle clips shall be not
less than 16-gauge metal.
G. All vertical drops and runouts shall be supported by
extension type split ring type hangers sized to fit the
outside diameter of the piping insulation.
H. All hangers on insulated lines shall be sized to fit the
outside diameter of the pipe insulation. Provide pipe
covering protection, sheet metal saddles at all hangers
on the insulated lines.
I. Remove rust from all ferrous hanger equipment (hangers,
rods, and bolts) and apply one coat of zinc chromate
immediately after erection.
J. Piping at all equipment and control valves shall be
supported to prevent strains or distortions in the
connected equipment and control valves. Piping at
equipment shall be supported to allow for removal of
equipment, valves, and accessories with a minimum of
dismantling and without requiring additional support
after these items are removed.
K. All piping installed under this Section of the
specification shall be independently supported from the
building structure and not from the piping, ductwork, or
conduit of other trades. All supplementary steel,
including factory fabricated channels, required to meet
the requirements specified herein, shall be furnished and
installed by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be subject
to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
L. Safety straps shall be installed with all beam clamps.
M. All hangers shall be secured to approved inserts or
expansion shields wherever possible and practical.
Drilling where required shall be done by the Plumbing
Contractor under this Section of the specifications.
The use of explosives for driving shields and inserts is
15410-7
..e
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 — PAGE 6
by means of approved hangers and supports. Piping shall
be supported to maintain required grading and pitching of
lines, to prevent vibration and to secure piping in
place, and shall be so arranged as to provide for
expansion and contraction.
B. Maximum spacing of hangers on runs of sanitary, storm,
and water piping shall be as follows:
PIPE SUPPORT SCHEDULE
PIPE SIZE SPACING IN FEET HANGER ROD
(IN. ) STEEL COPPER SIZE (IN. )
1/2 5 6 3/8
3/4 6 6 3/8
1 7 6 3/8
1 1/4 8 6 3/8
1 1/2 9 10 3/8 ,.
2 10 10 3/8
2 1/2 11 10 1/2
3 12 10 1/2
4 12 10 3/4
5 12 10 3/4
6 12 10 3/4
All horizontal piping shall be suspended from the
building by mild steel rod connecting the pipe hanger to
inserts, beam clamps, angle brackets, and lag screws as
required by the Building Construction in accordance with
the above schedule.
C. Maximum spacing of hangers on cast iron soil pipe shall
be 5 ' and hangers shall be provided at all changes in
direction. Hanger rods to support piping from the
structure or supplementary steel shall not exceed 4 ' in ..
total length. Where pipe support assemblies exceed 4 ' in
total length, the Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and
install factory fabricated channels and associated
..
accessories.
D. Where codes having jurisdiction require closer spacing,
the hanger spacing shall be as required by code in lieu
of the distances specified herein.
E. Hangers in general for all horizontal piping shall be
clevis type hangers. These hangers shall be sized to
provide for insulation protectors as hereinbefore
15410-6
•s
an
s
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 5
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and
stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
2 . 08 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy service weight.
Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN
compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead
and oakum.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and
stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
2 . 09 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size - 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under: Bronze unions
for copper pipe, soldered joints.
B. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Malleable
iron housing clamps to engage and lock, designed to
permit some angular deflection, contraction, and
expansion; "C" shape composition sealing gasket; steel
bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized couplings for
galvanized pipe.
C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated
steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious
isolation barrier.
we 2 . 10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BALL VALVES
A. Apollo, Model 100.
�. B. Nibco, Model T580.
C. Milwaukee Butterball.
2 . 11 BALL VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm) : Bronze Stainless steel body,
stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring,
lever handle and balancing stops, solder threaded ends
with union.
2 . 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
w
A. All piping shall be supported from the building structure
15410-5
am
,i
PLUMBING PIPING
0M
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 4
Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN ow
compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead
and oakum.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. `"
Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and
stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
2. 03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. Fittings: «
Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN
compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead
and oakum.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Neoprene gaskets and
stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
2 . 04 VENT PIPING
A. Copper Tubing: Type L, hard drawn. Pipe and fittings,
code approved. All joints made leak tight.
2 . 05 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. Fittings:
ANSI/ASME B16.23, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29,
wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade
95TA.
2 . 06 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND*5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy service weight.
Fittings: Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN
compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead
and oakum.
B. Concrete Pipe: ASTM C14. Fittings: Concrete. Joints:
ANSI/ASTM C443, rubber gaskets.
2 . 07 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF BUILDING �*
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 service weight. Fittings:
Cast iron. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN
compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead
and oakum.
15410-4
war
w
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 3
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and
accessories.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of General
Conditions.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of General
Conditions.
C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with
labeling in place.
1.08 INSULATION
A. Scope - The following piping, fittings, and valve systems
shall be insulated:
1. All interior hot, cold, and recirculating water
piping.
2 . All roof drain sumps, vertical roof drainage piping
from sump to first horizontal piping. Horizontal
piping to next vertical drop.
B. Manufacturers: Manville, Knauf, or Owens-Corning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF
BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight fittings: Cast
iron. Joints: ASTM C564 , neoprene gasketing system or
lead and oakum.
2 . 02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET (1500 mm) OF
BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 heavy service weight.
,, 15410-3
PLUMBING PIPING
.s.
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 2
B. ANSI/ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
C. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
D. ANSI/ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl chloride) Plastic Pipe "
fittings, Schedule 40.
E. ANSI/AWS D1. 1 - Structural Welding Code. .,
F. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
G. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
H. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings. •.+
I. ASTM D1785 - Poly Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80 and 120.
J. ASTM D2241 - Poly Vinyl Chloride Plasti Pipe (SDR-PR) .
K. ASTM D2729 - Poly Vinyl Chloride Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
L. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly
Vinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings.
M. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
N. AWS A5.8 -- Brazing Filler Metal.
O. AWWA C601 - Standard Methods for the Examination of Water
and Waste Water.
P. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless
Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
1. 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked
on valve body.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Codes
and applicable state labor regulations.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME Sec. '
9. ANSI/AWS D1. 1.
15410-2
rew
PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 15410 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divison-1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. 02 WORK INCLUDED
�r
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Sanitary sewer piping system.
" D. Vent Piping
E. Domestic water piping system.
F. Storm water piping system.
G. Hangers and supports.
H. Sleeves and escutcheons.
1. 03 RELATED WORK
A. General Specifications - Excavation, Backfilling and
Trenching. .
B. Section 15400 - Plumbing General Requirements.
C. Section 15430 - Plumbing specialties.
D. Section 15440 - Plumbing fixtures.
1. 04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B16. 3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class
150 NS 300.
15410-1
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 13
2 . Complete engineering calculations and drawings for
all vibration and seismic requirements for all
piping.
3 . Details for all the seismic bracing with snubbers
proposed.
4 . Details for steel frames to be used in connection
with the isolation and seismic restraint of the
items.
END OF SECTION
""" 15400-13
an
..
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
..
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 12
3 . Restraint of rigidly mounted piping and ductwork
shall conform to "SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic
Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing
Systems", SMACNA latest edition. Calculations need
not be submitted for restraint systems conforming
to these guidelines.
C. Isolated Piping: ••a
1. All piping 1 1/2" and over shall be protected in
all planes by cable restraints designed to
accommodate thermal movement as well as restraint
seismic motion. Locations shall include but not be
limited to:
a. All drops to equipment connections.
b. Changes in direction of pipe.
C. At horizontal runs of pipe. ..�
1) Up to 3" pipe: 251 .
2) 3 1/2" to 611 : 301 .
3) 8" to 1211: 351 .
d. On both sides of flexible connectors.
D. Seismic Pipe Connectors:
1. Copper Piping: Provide bronze hose covered with
bronze wired braid with copper tube ends or bronze
flanged ends, braze-welded to hose.
2. Steel Piping: Provide stainless steel hose covered
with stainless steel wire braid with NPT steel
nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges, welded to hose.
3 . Cast Iron Connectors: Provide neoprene or EDPM
construction consisting of multiple plies of nylon
tire cord fabric and elastomer molded and cured in
hydraulic rubber presses. Provide straight or
elbow connector as indicated, rated at 125 psi at
220° F (140° C) .
E. Submittals:
1. The seismic and vibration control manufacturer
shall determine the number, size, and type of
anchor bolts, cable restraints, etc. for each piece
and groups of pipes.
15400-12 �*!
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
w
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 11
quality and grade, in strict accordance with
specification requirements.
B. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to select a full
line of materials, appliances and fixtures in the event
that items listed are not in accord with specification
requirements or best quality and grade.
1.27 LIABILITY STATEMENT
A. Equipment is to be manufactured to meet or exceed all
applicable government and industrial codes, standards and
regulations, and be in accordance with good engineering
practice.
1.28 COORDINATION
A. The Plumbing Contractor is to coordinate with Owner,
Architect/Engineer, and all building contractors and sub-
contractors to maintain continuity of hospital operations
during the construction remodeling schedule. Any service
interruptions are to be approved by a field memo by the
owner or his designated representative.
1.29 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturer: ITT Grinnell, Super Strut, Kin Line, B-
Line, or approved equal.
B. Requirements:
1. Pipes shall be supported and braced per the SMACNA
"Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical
Systems and Plumbing Systems", "Superstrut Seismic
Restraint System" for pipes and conduits, the "Kin-
line Seismic Restraint System" for pipes and
conduits, only.
2 . The manufacturers of the seismic restraints for
piping shall submit shop drawings for review prior
to installation of piping. The shop drawings shall
indicate the location and loading of each
restraint.
15400-11
e�.
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 10
B. The charts shall show numbers of valve locations and
purpose and shall agree with valves on record drawings.
C. Attach to each valve a tag as described below. The
numbers on the tags shall run consecutively to
correspond with numbers on . the chart. Tags shall be
designated as follows: Cold Water (CW) , Hot Water (HW) ,
Hot Water Circulation (HWC) , etc.
D. Tags are to be brass or approved plastic material 2"
diameter with 3/16" hole and 1" diameter brass ring.
Numeral to be 5/8" high and lettering to be 1/4" high.
If brass tags are used, the lettering is to be black. If
plastic tags are used, they shall be black and white
lettering. Tags are to be fastened- to valve stems with -�
short sections of beaded or linked brass chain.
E. The chart shall be printed with Wrico pencil or typed. Aw
1.21 STAGING
A. Staging shall be supplied by this contractor in
accordance with the Special Conditions for the
installation of all plumbing work specified herein or
shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.22 GUARANTEE
A. See General Conditions. '
1.23 REPAIRS TO OTHER FINISHED WORK
A. Make good and pay for glass breakage, plaster patching,
and repairs to all other finished work caused by this
installation.
w.
1. 24 RUBBISH REMOVAL
A. See General Requirements.
1.25 CLEANING OF PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. See General Requirements.
1. 26 KIND AND QUALITY OF MATERIALS
A. Materials, appliances and fixtures to be new, of best
15400-10 . e
00
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 9
grouping of traps, valves, and cleanouts which must be
accessible for servicing and maintaining the plumbing
systems.
C. Panels shall have flush doors with #14 USCG steel door
and trim #16 USCG steel frame, metal wings for fitting
into construction, concealed hinges and screwdriver
*" operated stainless steel cam lock. Panels shall be shop
coated with one coat of zinc chromate primer. Valves
above removable ceilings shall have tiles marked with
the clips by this contractor for identification,
properly labeled.
1. 19 IDENTIFICATION
mar
A. All applying of stenciling on material piping and
equipment, as outlined hereinafter for identification
purposes, shall be performed by this contractor.
B. The stenciling shall be applied on the apparatus in full
view and shall be a color that is in sharp contrast with
the background.
C. Before stenciling is applied, the apparatus shall be
thoroughly cleaned and painted, if necessary.
D. Letters shall not be less than 1-1/2" in height. Arrows
shall not be less than 9" long.
E. All water lines, and waste piping, exposed and above
furred ceilings, shall be identified at intervals of
approximately 20' and at each change of direction. In
lieu of stenciling, piping systems may be identified with
approved snap-on covers, designating services and
direction of flow. Location of identification shall be
as near access panels wherever possible and on both sides
of valves.
F. Pipe markers, if used, shall be manufactured by W.H.
Brady Company, Westline Products of Seton Nameplate
Company.
1.20 TAGS AND CHARTS
A. On completion of the work, furnish three glazed frame
charts of all control valves.
! * 15400-9
.ee
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 8
1. 17 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete,
flushed and clean.
B. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6
by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid
(hydrochloric) .
C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder,
tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80
mg/L residual. `"
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test
for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of *�
outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L,
repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to
that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from
10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze
in accordance with AWWA C601.
u �
I. Verify disinfectant procedures with local codes.
1. 18 ACCESS PANELS �*
A. Group together valves, traps, cleanouts, etc. concealed
in suspended ceilings, walls and furred spaces to reduce
the number of access panels, but all valves must be
freely accessible for maintenance.
B. Furnish access panels of proper size to service all
concealed traps, valves and cleanouts, but in no case
less than 18" x 12" for one valve, trap, or cleanout and
24" x 12" for two valves, traps, or cleanouts or more. �.►
Panels shall be of the proper type for material in which
they occur to be furnished by this contractor and turned
over to the trade in which they occur for installation by
the particular trade contractor. The exact number of
panels shall be determined by the number, location and
15400-8
�w
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 7
closed and kept closed during construction.
1. 16 TESTS
A. All plumbing work shall be inspected, tested and approved
as required by governing Codes. Tests shall be made in
the presence of the proper inspectors, and the
Architect/Engineer or their authorized representatives.
All tests shall be made by the Contractor at his own
expense, and he shall furnish the Architect/Engineer a
certificate that satisfactory tests have been made.
B. All tests of piping systems, except final test of
completed system, shall be made before pipe is covered,
or connected to fixtures and equipment. Tests required
shall not be less than specified in the following
paragraphs.
1. The sanitary drainage system vent piping and storm
drainage system shall be tested with air at 5 lbs.
gauge pressure for a period of 15 minutes.
2 . The domestic water supply system shall be tested
with water at 100 lb. ga. pressure for a period of
two hours.
C. Defective Work - If inspection or tests show defects,
such defective work or material shall be replaced and
inspection and tests shall be repeated. All repairs to
piping shall be made with new material. No caulking or
screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.
D. Additional Tests:
1. Provide all additional tests, such as smoke or
pressure tests, as required by the regulations or
as directed by authorities making the inspection.
2. Provide for any repeated tests, as directed by the
Architect/Engineer to make all systems tight, as
required.
3 . Visual inspections of joints, valves, etc. shall be
made as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
15400-7
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 6
for production. ■*
1. 11 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
A. See Project Requirements.
1. 12 MEASUREMENTS AND CUTTING DIRECTIONS
A. Measurements and cutting directions required for cutting
pipe openings, openings for valves and for attachment of
equipment and plumbing fixtures shall be furnished by
this contractor.
1. 13 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND SLEEVES
A. Accurately locate all openings and provide and set all
sleeves in cooperation with Contractor whose work is
affected thereby. Sleeves to be one inch larger than "^
outside pipe diameter and of sufficient length to pass
through entire floor or wall construction, including
plaster. Sleeves in concrete or masonry floor and walls ,
shall be of steel pipe. All other sleeves, #22 gauge
galvanized iron.
B. Openings for piping in existing and new building shall be
carefully drilled or cored to prevent unnecessary damage
or weakening of any structural member. Chopping or
breaking out will not be permitted.
C. Seal all openings between pipe and sleeve at each end
with fiberglass and caulk opening with sealant. Provide
"Thunderline" or equal seals at one end of sleeve
passing through a fire rated wall or floor.
D. See Architectural Section "Cutting and Patching" .
1. 14 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Plumbing Contractor shall make all required water and
drain connections to heating, ventilating and air
conditioning equipment, special equipment and Owner 's
equipment requiring such connections.
1. 15 PROTECTION
.e.
A. Open ends of pipes, drains and water and fixture outlets
including those extending above roof must be effectively
15400-6
an
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 — PAGE 5
experienced superintendent.
B. He shall be constantly in charge of the installation of
.w the work together with all subcontractors, skilled
workmen, helpers, and labor required to unload,
transfer, erect, connect up, adjust, start, operate and
test each system.
C. He shall be thoroughly acquainted with and be responsible
for the various subcontractors' work so that it is
,. properly coordinated and supervised to the satisfaction
of the Architect/Engineer.
1. 09 CODES AND PERMITS
A. Comply with all State and Local Codes, Laws, Regulations
and requirements of the Board of Health and the Local
Plumbing Inspector.
B. Install all plumbing fixtures as required by State and
Federal Handicapped Codes.
C. Secure permits and licenses applicable to this Section of
the work. Pay all fees and post all bonds incident
'! thereto. See General and Supplementary Conditions.
1. 10 SHOP AND RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Submit to Architect/Engineer, 6 copies, for approval:
1. All drains.
2 . All plumbing fixtures and trim.
3 . All valves.
4 . All pipe insulation.
5. All cleanouts
B. In addition to the above, prepare and submit to
Architect/Engineer complete layout of piping and drains
as actually installed in the building, noting any
changes made in locations and elevations, to serve as
permanent record drawings. See Project Requirements.
C. See General Requirements and Project Requirements for
procedure.
40
D. Contractor and supplier to indicate expected delivery
time of material after submittal approvals and release
15400-5
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 4
specified, including all materials, equipment and
incidentals necessary and required for their
completion.
1. 06 SUMMARY OF WORK
A. In general, this Section includes all plumbing work to
constitute complete installation as specified, shown on
drawings, and required, including such items as drainage
and waste systems, water supply, plumbing fixtures,
special equipment, final connections, water supply and
waste connection for heating and Owner's equipment. '
B. Elevations and locations of all services in building as
indicated on plan are approximate, and Contractor shall **
definitely establish elevations and locations of
services in field, check given locations, elevations and
pitches with relation to service stubs, report „
immediately to Architect/Engineer, in writing, any major
deviation in location in conflict with code pitches
caused by variation in service stubs, and await
Architect/Engineer's decision on appropriate adjustment
of line locations and elevations before proceeding.
1. 07 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION
A. This Contractor shall give full cooperation to other
trades and furnish any information necessary to permit
the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and
with least possible interference or delay.
B. Where the work of the Contractor will be installed in
close proximity to the work of other trades, or where
there is evidence that the work of the Contractor will
interfere with work of other trades, he shall assist in
working out space conditions to make satisfactory
adjustments.
C. If the Contractor installs his work before coordinating
it with other trades or so as to cause interference with
work of other trades, he shall make necessary changes in
this work to correct the condition without extra charge. *�
1. 08 SUPERVISION
A. This Contractor shall furnish the services of an
15400-4
w�
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 3
2 . Examine plans and specifications of electrical and
heating and air conditioning, and fire protection
for equipment and piping layouts.
E. In the event drawings and specifications are not in full
accord and/or changes, alterations, additions or
deductions are necessary, Contractor shall notify
Architect/Engineer immediately, in writing, any
exceptions in regard to size of equipment, pipe sizes,
layout, etc. , and await his decision.
F. Information given herein and on drawings is as exact as
could be secured. Size, location, and elevations shown
for services taken from site drawings.
1. This Contractor must, therefore, examine location
carefully and verify all measurements, distances,
levels, etc. before starting work.
G. Wherever location of piping or equipment is governed by
architectural features, this Contractor shall establish
their location by referring to general drawings; he shall
not scale drawings for exact dimensions.
H. Any exceptions to size of equipment, pipe sizes, etc. or
general layout which are taken by Contractor shall be
submitted to Architect/Engineer in writing, for his
decision.
1. Any such exceptions must be submitted seven days
prior to date set for receiving of proposal.
2 . After proposals are accepted by Owner, it shall be
understood that this Contractor has studied the
• drawings, specifications, jobsite, and no further
exceptions will be taken affecting the bid due to
his failure to comply herewith.
w.
I. Visit building site and become thoroughly familiar with
all conditions affecting this section of the work.
Ignorance of field conditions affecting work will not be
considered as reason for additional cost of work above
contract price. See Instructions to Bidders.
1. The Contractor shall provide all items, articles,
materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned
or scheduled on the drawings and/or herein
15400-3
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 2
operation specified herein, even though not specifically ..�
mentioned or indicated on the drawings but which are
usually provided or are essential for proper installation
and operation of all systems as indicated on the drawings
and specified herein.
1. 04 WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Utilities, Piping, Storm Sewer, Sanitary Sewer, and
Water.
1. 05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall furnish all plumbing work, complete
ready for test and operation, and duly approved by
agency(ies) having jurisdiction.
B. It is also to be understood that the tender of proposal --
shall include furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment, and incidentals necessary for completion of
the work required, including that which may not be
directly shown on the drawings or in the specifications
but necessary for proper operation and approval.
C. Information on conditions affecting work - obtain at
building site, including:
1 . Check location of piping to which systems will
connect.
2 . Obtain complete information as to details of
building construction, piping and equipment
layout, in order to . install system to clear
structural work, piping, and equipment of other
trades.
3 . Accessibility and storage space - See General
Requirements.
D. On all conditions affecting work, obtain at building the
condition of foundations and surfaces to support pipe and
equipment.
1. Examine details of building construction in order
to install system to clear all structural work and .R
finish.
15400-2 �"""
.w
PLUMBING PROVISIONS
SECTION 15400 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 REFERENCES
A. All work in this section is subject to the Provision of
the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 1
Specification Sections.
1. 02 DEFINITIONS
A. "Contractor" - is the Plumbing Contractor and his sub-
, , contractors under this division of the contract.
B. N. I.C. - "Not in Contract" - Indicates item not to be
included by this contractor.
C. "Furnish" - Means contractor is to furnish and install
the item in working order.
D. "Install" - Means Contractor is to furnish and install
the item in working condition.
E. "Provide" - Means contractor is to furnish and install
the material in operating condition in the system.
1. 03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Section of work under this contract include:
1. General Provisions
2 . Basic Materials
.�. 3 . Methods
4 . Insulation
5. Plumbing Systems
6. Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
B. Scope of Work - The work under this contract shall
include all labor, fixtures, materials, tools,
equipment, rigging, hoisting, staging, transportation,
insurance, temporary protection, supervision, and
incidental items essential for proper installation and
" 15400-1
.►
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 13
a. All drops to equipment connections.
b. Changes in direction of pipe.
C. At horizontal runs of pipe.
1) Up to 3" pipe: 251 .
2) 3 1/2" to 611 : 301 .
3) 8" to 1211 : 351 .
d. On both sides of flexible connectors.
D. Seismic Pipe Connectors:
1. Steel Piping: Provide stainless steel hose
covered with stainless steel wire braid with
NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges,
welded to hose.
E. Submittals:
1. The seismic and vibration control manufacturer
shall determine the number, size, and type of
anchor bolts, cable restraints, etc. for each
piece and groups of pipes.
2 . Complete engineering calculations and drawings
for all vibration and seismic requirements for
all piping.
3 . Details for all the seismic bracing with
snubbers proposed.
4 . Details for steel frames to be used in
connection with the isolation and seismic
restraint of the items.
END OF SECTION
'"' 15300-13
■0
am
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 12
3 . 07 STAGING *+
A. Staging shall be supplied by this Contractor in
accordance with the Special Conditions for the
installation of all Fire Protection Work specified
herein or shown on the Contract Drawings.
3 . 08 SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS
A. Manufacturer: ITT Grinnell, Super Strut, Kin Line,
B-Line, or approved equal.
B. Requirements:
1. Pipes shall be supported and braced per the �*
SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of
Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Systems" ,
"Superstrut Seismic Restraint System" for
pipes and conduits, the "Kin-line Seismic
Restraint System" for pipes and conduits,
only. .�
2 . The manufacturers of the seismic restraints
for piping shall submit shop drawings for
review prior to installation of piping. The •
shop drawings shall indicate the location and
loading of each restraint.
3 . Restraint of rigidly mounted piping and
ductwork shall conform to "SMACNA Guidelines
for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems
and Plumbing Systems" , SMACNA latest edition.
Calculations need not be submitted for
restraint systems conforming to these
guidelines. ...
C. Isolated Piping:
1. All piping 1 1/2" and over shall be protected "
in all planes by cable restraints designed to
accommodate thermal movement as well as
restraint seismic motion. Locations shall
include but not be limited to:
15300-12 '
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 11
C. In the new building, all cutting and patching done
by Fire Protection Contractor shall be subject to
direction and approval of the Architect/Engineer.
This Contractor shall not endanger the stability of
the structure by cutting and digging or otherwise,
and shall not at any time cut or alter work of any
other contractor without Architect/Engineer' s
consent and approval.
D. Pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings
shall be sealed tight with suitable caulking or
sealant. Sealant at fire rated walls or floors to
be similar to Dow Corning fire stop.
,wA 3 . 05 IDENTIFICATION
A. All piping and valves shall be identified with
proper identification signs per NFPA. Pipe markers
by W. H. Brady Company or Seton Name Plate Company
are acceptable.
B. At base of riser, install a secured hydraulic
placard stating the design criteria and flow and
pressure for the system.
3 . 06 VALVE TAGS AND CHARTS
A. All new valves on pipes of every description shall
have near circular brass valve tags of at least 1-
1/4" in diameter, attached with brass hooks to each
valve stem. Stamp on these valve tags in letters
as large as practical the number of the valve and
the service and zone, such as "SP" , "D", for
sprinkler or drain, respectively. The number of
each service shall be consecutive.
B. These numbers shall correspond to numbers indicated
for valves on the record drawings and on printed
detailed lists. These printed lists shall state
the numbers and locations of each valve and the
equipment which it controls, and other necessary
information such as requiring the opening or
closing of another valve or valves, when any one
valve is to be opened or closed.
* 15300-11
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 10
B. All piping shall be suspended from floor, wall and
ceiling construction with proper type pipe hangers.
Provide drops with swing connections to allow for
clearances at lights, and heating units.
C. Provide sleeves for all piping penetrating through
bearing walls or fire rated walls.
D. Install heads in center of ceiling tiles.
3 . 02 RISER ASSEMBLY
A. Connect to existing source of water supply as
required to provide an operational system.
3 . 03 DRAINS
A. Main system drain shall drain to exterior.
B. Auxiliary drains shall be plugged or valved as
required.
C. Inspector' s test and drain connection shall be as
per NFPA complete with valve(s) , sight glass and
smooth bore corrosion resistant orifice giving a
flow equivalent to one sprinkler. Standard
inspector' s test connections shall be installed as
required at the hydraulically remote point of the
system. Pipe inspector' s test connection drains to
exterior.
3 . 04 CUTTING AND PATCHING ..
A. General Contractor is required under his contract
to leave chases, recesses, and openings in his
work, provided that this Contractor furnish him
full information as to locations and dimensions of
same in all new construction. Failing to give
General Contractor the proper information at the �.
time required, such cutting and patching shall be
done by this Sub-contractor.
B. This Contractor shall set all sleeves and anchors
in such time as to cause no delay in the work of
the General Contractor. Any cost caused by
defective or ill timed work shall be borne by the
party responsible herefor.
15300-10
.w.
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 9
2 . 03 VALVES
A. Valves shall be by Nibco, Norriseal, Viking, Crane
or approved equal. All valves shall be UL listed.
1. Drain valves shall be inside screw with rising
stem type, iron body and solid wedge.
2 . Gate valves to be OS&Y or NRS as noted with
bolted bonnet, bronze fitted cast iron with
�. solid wedge.
2. 04 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Types shall be of required temperature rating and
orifice size, and as manufactured by Grinnell,
Viking, Grunau, or Central.
B. Provide type and in areas as follows:
Type Area
H-1 Bronze upright head on Areas with exposed
exposed piping. structure ceilings.
Viking Micromatic
Model M
H-2 Brass Model M Pendent All areas with
head, base bracket, suspended
and cover ceilings.
Viking Silhouette
Model A-1 Concealed
Sprinkler.
2 . 05 VALVE CABINETS
A. Provide a surface mounted valve cabinet. Cabinets
to be of standard design for intended use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 01 INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements - Installation shall conform
to standards set forth by State and local codes,
laws, regulations and requirements of NFPA.
+ '" 15300-9
wu
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 8
UL and FM approved combination of couplings,
gaskets and grooves. Grooves may be rolled
or cut, and they shall be dimensionally
compatible with the coupling and conform to
ASTM A-120 tolerances.
3 . All black steel pipe must be preoxidized with
a suitable protective coating. Sprinkler
piping that is exposed to the weather, or used
in a corrosive atmosphere or where noted on
drawings, shall be galvanized.
4 . All materials shall be manufactured
domestically.
B. Fittings
1. Screwed fittings shall be cast iron, 125 lb.
class, black, and in accordance with ANSI B
16.4 or malleable iron, 150 lb. class, black,
and in accordance with ANSI B 16. 3 .
,w
2 . Flanged fittings shall be cast iron, short
body, Class 125, black, and in accordance with
ANSI B 16. 1. Gaskets shall be full face of ow
1/8" minimum thickness red sheet rubber.
Flange bolts shall be hexagon head machine
bolts with heavy semi-finished hexagon head
nuts, cadmium plated, having dimensions in no
accordance with ANSI B 18 . 2 .
3 . Weld fittings shall be steel, standard wo
weights, black, and in accordance with ANSI B
16.9, ANSI B 16. 25, ASTM A 2334 , ANSI B 16. 5,
or ANSI B 16. 11. M,
4 . Grooved couplings and mechanical fittings
shall be malleable iron, 500 psi working
pressure, in accordance with ASTM A-47 . ""
Couplings gasket material shall be butyl
rubber. Grooved couplings and mechanical
fittings shall be tested and listed by UL ow
and/or FM.
5. Manufacturer - Victaulic, Nibco, Grinnell, or 4W
equal as approved.
15300-8 ■*
no
d.
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 7
work, that may be required, to perform any of the
work shown on the Fire Protection Contract
Drawings or specified herein in order to avoid work
stoppages due to jurisdictional disputes. The
basis for subletting work in question, if any,
shall conform with precedent agreements and
decisions of record as listed in the Building and
Construction Trades Department Manual of the latest
date including any amendments or additions thereto.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 01 KIND AND QUALITY OF MATERIALS
A. Materials to be new, of best quality and grade, UL
listed, or approved, in strict accordance with
specification requirements.
B. Within thirty (30) days after contract award,
prepare and submit to Architect/Engineer six (6)
sets of complete list of all materials and
equipment proposed for installation, with
manufacturer's name and address, trade name and
catalog number.
C. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to select a
full line of materials in the event that listing is
not submitted within the 30-day period or items
listed are not in accord with specification
requirements or best quality and grade.
2 . 02 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Piping
1. Pipe shall be steel, Schedule 10 for mains and
Schedule 40 for branches, black and in
accordance with specifications, ASTM A-120
designed for 175 psi working pressure.
• 2 . Black steel pipe shall be jointed by screwed
joints in accordance with specification ANSI B
2 . 1, or by welded joints in accordance with
specifications ANSI B 31. 10, ANSI B 31. 10a and
ANSI B 31. 10b, or by mechanical grooved
couplings or push-on couplings, jointed by a
"" 15300-7
wM
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 6
B. Keep other separate contractors fully informed as
to the shape, size and position of all openings
required for apparatus and give full information to
the General Contractor and other separate
contractors sufficiently in advance of the work so
that all openings may be built in advance. Furnish
and install all sleeves, supports and inserts
hereinafter specified or required.
C. Obtain detailed information from the manufacturers
of apparatus as to the proper method of installing
and connecting same. Obtain all information from •■
the General Contractor and the other separate sub-
contractors which may be necessary to facilitate
work and the completion of the whole project.
1. 14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Instruct to the Owner's satisfaction such person as
the Owner designates in the proper operation and
maintenance of the systems and their parts. This
subcontractor shall pay the cost of the
manufacturer' s representative for a period of four
(4) hours for the instruction of major fire
protection equipment and systems. ow
B. Furnish in accordance with General Requirements and
Supplementary General Requirements, equipment
maintenance instructions and forward to the
Architect/Engineer for transmittal to the Owner.
C. For maintenance purposes, provide shop drawings,
parts lists, specifications, and manufacturer ' s
maintenance bulletins for each piece of equipment.
D. Provide name, address, and telephone number of the
manufacturer's representative, and service company
for each piece of equipment so that service or
spare parts can be readily obtained. .w
E. Manuals shall be enclosed in a hard cover, three-
ring binder properly labeled and indexed. ow
1. 15 JURISDICTIONAL DISPUTES
A. It shall be the responsibility of this Sub- go
contractor to pay all costs for subletting any
15300-6 on
4W
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 5
B. Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of system
layout drawings and four (4) copies of related
engineering calculations to Architect/Engineer for
review after copies are approved by Owner's
! ' insurance company and State and local fire
protection approval agencies as required.
C. Reproducible sepia drawings of the system as
installed as record drawings are also to be
provided to the Architect/Engineer.
1. 11 REPAIR OF DEFECTS
A. The sprinkler contractor is to repair and/or
• replace all defective pipe, fittings, valves,
heads, etc. , during the guarantee period.
B. Repair work to be done as promptly as possible
after notification.
C. All damages to building and contents due to leaks
to be the responsibility of the Fire Protection
Contractor.
D. Notify authorities whenever sprinkler valves are
closed manually for service or repair.
1. 12 LIABILITY STATEMENT
A. Equipment is to be manufactured to meet or exceed
all applicable government and industrial codes,
standards and regulations, and be in accordance
with good engineering practice.
1. 13 WORKMANSHIP
A. The entire work provided in this Specification
shall be constructed and finished in every respect
in a workmanlike and substantial manner. It is
not intended that the drawings shall show every
pipe, fitting, and appliance, but the Fire
Protection Contractor shall furnish and install all
such parts as may be necessary to complete the
systems in accordance with the best trade practice
and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer.
"' 15300-5
0M
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 4
C. Sprinkler contractor to verify all flow data as XM
required for the system.
1. 09 QUALITY ASSURANCE
MM
A. All work covered in this section must be performed
by a licensed fire protection contractor,
regularly engaged in the design, engineering,
fabrication, and installation of automatic
sprinkler and related fire protection systems.
B. The entire fire protection system as specified
herein shall be guaranteed for a period of one
year against defective equipment, materials, and
workmanship. Provide written guarantee to Owner
with final payment request.
C. The guarantee period shall begin on the date the
system is completed and placed in operation and
accepted by Owner.
D. Inspections and tests required by the authorities
and/or agencies having jurisdiction shall be
arranged and paid for by the contractor, as
necessary to obtain complete and final acceptance
of the automatic sprinkler system.
E. Signed test forms covering required hydrostatic
tests of underground water supply and overhead ""
sprinkler piping shall be furnished by this
contractor to Owner and approval agencies.
F. Prior to initial fill of system with water, an air
test may be required at the discretion of field
superintendent. Air test, when required, shall
maintain minimum of 50 psi air pressure for two
hours.
1. 10 SHOP AND RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of shop
drawings of the following for approval as indicated
in General and Supplementary Requirements:
1. All valves.
2 . Each type of sprinkler head. 4M
15300-4
eye
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 3
C. Contractor shall check all measurements at
building, review building and mechanical plans and
specifications, and adjust his work to fit into
spaces allotted for same. Close cooperation among
all trades will be required throughout the work to
prevent interferences in their respective
installations.
D. Any work installed without regard for work of other
trades which must, in the opinion of the
Architect/Engineer, necessarily be moved in order
to permit proper installation, shall be moved as
part of the sprinkler work without extra charge.
" ! 1. 07 CODES, ORDINANCES AND PERMITS
A. All work and materials are to comply in every
respect with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Building Code, and such applicable building laws
and regulations are to be considered as part of
these specifications.
B. The Fire Protection Contractor is to give all
requisite notices, file all requisite plans
relating to his work with the proper authorities,
and is to secure all permits and pay all fees for
same. If any work is performed and changes are
necessary to conform to the ordinances, these
changes shall be made at the Fire Protection
Contractor's expense.
C. The drawings and specifications shall be followed
when in excess of the minimum requirements of the
code.
1. 08 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Contractor shall provide complete automatic
sprinkler system to protect all areas as indicated
on the drawings. Systems shall conform to the
design criteria required by Commonwealth of
Massachusetts Building Code, NFPA, and any other
authority(ies) having jurisdiction.
B. Installation layout drawings to be sized per NFPA-
13 pipe schedule or hydraulic design at
contractor's option.
15300-3
go
ON
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
40
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 2
B. Ordinary hazard pipe schedule. •�
C. Approval of drawings and calculations by local
authorities and insurance company as necessary.
D. Connect to existing source of water supply as
required to provide an operational system.
1. 05 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope
B. General Provisions
C. Permits, Codes and Regulations
D. Design Criteria
E. Sprinkler System
F. Kind and Quality of Materials
G. Pipe and Fittings
H. Valves 4"
I . Sprinkler Heads
J. Installation
K. Identification
L. Drains and Test Connections w
M. Cutting and Patching
N. Guarantee
O. Inspection and Tests ""
P. Shop and Record Drawings
Q. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
4W
1. 06 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A. Fire Protection Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for final layout and details as No
required by authority or authorities having
jurisdiction, including installation to miss all
lighting, ducts, and structural interferences per o"
NFPA-13 and 14 and State and Local Codes.
B. Work shall include furnishing all labor, materials, go
equipment and performing all operations necessary
to design and install the fire protection system
including piping, fittings, sprinkler heads,
valves, controls, alarms, hangers, and any other
supplemental items necessary to complete the
system.
15300-2 w.
was
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
SECTION 15300 - PAGE 1
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section.
on 1. 02 DEFINITIONS
A. "Contractor" - Is the Sprinkler-Fire Protection
Contractor and his Sub-Contractors under this
division of the contract.
B. N. I .C. - "Not in Contract" - Indicates item not to
be included by this contractor.
C. "Furnish" - Means contractor is to furnish and
install the item in working order.
D. "Install" - Means Contractor is to furnish and
install the item in working condition.
E. "Provide" - Means contractor is to furnish and
install the material in operating condition in the
system.
1. 03 WORK SEQUENCE
uw
A. Install work in phases to accommodate Owner' s
occupancy requirements. During' the construction
period, coordinate fire protection work and
operations with Architect/Engineer.
1. 04 SCOPE
A. This is a performance specification to cover the
design and installation requirements of a complete
automatic sprinkler system as specified herein.
"��' 15300-1
am
RADIATION PROTECTION
Section 13090 - Page 4
2. Lead shielding "patches" shall be secured to studs ,
formed ground boxes and tapped to inside shielding so
as to maintain shielding protection.
3. Secure lead with panel adhesive and copper wire. .•
D. Piping Shielding:
1. In common partition between rooms , in addition to lead
shielding indicated in partition, provide additional
strip of sheet lead of some thickness on opposite side
of partition covering oxygen and vacuum piping.
2. Additional lead strip to extend a minimum of 4"
horizontally beyond pipes and vertically from floor to
ceiling.
3. Secure lead to top of metal stud partition with sheet
metal screws .
4 . Secure lead to piping with copper wire minimum 12" on
center . ■M
E. Door and Window Frames :
1 . Install as per manufacturer ' s recommendations. am
F . Wood Doors :
1. Install as per manufacturer 's recommendations.
G. Leaded Glass :
1 . Install as per manufacturer 's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
13090 - 4 '"""
w
w RADIATION PROTECTION
Section 13090 - Page 3
me
E. Lead Core Wood Doors:
aye
1. Doors shall be constructed of two (2) high density
particle board cores separated by a single sheet of
lead of thickness equal to that in partition (i .e. ,
1/16" lead) , through the center . Two inch ( 2" )
hardwood edge strips and three inch (3" ) hardwood at
toe and bottom. Cores shall be secured together with
flush-headed, poured lead dowels, spaced approximately
eight inches ( 8" ) on center in each direction. Doors
to have a 20-minute label. Surface veneer to be red
+0 oak , rotary cut . Doors as manufactured by A & L Lead,
Inc. Rome, Georgia; Telephone: (800) 329-5323.
F. Lead-Lined Hollow Metal Door Frames:
1. Factory-welded, C-Label hollow metal door frames with
1/16" lead shielding. Jamb depth to accommodate new
partitions and existing wall construction . Door
frames as manufactured by A & L Lead , Inc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install products of this Section in accordance with the
manufacturer 's installation directions and National Bureau
of Standards Handbook No. 76.
B. Lead-Laminated Gypsum Wallboard:
1. Secure to metal studs with self-tapping screws set in
wallboard with lead buttons. Install a 2" wide strip
of lead behind vertical joints to provide a 1" lap
with each edge of butting wallboard.
C . Penetration Shielding:
±.r 1. Apply strips or "patches" of 1/16" thick as indicated
sheet lead behind all electrical boxes , telephone
boxes and other penetrations to shielding.
13090 - 3
�w
an
RADIATION PROTECTION
am
Section 13090 - Page 2
Im
am
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1 . A & L Lead Company
2. Ameray
3 . Bar-Ray
4 . Ray Proof Corporation
5. Architect-Approved Equivalent
2 .02 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Lead - Federal Specification QQ-L-201.
B. Sheet lead shall be 99. 9% virgin lead, free from dross ,
oxide inclusions , lamination, scale, blisters or cracks .
C. Lead thickness in specialty and accessory items shall be
equivalent to lead in partitions in which specialty or
accessory item occurs.
D. Lead-Laminated Gypsum Wallboard:
1 . Lead-laminated gypsum wallboard shall consist of
single , unpierced lead sheet, 1/16" thick , factory-
laminated to 5/ 8 " thick gypsum wallboard , as
manufactured by A & L Lead , Inc . , Rome , Georgia ;
Telephone (800) 329-5323.
2. Lead-laminated gypsum wallboard shall be installed
using appropriate fasteners and using a lead strip
behind each joint as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Thickness of lead lining shall be as indicated on the
Contract Drawings .
13090 - 2 ""
A
RADIATION PROTECTION
Section 13090 - Page 1
SECTION 13090
RADIATION PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the furnishing of :
1. Lead - laminated gypsum wallboard and anchorage
fasteners. NOTE: Installation to be completed under
Section 09260 - Gypsum Wallboard Systems.
2. Lead-lined doors and door frames. NOTE: Installation
to be completed under Section 06200 - Finish
Carpentry.
3. Relocate existing lead-lined window frames and special
radiation protection glazing. NOTE: Installation to
be completed under Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.
1 .02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit , before delivery of materials of this Section , a
complete list of all materials indicating manufacturer ' s
name and catalog number for each item.
B. Submit manufacturer ' s current recommendation method of
installation for each item. These recommendations shall
be basis for acceptance or rejection of actual
installation methods used in this work .
C . Submit warranty for radiation protective materials to
retain the specified shielding effectiveness for a period
of five ( 5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
'�" 13090 - 1
am
CUBICLE TRACK
Section 12531 - Page 2
B. PVC: White.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A . Mount track support system on solid backing with
tamperproof screws . Where possible , provide single
length , tightly scribed to the opening . At windows ,
provide lengths as noted on the Drawings , with end caps at
all exposed ends; scribe ends which abut walls.
END OF SECTION
ww
12531 - 2
we
CUBICLE TRACK
Section 12531 - Page 1
SECTION 12531
CUBICLE TRACK
s
PART 1 GENERAL
fop 1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install formed channel track for cubicle
go curtains .
B. Nylon sliding carriers, wands and accessories.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09510 : Suspended Acoustical Ceilings.
1 .03 SHOP DRAWINGS
Wr
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
*0 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Clickeze Ultra-Cube System , Abington , Pennsylvania ,
in UC8000 Series .
2 .02 MATERIALS
on A. Tracks : Extruded aluminum with baked-on white paint
finish ( Ultra-Cube Track by Clickeze ) cubicle track
complete with end caps.
am
B. Carriers : White , self-lube delvin type , Whisper-Cube
canted wheel carrier (CP9025) .
No 2 .03 FINISHES
A. Exposed Metal : Baked enamel , white.
No
12531 - 1
AIR INFLATABLE ENCLOSURE UNIT
Section 10950 - 2
3 . Unit shall have a storage cover to enhance
appearances , deter weathering and hold the unit in a •
stored position .
4 . The motor/blowers shall be two (2) one and one-half .�
(1-1/2) horsepower , 8 . 6 amps , 115 volt with a minimum
free air of 1210 cfm.
5. Air inflatable unit is compatible with a Mobile
M. R. I . Diagnostic Van .
PART 3 EXECUTION no
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install unit in complete accordance with the
manufacturer 's installation instructions .
END OF SECTION
w
10950 - 2 �,.
AIR INFLATABLE ENCLOSURE UNIT
ass
Section 10950 - 1
*+ SECTION 10950
AIR INFLATABLE ENCLOSURE UNIT
PART 1 GENERAL
e+e�
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A . Scope of Work :
1. Remove , relocate and reinstall a three-sided air
inflatable enclosure unit with bottom bolster unit
that is currently mounted at the M.R. I . corridor at
the Hospital. Note : This unit needs to be relocated
at the end of the project and the exact time for
relocation needs to be coordinated with the Hospital.
2. Furnish and install all new accessories , screws ,
bolts and ductwork that is necessary for the
installation because the existing items are
impractical to relocate.
1 .02 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Provide staging and scaffolding as required to complete
w. the work .
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 AIR INFLATABLE ENCLOSURE UNIT
(EXISTING UNIT)
A. The air inflatable enclosure unit shall be "Comfort-Seal"
as manufactured by Frommelt Industries , Inc . and shall
have the following characteristics :
1 . The air inflatable unit to be three sided.
2. The cover material shall consist of a specially
formulated color fire-retardant fabric for use with a
' mobile diagnostic trailer .
10950 - 1
am
so LOUVERS
Section 10850 - Page 3
on
Louvers to be furnished with 1/2" mesh , 0 . 063 diameter
wire intercrimp bird screen . Screening shall be
replaceable with extruded fans .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Take site dimensions affecting this work.
B. Ensure openings affecting this work are properly prepared
and that flashings are correctly located to divert
moisture to exterior .
3 .02 INSTALLATION
A. Install louvers in accordance with the manufacturer 's
installation instructions.
B. Coordinate opening size with Mechanical Subcontractor and
Simulated Masonry Subcontractor .
END OF SECTION
Aw
e�w
w.
10850 - 3
oil
LOUVERS
Section 10850 - Page 2
B. Provide 3-inch (31' ) sample of material with finish.
1 .06 PROTECTION
A. Protect louvers and finishes from damage during delivery
and installation .
B. Protect adjacent surfaces , finishes and materials from
damage during installation of louvers .
1 .07 STAGING AND SCAFFOLDING
A. Provide staging and scaffolding as required to complete
the work .
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Airline Products Company, Hagerstown, Maryland.
B. American Abrasive Metals Company, Irvington, New Jersey.
C . Construction Specialties, Inc. , Cranford, New Jersey.
D. Three manufacturers have been listed as acceptable for
this product . However, for the purposes of clarity, these
Specifications will list the detailed requirements of only
one product. The manufacturer whose product requirements
are to be used as a performance guide is Construction
Specialties , Inc. , Cranford , New Jersey.
E. Substitutions : Items of same function and performance are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01630.
2 .02 MATERIALS ••�
A. Metal Stationary Wall Louvers : Type 1 ; louvers shall be
4" deep louvers , Model 4115 by Construction Specialties ,
Inc . , Cranford, New Jersey, or equal . Louvers shall be
extruded aluminum horizontal line louvers with CIS Kynar
500 coating in a color selected by the Architect. Louvers
to be supplied with sills and anchorages . All blades to
be supported and lined with heavy gauge extruded aluminum
blade and mechanically secured to structural angles.
10850 - 2
on
LOUVERS
so
Section 10850 - Page 1
4W
SECTION 10850
LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Supply and install all required metal stationary wall
louvers for the mechanical work as shown on the Contract
Drawings . Coordinate location with the Mechanical
Subcontractor and the Simulated Masonry Subcontractor .
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04100 : Masonry - Masonry openings for louvers .
B. Section 07900: Joint Sealants - Caulking around louvers.
1 .03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated, Galvanized by the
Hot-Dip Process , Lock-Forming Quality.
B. ASTM B209 - Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars , Rods , Wire,
Shapes and Tubes.
1 .04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340.
B. Clearly indicate , in large scale , profile of frame and
installation details , relation to adjacent construction ,
flashing, blade configuration , connections to duct work,
bird and insect screens , and percentage of free air
opening.
1 .05 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01340.
10850 - 1
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS , CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
Section 10522 - Page 4
aw
as
C. Securely fasten fire extinguisher cabinets to structure ,
square and plumb , to comply with manufacturer ' s go
instructions .
No
END OF SECTION
10522 - 4
so
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS , CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
Section 10522 - Page 3
Industries "Cosmopolitan 1035", fully-recessed, with 1-1/4
inch wide flat trim, or equal.
B. Construction: Manufacturer ' s standard enameled steel box,
with stainless steel trim, frame and door ; hardware to
suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
Weld all joints and grind smooth . Miter and weld
perimeter door frames.
ws
C . Trim Style : Fabricate trim in one piece with corners
mitered , welded and ground smooth . Trim shall be one-
piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
' overlapping surrounding wall. surface with exposed 1-1/4
inch face . Trim shall have square edges. Metal trim
shall be stainless steel with No. 4 finish.
D. Door Material and Construction : Manufacturer ' s standard
door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with
cabinet types and trim styles selected. Door shall be
stainless steel with No . 4 finish , hollow steel door
construction with tubular stiles and rails. Door style
shall be fully glazed design with 1/4-inch thick clear
acrylic.
E. Door Hardware : Provide manufacturer ' s standard door
operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim
style and door material and style indicated. Provide door
pull and roller catch . Provide continuous type hinge
permitting door to open 180 degrees.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install items included in this Section in locations and at
mounting heights indicated.
1. Provide fire extinguishers and cabinets , to be located
where directed by Architect. General Contractor to
notify the Architect when he desires the locations of
the cabinets at the jobsite prior to the construction
of the walls.
B. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets
as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim
and to comply with manufacturer ' s instructions.
10522 - 3
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS , CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
Section 10522 - Page 2
«w
extinguisher cabinets , include roughing-in dimensions and
details showing mounting methods , relationships to N
surrounding construction, door hardware , cabinet type and
materials , trim style and door construction, style and
materials . Steel cabinet color to be red. Lettering on
clear acrylic. .w
1 . 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
am
A. Provide portable fire extinguishers , cabinets and
accessories by one manufacturer , unless otherwise
acceptable to Architect . .w
B. UL - Listed Products : Provide new portable fire
extinguishers which are UL-listed and bear UL "Listing
Mark" for type, rating and classification of extinguisher am
indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS A„
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products on
of one of the following, or equal :
1. J.L . Industries ..
2. Larsen 's Manufacturing Company
no
3. Muckle Manufacturing, Division of Technico, Inc.
4. Or Equal
ow
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet
which comply with requirements of governing authorities.
B. Multi-Purpose Extinguishers : Fire extinguishers shall be M,
multi-purpose dry chemical type (4A-60BC-FE) , UL-rated, 10
pound nominal capacity, in enameled steel container , for
Class A, Class B and Class C fires .
so
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be equal to J. L. ..«
10522 - 2
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS , CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
Section 10522 - Page 1
SECTION 10522
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS , CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
�w
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS IN OTHER PARTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL
A. Refer to Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
including subdivisions thereof , for requirements and
conditions which may affect the work of this Section .
1 .02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Definition : "Fire Extinguishers" in this Section refers
to units which can be hand-carried.
B. Type of products in this Section include:
1 . Fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
1 .03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements
B. Section 06000 : Rough Carpentry
eu�e C. Section 09260: Gypsum Wallboard Systems
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 , manufacturer 's
technical data and installation instructions for all
portable fire extinguishers required. For fire
lip
10522 - 1
on
TOILET ACCESSORIES
Section 10500 - Page 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all toilet accessories selected in accordance with
the manufacturer ' s recommendations and installation
instructions.
B. Provide wood blocking where required for all new toilet
accessories .
END OF SECTION
..
w
4W
10500 - 2
01111
40
TOILET ACCESSORIES
Section 10500 - Page 1
SECTION 10500
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
ww 1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish all toilet accessories for this project under an
Allowance. See Section 01020, Allowances , for a complete
description of the Allowance . The Contractor will ,
however , be required to install all toilet accessories
shown on the Contract Drawings under the Base Bid.
ow
B. For the purpose of the Allowance, the following items are
considered toilet accessories :
1. Grab Bars
2. Toilet Paper Dispensers
3. Paper Towel Dispensers
4. Coat Hooks
5. Towel Bars
6. Soap Dispensers
7 . Mirrors
PART 2 MATERIALS
(Not Used)
10500 - 1
CORNER GUARDS
Section 10260 - Page 1
SECTION 10260
CORNER GUARDS
w
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install corner guards as shown in Contract
Drawing locations .
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 09111 : Metal Stud Framing.
C. Section 09260: Gypsum Wallboard Systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS
A. Corner Guards : Model FS-20 corner guard, floor to ceiling
length ; "Acrovyn " as manufactured by Construction
Specialties , Inc. , Muncy, Pennsylvania, Telephone : (717)
546-5941 . Color to be selected by the Architect .
PART 3 EXECUTION
ws 3 .01 INSTALLATION - MATERIALS
A. Install as per manufacturer ' s requirements using proper
a� materials , products and tools for installation.
END OF SECTION
10260 - 1
ON
PAINTING
am
Section 09900 - Page 6
am
go
3 .06 PAINTING AND FINISH SCHEDULE (EXTERIOR)
so
A. Miscellaneous Metal , Metal Fabrications, Cast Iron and
Steel Items :
1. Paint Finish: 1 Coat Primer no
2. Paint Finish: 2 Coats Oil Base Enamel
END OF SECTION
w
09900 - 6
OR
PAINTING
ewr�
Section 09900 - Page 5
C. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean to
the satisfaction of the Architect.
3 .05 PAINTING AND FINISH SCHEDULE ( INTERIOR)
A. Miscellaneous Metal , Metal Fabrication , Cast Iron and
Steel , Cabinets, Control Panels , Doors , Frames , Ornamental
Iron, Partitions , Posts, Rails:
1. Paint Finish: Touch-Up Shop Applied Primer
2. Paint Finish: 1 Coat Enamel Undercoater
3. Paint Finish: 2 Coats Enamel , Semi-Gloss Finish
B. Galvanized Metal (Ducts, Pipes, Doors, Frames) :
1. Paint Finish: 1 Coat Metal Primer
2. Paint Finish: 2 Coats Latex Enamel, Semi-Gloss
Finish
C . Wood Doors and Trim (New) :
1. Paint Finish: 1 Coat Wood Stain
2. Paint Finish: 3 Coats Satin Finish Varnish With a
Steel Wool Rubbing Between Each Coat
of Varnish
D. Drywall or Plaster:
` 1. Paint Finish: 1 Coat Drywall Primer
2. Paint Finish: 2 Coats Sprayed-On Vinyl Paint System
(Basics Series) by Polomyx. Exact
colors to be selected by the Architect.
Note: A minimum of three (3) colors
will be used for this project.
E. All colors to be selected by the Architect.
09900 - 5
MW
PAINTING
.w
Section 09900 - Page 4
D. Remove surface contamination and oils from zinc-coated
surfaces and prepare for priming in accordance with metal
manufacturer 's recommendations.
E. Remove grease, rust , scale, dirt and dust from steel and
iron surfaces . Where heavy coatings of scale are evident ,
remove by wire brushing , sandblasting or any other
necessary method. Ensure steel surfaces are satisfactory
before paint finishing.
F. Clean unprimed steel surfaces by washing with solvent.
Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring
weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime
surfaces to indicate defects , if any. Paint after defects
have been remedied.
G. Sand and scrape shop-primed steel surfaces to remove loose
primer and rust . Feather out edges to make touch-up
patches inconspicuous . Clean surfaces with solvent .
Prime bare steel surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATIONS «.0
A. Apply each coat at proper consistency.
B. Each coat of paint is to be slightly darker than
preceeding coat unless otherwise approved by Architect.
C. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. �•
D. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not
sufficiently dry.
E. Allow each coat of finish to dry before following coat is
applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer.
3.04 CLEANING
A. As work proceeds and upon completion , promptly remove
paint where spilled, splashed or spattered.
B. During progress of work , keep premises free from an
unnecessary accumulation of tools , equipment , surplus
materials and debris.
am
09900 - 4
..
OR
w
PAINTING
Section 09900 - Page 3
go
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Paint and Enamel : Type and brand listed herein or
equivalent products approved by Architect .
B. Paint Accessory Materials (Linseed oil , shellac ,
turpentine and other materials not specifically indicated
herein but required to achieve the finishes specified) :
Of high quality and approved manufacturer.
C. Paints : Ready-mixed except field-catalysed coatings.
Pigments fully ground maintaining a soft paste
consistency , capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a complete homogeneous mixture.
D. Paints to have ood flowing -and g brushing properties and be
capable of drying or curing free of steaks or sags .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSPECTION
A. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted prior
to commencement of work . Report in writing to Architect
any condition that may potentially affect proper
! " application. Do not commence until such defects have been
corrected.
„ B. Correct defects and deficiencies in surfaces which may
adversely affect work of this Section.
40
3 .02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Remove surface contamination from aluminum surfaces
requiring a paint finish by steam, high pressure water or
we solvent washing . Apply etching primer or acid etch .
Apply paint immediately if acid etching.
no B. Remove contamination from copper surfaces requiring finish
by steam, high pressure water or solvent washing. Apply
vinyl etch primer or acid etch. Apply paint immediately
after etching.
C. Remove surface contamination and oils from galvanized
surfaces and wash with solvent . Apply coat of etching-
type primer.
09900 - 3
an
am
PAINTING
an
Section 09900 - Page 2
1 .04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
w�
A. Ensure surface temperature or the surrounding air
temperature is above 40 degrees F . before applying
finishes. Minimum application temperatures for exterior
work is 50 degrees F.
B. Provide minimum 15 foot candles of lighting on surfaces to
be finished. +
1 .05 PROTECTION
A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage.
Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable
protection.
B. Furnish sufficient drop cloths , shields and protective
equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling
surfaces not being painted and, in particular, surfaces ..
within storage and preparation area.
C. Place cotton waste , cloths and material which may
constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and
remove daily from site.
1 .06 RELATED WORK ..
A. Section 08111 : Hollow Metal Frames.
B. Section 16001: Electrical General Provisions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Sherwin Williams Company, Cleveland, Ohio. �•
B. Polomyx Sprayed-On Painting System.
C. Or Equal. «w
D. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01630.
09900 - 2
PAINTING
Section 09900 - Page 1
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor , materials , service , equipment and
transportation required to complete all painting
indicated, as specified herein, or both.
B. See Drawings for locations and details.
1 .02 MOCK UP
A. Before proceeding with paint application , finish one
complete surface of each color scheme required, clearly
indicating selected colors, finish texture, materials and
workmanship.
B. If approved, sample area will serve as a minimum standard
* for work throughout work.
1 .03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver paint materials in sealed , original , labeled
containers bearing manufacturer ' s name , type of paint ,
brand name, color designation and instructions for mixing
and/or reducing.
B. Provide adequate storage facilities . Store paint
wr materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F.
in well-ventilated areas.
C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and
spontaneous combustions .
09900 - 1
qft
TROWELED-ON SURFACING SYSTEM
Section 09826 - Page 3
of
C. Install expansion joints in the Dryvit System as per the
ON manufacturer 's requirements.
ow.
END OF SECTION
wo
AI114
�w
09826 - 3
so
TROWELED-ON SURFACING SYSTEM
so
Section 09826 - Page 2
MR
an
PART 2 PRODUCTS
so
2.01 GENERAL
A. All components of this system shall be obtained from the as
manufacturer, Dryvit Systems , Inc. , West Warwick , Rhode
Island, or equal.
2.02 MATERIALS am
A. Primus/Adhesive: An acrylic-based product manufactured by
Dryvit System, Inc. „f,
B. Hardcoat: An acrylic-based product manufactured by Dryvit
System, Inc.
C. Dryvit Insulation Board: Nominal 1.0 pcf aged polystyrene
meeting the specifications of Dryvit System , Inc .
Insulation thickness to be as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
D. Panzer Mesh: A balanced, treated, heavy glass fiber mesh ,r,
supplied by Dryvit System, Inc.
E. Dryvit Finish: Sandblast finish texture type with color
to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer ' s ow
standard colors.
F. Sealant System: Tremco "Dymeric" with Primer #1. am
G. Cement: Type I , I-11 or II Portland cement meeting ASTM
C150.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install Dryvit System in complete accordance with the
manufacturer 's installation instructions.
B. Clean adjacent areas of any excess material after
completion of work.
09826 - 2
s
TROWELED-ON SURFACING SYSTEM
Section 09826 - Page 1
SECTION 09826
TROWELED-ON SURFACING SYSTEM
70
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all required materials for the
installation of a troweled-on surfacing system, complete
with reinforcing and back-up insulation board for exterior
soffits and canopies.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer 's literature, color selection charts
and samples in conformance with Section 01340.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original, unopened packages with
labels intact.
B. Store materials protected from the weather and at
temperatures not less than 40 degrees F.
1 .04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Ambient air temperature shall be 40 degrees F. or greater
and rising at the time of installation of the material and
on shall remain at 40 degrees F. for at least 24 hours after
application.
40 1 .05 LIMITED WARRANTY
A. Furnish Owner with manufacturer 's three (3) year limited
warranty.
09826 -- 1
am
CARPET
ON
Section 09690 - Page 6
am
E. All damage to surfaces caused by carpet manufacturer shall
be repaired to the Architect ' s satisfaction without
additional cost to the Owner.
,W
END OF SECTION 4W
w.
seas
. ww
09690 - 6
CARPET
Section 09690 - Page 5
qft
W,
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Carpeting , materials, installation and workmanship shall
be inspected by the Architect before the Carpet
Subcontractor leaves the job site.
Wk
B. Make written request for inspection at least ten (10) days
before completion of carpet installation work.
C. Correct all defects in materials and workmanship listed by
the Architect during inspection.
D. Approval of carpet installation will be given only after
all such defects have been corrected.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Make all necessary repairs including lifting and complete
re- laying of any area , if required , after initial
installation.
B. The time of such work shall be when directed by the Owner ,
but within one ( 1) year after completion of initial
installation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove from
the job site all rubbish, debris , wrapping paper and waste
caused by the work of this Section.
B. Remove all loose threads with sharp scissors and clean
carpet with a strong vacuum cleaner.
C. Remove all spots or stains on carpeting with a spot
remover approved and recommended by carpet manufacturer .
All carpeting which has spots or stains that cannot be
removed to the satisfaction of Architect shall be removed
and replaced with new carpeting.
D. Owner shall view all carpet scraps and be allowed to
retain any he chooses to keep for future maintenance work .
All carpet scraps not to be retained by Owner shall be
removed from the job site.
w
09690 - 5
CARPET
Section 09690 - Page 4
1. All selvage edges must be removed. All cuts must be
made of a 15 degree angle with surface yarns extending
outward over backing material.
2. A bead of non-flammable latex carpet seam adhesive
shall be applied to all cut edges before seams are
made.
D. Lay carpet on floors with run of the pile in same ..
direction of anticipated traffic. Do not change run of
pile in any one room or from one room to next.
E. Carpet shall be cemented directly to the subfloor with an
all-purpose adhesive. A "V"-notched trowel with notches
1/8-inch wide , 1/8-inch deep and spaced 1/16-inch apart
shall be used to spread the adhesive.
F. Contact cement shall be used a minimum of 6-inches at the
perimeter of all areas and a minimum of 6-inches on both
sides of all cross seams . All carpet areas shall be
rolled with a 30-pound carpet roller to insure proper
contact of carpet to the subfloor and to remove all
bubbles and buckles . *"
G. Entire carpet installation shall be laid tight and flat,
and present a uniform appearance . Ensure monolithic ..
color, pattern and texture match within any one area.
H. Carpeting shall run under all open-bottom items, such as ..
heating convectors, and shall be installed tight against
columns , walls and cabinets so that all portions of the
floor area are covered with carpet. Carpeting shall be
installed around all floor outlets and similar
obstructions . Show on shop drawings all obstructions
which affect carpet installation. Report to Architect
obstructions subsequently installed.
I . Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other
floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight
to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided,
butt ends tight and flush.
4M
Ow
09690 - 4
am
•
CARPET
ON
Section 09690 - Page 3
g
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Examine all surfaces to receive carpet and report to the
Contractor any surfaces that are not acceptable. Carpet
installation shall not start until such defects are
corrected . Start of carpet work shall constitute
acceptance of substrate.
1. Ensure that floors are clean of solvents , oils ,
grease , paint , plaster and other substances which
we would be detrimental to the proper performance of
adhesive and carpet .
40 2. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and
irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to
acidity and alkalinity.
' 3. Use an approved cement:itious filler to patch cracks,
small holes and for leveling.
4. Remove existing finishes and dispose of debris.
B. Vacuum substrates of all dust and dirt before installing
carpet and accessories .
3.02 INSTALLATION OF CARPET
A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Architect ' s approval.
Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there
is no visible variation between dye lots.
B. Cut carpet , where required, in a manner to allow proper
seam and pattern match . Ensure cuts .are straight and true
and unfrayed. Where possible and practical, locate seams
in areas of least amount of traffic. Perpendicular seams
at doorways will not be permitted.
C. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract
from the appearance of the carpet installation and
decrease its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight,
not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
t
09690 .- 3
CARPET
wr
Section 09690 - Page 2
B. The carpet installer shall measure all areas to receive
carpet and verify in the field their actual dimensions.
Installer shall be responsible for proper installation and
fitting of all carpeting and accessories.
C. Field measure all work which must be accurately fitted to
the construction , including wall-to-wall dimensions ,
offsets , door locations and details , and all other
installed items. *
D. Evaluate leaving or removing existing finishes to be
covered, producing finished, accepted results.
1 .05 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Furnish an additional five (5) square
yards of the required amount of carpeting and deliver it
to the Owner for future maintenance work. Cut pieces and
scraps resulting from installation work shall not be
included as part of this carpet material furnished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CARPET
A. Carpet to be a (Lees commercial carpet) , Pebbleweave II
Series , as manufactured by Lees Commercial Carpets . Color
to be selected by the Architect.
2.02 CARPET ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives shall be non-flammable , quick-release type
carpet adhesive as recommended by carpet manufacturer to
suit application and expected service.
B. Edge strips shall be equal to "Snap-Down Standard Edge" .�
(Stock No . 33B ) for direct cement-down carpet , as
manufactured by Mercer Plastics Company, Inc. Color shall
be selected by Architect.
C. Tape for seaming carpet shall be pin tape.
.�e
09690 - 2
ON
CARPET
Section 09690 - Page 1
SECTION 09690
CARPET
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS IN OTHER PARTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL
A. Refer to Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
including subdivision thereof , for requirements and
conditions which may affect the work of this Section.
1.02 WORK INCLUDES
A. Scope of Work for Base Bid:
1. Prepare surfaces to receive carpeting.
2. Furnish and install carpet on floor surfaces where
indicated using a direct cement-down method.
3. Provide edge strips where carpeting terminates at
other flooring finishes.
4. Furnish and install carpet base on floor surfaces
where indicated on the Contract Drawings.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements
1 .04 FIELD INSPECTION
A. Ensure sufficient lighting is provided for the
�,. installation and cleaning of carpet.
09690 - 1
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09650 - Page 5
B. Fit joints tight and vertical . Maintain minimum
measurement of 18" between joints. Use premolded sections
for external and internal corners and exposed ends.
C. Install straight and level to a maximum variation of plus
or minus 1/8" over 10 feet .
D. Install topset cove base after resilient flooring is
•� installed.
3.06 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP
" A. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 48 hours after
installation .
B. Remove excess adhesive from floor , base and wall surfaces
without damage.
C. Clean, seal and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance
with manufacturer 's recommendations.
D. Protect resilient flooring from damage by other trades or
Contractors.
END OF SECTION
�w
ww
09650 - 5
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09650 - Page 4
B. Clean substrate . Spread cement evenly and in quantity
recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion over entire
area of installation . Spread only enough adhesive to
permit installation of flooring before initial set.
C. Set flooring in place; press with heavy roller to ensure
full adhesion.
D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building
lines.
E. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door
openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar .
F. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where
flooring terminates .
G. Scribe flooring to walls, cabinets and other appurtenances
to produce tight joints .
H. Provide and install base on all cabinets detailed on
Drawings.
3 .04 INSTALLATION - BASE
A. Apply base to walls , columns , pilasters , casework and +.
other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is
required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable
with preformed corner units , or fabricated from base
materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly
bond base to substrate throughout length of each piece ,
with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical
surfaces.
1. On masonry surfaces or other. similar irregular
substrates , fill voids along top edge of resilient
wall base with manufacturer ' s recommended adhesive
filler material .
09650 - 4
.0.
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09650 - Page 3
D. Cleaning : Thoroughly clean the new flooring prior to
waxing.
E. Sealer and Wax : Type recommended by resilient flooring
material manufacturer for material type and location.
Contractor to install two
( 2) coats of floor wax at
completion of project .
** PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE AND SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS
A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum
variation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet .
B. Ensure concrete floors are dry (maximum 7 percent moisture
content) and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization or
dusting.
C. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F. air temperature at flooring
installation area for three ( 3) days prior to, during and
for 24 hours after installation.
D. Store flooring materials in area of application. Allow
three (3) days for material to reach equal temperature as
area.
3.02 LEVELING
A. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks,
joints , holes and other defects with subfloor filler to
level to maximum variation of 1/16-inch in 10 feet.
B. Clean floor and apply; trowel and float filler to leave
smooth, flat , hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler
is cured.
C. Prepare existing floors or removed existing surfaces to
receive new tile.
3 .03 INSTALLATION - SHEET VINYL
A. Install sheet vinyl according to the manufacturer ' s
installation instructions only after the existing and new
concrete slabs have been thoroughly prepared, leveled and
w patched as necessary.
09650 - 3
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09650 - Page 2
B. Submit 12-inch by 12-inch (12" x 1211) sized samples of
each flooring material , color and pattern selected.
C. Submit 12-inch ( 1211 ) long samples of base, and reducer
strips selected. 4" x 6" high.
1 .04 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Deliver twenty (20) square feet of each color and pattern ""
of floor material required for project , for maintenance
use.
B. Clearly identify each box and roll.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
..R
2.01 FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS
A. Vinyl Tile : Armstrong vinyl tile, (Stonetex Series) as
manufactured by Armstrong Tile Company. Tile to be 12" x
12 " x 1/8 " gauge . Architect to select colors from
manufacturer ' s color chart. Note: There will be three
(3) separate tile colors selected for this project. Each
room will have two (2) colors of tile in a pattern layout.
The Architect will furnish the Contractor with a pattern
layout for each room during construction . Contractor
shall include the cost of a pattern in each room in their
bid.
no
2 .02 ACCESSORIES/ADHESIVES/SEALERS
A. Vinyl base shall be ribbed-backed, 0. 125-inch gauge thick,
rounded top. All bases shall be 4" high; see Room Finish
Schedule. Vinyl base for use with resilient flooring or
where sealed concrete is scheduled shall be topset type w
cove base . Provide vinyl base where indicated on Room
Finish Schedule . See Sheets I-1 and Sheet I-2 of the
Contract Drawings.
B. Sub-Floor Filler : White premix latex; mix with water to
produce cementitious paste.
C. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; of types recommended
by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific material.
09650 - 2
am
RESILIENT FLOORING
OR
Section 09650 - Page 1
OR
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
O
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials and accessories,
as specified herein , for the complete installation of
40 resilient flooring including, but not limited to:
1. Preparation of substrate surfaces, new and existing.
2. Application of vinyl tile where shown on the Contract
Drawings.
3. Application of vinyl base , 4" , including base on
cabinetwork kickstops, and accessories as indicated on
Drawings.
4. Cleaning and waxing of all new flooring.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements.
B. Section 02052: Asbestos Removal
C. Section 03001 : Concrete Finishing of concrete floor
surfaces to receive resilient flooring.
D. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry
1.03 SUBMITTALS
„ A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340 , Submittals ,
manufacturer ' s product data for resilient flooring and all
accessories including installation instructions.
09650 .- 1
go
M Nil
so
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09510 - Page 3
an
H. Do not install fixtures so that main runners and cross
runners will be eccentrically loaded . Where fixture
installation would produce rotation of runners, provide
stabilizers .
I . Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and
vertical surfaces, using maximum lengths , straight , true
to line and level . Miter corners. Provide edge moldings
at junctions with other ceiling finishes .
J. Fit acoustic lay-in panels in place, free from damaged
edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function . Fit border units neatly against abutting
surfaces .
K. Install lay-in panels level , in uniform plane and free
from twist , warp and dent.
3.02 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the ceiling
systems and replace any part which is damaged or faulty.
3.03 EXTRA TILE
A. Furnish the Hospital with four ( 4) cartons of extra
replacement tile for each type of tile specified for the
project.
w
END OF SECTION
e�w
09510 - 3
so
wo
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09510 - Page 2
B. Type 2 Ceiling Areas : Armstrong non-perforated ML Fire
Guard, 2 ' x 2 ' x 5/8" lay-in ceiling tiles (Model No. 874)
as manufactured by Armstrong Company , Lancaster ,
Pennsylvania.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with
manufacturer 's recommendations to produce finished ceiling .�
true to lines and levels and free from warped, soiled or
damaged grid or lay-in panels.
B. Install ceiling systems in a manner capable of supporting
all superimposed loads , with maximum permissible
deflection of 1/360 of span and maximum surface deviation
of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. .�
C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete .
Coordinate the location of hangers with other work . „
Ensure that lay-out of hangers and carrying channels are
located to accommodate fittings and units of equipment
which are to be placed after the installation of ceiling
grid systems.
D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing
of hangers, reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and
related carrying channels as required to span the required
distance.
E. Hang independently of walls , columns, ducts, pipes and
conduit . Where carrying members are spliced , avoid
visible displacement of the longitudinal axis or face
plane of adjacent members. 4W
F. Center ceiling systems on room axis, leaving equal border
pieces.
G. Do not support fixtures from or on main runners or cross
runners . In such cases , support fixture loads by
supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each
corner, or support the fixtures independently.
09510 - 2
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09510 - Page 1
�r
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. All work related to this Section will be completed by the
Acoustical Ceilings Contractor .
B. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and all of the General Requirements
Sections will be part of this Section's scope of work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Type I Ceiling Areas : Armstrong Minatone Grid System,
manufactured by Armstrong Company , Lancaster ,
Pennsylvania.
B. Type 2 Ceiling Areas: Armstrong ML Fire Guard Grid
System, manufactured by Armstrong Company, Lancaster ,
Pennsylvania.
" C. Accessories: Furring clips, splices and edge moldings.
D. Carrying Channels and Hangers : Size and type to suit
application and to rigidly secure the complete acoustic
unit ceiling system with maximum deflection of 1/360.
„ 2.02 LAY-IN PANELS
A. Type I Ceiling Areas: Armstrong Minatone, 2 ' x 2 ' x 5/8”
tegular lay-in ceiling tiles (Model No . 704 ) as
manufactured by Armstrong Company , Lancaster ,
Pennsylvania.
09510 - 1
OF
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SHEATHING
Section 09261 - Page 2
2.02 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A.
A. Provide gypsum wallboard fasteners in accordance with
manufacturer 's recommendations .
PART 3 EXECUTION .�.
3 .01 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance wtih recommendations of
the manufacturer.
B. Remove and re-do defective work.
END OF SECTION ...
wits
w
r
09261 - 2
an
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SHEATHING
Section 09261 - Page 1
SECTION 09261
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SHEATHING
eu.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Supply and install all required gypsum board sheathing as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform gypsum wallboard systems in accordance with
recommendations of the manufacturer and GA 216 unless
otherwise specified in this Section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. GA 216 - Recommended specifications for the application
+ + and finishing of gypsum board.
B. ASTM C79.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Provide gypsum sheathing materials in accordance with
recommendations of ASTM C79.
w.
B. Gypsum Sheathing : 5/8-inch thick , maximum permissible
lengths; ends square cut, square edges. See Drawings for
location. Gypsum sheathing to contain an asphalt emulsion
core and a water -repellent surface on the paper .
Sheathing to be Georgia Pacific (Gypsum Sheathing) , or
equal.
09261 - 1
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS
Section 09260 - Page 3
D. Place corner beads at external corners . Use longest
practical lengths. Place edge trim where gypsum board
abuts dissimilar materials.
E. Tape, apply three (3) coats joint compound, fill and sand
exposed joints, edges , corners , openings and fusing to
produce surface ready to receive surface finishes .
Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces to that camber is
maximum 1/32-inch.
F. Remove and re-do defective work.
G. Provide acceptable flush finish over existing walls to
allow acceptance of paint .
END OF SECTION
ow
on
09260 - 3
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS
Section 09260 - Page 2
1.05 RELATED WORK
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements .
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Provide gypsum wallboard materials in accordance with
recommendations of GA 216.
B. Fire-Rated Gypsum Board : UL-rated, 5/8-inch thick ,
maximum permissible lengths , ends square cut , tapered
edges. See Drawings for locations.
C. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board : 5/8" thick , maximum
permissible lengths , ends square cut, tapered edges (to be
used in all Toilet Rooms) .
2.02 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with GA
216.
B. Corner Beads : Metal , except as noted on Contract
Drawings .
C. Edge Trim: Bead-X "L" trim by Bead-X Company or equal. „
D. Reinforcing Tape , Joint Compound , Adhesive , Water ,
Fasteners : GA 216.
ow
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION ..
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with recommendations of
GA 216. ..
B. Erect single layer fire-rated gypsum board vertically,
with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing.
C. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or
framing . Use screws when fastening gypsum board to
framing.
09260 - 2
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS
Section 09260 - Page 1
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope of Work for Base Bid:
1. Supply and install all gypsum board wall surfaces and
miscellaneous surfaces as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
00
2. Taped and sanded joint treatment, prepared for finish.
3. Patch all joints at different connecting materials in
existing remodeled areas.
4. Install lead-lined drywall being furnished under
Section 13090 - Radiation Protection . See Section
13090 for installation instructions.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform gypsum wallboard systems in accordance with
recommendations of ASTM C754 and GA 216 unless otherwise
specified in this Section.
1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Fire-Rated Partitions: Provide rated enclosures below and
above ceilings in corridors, vestibules , transoms , duct
passage enclosures and walls as required by Codes, both
sides of studs.
1 .04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. GA 216 - Recommended specifications for the application
and finishing of gypsum board.
09260 - 1
on
METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM
No
Section 09111 - Page 3
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Install members to provide surface plane with maximum
variation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet in any direction
END OF SECTION
4"
0"
09111 - 3
.M
METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM
Section 09111 - Page 2
B. Interior Wall Metal Runners: 20 gage of same material and
finish as studs .
C. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material and finish
as studs , thickness to suit purpose.
D. Exterior Wall Metal Studs and Runners: 16 gage, rolled
steel, galvanized, channel-shaped, in sizes shown on the
Contract Drawings , punched for utility access, by Chicago
Metallic, or equal.
E. Fasteners: GA 203.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A. Secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches o.c. Align to
configuration required. ..
B. Install studs vertically at 16 inches o.c. , and not more
than 2 inches from abutting construction , each side of .�
openings and at corners.
C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate
studs at spacing of wall studs .
D. Brace stud framing system and make rigid.
E. Coordinate erection of studs with installation of service
utilities. Align stud web openings.
F. Coordinate installation of anchors , blocking and
mechanical work to be placed in or behind stud framing.
G. Stud splicing not permissible. ..
H. Maintain clearance under structural building members to
avoid deflection transfer to non-loadbearing studs.
I . Blocking: Secure wood blocking to studs.
09111 - 2
METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM
Section 09111 - Page 1
SECTION 09111
METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install all top and bottom runners, studs,
internal bracing, and blocking for all metal stud work as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100 - Carpentry Work.
1 .03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C645 - Non-Loadbearing Steel Studs, Runners and Rigid
Furring Channels.
B. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to
Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or
Water-Resistant Backing Board.
C. GA 203 - Installation of Screw-Type Steel Framing Members
to Receive Gypsum Board.
1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform the work in accordance with ASTM C754.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Interior Wall Metal Studs: Non-loadbearing rolled steel,
galvanized, channel shaped, in sizes shown on the Contract
Drawings, 20 gage, punched for utility access, type super
C studs by Chicago Metallic.
09111 - 1
me
GLAZING
Section 08800 - Page 3
B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene; '70-90 durometer hardness. .
C. Accessories as condition requires.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 SETTING METHOD
ON
A. Set glass to conform with recommendations of window
manufacturer .
3.02 CLEANING
A. Immediately remove droppings from finished surfaces .
Remove labels after work is completed.
B. Remove all packaging and shipping materials from site.
C. Remove labels and markings from glass.
END OF SECTION
08800 - 3
ow
GLAZING
am
Section 08800 - Page 2
MR
F. Sigma #65-7-2 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
1 .04 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY wW
A. Provide written guarantee in accordance with Section
01740.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company
2. Libbey-Owens-Ford Company
3. Mississippi Glass Company ...
B. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01630.
2 .02 GLASS
A. Thermopane Glass: One inch (1" ) thick total unit, clear,
tempered both lites.
B. Wire Glass: 1/4" wire glass. so
C. Safety Glass: 1/4" safety glass.
2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS "`
A. Sealant : Single component acrylics; see Joint Sealant
Section for specifications for this product. No
B. Provide recommended sealants to be compatible to frames
provided by window and frame manufacturer . an
2.04 GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl type; NAAMM #SS-lB-68, with
integral spacing device.
08800 - 2
No
GLAZING
Section 08800 - Page 1
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements
B. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry
C. Section 08110: Standard Steel Doors
1 .02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor , materials , services , equipment and
transportation required to complete all glass and glazing
work indicated on Drawings, as specified herein, or both.
B. See Drawings for location and details.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS DD-G-451C - Glass , Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat, for
Glazing, Mirrors and Other Use) .
B. FS DD-G- 1403B - Glass , Plate (Float ) , Sheet (Heat
Strengthened and Fully Tempered) .
C. FS TT-S-230A - Sealing Compound, Synthetic Rubber Base,
Single Component, Chemical Curing for Caulking, Sealing
and Glazing in Building Construction.
D. FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Base (For
Caulking and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures) .
E. NAAMM #SS-1B- 68 - Nonskinning Resilient Preformed
Compounds - Tapes , Ribbons , Beads with Release Paper .
08800 - 1
am
HARDWARE
.w
Section 08700 - Page 2
D. Field visit to verify existing conditions, door types,
material thickness and jambs for replacement of knobs and
related hardware necessary for the operation of the door .
1.04 KEYING
..e
A. All locksets shall be master-keyed in accordance with the
Owner ' s requirements and shall match the existing
building 's keying system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HARDWARE
A. The hardware products for this project will match the
Hospital 's existing standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware under Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry
and in accordance with the manufacturer 's instructions.
B. Contractor to cooperate and work with all other
Contractors who will be working on the project.
C. Remove all existing doorknobs , handles , latches and
related opening hardware . Replace with new stainless ..
satin finish door knobs to fit door conditions. Patch all
holes when required. Provide cover plates when required.
END OF SECTION
08700 - 2
HARDWARE
e�w
Section 08700 - Page 1
w.
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope of Work for Base Bid:
1. All door hardware for this project will be furnished
under an Allowance (see Section 01020 - Allowances ) .
Hardware to be installed under the Finish Carpentry
Section, Section 06200 •- Finish Carpentry.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements
B. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry
C. Section 08110: Standard Steel Doors
D. Section 08111 : Hollow Metal Frames
E. Section 08210: Wood Doors
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with
Section 01340.
B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of
hardware.
C . Supply templates to door and frame manufacturers to enable
proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut-outs for
hardware.
08700 - 1
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM
Section 08520 - Page 3
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN
e►
A. Clean glass of window units promptly after installation.
Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than four (4)
days prior to date scheduled for Final Inspection (of each
area of project ) . Comply with glass manufacturer ' s
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance.
B. Remove and replace glass which is broken , chipped, or
cracked , abraded or damaged in other ways during
construction period, including natural causes, accidents
and vandalism.
C. Institute protection required through remainder of
construction period to ensure that window units will be
without damage or deterioration (other than normal
weathering) at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
�w
..w
08520 - 3
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM
Section 08520 - Page 2
1.05 SCAFFOLDING AND MECHANICAL HOISTING
A. Provide all required scaffolding and mechanical hoisting
for all work under this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS . A
2.01 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM
A. Type : Kawneer Series (NUCORE, heavy mullion - 1-3/411 )
storefront system by Kawneer with anodized coating .
Color: Dark bronze anodized aluminum.
B. Finish : Anodized coating in accordance with Aluminum
Association Standard (AA-M12C22A42/44) .
C. Glass: One inch (1" ) insulated glass unit with tempered
glass both lites.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer ' s instructions and
recommendations for installation of window units',
hardware, accessories and other components of work.
B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or
rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor ,
securely in place . Refer to Section 07900 , Joint
Sealants, for joint fillers and sealants required for
installation.
C. Field measure all existing openings prior to shipping.
D. Coordinate with other trades to provide jamb, sill and *�
head conditions to prevent leaks. This includes gaskets
by window installer.
E. Water test units for acceptance.
F. Remove all debris from site related to existing window
removal and installation of new units.
08520 - 2
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM
Section 08520 - Page 1
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM
w
s�
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnishing and installing aluminum storefront systems with
insulating clear tempered glass both lites where shown on
the Contract Drawings.
1 .02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements.
B. Section 06100 : Rough Carpentry
C. Section 06200: Finish Carpentry
D. Section 07900: Joint Sealants
e . 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with manufacturer ' s specifications ,
standard details and recommendations for each type of
window unit required.
1. Include manufacturer ' s certified test report
! * indicating that each type of unit has been tested and
complies with requirements for performance as
specified.
OW
1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards : Comply with General Requirements of the
Industry Standards for commercial window units.
08520 - 1
ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS
iwr
Section 08360 - Page 4
B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall
construction and building framing without distortion or *�*
stress.
C. Fit and align door assembly including hardware, level and
plumb, to provide smooth operation.
D. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete
wiring from disconnect to unit components. A*!
E. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials
at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07900.
F. Install perimeter trim and closures.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Wo
A. Adjust door assembly.
OR
B. Clean doors, frames and glass.
C. Remove labels and visible markings. MP
END OF SECTION
08360 - 4
MW
ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS
Section 08360 - Page 3
2 .02 COMPONENTS
A. Panels : Flush steel construction of slats with
polystyrene insulation core . Slats to have a prime
painted finish. Slat type to be Type (IF) , 20 gauge.
B. Guides: Steel angles , minimum 3/16" thickness. Guides to
have a painted finish; Architect to select color.
C. Hood : Prime-painted, 24 gauge , hot-dipped galvanized
steel.
D. Stop Lock Safety Bearing: Safety feature to prevent door
falling in the event of damage to a drive chain , motor
operator or pipe shaft.
E. Electric Operator: NEMA Type "C" motor; Model (RGJH) ; 1/2
horsepower as manufactured by Raynor Door Company, or
equal. Unit to have an adjustable safety friction clutch .
Motor to be 115 volt , 1-phase motor . Motor to be mounted
in a standard (Type B) bracket plate-mount vertical in
front of the hood.
F. Safety Edge : At bottom of door panel, full width; wired
to reverse door upon striking object.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and
opening dimensions and tolerances are within limits .
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
surfaces.
3 .02 OPERATION
A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door
unit.
3 .03 INSTALLATION
A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with
manufacturer 's instructions .
08360 •- 3
ow
ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS
Section 08360 - Page 2
1 .04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Panels: Insulated panels, flush design.
B. Motorized lift design with associated track and hardware.
C. Electric operation on 120 volt service to 1/2 HP motor
manually operable in case of power failure. (Contractor
to install unit with door assembly.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in installing overhead
doors with three (3) years documented experience.
1.06 SUBMITTALS ""•
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
Section 01340. •.
B. Indicate opening dimensions and tolerances , component
construction, connections and details, anchorage methods
and spacing , hardware and locations and installation
details.
C. Submit manufacturer ' s installation instructions under
provisions of Section 01340.
1 .07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA .„
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of
Section 01730.
B. Include data for motor and transmission , shaft and
gearing, lubrication frequency, control adjustments and
spare part sources.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT AND MANUFACTURER
A. Insulated rolling service door by Raynor Garage Doors, 186
Stafford Street , Springfield, Massachusetts 01104.
08360 - 2
ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS
Section 08360 - Page 1
SECTION 08360
ROLLING OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install an electrically-operated overhead
rolling door as shown in the Contract Drawings.
B. Furnish and install all operating hardware and supports.
C. Furnish and install motor operator with controls and
control wiring.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 05120: Structural Steel
B. Section 06100 : Wood Blocking - Rough wood blocking for
door opening.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot Dip Process , Structural (Physical) Quality.
B. ANSI/ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot Dip Process , Commercial Quality.
C. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
D. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars , Rods, Wire,
Shapes and Tubes.
E. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer 's Association.
�r
08360 1
ow
WOOD DOORS
Section 08210 - Page 2
A. Weyerhaeuser Company, Tacoma, Washington.
B. U. S . Plywood Corporation, New York, New York.
C. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01630.
2.02 DOOR TYPE
A. Flush faced type wood doors.
2.03 DOORS
A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick, solid core wood
staved construction with red oak species face veneers ,
custom grade, face veneers, plain slice.
2 .04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate standard type doors in accordance with
requirements of AWI Quality Standards.
B. Provide doors with minimum 3/4 inch thick edge strips, of
wood species to match face veneers .
C. Provide astragals for double doors. Provide in accordance "
with UL requirements.
D. Bevel strike edge of single acting doors 1/8 inch in two
inches.
E. Prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700
for hardware requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
..
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood doors plumb and square, with maximum diagonal ON
distortion of 1/16 inch. Install hardware in accordance
with requirements of Section 08700.
.w
END OF SECTION
08210 - 2 ,
WOOD DOORS
Section 08210 - Page 1
SECTION 08210
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
" 1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Supply and install standard type wood doors, with flush
faces.
B. Install door hardware , as described in the Hardware
Section - Section 08700.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08111 - Hollow Metal Frames
B. Section 08700 - Hardware
C. Section 09900 - Painting
1 .03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute.
1.04 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. Provide written guarantee in accordance with Section
01740.
B. Guarantee : Provide for replacing including cost of
rehanging and refinishing at no cost to Owner , wood doors
exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including
warp and delamination within minimum period of five years
from date of substantial completion of work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
e• 08210 - 1
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
Section 08111 - Page 3
�r
D. Provide jamb anchors; SDI-100. Weld floor jamb anchors in
place.
E. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer
paint .
PART 3 EXECUTION
" 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install door frames in accordance with SDI-100 except as
amended in this Section.
B. Install hollow metal frames plumb and square in correct
locations indicated on Drawings , and with a maximum
diagonal distortion of 1/16" . Ensure frames are securely
and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction.
■r C. Provide clear caulk joint, for exterior frame/masonry
joints.
D. Repair dents , scrapes and miscellaneous markings for
painters ' preparation.
E. Warped, damaged or unacceptable frames will be removed and
!*" replaced at Architect 's discretion by the Contractor and
related Subcontractors.
END OF SECTION
ew
ww
„ 08111 - 3
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
Section 08111 - Page 2
1 .04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with
Section 01340.
B. Indicate general construction, configurations, jointing
methods , reinforcements , anchorage methods , hardware
locations and installation details. Doors to be 1-3/4"
thick . •_
PART 2 PRODUCTS
w®
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Type manufactured by Overly Manufacturing Company ,
Steelcraft Manufacturing, or Dusing and Hunt . ""
B. Or Equal.
C. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01630.
2.02 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Materials and Fabrication: SDI-100 except as amended.
B. Types : Welded frame construction, 16 gauge. Exterior
door frames to have an integral thermal break.
C. Door Bumpers : Manufacturer ' s standard resilient type,
removable for replacement.
D. Provide metal stops for hollow metal sidelight and window
frames. Interior metal window frames 16 gauge.
2.03 FABRICATION ..
A. Weld all corner connections and grind smooth.
B. Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware.
C. Place minimum of three (3) single bumpers on single door
frames. Space equally along strike jambs.
08111 - 2 ,,.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
Section 08111 - Page 1
SECTION 08111
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope of Work for Base Bid:
1. Furnish and install steel hollow metal door frames for
interior and exterior applications with all related
accessories as shown on the Contract Drawings.
2. Furnish and install steel hollow metal window frames
for interior locations as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements.
B. Section 08110: Standard Steel Doors.
C. Section 08210: Wood Doors.
D. Section 08700: Hardware.
E. Section 09900: Painting.
1 .03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel
Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute.
B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual
(FM) , as applicable to fire-rated hollow metal door
frames.
08111 - 1
STANDARD STEEL DOORS
Section 08110 - Page 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
e
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with SDI-100 , except as
amended in this Section.
B. Install hollow metal doors plumb and square , and with
00 maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16-inch . Install
hardware in accordance with the requirements of Section
08700.
C. Contractor to cooperate and work with all other
Contractors working on the project .
No D. Contractor to field-verify all existing openings prior to
fabrication.
E. Prepare for final painting under Section 09900 - Painting.
END OF SECTION
08110 - 3
am
STANDARD STEEL DOORS
MW
Section 08110 - Page 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Overly Manufacturing Company
2. Steelcraft Manufacturing a"
3. Dusing and Hunt, Inc.
oft
4. Or Equal
B. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01630.
2.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Materials and Fabrication: SDI-100, except as amended in
this Section.
4W
B. Types: Type I , standard duty, 1-3/4-inch, insulated with
a rigid insulation core.
2.03 FABRICATION dw
A. Mechanically interlock longitudinal seams of honeycomb
core-type doors. Leave seams invisible, or weld, fill and .•
grind smooth.
B. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to me
Section 08700 for hardware requirements.
C. Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and
grind smooth uniform finish. ON
D. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of
primer. no
08110 - 2
STANDARD STEEL DOORS
Section 08110 - Page 1
SECTION 08110
STANDARD STEEL DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope of Work for Base Bid:
1. Furnish and install insulated steel hollow metal
exterior doors with flush faces as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements.
B. Section 08111: Hollow Metal Frames.
C. Section 08700: Hardware.
D. Section 08800: Glazing.
E. Section 09900: Painting.
1 .03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel
Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute.
B. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual
(FM) as applicable to fire-rated hollow metal doors.
1 .04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.� A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with
Section 01340.
B. Indicate general construction, configurations, jointing
methods , reinforcements.
,�„ 08110 - 1
go
JOINT SEALANTS w�
Section 07900 - Page 4
E. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges .
Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within
recommended temperature ranges.
F. Form joints concave, free of air pockets, embedded matter,
ridges and sags.
END OF SECTION •
wr
07900 - 4
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07900 - Page 3
w
degrees C . ; Shore "A" hardness of maximum 55 ' non-
* staining , non-bleeding , non-sagging; colors selected by
Architect . Mono-Lasto-Meric manufactured by Tremco
Manufacturing Company. This sealant is to be used at all
exterior window and door frames.
2.03 PREPARATORY MATERIALS
A. Primers : Non-staining types recommended by sealant
manufacturer to suit applications .
B. Joint Cleaners : Non-corrosive types recommended by
sealant manufacturer ' compatible with joint-forming
materials.
40 C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1056, round closed cell polyethylene
foam rod; oversized 30% to 50% .
�w D. Bond Breaker : Pressure-sensitive type recommended by
sealant manufacturer to suit application.
�. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Maintain workmanship of the highest quality in accordance
with the best trade practice . Perform all work in
accordance with ASTM C804.
B. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer ' s
recommendations. Remove any loose materials and other
foreign matter which might :impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Ensure that joint-forming materials are compatible with
sealant.
D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve
required width/depth ratios. Use joint filler to achieve
required joint depths to allow sealants to perform
properly. Use bond breakers where required.
+ 07900 - 3
■.
JOINT SEALANTS
so
Section 07900 - Page 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Thiokol Chemical Corporation
B. Tremco Manufacturing Company
C. W.R. Grace Company *
2.02 SEALANTS MATERIALS
A. Sealant : Polysulphide base , two components , chemical
curing ; non-sagging type for application in vertical
joints , uniform, homogeneous and free from lumps, skins
and coarse particles when mixed ; capable of being
continuously immersed in water, withstand movement up to
25% of joint width and satisfactorily handled throughout a
temperature range of four degrees to 27 degrees C. ; Shore
"A" hardness of minimum 15 and maximum 50; non-staining
and non-bleeding; colors selected by Architect. "Tremco
Lasto-Meric" manufactured by Tremco Corporation . This
sealant is to be used as an exterior sealant for expansion
joints.
B. Sealant : Terpolymer base , multi -component , chemical
curing, non-sagging for application in vertical joints ;
uniform, homogenous and free from lumps, skins and coarse
particles when mixed ; capable of being continuously
immersed in water, withstand movement up to 25% of joint
width and satisfactorily handled throughout a temperature
range of four to 27 degrees C. ; Shore "A" hardness of
minimum 15 and maximum 50; non-staining and non-bleeding;
colors selected by Architect, manufactured by W.R. Grace
Company. This sealant is to be used as an interior
sealant.
C. Sealant : Acrylic base , one component, solvent curing;
capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstand
movement up to 7 . 5% of joint width and satisfactorily
handled throughout a temperature range of four to 27
07900 - 2 �,,
JOINT SEALANTS
Section 07900 - Page 1
�r
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive sealant materials.
B. Furnish and install sealant and backing materials, and
exterior joints between dissimilar materials .
1 .02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C804 - Recommended Practices for Use of Solvent
Release Type Sealants.
B. ASTM D1056 - Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials
Sponge or Expanded Rubber .
C. ASTM D1565 - Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials
- Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open Cell Foam) .
D. FS SS-S-156 - Sealer: Cold Application Emulsion Type for
Joints in Concrete.
w
E. FS TT-S- 227B - Sealing Compound , Rubber Base , Two
Component .
F. FS TT-S-00230C - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type ,
Single Component.
! " G. FS TT-S-001543A - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base.
1.03 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data in accordance with Section 01340.
B. Submit manufacturer ' s descriptive literature, including
surface preparation and installation instructions .
07900 - 1
ALUMINUM SKYLIGHT WINDOWS
Section 07820 - Page 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS .r
A. Wasco Skylight Company, Sanford, Maine.
2.02 SKYLIGHT WINDOW TYPE
A. Type: Wasco (Model LP) low profile system with anodized **�
aluminum frame, fixed skylights with double dome safety
plastic glazing . Both lites to be clear plastic .
Skylight unit to have an integral condensation tray which
is drained to the exterior. Size of skylight is shown on
the Contract Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION M„
A. Install skylights in accordance with manufacturer ' s
recommendations to achieve weathertight and freely
operating installation.
B. Maintain alignment with adjacent work. Secure assembly to
framed openings without distortion.
C. Place insulation to ship spaces around unit perimeter, to
maintain continuity of building thermal barrier.
D. Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter
of assembly in accordance with Section 07900.
E. Remove all labels from plastic glazing.
END OF SECTION
07820 - 2
No
ALUMINUM SKYLIGHT WINDOWS
Section 07820 - Page 1
■w
SECTION 07820
ALUMINUM SKYLIGHT WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
ee■ 1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install factory assembled aluminum skylight
windows , flashings, glazing and all required accessories.
B. Anchorages , attachments and shims.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01710 - Final Cleaning : Glazing glass and
go skylight window unit.
1 .03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with
Section 01340.
B. Indicate pertinent dimensioning , general construction,
component connections and locations, anchorage methods and
locations , hardware locations and installation details.
1 .04 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS
A. Deliver windows in manufacturer 's packaging complete with
installation instructions.
1 .05 WARRANTY
on A. Provide glass manufacturer ' s warranty for the skylight
unit .
V
07820 - 1
an
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
w.
Section 07600 - Page 2
B. Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashings and
asphalt felt flashings .
C. Lock seams and end joints. Fit flashings tight in place.
Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes ,
and lines accurate to profiles.
D. Install continuous clip flashing at all cap and wall
counterflashing.
END OF SECTION
.se
07600 - 2
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
Section 07600 - Page 1
w
SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
ww
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install roof and miscellaneous flashings as
40 shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.02 EXISTING CONDITIONS/PROTECTION
40 A. Exercise care when working - on or about roof surfaces to
avoid damaging or puncturing membrane or flexible
flashings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
e.r
2 .01 SHEET METALS
A. All flashings and flashing accessories shall be
constructed of 16 oz. lead-coated copper.
ws
2.02 FABRICATIONS
," A. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from
distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or
performance.
B. Form sections in 8 foot lengths . Make allowances for
expansion at joints .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Secure flashings in place using specified type fasteners.
Use exposed fasteners in locations approved by Architect .
When using exposed fasteners , they are to be of same
finish 'as flashings.
, . 07600 - 1
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
eAs
Section 07531 - 5
D. All f1 ash ings shall be mechanically fastened at the top
under appropriate counterflashing with approved fasteners
as shown in illustrated details.
3 .07 OVERNIGHT SEAL
A. Shall be made by pourable sealer approved in writing by
the roofing manufacturer . To protect the insulation from
inclement weather at the end of the day ' s work , the
membrane is extended beyond the insulation and set into
the approved overnight seal material.
3.08 BALLAST REQUIREMENTS
A. Ballast shall be sufficient to provide protection against
Pa wind uplift . Weight per square foot shall be ten pounds
per square foot. Ballast shall be washed gravel 3/4" to
1-1/2" in diameter with no sharp edges or surfaces .
a
END OF SECTION
±�w
�► 07531 - 5
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
Section 07531 - 4
B. Precautions: The surface of the insulation must not be
ruptured by mechanically fastening.
3 .04 ATTACHMENT OF MEMBRANE AND INSULATION
A. Membrane is to be attached with Hi-Tuff screws and plates.
Membrane must be mechanically fastened 12 inches o.c. at
all perimeters and at any penetration that has a dimension
of 24 inches or greater . At perimeters , the roofing
membrane must be brought over the outside edge and
terminate 12 inches o.c.
3.05 LAP SPLICE
A. Membrane shall be overlapped 2" as marked on top side of
membrane and hot air welded.
B. Hot Air Welding : Recommended method of seaming , an
automatic hot air welder. Hand held welders are not an
acceptable method for field seaming. Upon completion of
hot air welded laps, the membrane must be allowed to cool.
The entire lap must be inspected and the necessary repairs
made. Laps will be caulked by applying Hi-Tuff seam caulk
from a squeeze bottle. Seams are to be caulked at the end
of each work day.
3.06 FLASHING
A. Perimeter , curb, vents , expansion joints , drains, and
other details shall be flashed in accordance with the
manufacturer 's recommendations.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to both underside of flashing and
surface to which it is to be bonded , at a rate of
approximately one (1) gallon per 60 square feet of surface
coverage . �•+
C. Bonding adhesive shall be allowed to dry to finger touch
where it does not string or stick to a dry finger . Roll
the flashing into the dry adhesive. Care must be taken to
assure that the flashing does not bridge where there is
any change of direction.
07531 - 4 e..
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
Section 07531 - 3
E. Thinner and Cleaner : As recommended by adhesive
rw manufacturer compatible with sheet roofing.
F. Caulking: As recommended by membrane manufacturer .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that drains, sleeves and curbs which pass through
surfaces to receive roofing are rigidly installed.
a,.
B. Verify flatness and tight joints of insulation and that
insulation has been installed by fastening approved by the
roofing manufacturer.
op
C. Verify that surfaces are free of cracks , depressions ,
waves , or projections which may be detrimental to
successful installation. Remove foreign materials.
D. Starting work of this Section means acceptance of
substrate and site conditions .
3 .02 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive
roofing.
B. Seal cracks and joints with recommended material and
sealant . Use proper depth-width ratio as recommended by
the sealant manufacturer.
C. Clean surfaces of foreign matter detrimental to
installation of roofing.
3.03 INSULATION
A. Manufacturer ' s Instructions : In regard to attachment ,
compatibility, etc. , the manufacturer 's instructions or
specifications shall determine the suitability for an
application.
.. 07531 - 3
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
we
Section 07531 - 2
temperature is below 40 degrees F.
B. Do not apply roofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty or deck
surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide under provisions of the General Conditions a ten-
year warranty for materials and insulation.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The "Hi-Tuff/EP" membrane system shall only be applied by
a roofing contractor approved and licensed by J. P. Stevens
and Co. , Inc. Contractor shall furnish evidence of this
to the Architect and the Owner prior to the starting of
any roofing work. Contractor shall also list all projects
that he has completed for J.P. Stevens in the last five
years . *�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
w.
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Membrane : . 060 inch thick , Hi -Tuff/EP, special order ,
scrim reinforced, bolack, manufactured by J. P. Stevens &
Co. , conforming to the following criteria:
Properties Test Results
Hardness ASTM D2240 80 + 5
Tear Strength ASTM D751 90 Pounds
Low Temp. Bend ASTM D2136 -40 Deg. C Pass
B. Flashing: Same material as membrane with adhesive joint
adhesion, except at vent stacks , pipes and corners use .
Unreinforced 0.055 inch thick uncured white hypalon.
C. Surface Conditioner: Compatible with membrane.
D. Adhesive and Sealant : As recommended by membrane .w
manufacturer .
07531 - 2 �*
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
Section 07531 - 1
SECTION 07531
ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Supply and install a ballasted elastomeric Hi-Tuff/EP
(ethylene propylene) sheet roofing system complete with
all flashings and sealants.
B. Counterflashing and sealing sheet at terminations.
C. Flashing of all roof fans, plumbing vents and other roof
penetrations .
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 07212: Rigid Insulation.
C. Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
! " 1.03 REFERENCES
A. D2136 - Low Temp Bending
B. ASTM D2240 - Hardness
C. ASTM D751 - Tear Strength
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
!+A A. Submit manufacturer ' s instructions and samples under
provisions of Section 01340 for surface conditioner
compatibility, elastic flashing, joint cover sheet, and
joint crack sealants , with temperature range for
application of roofing membrane.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply roofing during inclement weather or when air
,.�, 07531 - 1
CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING
Section 07255 - Page 4
F. Verify ducts , piping , equipment , or other items which
would interfere with application of fireproofing are not �*
positioned until fireproofing work is completed.
3 .02 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by
overspray fallout and dusting.
w
B. Close off and seal ductwork in areas where fireproofing is
being applied.
C. Protect applied sprayed fireproofing from damage.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Mix and apply fireproofing in strict accordance with
manufacturer 's instructions.
B. Apply primer adhesive and fireproofing to thicknesses
shown on the Contract Drawings to achieve rating with as
many passes necessary to cover with monolithic blanket of
uniform density and texture.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove excess material, overspray, drippings and debris.
B. Remove fireproofing from materials and surfaces not •
specifically required to be fireproofed.
END OF SECTION
07255 - 4
wA
CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING
Section 07255 - Page 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Spray Fireproofing : Factory mixed
cementitious material blended for uniform texture ; non-
fibrous materials; conforming to following requirements :
1. Bond Strength : 300 psi when set and dry.
2. Bond Impact : ASTM E72 , no cracking , flaking or
delamination.
3. Dry Density: Minimum average density of 17 lb/cu ft
with minimum individual density of 15 lb/cu ft .
4. Compressive Strength: To exceed 70 psi .
B. Primer Adhesive : Type recommended by fireproofing
material manufacturer.
C. Water: Clean, potable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Fill voids and cracks in substrate, remove projections and
level where sprayed fireproofing is exposed to view as
finish material.
B. Clean substrate of dirt , dust , grease , oil , loose
material, or other matter which may affect bond of sprayed
fireproofing.
C. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond , by
scraping, brushing, scrubbing, or sand blasting.
D. Confirm compatibility of surfaces to receive fireproofing
materials.
E. Verify clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items
required to penetrate fireproofing are in place before
application.
07255 - 3
tAF
CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING
go
Section 07255 - Page 2
B. Comply with project requirements as to thickness, density
of application, and fire rating.
C. Examine installation within one hour of application to
determine variance due to shrinkage , temperature and
humidity.
D. Where shrinkage and cracking are evident, adjust mixture
and method of application as necessary.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
AJR
A. Submit manufacturer ' s instructions for bonding and
applying sprayed fireproofing under provisions of Section
01340.
B. Provide certificate stating that fireproofing has been
completed in full accordance with requirements to provide
necessary fire resistance ratings. A.
C. Provide three copies of certified test reports of:
1. Bond Strength of Fireproofing: ASTM E72, tested to
provide minimum bond strength twenty times weight of
fireproofing materials.
.A
2. Fire test reports of fireproofing application to
substrate materials similar to project conditions .
3. Reports from reputable independent testing agencies,
of product proposed for use , which indicate
conformance to ASTM #119 and ASTM E84. ..�
1 .06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide ventilation in areas to receive fireproofing
during and 24 hours after application, to dry material and
maintain non-toxic , unpolluted working area . Provide
temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating MV
air.
B. Do not apply spray fireproofing when temperature of
substrate material and surrounding air is below 40 degrees
F .
07255 - 2
CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING
Section 07255 - Page 1
SECTION 07255
CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install cementitious fireproofing spray
applied to new steel structural members as shown in the
Contract Drawings, to provide two-hour rated fireproofed
assembly for the roof members and a three-hour rating on
all columns and exterior structural metal studs , in
accordance with the Underwriters ' Laboratory Test
Assembly as shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. UL Fire Hazard Classification.
wrr
B. ASTM E72 - Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for
Building Construction.
C. ASTM E84 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
w. D. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials .
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fireproofing Applicator : Shall be acceptable to
cementitious fireproofing material manufacturer.
B. Regulatory Requirements : Conform to applicable UL
standard for fire resistance ratings.
1.04 MOCK UP
A. Apply sample section to representative substrates on site.
Confirm requirements of fire ratings and finish texture.
07255 - 1
am
FIBROUS BATT INSULATION
Section 07213. 01 - Page 2
2 .02 MATERIALS
.r,
A. Batt Insulation: 5-1/2" (R-19) preformed fiberglass wool
batt with metal foil facing.
B. Sound Batt Insulation: 3-1/2" unfaced fiberglass sound
batt insulation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install batt insulation in exterior walls without visible
gaps or separations .
B. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts
free of ripped backs or edges .
C. Screw sheet metal battens , 22 gauge x 1-1/2" wide, over "*
vinyl edges at each vertical stud location to secure the
batt insulation in place.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer 's
recommendations. Install after mechanical and electrical
services within walls have been installed.
B. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind
mechanical and electrical services within the plane of
insulation. Leave no gaps or voids.
END OF SECTION
07213.01 - 2
40
FIBROUS BATT INSULATION
Section 07213. 01 - Page 1
SECTION 07213.01
FIBROUS BATT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install batt insulation in all exterior wall
construction as shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Furnish and install sound batt insulation in all interior
wall construction as shown on the Contract Drawings .
1 .02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS L-P-375C (2) - Plastic Film, Flexible, Vinyl-Chloride.
B. FS HH-I-521E - Insulation Blankets, Thermal Fiber, for
Ambient Temperatures.
1.03 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS
A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's packaging, complete
with installation instructions .
1 .04 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09260: Gypsum Wallboard Systems
B. Section 09111 : Metal Stud Framing System
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Owens Corning
B. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01630.
07213.01 - 1
�r►
RIGID INSULATION
Section 07212 - Page 3
D. Use insulation free of broken or chipped edges , with face
membrane undamaged.
E. Contractor to assure positive drainage on all roofs. No
ponding will be permitted.
F. Assure maximum 1/8" difference in level between adjacent
pieces of insulation . Assure tight fit between adjacent
pieces. Otherwise, remove and reinstall.
G. Verify substrate and adjacent materials and insulation
boards are dry and ready to receive insulation and
adhesive.
3 .02 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in a manner approved by the membrane
manufacturer and capable of receiving FM I-90 approval.
B. All sheets of insulation, no matter how small , are to have
four (4) fasteners per sheet minimum.
C. Four foot by eight foot (4 ' x 8 ' ) sheets to have the
number of fasteners required by the roofing membrane
w
manufacturer.
D. Contractor to accurately follow the tapered roof
insulation layout .
END OF SECTION
07212 - 3
RIGID INSULATION
Section 07212 - Page 2
1 .05 MANUFACTURER' S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit manufacturer ' s installation instructions in
accordance with Section 01340.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 PRODUCT DATA AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit manufacturer 's installation instructions for review
by Architect .
B. Submit shop drawings for the tapered roof insulation
layout for approval by the Architect .
2 .02 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Rigid Insulation: (ENRGY 1) polyisocyanurate foam tapered
insulation as manufactured by N . R . G. Barriers , Inc . ,
Sanford, Maine, or equal . The rigid insulation shall have
a minimum thickness of two inches ( 2" ) at the lowest
points of the roof as shown on the Contract Drawings. ..�
Facing material to have an integral vapor barrier .
B. Foundation Insulation : Two inch (2") thick closed cell
"styrofoam" polystyrene insulation as manufactured by Dow
Chemical , or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install rigid insulation to maintain continuous and
complete thermal protection for building spaces and
elements.
MR
B. Ensure surfaces which are to receive rigid insulation are
clean, free of deleterious matter and are sufficiently
level to allow proper installation and pitch of so
insulation .
C. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces . Butt edges ,M,
and ends tight . Fit insulation tight against mechanical ,
electrical and other items which protrude through plane of
insulation . Where more than one layer is used to achieve
desired thickness , lap joints. ow
07212 - 2
ow
go
RIGID INSULATION
on
Section 07212 - Page 1
uw
SECTION 07212
RIGID INSULATION
w
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope of Work for Base Bid:
1. Clean metal deck roof surfaces to receive insulation
with an integral vapor adhesive barrier .
2. Furnish and install all required rigid insulation for
new roof areas .
3. Furnish and install all required rigid perimeter
insulation for all new foundation and slab insulation .
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements .
B. Section 07531 : Elastomeric Sheet Roofing
1 .03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Materials of this Section shall provide a continuous
thermal barrier at building enclosure.
1 .04 REFERENCES
A. Federal Specification HH-1-530A and HH-11972 Gen. 1 and 2,
Class 1 (Polyisocyanurate) .
.■
07212 - 1
a�w
CABINETWORK
Section 06410 - Page 5
using appropriate angles and anchorages.
E. Counter-sink semi-concealed anchorage devices used to wall
mount components, and conceal with solid plugs of species
to match surrounding surfaces.
,�. F. Carefully scribe cabinetwork which is against other
building materials , leaving gaps of 1/32 inch maximum. Do
not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
G. Install and adjust cabinet hardware to ensure smooth and
correct operation.
END OF SECTION
06410 - 5
CABINETWORK
Section 06410 - Page 4
countertops .
F. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when
unavoidable. Arrange neatly.
G. Shop assemble cabinetwork and finish carpentry items for
delivery to site in sizes easily handled and to ensure
passage through building openings.
H. Contractor to field verify all cabinet dimensions and
locations prior to fabrication to assure desired fit and
tolerances.
2.07 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. Apply
wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and
leave ready to receive site applied finishes.
B. Seal internal surfaces of cabinets with one coat of ..
shellac. Brush apply only.
C . Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures , inserts ,
appliances , outlet boxes and other fixtures and fittings .
Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions . Seal
contact surfaces of cutouts .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure cabinetwork and finish carpentry items in
place rigid, plumb and square.
B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments for wall mounted
components .
C. Use threaded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and
secure adjoining cabinet units , counter tops and elements
of the nurses' station.
D. Permanently fix cabinet and counter bases to flooring
06410 - 4 r.,.
00
CABINETWORK
Section 06410 - Page 3
to be selected by the Architect .
B. Plastic Laminate Backing : High pressure paper base
laminate without a decorative finish; minimum 1/16" thick.
C. Adhesive : FS MMM-A-130A type recommended by millwork
manufacturer to suit application .
D. Wood Trim: Red Oak clear grade, kiln dried.
2 .04 ACCESSORIES
A. Nails : Size and type to suit application.
B. Bolts , Nuts , Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Of size and
type to suit application.
2.05 CABINET HARDWARE
A. As shown on the cabinet details in the drawings .
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cabinetwork and finish carpentry items in
accordance with recommendations of AWI and to extent
indicated in Schedule of Items located at the end of this
Section . When necessary to cut and f it on site , make
material with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim
q" for scribing and site cutting.
B. Fit shelves , doors and exposed edges with 1/16" thick
go plastic laminate edging. Use full length pieces only.
C. Cabinetwork Doors: Minimum 3/4 inch thick and of type of
construction indicated in Schedule.
so
D. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets
consistent with manufactured sizes. Corners and joints :
hairline . Locate counter butt joints at least two feet
from sink cut-outs .
E. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same
finish and pattern . Mechanically fasten splashbacks to
06410 - 3
CABINETWORK
Section 06410 - Page 2
B. Indicate materials and wood species, component profiles,
fastenings , jointing, details , finishes and accessories to
large scale.
1 .05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
WN
A. Do not deliver cabinetwork items until site conditions are
adequate to receive the work . Protect items from weather
while in transit. *■
B. Store indoors , in ventilated areas with constant but
minimum temperature of 16 degrees C. and maximum relative
humidity of 25% to 55%.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
no
2.01 LUMBER PRODUCTS
A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20 ; and graded in accordance with the
requirements of AWI ; maximum moisture content of 6% for
interior work.
B. Hardwood Lumber : PS 58 ; FS MM-L-736C ; graded in
accordance with the requirements of AWI ; maximum moisture
content of 6% . Species to be red oak, clear grade, for
all exposed hardwood trim. *�
2 .02 SHEET MATERIALS
A. A/C Plywood: Graded in accordance with AWI ; core material
of lumber .
B. Wood Particleboard : Composed of wood chips , made with
water resistant adhesive of grade to suit application ;
sanded faces.
C. Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, standard
grade.
2.03 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate : General purpose type. Minimum 1/16
inches thick; manufactured by Wilson Art or equal . Colors
06410 - 2
0
CABINETWORK
�w
Section 06410 - Page 1
SECTION 06410
CABINETWORK
fox
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all required shop fabricated
cabinetwork and accessories , complete with hardware and
accessories , shop finished where required.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
wt
A. Perform carpentry work in accordance with the
recommendations of the Millwork Standards of the
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) .
1 .03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
OR A. FS L-P-508F - Plastic Sheet, Laminated, Decorative, and
Non-Decorative.
B. FS MMM-A-130A - Adhesive, Contact .
C. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
E. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
F. PS 58 - Basic Hardwood.
G. NFPA National Forest Products Association - National
Design Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its
Fastening.
1 .04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings of all cabinetry for approval by the
Architect in accordance with Section 01340.
06410 - 1
No
we
FINISH CARPENTRY
Section 06200 - Page 3
we
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Perform finish carpentry work to extent indicated in this
Section . Construction nin oi
j g and pre-finishing of
assemblies and items as established by AWI .
!"^ B. Set and secure materials and components in place, rigid,
plumb and square.
C. Ensure all mechanical and electrical items affecting this
Section of work are properly placed, complete , and have
been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of
installation .
D. Prime paint contact surfaces of items and assemblies in
contact with cementitious materials .
�w
E. Install hardware, fixtures and accessories.
F. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer ' s
recommendations .
G. Patch to match existing conditions and materials.
3.02 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. Apply
wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and
leave ready to receive site-applied finish. On items to
receive transparent finishes , use wood filler which
matches surrounding surfaces, and of types recommended for
applied finishes .
END OF SECTION
06200 - 3
an
FINISH CARPENTRY
Section 06200 - Page 2
D. Toilet Accessories: Section 10800.
E. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements .
1 .03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS MM-L-736C - Lumber, Hardwood.
B . PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
C . PS 58 - Basic Hardwood.
1 .04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Do not deliver finish carpentry items until site
conditions are adequate to receive the work of this
section. Protect materials from weather while in transit .
B. Store indoors , in ventilated areas with a constant but
minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. and maximum relative
humidity of 25 to 55 percent . General Contractor to
provide these conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCESSORIES
A. Nails : Size and type to suit application.
B. Bolts , Nuts , Washers , Lags , Pins and Screws: Size and
type to suit application . w,
C. Glue - Acceptable to both surfaces .
2 .02 HARDWARE
A. All door hardware will be supplied under an Allowance and
will be installed under this section .
06200 - 2 "'
FINISH CARPENTRY
Section 06200 - Page 1
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Scope of Work for Base Bid:
1. Install interior and exterior doors and frames that
are being furnished under other sections of the
Specifications where shown on the Contract Drawings.
2. Install finish door hardware for interior and exterior
doors that is being furnished under an Allowance in
OR this Contract.
3. Furnish and install new wood handrails as shown on the
No Contract Drawings.
4. Install toilet accessories being furnished under
another section of the Specifications.
go
5. Furnish and install wood window sill trim and other
trim shown on the Contract Drawings.
6. Install lead-lined doors and door frames being
furnished under Section 13090 - Radiation Protection.
7. Relocate existing lead-lined window frame and leaded
glass from the existing CAT Scan Room at the end of
the project. The relocation time is to be coordinated
with the Hospital.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A . Rough Carpentry: Section 06000.
B. Hardware: Section 08700.
C . Painting: Section 09900.
!! 06200 - 1
ROUGH CARPENTRY
e
Section 06100 - Page 3
3 .02 PLACEMENT
�w
A. Place miscellaneous blocking, furring, canting, nailing
strips , framing and sheathing . Place members true to
w lines and levels. Secure rigidly in place.
B. Space miscellaneous framing and furring at 16 inches on
center .
C. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible
lengths .
so
END OF SECTION
06100 - 3
r
ROUGH CARPENTRY
■
Section 06100 - Page 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
r
2 .01 LUMBER AND SHEET MATERIALS
A. Lumber : PS 20 , graded in accordance with NFPA Grading
Rules; Spruce species; standard grade , pressure-treated
with fire-retardant solution.
B. Lumber : PS 20 , graded in accordance with NFPA Grading
Rules; Spruce species; clear grade , pressure-treated with
preservative salts.
2 .02 ACCESSORY MATERIAL
A. Nails , Spikes and Staples : Galvanized for exterior
locations , high humidity locations , and treated wood ;
plain finish for other interior locations; size and type
to suit application .
B. Bolts , Nuts , Washers , Lags , Pins and Screws : Medium
carbon steel ; sized to suit application ; galvanized for
exterior locations , high humidity locations and treated
wood ; plain finish for other interior locations.
C. Fasteners : Expansion shield and lag bolt type for
anchorage to solid masonry or concrete bolts or power-
activated type for anchorage to steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Brush apply two ( 2) coats of preservative treatment on
site-sawn ends . Allow preservative to cure prior to
placing members.
06100 - 2 ''
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Section 06100 - Page 1
s
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
�w
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all required pressure-treated, fire-
retardant wood blocking in connection with the
installation of all door frames and other locations where
shown on the Contract Drawings .
B. Furnish and install all required pressure-treated blocking
with preservative salts for roof blocking and other
blocking where shown on the Contract Drawings.
C. Pressure-applied preservative or fire-retardant treatment
of wood members where required.
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09111: Metal Stud Framing System.
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber to have visible grade stamp of an agency certified
by NFPA.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. MIL-V-13518C (1) Wood Preservative: Tetrachlorophenol and
Pentachlorophenol , Surface Sealing Compound.
B. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood..
C. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
D. NFPA National Forest Products Association National Design
go Specification for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastening.
06100 - 1
,..
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
MR
Section 05999 - Page 4
am
B. Schedule of Metal Fabrications:
1. Ledge and shelf angles , channels , and plates not
attached to structural steel for support of metal
decking, and joists; prime paint finish.
2. Plates, channels and bolts for the installation of the
movable partitions .
3. Lintels: Prime paint finish.
4. Miscellaneous ferrous metal fabrications shown on the •�•
Contract Drawings .
5. Steel bollards with applied paint finish.
6. Elevator pit ladder with applied paint finish.
..r
END OF SECTION
.w
05999 - 4 '"
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Section 05999 - Page 3
G. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal
fabrications . Fabricate anchorage and related components
of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless
otherwise specified in schedule herein .
H. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust , scale , grease and
foreign matter prior to prime painting.
I . Prime paint items as scheduled . Do not shop prime
surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field
welding. Shop prime in two coats.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 ERECTION
A. Obtain Architect review prior to site cutting or making
adjustments which are not part of scheduled work .
B. Install items square and level , accurately fitted and free
from distortion or defects .
C. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing.
Keep work in alignment .
D. Replace items damaged in course of installation.
E. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS Dl. l.
F. After installation, touch up field welds and scratched and
damaged prime painted surfaces. Use a primer consistent
with shop coat.
G. Supply to appropriate sections, items requiring to be cast
into concrete or embedded in masonry , complete with
necessary setting templates.
3 .02 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS
A. Supply and install metal fabrications listed herein ,
complete with anchorage and attachments necessary for
installation.
so 05999 - 3
4WPAW
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
am
Section 05999 - Page 2
ow
D. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding
symbols; indicate net weld length .
1 .04 RELATED WORK
MW
A. Section 09900 - Painting
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel: ASTM A36.
B. Bolts , Nuts and Washers: High strength type recommended
for structural steel joints; ASTM A307, A325, and A490.
C . Welding Materials: Applicable AWS D1. 1, type required for
materials being welded.
D. Primer: Red lead FS TT-P-86 Type I .
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.
B. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly ..
secured.
C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for
delivery to site.
D. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent
finished surfaces .
E. Exposed mechanical fastenings : Flush countersunk screws
or bolts unobtrusively located consistent with design of
structure, except when specifically noted otherwise.
F . Make exposed joints flush butt type hairline joints where
mechanically fastened.
05999 - 2 �'
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
Section 05999 - Page 1
SECTION 05999
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Custom fabricate ferrous metal items 14 gage and heavier;
prime paint finish.
B. Refer to schedule located at end of this section.
1 .02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A307 - Low Carbon Steel externally and internally
threaded fasteners .
C. ASTM A325 - High strength bolts for structural steel
joints including suitable nuts and plain hardened washers .
D. ASTM A490 - Quenched and tempered alloy steel bolts for
structural steel joints .
E. AWI D1. 1 - Structural Welding Code.
F. FS TT-P-86 - Paint, red-lead base, ready mixed.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings and metal fabrications in accordance
with Section 01340.
B. Indicate profiles , sizes , connection attachments ,
reinforcing, anchorage , size and type of fasteners and
accessories.
C. Include erection drawings , elevations and details where
applicable.
05999 - 1
METAL DECKING
Section 05300 - Page 3
B. Allow minimum 1- 1/2 inch bearing when supported by
structural steel .
C. Mechanically fasten male/female side laps at maximum 24
inches on center.
D. Mechanically fasten male/female at ends and intermediate
supports with 3/4 inch fusion welds at maximum 12 inches
on center .
E. Install strip closures and angle flashings as required to
close openings between deck and walls and openings.
F. Immediately after installation , touch up welds, burned
areas and damaged spots with prime paint . Use type of
primer recommended for galvanized surfaces consistent with
shop coat .
END OF SECTION
05300 - 3
am
METAL DECKING
MR
Section 05300 - Page 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Sheet Steel: Grade A and B structural quality; ASTM A446, ...
with minimum 1 . 25 oz./sq. ft . galvanized coating for roof
decking.
B. Bearing Plates and Angles: Of type ASTM A36 steel.
C. Welding Materials: Applicable AWS D1. 1 type required for
materials being welded.
2 .02 DECKING AND RELATED ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Decking : Minimum 22 gage sheet steel ; Grade B ;
triple span; 1-1/2 inch deep profiles, galvanized , Lok-
Floor galvanized metal deck by United Steel Deck, Inc. , or
equal .
B. Floor Decking : Minimum 22 gage sheet steel; Grade B-LOK
triple span; 1-1/2" deep profiles , galvanized, LOK-Floor
galvanized metal deck by United Steel Deck , Inc . , or
equal .
C. Closure Strips , Flashings , Cover Plates and Related
Accessories : Minimum 22 gage sheet steel ; of required
profiles and sizes.
2 .03 FABRICATION
A . Fabricate metal decking as recommended by the Steel Deck
Institute . Fabricate to accommodate maximum working
stress of 20, 000 psi and maximum deflection of 1/240 of
span. Decking shall be fabricated to allow a lapped joint
of two (2) inches minimum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal decking as recommended by the SDI . Properly
align and level on structural supports .
05300 - 2 ..
rm
METAL DECKING
In
Section 05300 - Page 1
ow
SECTION 05300
METAL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install steel_ floor decking and steel roof
decking complete with all accessories .
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 05120: Structural Steel.
1 .03 WORK FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED
A . Section 05120 : Anchorage for bearing plates and angles
embedded in masonry.
1 .04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Steel Deck Institute - SDI Standard #1.
B. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
C. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet , Zinc-Coated, Galvanized by the
Hot Dip Process , Physical Structural Quality.
�. D. AISC - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members. .
1 .05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A . Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340.
B. Indicate decking plan, deck profile dimensions , anchorage,
supports , projections , openings and reinforcement ,
finishes, applicable details and accessories.
�. 05300 - 1
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Section 05120 - Page 3
E. Contractor is to cooperate with and coordinate with all
other Contractors working directly for the Owner on this
project.
END OF SECTION
�w
a.�
05120 - 3
■w
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Ow
Section 05120 - Page 2
w�
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36.
B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500 Grade B .
C. Bolts , Nuts and Washers : ASTM A325.
D. Welding Materials : AWS D1. 1 , type required for materials
being welded.
E. Primer: FS TT-P-31, red.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC
Specification . �.
2.03 FINISH
A. Clean , prepare and shop-prime structural steel members. ww
Do not prime surfaces to be field welded.
PART 3 EXECUTION ■0
3 .01 ERECTION
4W
A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC
Specification .
B. Make provision for erection loads , and for sufficient
temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and
in true alignment until completion of erection and
installation of permanent bracing.
C. Do not field-cut or alter structural members without
approval of Architect . ..
D. After erection , prime welds, abrasions and surfaces not
shop-primed. Use a primer consistent with shop coat .
05120 - 2 „ ,
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Section 05120 - Page 1
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all required structural steel support
members including bar joists , with required bracing, welds
and fasteners.
B. Furnish and install all required baseplates, levelling
plates and anchor bolts .
1 .02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel
Joints .
C. AWS D1. 1 - Structural Welding Code.
D. AISC - Specification for the Design , Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Building.
E. FS TT-P-31 - Paint , Oil: Iron Oxide, Ready Mix , Red and
Brown.
1 .03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340.
B. Indicate profiles , sizes , spacing and locations of
structural members , connections , attachments and
fasteners.
C . Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding
symbols . Indicate net weld lengths .
w• 05120 - 1
Imp
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04000 - Page 9
concave. Rake out mortar in preparation for application
of caulking or sealants where shown.
D. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and
relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to
fit stretched units which have been set in position . If
adjustments are required, remove masonry units , clean off
mortar, and reset in fresh mortar.
3.03 LINTELS
A. Install steel angle lintels over openings where indicated.
Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of openings.
3 .04 CLEANING
A. Promptly as work proceeds and upon completion, remove
excess mortar , smears, droppings .
B. Clean adjacent and adjoining surface of marks arising out
of execution of work of this section .
C. Sweep up and remove daily sand, cleaning compounds and
mixtures , dirt , debris and rubbish.
D. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution which
will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult
masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non-
metallic tools in cleaning operation. Cleaning methods
are subject to Architect ' s approval.
E. Wash with Sure Kleen or equal to a clean, even and
acceptable finish .
END OF SECTION
on
04000 - 9
mw
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04000 - Page 8
surfaces of set masonry and remove loose masonry units and
mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
I . Build in items specified under this and other sections of
these specifications as the work progresses. Fill-in
solidly with masonry around built-in items .
J. Temporary Formwork:
1. Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary
support to reinforced masonry elements. Design,
erect, support, brace and maintain formwork, in a safe
and acceptable trade procedure. ..
2. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and
dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent
leakage of mortar, grout or concrete (if any) . Brace,
tie and support as required to maintain portion and
shape during construction and curing of reinforced
masonry.
3. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced
masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its
own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads
that may be placed on it during construction.
3 .02 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed, head ow
and collar joints , butter ends on four faces with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into
place. Do not slush head joints .
.m
B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar
coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed
webs in mortar in starting course on footings and
foundation walls and in all courses where adjacent to
cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with
grout .
C. Maintain joints widths except for minor variations
required to maintain bond alignment. Lay all walls with
joints to match the existing coursing. Cut joints flush
for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be
covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly
04000 - 8
00
UNIT MASONRY
so
Section 04000 - Page 7
the volumes of cement and lime materials , and coarse
aggregate equal to one to two times the sum of the
volumes of cement and lime materials .
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown,
except , build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness
of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness
shown or specified.
B. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the
work of other trades . Provide not less than 8 inches of
masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings , and
between adjacent cases and recesses.
C. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut
with clean, sharp, unchipped edges . Cut units as required
to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly.
Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry
cutting saws to cut units.
D. Do not wet masonry units.
E. Lay exposed masonry in running bond, to match the existing
brick bond pattern, with vertical joint in each course
centered on units in courses above and below. Lay
concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running
bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond
and interlock each course of each wythe at corners unless
otherwise shown.
F . Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface
bond patterns , with uniform joint widths and to properly
locate openings, movement-type joints , returns and
offsets . Avoid the use of less-than-half size units at
corners , jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
G. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately
spaced and coordinated with other work .
H. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back 1/2 masonry unit
length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed
04000 - 7
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04000 - Page 6
1. Provide minimum 1800 psi Type S mortar at 28 days for
load bearing walls and partitions. Mortar proportions
by volume shall be one part Portland Cement; over 1/4
to 1/2 part hydrated lime; and not less than 2-1/4 and
not more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of
cements and lime shall be aggregate.
2. Provide minimum 750 psi Type N mortar at 28 days for
non-load bearing walls with maximum 2 percent ammonia
stearate or calcium stearate per cement volume.
Mortar proportions by volume shall be one part
Portland Cement; over 1/2 to 1-1/4 parts hydrated
lime; and not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3
times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime shall
be aggregate. **�
C. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients , in quantities needed
for immediate use. ,
D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing
point of mortar .
E. Plasticizers, accelerators, retardants, water repellent
agents and other admixtures shall not be added to the
mortar mix unless approved by Architect.
F. Use mortar within two hours of mixing at temperatures over
74 degrees F. , and two and one half hours at temperatures
over 50 degrees F. but under 74 degrees F .
G. Do not retemper mortar after two hours.
2 .05 GROUT MIX
A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C476 and the following:
1. Fine Grout : Proportion by volume; one part Portland
Cement , zero to 1/10 part lime and sand equal to 2-1/4
to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime
materials .
2. Coarse Grout : Proporation by volume; one part *■
Portland Cement , zero to 1/10 part lime, and fine
aggregate (sand) equal to 2-1/4 to 3 times the sum of
04000 - 6
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04000 - Page 5
w
2 .02 ACCESSORIES
A. Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Provide premolded,
compressible, elastic fillers of foam rubber , neoprene, or
extruded plastic.
B. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with
a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit
standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in
masonry wall , size and configuration as indicated.
2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I , except
Type III may be used for cold weather construction.
Provide natural color on block.
B. Lime: ASTM C207, special finishing hydrated lime, non-air
xw entrained.
C. Aggregate for Mortar: Sand, ASTM C144, or ASTM C404, Size
No. 2 except for joints 1/4 inch and less (if any) , use
aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16
seive.
D. Fine Aggregate for Grout: Sand, ASTM C33 or ASTM C404,
size no 1.
E. Coarse Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, size no. 8 or size
no. 89.
F. Moisture Resistant Mortar Additive: Ammonium Stearate,
aluminum tri-stearate or calcium stearate.
G. Water: Clean, free of deleterious materials which would
impair strength or bond.
2.04 MORTAR MIX
A. Measurement: Use methods which will ensure that specified
proportions are controlled and accurately maintained.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270,
Proportion Specifications , except limit materials to those
specified herein, and limit cement/lime ration (by volume)
,�. as follows :
04000 - 5
..
UNIT MASONRY
mw
Section 04000 - Page 4
dw
Am
PART 2 PRODUCTS
so
2.01 MASONRY UNITS
A. Manufacturer: Obtain masonry units and face brick from No
one manufacturer , of uniform texture for each kind
required. The new face brick shall exactly match the
existing face brick .
ow
B. Concrete blocks shall conform to ASTM C90, hollow load-
bearing concrete masonry units , Grade N , Type I , modular
size complete with corners, and fillers to match and
complement block units; standard weight . Concrete blocks
shall also meet or exceed the requirements for (U.L.
Design No. U907) for a (C-3) 3-hour fire-rated concrete
block .
1. Provide units using concrete aggregate complying with
ASTM C33, producing a dry net unit weight of not less
than 125 pounds per cubic foot .
2. Cure units in a moisture-controlled atmosphere or in .,►
an autoclave at normal pressure and temperature to
comply with ASTM C129, Type I , limit moisture
absorption during delivery and until time of
installation to the maximum percentage specified for
Type I units for the average annual relative humidity
as reported by the U. S . Weather Bureau Station nearest
the project site.
3. Provide manufacturer ' s standard color and texture,
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Concrete block in reinforced walls shall be 2 core.
C. Face brick shall be of the following brick type:
1. Brick Type:
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for
approval a face brick that matches the existing brick
in color, size, shape and finish. .�
04000 - 4
no
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04000 - Page 3
3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For positions
shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls
and partitions , do not exceed minus 1/2 inch in any
bay or 20 feet maximum.
4. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns
and thickness of walls , from dimensions shown, do not
exceed minus 1/4 inch nor plus 1/2 inch.
1�w
C. Inspection:
1. Concrete and mortar materials and operations will be
inspected as the work progresses . Failure to detect
- any defective work or material shall not in any way
prevent later rejection when such defect is
discovered nor shall it obligate the Architect for
final acceptance.
1 .07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged
condition.
B. Store and handle masonry units to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature
changes , contaminants, corrosion or other causes.
C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover
and in dry location.
D. Store aggregates where grading and other required
characteristics can be maintained.
E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent
corrosion and accumulation of dirt .
1 .08 SCAFFOLDING AND MECHANICAL HOISTING
A. Provide all required scaffolding and mechanical hoisting
to complete the scope of work of this section.
04000 - 3
am
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04000 - Page 2
1.04 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.
B. Section 05999 - Miscellaneous Metals.
C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants .
E. Section 08111 - Hollow Metal Frames.
F. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions,
Special Conditions and General Requirements .
1.05 SUBMITTALS .,■�
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, manufacturer's
specifications and data for each type of masonry unit,
accessory, and other manufactured products, including
certifications that each type complies with specified
requirements. Inlcude instructions for handling, storage
installations and protection.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance Rated Masonry: Comply with requirements
for materials and installation established by governing
authorities for construction and fire-resistance ratings
indicated.
B. Construction Tolerances:
1. Variations from Plumb: For vertical lines and
surfaces of columns , walls and arises , do not exceed
1/4 inch in 10 feet. For external corners, expansion ..�
joints , control joints and other conspicuous lines , do
not exceed 1/4 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum.
2. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels,
sills , parapets , horizontal grooves and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in any bay
or 20 feet maximum. ..�
04000 - 2
OR,
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04000 - Page 1
SECTION 04000
UNIT MASONRY
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS IN OTHER PARTS OF THE PROJECT MANUAL
A. Refer to Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1,
including subdivisions thereof , for requirements and
conditions which may affect the work of this section.
1 .02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The work of this section includes but is not limited to
W" the following:
1. Furnishing and installing veneer face brick for the
building as shown on the Contract Documents .
2. Cutting and patching existing masonry walls for new
on openings and new structural steel members.
3. Furnishing and installing mortar and grout for
masonry as well as masonry patching.
4. Furnishing and installing grout fill for lintels.
5. Installing built-in items supplied by other trades.
6. Furnishing and installing concrete block and face
brick for the new elevator shaft .
7. Cutting and fitting for other sections of work.
+ ! 8. Installing elevator guide rail brackets furnished by
the Hospital ' s Elevator Installer .
1 .03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Products indicated on Drawings as having openings
constructed or as being built into the new masonry work .
04000 1
CONCRETE WORK
Section 03001 - Page 6
..A
B. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required
lines , details and elevations.
C. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting
in excessive honeycombing and other defects . Do not
patch , repair or replace exposed architectural concrete
except on express direction of the Architect .
END OF SECTION
,w
.w.
aw
.o
■o
am
so
03001 - 6
Ift
w.
CONCRETE WORK
Section 03001 - Page 5
3.07 VAPOR BARRIER
A. Install vapor barrier under interior floor slabs on fill.
Lap joints minimum six inches ( 61' ) and seal . Do not
disturb or damage vapor barrier while placing concrete
reinforcing. If damage does occur, repair areas before
placing concrete. Use vapor barrier material lapped over
damaged areas minimum six inches ( 6" ) and seal .
3.08 SLABS (ACI 301 11. 1)
A. Pour floor slabs in checkerboard pattern indicated on
Drawings.
B. Separate slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2-
"' inch (1/2" ) thick joint filler from bottom of slab to
within 1/4-inch ( 1/411 ) of finished slab surfaces. Top
joint filler to be caulked with an elastomeric caulking
compound.
C. Provide Class A tolerances according to ACI 301 11. 9.
Pitch to drains 1/4-inch (1/411) per foot nominal .
3.09 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. As required by ACI 301.
3.10 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed open. -cgs where required for pipes ,
conduits , sleeves and other- work to be embedded in the
passing through concrete members.
B. Coordinate work of other sections and cooperate with trade
involved in forming and setting openings , slots , recesses ,
chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts.
C. Install new Walker recessed duct system in the new
concrete slabs.
3.11 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS (ACI 301 9. 1)
00 A. Allow Architect to inspect concrete surfaces immediately
upon removal of forms.
03001 - 5
CONCRETE WORK
ow
Section 03001 - Page 4
ow
whenever a concrete pour is stopped and another pour
started in the foundation walls . am,
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Barrier: 4 mil clear polyethylene film. owl
B. Non-Shrink Grout : Premixed compound consisting of non-
metallic aggregate , cement , water reducing and o
plasticizing strength of 3000 psi in 28 days.
PART 3 EXECUTION am
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301 except as ..
amended by this Section.
3.02 FORMWORK (ACI 301 4. 2) .
A. Obtain Architect 's review for use of earth forms. When
using earth forms , hand trim sides and bottom, and remove ,
loose dirt prior to placing concrete.
B. Chamfer external corners of joints.
3.03 TOLERANCES (ACI 301 4. 3)
3.04 FORM SURFACES PREPARATION (ACI 4. 4)
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with
manufacturer 's recommendations. Apply prior to placing
reinforcing steel, anchoring devices and embedded parts.
3.05 FINISHING FORM SURFACES (ACI 301 10.4)
A. Formed Surface Finishes: ACI 301 10.4. Provide smooth
rubbed finish at exposed concrete above grade.
W"
3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS (ACI 4. 5)
A. Do not remove forms, shores and bracing until concrete has
gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight , am
construction loads, and design loads which are liable to
be imposed upon it . Verify strength of concrete by
compressive test results. +.
03001 - 4
40
CONCRETE WORK
or
Section 03001 - Page 3
ON
Compressive Strength (28 Day) : 3000 psi (all areas except
where noted.
Compressive Strength (28 Day) : 4000 psi (exterior walks
and paving.
2.04 AIR ENTRAINMENT (ACI 301 3. 4 )
A. Add air entrainment agent to concrete mix for concrete
work exposed to exterior .
AR 2.05 SLUMP (ACI 301 3. 5)
A. Slump for Consolidation by Vibration: Four inches (4" ) .
B. Slump for Consolidation Other Than by Vibration: Five
inches ( 5" ) .
2.06 PROPORTIONS (ACI 3. 5)
A. Selection of proportions for normal weight concrete Method
1.
2 .07 REINFORCING STEEL (ACI 301 5.2)
uw A. Bars shall conform to ASTM A615-68, Grade 60. (Deformed) ,
except where required to be fiberglass reinforced plastic
rods in the new concrete pad, for the van unit. See the
Contract Drawings for the location of the fiberglass
reinforcing rods. Fiberglass reinforced plastic rods to
be as manufactured by Polystructures , Inc . , 1510 South
Broadway, Little Rock , Arkansas 72202; Telephone: (501)
' 375-0286.
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type. ASTM A185; coiled
rolls; plain finish , 6" x 6" - 10/10 W.W.F. size.
2.08 EXPANSION JOINTS (ACI 301 6. 2)
2.09 WATER STOPS (ACI 301 6. 3)
A. Water Stops: Polyvinyl chloride; minimum 1750 psi tensile
strength, minus 50 degrees F. to plus 175 degrees F .
working temperature range ; maximum possible lengths ;
profiled as required. Water stops shall be installed
03001 - 3
CONCRETE WORK
Section 03001 - Page 2
B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with
Contractor 's appointed firm. ..
C. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure
conformance with requirements stated herein.
D. Two ( 2 ) concrete test cylinders will be taken for every
100 or less cubic yards of concrete placed.
E. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold
weather concreting and will be cured on job site under
same conditions as concrete it represents.
F. One ( 1) slump test will be taken for each set of test
cylinders taken .
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings .
PART 2 PRODUCTS .�
2.01 CEMENT (ACI 301 2. 2)
A. Use one brand and type of cement throughout project unless
otherwise specified.
B. Cement : Air entraining Type IA.
2.02 ADMIXTURES (ACI 301 2. 2)
A. Add air entraining agent as indicated in ACI 301, Table
3.4. 1.
B. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when WP
accepted by Architect .
2.03 STRENGTH (ACI 301 3. 2) V.
A. Provide concrete of the following strength :
03001 - 2
XW
40
CONCRETE WORK
Section 03001 - Page 1
40
SECTION 03001
CONCRETE WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all required framework, complete with
required shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B. Furnish and install all required concrete reinforcing,
complete with required supports , spacers and related
► accessories.
C . Furnish and install all required cast-in-place concrete
for this project to complete the building foundation and
floor slabs as well as other concrete for the building.
D. Furnish and install vapor barrier under new interior
slabs.
E. Furnish and install all required cast-in-place concrete
sidewalks, curbs , concrete paved areas , concrete van pads ,
and other sitework concrete.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with ACI
301 unless specified otherwise in this Project Manual.
1 .03 TESTING AGENCY
A. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed
by an independent firm who will be hired and paid for by
the Contractor . Contractor to submit test results for
seven ( 7) and twenty-eight ( 28 ) days curing to the
Architect.
03001 -- 1
40
SEEDING
Section 02951 - Page 3
•w
3.04 MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A. Maintenance Period: Until the new grass is permanently
established, or the Substantial Completion of the project ,
whichever is the later in completion. Cut and maintain
the grass during this period.
B. Maintain surfaces and supply additional top soil where
necessary, including areas affected by erosion.
C. Water to ensure uniform seed germination and to keep
surface of soil damp.
D. Apply water slowly so that surface of soil will not puddle
and crust.
E. Cut grass first time when it reaches height of 2-1/2
inches and maintain to minimum height of two inches . Do
so not cut more than 1/3 of blade at any mowing.
F. After first mowing, water grass sufficient to moisten soil
from three inches to five inches deep.
G. Replant damaged grass areas showing root growth failure,
deterioration, bare or thin spots , and eroded areas.
3 .06 RESTORATION
A. Restore grassed areas damaged during execution of work of
this Section.
3.07 ACCEPTANCE
A. Seeded areas will be accepted at the date of the
substantial completion of the building, providing that the
seeded areas have been properly established and are
otherwise acceptable.
END OF SECTION
,,,
02951 -• 3
am
SEEDING
AM
Section 02951 - Page 2
B. Fertilizer: 5-5-5 commercial type with 50% of the
elements derived from organic sources. AM.
2.02 SEED
A. Seed Mixture: 55% Streambark Wheat , 20 percent Kentucky '
Blue Grass , 20 percent Creeping Red Fescue and 5 percent
Norlea Perennial Rye.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing underground improvements from damage.
B. Remove foreign materials, plants, roots, stones, and
debris , from site. Do not bury foreign material.
3.02 FERTILIZING ..�
A. Apply after fine grading and mix thoroughly into upper two
inches of top soil. ..
B. Do not apply grass seed and fertilizer at same time, in
same machine.
C. Lightly water to aid breakdown of fertilizer and to
provide moist soil for seed.
3.03 SEEDING
A. Apply seed at a rate of five pounds per 1,000 square feet
evenly in two intersecting directions. Rake in lightly.
B. Do not sow immediately following rain, when ground is too
dry, or during windy periods.
C. Apply water with fine spray immediately after each area
has been sown. .�
02951 - 2 ,,
SEEDING
Section 02951 - Page 1
SECTION 02951
SEEDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all required seeding and fertilizer.
B. Maintain and reseed seeded areas until the grass has
become firmly established.
C. Cut and maintain grass areas until the Substantial
Completion of the project.
1 .02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver grass seed in original containers showing analysis
of seed mixture, percentage of pure seed, year of
production, net weight, date of packaging and location of
packaging. Damaged packages are not acceptable.
B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight,
chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer .
1 .03 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Beginning work means acceptance of existing conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROWING MEDIA
A. New Top Soil: Natural, fertile agricultural soil capable
of sustaining vigorous plant growth , not in frozen or
muddy condition, containing not less than 6% organic
matter and corrected to pH value of 5. 9 to 7.0 free from
sub soil, slag, clay, stones, lumps, live plants, roots,
sticks , crabgrass , coughgrass , noxious weeds and foreign
matter.
02951 -- 1
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS
Section 02690 - Page 5
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of
Division One.
END OF SECTION
�w
,�„ 02690 - 5
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS
we
Section 02690 - Page 4
B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with
manufacturer 's instructions. Seal joints watertight. .w.
C. Place pipe on minimum 3" deep bed of pipe bedding
aggregates.
D. Lay pipe to slope gradient noted on Drawings.
E. Install coarse filter aggregate at sides to top of pipe.
F. Place selected excavation soil maximum 12 inch lifts,
consolidating each lift . ,
G. The trenches shall be kept free from water when pipe
installation is in progress.
H. All pipe shall be handled and assembled in accordance with
the manufacturer 's instructions , except as modified by the
Contract Drawings or by the Architect/Engineer.
I . Pipe installation shall begin from the lower end and
progress in the upper end direction. The pipes shall be
thoroughly cleaned before they are installed, and kept
clean until acceptance of the completed work.
J. At the end of each working day , the upper end of the
installed pipe shall be plugged temporarily with a
stopper. The stopper shall be left in place and shall be
removed only just prior to installation of the next
section of pipe.
K. Before joints are made, such pipe shall be well bedded on
a solid foundation , and no pipe shall be brought into
position until the preceding length has been thoroughly
embedded and secured in place.
L. Whenever a pipe requires cutting to fit the line or bring
it to the required location, the work shall be performed
in a skillful manner so as to leave a smooth cut end.
M. All trenches shall be backf i l led immediately after
installation of pipe in accordance with Section 02226.
02690 - 4 ..
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS
Section 026901 - Page 3
�w
2 .03 AIR VACUUM RELIEF
A. Clow Corporation Style 5403 Model B 2x2 combination air
and vacuum and air release valve or approved equal.
2.04 CLEAN-OUT ASSEMBLY
A. Components to be good quality standard commercial
products .
B. Assemble as detailed on Plans.
on
C. Piping in and through manhole wall to be ductile iron,
Class 52.
D. Provide cast iron couplers to join plain and ductile iron
and PVC pipe.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
w A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work , and
excavations , dimensions and elevations are as indicated on
Drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions .
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare excavations to required elevations. Correct over
excavation with fill material of pipe bedding stone.
B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could
damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or
compaction.
3 .03 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Trenching shall be performed in accordance with Section
02226.
M" 02690 -- 3
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS
Section 02690 - Page 2
1 .06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01720.
B. Accurately record location of pipe runs , connections,
manholes and invert elevations.
C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil
conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities . •.•
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A. Plastic Pipe : ANSI/ASTM D3034 , Type PSM, polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) material ; bell and spigot , with elastomeric
sealed joints.
B. Fittings: Same material as pipe, molded or formed to suit
pipe size and end design, in required "T", bends , elbows ,
cleanouts , reducers , traps , and other configurations
required.
2.02 PIPE BEDDING AND BACKFILL
A. Clean , natural gravel , crushed gravel stone free from „
shale, clay, organic materials or debris ; graded to the
following limits:
Sieve Size Percent Passing
M2.01. 4 M2.01. 5 M2.01.6
1 Inch 100
3/4 Inch 90 - 100
5/8 Inch 100
1/2 Inch 10 - 50 85 - 100 100
3/8 Inch 0 - 20 15 - 45 85 - 100
1/4 Inch 0 - 5
No. 4 0 - 15 20 - 50
No. 8 0 - 5 0 - 15
No. 16 0 - 5
02690 - 2
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS
Section 02690 - Page 1
s. SECTION 02690
SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS
OR
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK UNITS
A. Sanitary sewer piping, fittings and accessories.
we
B. Connection of building sanitary sewer to sewer system.
C. Manhole access.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02226: Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) ,
SDR35 Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation
of the work of this Section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Submit manufacturer ' s certification that materials meet
the specifications .
ON 02690 -- 1
Im
TESTING WATER MAINS
Im
Section 02680 - Page 3
No
ON
Nominal Diameter - Inches
40
Average Test Pressure
psi 18 20 24 30 36 42 48 54
'ft 450 2.87 3.18 3.82 4 .78 5.73 6.69 7.64 8 .60
400 2. 70 3.00 3. 60 4. 50 5. 41 6. 31 7. 21 8 . 11
350 2 .53 2.81 3.37 4.21 5.06 5.90 6.74 7 .58
ws 300 2. 34 2. 60 3. 12 3.90 4. 68 5. 46 6. 24 7.02
275 2. 24 2 .49 2. 99 3.73 4 .48 5.23 5.98 6 .72
250 2. 14 2. 37 2. 85 3. 56 4. 27 4.99 5.70 6.41
225 2 .03 2. 25 2.70 3 .38 4 .05 4 .73 5.41 6.03
200 1. 91 2. 12 2. 55 3. 19 3. 82 4.46 5.09 5.73
175 1.79 1.98 2. 38 2 .98 3.58 4.17 4 .77 5.36
150 1.66 1. 84 2. 21 2.76 3. 31 3. 86 4.41 4 . 97
125 1.51 1.68 2.01 2 .52 3 .02 3.53 4 .03 4 .53
100 1. 35 1. 50 1.80 2. 25 2. 70 3. 15 3.60 4.05
G. If the leakage in the system exceeds the specified amount,
the Contractor shall locate, repair, and/or replace the
defect (s) and retest the piping system.
END OF SECTION
wr
02680 -- 3
so
TESTING WATER MAINS
ON
Section 02680 - Page 2
am
Provisions shall be made to relieve air trapped at high
points in the system throughout adjacent hydrants or •
through taps and corporation stops installed for this
purpose by the Contractor. After this pressure has been
maintained for a period of at least two hours, the section ..
under test shall be considered to have passed the pressure
test .
E. The leakage test shall be performed concurrently with the
pressure test.
F. The maximum allowable leakage shall be as shown in the
following table:
Allowable Leakage Per 1000 Feet of Pipeline*
Nominal Diameter - Inches
Average Test Pressure 40
psi 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
450 0.48 0.64 0.95 1. 27 1.59 1.91 2.23 2.55 ,gym
400 0. 45 0. 60 0. 90 1. 20 1.50 1.80 2. 10 2. 40
350 0.42 0.56 0.84 1.12 1.40 1 .69 1.97 2 .25
300 0. 39 0. 52 0.78 1.04 1. 30 1. 56 1.82 2.08
275 0.37 0.50 0.75 1 .00 1 . 24 1.49 1.74 1 .99 am
250 0. 36 0.47 0. 71 0. 95 1. 19 1.42 1. 66 1. 90
225 0.34 0.45 0.68 0.90 1.13 1.35 1. 58 1 .80
200 0. 32 0.43 0. 64 0. 85 1.06 1. 28 1.48 1.70
175 0. 30 0.40 0. 59 0.80 0.99 1.19 1 .39 1 . 59
150 0. 28 0. 37 0. 55 0.74 0. 92 1. 10 1. 29 1.47
125 0.25 0.34 0. 50 0.67 0.84 1.01 1.18 1 .34
100 0. 23 0. 30 0. 45 0. 60 0. 75 0. 90 1.05 1. 20
* If the pipeline under test contains sections of various
diameters , the allowable leakage will be the sum of the
computed leakage for each size.
Am
02680 - 2 ..
TESTING WATER MAINS
Section 02680 - Page 1
SECTION 02680
TESTING WATER MAINS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 RELATED WORK
A. Water Distribution System
1 .02 TESTING PROCEDURE
A. After the trench has been backfilled, acceptance tests ,
consisting of a pressure test and a leakage test , shall be
performed on all sections of the water mains and services
installed . The leakage test shall be conducted
concurrently with the pressure test.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools,
and equipment necessary for the testing. All water for
tests shall be furnished and disposed of by the Contractor
at his expense. Source and quality of the potable water
which the Contractor proposes to use in testing the lines
shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
C. Hydrostatic presumptive tests may be performed when the
system is partially backfilled to simply check the work ,
aw but acceptance 'of the system shall be based on hydrostatic
tests run on the finished system after it has been
completely backfilled . All hydrostatic tests shall be
performed in accordance with Section 4 of AWWA Standard
C600, as modified herein.
D. For the pressure test, the system shall be pressurized and
maintained at a minimum of 150 pounds per square inch, or
1 . 5 times the working pressure , whichever is greater ,
based on the elevation of the lowest point in the section
under test and corrected to the elevation of the gauge.
02680 -- 1
DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 02650 - Page 5
w
B. If bacteriological test proves water quality to be
unacceptable, repeat system treatment .
C. If bacteriological test proves water quality to be
acceptable, remove the feed line.
D. The samples must test bacteriologically safe before the
water main is placed in service.
END OF SECTION
02650 -- 5
on
DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 02650 - Page 4
C. Product deterioration must be considered in computing the
quantity of sodium hypochlorite required for the desired .•
concentration.
3 .04 SYSTEM TREATMENT
.wa
A. The chlorine-water solution shall be applied to the water
main with a chemical feed pump designed for feeding
chlorine solutions. Feed lines shall be of such material
and strength so as to withstand safely the maximum
pressures that may be created by the pump . A11
connections shall be checked for tightness before the
hypochlorite solution is applied to the main.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install a 3/4 inch
corporation stop just downstream from the newly installed
gate valve or approved by the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall review his proposed procedures with + »
the Engineer at least 48 hours prior to the start of
disinfection . All disinfection procedures must be
approved by the Engineer before any work starts . ,w
D. After the Contractor has verified the minimum 25 ppm
chlorine concentration, the Contractor shall retain the
chlorinated water in the main for a minimum of 24 hours.
E. If after 24 hours the chlorine residual is less than 10
ppm, repeat system treatment.
3 .05 FLUSHING
A. After the Contractor has verified the minimum 10 ppm
chlorine residual, the Contractor shall thoroughly flush
the chlorinated water from the main.
B. Flush the main with potable water in such a manner that
shall not adversely affect fish, plant or animal life.
3.06 BACTERIOLOGICAL TEST
A. The quantity and location of water samples to be taken
shall be determined by the Water Superintendent .
02650 - 4 „�
so
DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 02650 - Page 3
3.03 PREPARATION OF WATER FOR TREATMENT
A. Disinfection will be performed in accordance with AWWA
Standard C 601 using either continuous feed or slug
method.
B. The chlorine - water solution is prepared by adding
hypochlorite to water in accordance with the following
table:
Chlorine Required to Produce 25 Mg/l Concentration
in 100 Feet of Pipe by Diameter
100 Percent 1 Percent
Pipe Size Chlorine Chlorine Solutions
Inches Pounds Gallons .
4 0.013 0.16
6 0. 030 0. 36
8 0.054 0.65
10 0.085 1.02
12 0.120 1 .44
16 0. 217 2. 60
18 0.275 3.30
20 0. 341 4.08
24 0.490 5.87
30 0. 765 9. 17
36 1.100 13.21
NOTE: 1% solution requires 1 pound of calcium hypochlorite in
8 gallons of water.
02650 - 3
DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 02650 - Page 2
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect against damage and contamination.
B. Maintain caution labels on hazardous materials.
..
1 .06 PROTECTION
A. Provide necessary signs , barricades , and notices to **
prevent any person from accidentally consuming water or
disturbing system being treated.
MW
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
no
A. Disinfectant - Chlorine:
1. Calcium Hypochlorite Granules : 70% available
chlorine; or
2. Sodium Hypochlorite Solutions : 5 . 25% and 14 . 70
available chlorine.
PART 3 EXECUTION
air
3 .01 INSPECTION
A. Prior to starting work, verify that domestic water system .ft
is completed and cleaned.
B. Notify General Contractor about defects requiring
correction. s"
C. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
3.02 SCHEDULES
A. Disinfection will be accomplished after the pipe has
passed the pressure and leakage tests.
B. The Owner and the Engineer will be notified at least 48
hours prior to the start of the disinfection. *�
02650 - 2
DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 02650 - Page 1
w
SECTION 02650
DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK UNITS
A. Provide personnel , equipment, and supplies to disinfect
all pipes and fittings connected to and forming a portion
of the potable water supply system, and flush out the
system in a manner acceptable to the Architect upon
completion of treatment.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Water Distribution Systems
B. Testing Water Mains
1.03 REFERENCE
A. AWWA C601 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Bacteriological Laboratory: Contractor is responsible for
sampling and testing of water at an approved laboratory.
B. Work at or on existing water mains shall be disinfected
and/or flushed as directed by the Superintendent of the
Northampton water system before restoring service.
C. Samples must test bacteriologically safe before the new
water main is placed in service.
D. Contractor to provide chlorine residual testing equipment
+ " with the required range.
�,,,
02650 -- 1
on
VALVES
Section 02641 - Page 3
3.02 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Check and adjust valves and accessories for smooth
operation.
"•
END OF SECTION
V•
MR
02641 - 3
VALVES
w
Section 02641 - Page 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IRON-BODY GATE VALVES, OPEN LEFT
A. Valves 3" to 10" .
4M
B. AWWA C-500 or AWWA C509.
C. Stem Construction: .�
1. Valves installed underground shall be non-rising.
2. Valves installed inside structures shall be outside ..
screw and yoke.
D. Stem Seals: 0-ring. �*
E. Gate Type: Double disc or resilient seat.
F. End Connections :
1. Valves installed underground shall be mechanical
joint .
2. Valves installed inside structures shall be flanged.
G. The tapping sleeves shall be mechanical joint type. The
tapping valves shall be mechanical joint gate valves with
0-ring seal and shall open left. ..
H. Gate valves shall be Waterous, M & H , American Darling, or
equal.
am
2.02 VALVE BOXES
A. Two-piece , cast iron , slip type , 5-1/4 ID , flange top
cover marked WATER.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves and accessories in accordance with
manufacturer 's instructions .
02641 - 2
go,
e. VALVES
Section 02641 - Page 1
• SECTION 02641
VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK UNITS
A. Gate Valves
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02226: Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
B. Section 02618: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
C. Section 02650: Water Distribution System
1 .03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves and accessories for shipment according to
AWWA specifications where applicable and seal valve ends
to prevent entry of foreign matter into valve body.
B. Store valves and accessories in area protected from
weather , moisture, or possible damage.
C. Do not store materials directly on ground.
D. Handle items to prevent damage to interior or exterior
+�* surfaces .
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificate of compliance for testing.
02641 - 1
wo
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
WF
Section 02618 - Page 3
w
marked with NSF Seal of Approval and conform to the
following classification and standard (maximum) laying
lengths :
a. AWWA C900 : Class 100 (DR 17 or 18) , 20 +/- foot
length.
3. For gravity sewers, random short lengths of pipe shall
a be used only where required by the Contract Drawings
or Specifications to connect to manholes , or as
directed by the Architect/Engineer .
4. Wyes for Gravity Sewers : Fitting type.
5. Elastomeric Gasketed Joints : Rubber sealing ring
supplied by the pipe manufacturer and shall allow for
expansion and contraction at each joint. Joints shall
be the push-on type with a bell being an integral part
of each pipe length supplied.
6. All pipe and fittings conforming to AWWA C900 shall be
made to cast iron outside diameter .
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
ew
02618 - 3
M
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
w�+
Section 02618 - Page 2
2. Pressure Pipe:
a. Heavy Duty: AWWA C900, polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
pressure pipe, 4-inch through 12-inch for water .
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Criteria:
1. Pipe shall be of the size, SDR OR DR classification
and pressure rating as shown on the Contract Drawings
or as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
2. Pipe shall be designed in accordance with the
applicable reference standard (s) .
1.03 SUBMITTALS w.
A. Submit manufacturer 's name, location and specifications in
accordance with submittals . +
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not store materials directly on ground.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. Pipe Couplings, Adaptors and Fittings : Type 1, Grade 1, �.
PVC , ANSI/ASTM D1784, "Standard Specification for Rigid
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds".
1. Non-Pressure Pipe Couplings, Adaptors and Fittings :
a. ASTM D 3034 : SDR 35; 12. 5 foot length.
..
b. ASTM F 789: PS-46; 13 foot length.
C. ASTM F 679: SDR 35; 13 foot length. a„„
2. Pressure pipe shall be suitable for use as a pressure
conduit and all pipe, couplings , and fittings designed
at a hydrostatic working pressure of 150 psi at 73-OF, 'ft
plus a surge allowance of 35 psi . Pipe shall be
02618 - 2 •A
w.
as
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
No
Section 02618 - Page 1
SECTION 02618
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INSTALLED
A. Work Units:
1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, adapters, couplings and
fittings .
2. Joints shall be as specified herein or as directed by
the Engineer/Architect.
a. Non-Pressure Pipe:
1) Pipe , Adaptors , Couplings and Fittings
( Sanitary Sewers ) : Push-on joints with
a. elastomeric gaskets.
b. Pressure Pipe:
1) Pipe , Couplings and Fittings (Heavy Duty)
Push-on joints with elastomeric gaskets .
" B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Section 02226: Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
C. Reference Standards:
w► 1. Non-Pressure Pipe:
a. Sanitary and Storm Sewers : (4" - 15" Diameter) :
ASTM D 3034, ASTM F 789 ; ( 18" - 27" Diameter ) :
ASTM F 679. Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings .
02618 - 1
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Section 02615 - Page 7
r�
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall be responsible for installing the water
distribution system to the elevations indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
B. Contractor shall provide test pits as indicated or as
required to determine existing conditions and to avoid
obstacles that may become known.
C. Test pit work shall include excavation, backfilling and
restoration of surfaces and is to be included in water
main work items .
END OF SECTION
02615 - 7
ow
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
w�
Section 02615 - Page 6
Other means of thrust restraint utilizing anchoring
fittings and pipe, rods and clamps may be used where
appropriate.
14. At times when pipe laying is not actually in progress,
the open ends of the pipes shall be closed temporarily
with pipe plugs or by other means. If water is in the
trench when work is resumed , the trench shall be
dewatered first and the plugs shall not be removed
until all danger of water entering the pipe is past .
15. At the conclusion of the work , the Contractor shall
thoroughly clean all new pipes by flushing with water
or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of
wood , etc . , which may have entered during the
construction period. - If , after this cleaning, any
obstructions still remain, they shall be removed to
the satisfaction of the Engineer . Pipes shall be
flushed at a rate of 2 . 5 feet per second for a ..
duration suitable to the Engineer. The rates of flow
required to produce a 2 . 5 feet per second flushing
velocity in different sizes of pipe are as shown in
the following table:
Water Main Flushing Data
Pipe Flow Required to Outlet Pressure With
Size Produce 2. 5 FPS Velocity Hydrant Opening
( Inches) (Gallons Per Minute) One 2-1/2" Nozzle
4 100 0. 5 PSI
6 220 1.75 PSI
8 390 5. 5 PSI
10 610 14.5 PSI
12 880 31 PSI
02615 - 6 ,,.,
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Section 02615 - Page 5
and large stones shall be removed to provide a
clearance of at least 6 inches below and on each side
of all pipe (including bells) , valves and fittings .
Excavated rock shall be replaced with compacted sand.
Backfilling shall be with sand.
9. Proper and suitable tools and equipment for convenient
and proper handling and laying of pipe and fittings
shall be used. Great care shall be taken to prevent
entrance of dirt or foreign matter into the pipe and
to prevent damage of pipe lining and coating. Open
ends of pipes shall be kept plugged or bulkheaded
during construction.
10. Whenever pipes require cutting, use tools specifically
designed to cut pipe so as to leave a smooth end at
right angles to the axis of pipe. The cut end shall
be ground or filed to a slight taper so as not to
damage rubber gaskets. The spigot end of pipe shall
be installed at the correct depth in the bell.
11. When making plain end connections with a sleeve, an
approved cast coupling shall be used.
12. All valve boxes and curb boxes shall be clean, set
squarely down on the valve or curb stop, centered and
plumb over the wrench nut of the valve or operating
rod of the curb stop, and shall have a residual
adjustment of 6" when set to grade. All valves and
curb stops shall be suitably marked and adequately
protected during construction.
13. Thrust blocking and restraints for all plugs, caps,
tees , bends, tapping sleeves and other fittings shall
be provided with concrete thrust blocking or suitable
w metal rods and clamps to resist test pressures and to
prevent movement. All concrete shall be 3000 psi and
shall be placed around the fittings to completely fill
the space between the fittings and the undisturbed
walls of the trench. Concrete shall not overlap any
joint and shall be placed so as not to interfere with
removing or installing any of the jointing hardware.
02615 - 5
on
ow
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
..w
Section 02615 - Page 4
be permitted unless the pipe is to be laid with a
concrete cradle or encasement or inside a tunnel or .,
casing pipe. When pipe is laid in a tunnel or casing,
the pipe shall be blocked in such a manner so as to
take the weight off the bells. Sufficient selected
bedding and backfill shall be placed or other "^
precautions taken to prevent flotation, movement , or
damage to the pipe, fittings and coatings.
5. Pipe installation for trench in earth shall conform to
ANSI/AWWA Standard C600-77 Laying Condition Type 4
with the pipe bedded in tamped and shaped select
bedding material to a depth of 1/8 of the pipe
diameter or a 3 inch minimum, whichever is greater,
followed with tamped pipe zone backfill up to the top
of the pipe.
6. Excavation below grade and select bedding shall be in
accordance with Section 3 . 2 of ANSI/AWWA Standard w
C600-77 . Select bedding material shall consist of
compacted sand, gravel , or crushed stone depending on
conditions. Backfilling shall be the same as above.
7. Backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 3. 5 of
ANSI/AWWA Standard C600-77 using satisfactory
excavated material, or sand, gravel or other special
trench backfill as required by the Engineer/Architect .
The backfill shall be placed by hand or approved
mechanical means to a depth of one (1) foot over the
top of the pipe to provide a cushion and prevent
movement and damage to the pipe during subsequent
backfilling with equipment.
8. The standard pipe installation for trench in rock
shall conform to ANSI/AWWA Standard C600-77 Laying
Condition Type 3 with the pipe bedded in tamped and
shaped select bedding material to a depth of 1/8 of
the pipe diameter or a 6-inch minimum, whichever is
greater , followed with tamped pipe zone backfill up to
the top of the pipe. Rock excavation below grade and
select bedding shall be in accordance with Section 3. 2
of ANSI/AWWA Standard C600-77. Ledge rock, boulders
02615 - 4
xx
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Section 02615 - Page 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Prior to all work , inspect the site and verify that
construction may properly begin.
B. Do not start work until all. unsatisfactory conditions are
brought to the attention of the Engineer and are
corrected.
3 .02 INSTALLATION
A. Workmanship:
1. Examine all materials before installation and assure
no defective materials are incorporated into the work .
B. Placement of PVC:
1. Trenching , backfilling and compacting shall be
performed and shall be compacted to 95% Standard
Proctor Density in roadways and 80% in cross country
locations.
2. The trenches shall be kept free from water when water
main installation is in progress.
3. Trenches shall be open cut from the surface deep
enough to provide a minimum of 5 feet of cover over
the barrel of the pipe from the finished grade .
Trenches should be wide enough to provide at least a
6 inch clearance on each side of the bell of the pipe.
The maximum trench width at the top of the pipe shall
be no greater that the nominal pipe size diameter plus
24 inches .
4. All pipe and appurtenances shall be laid on good
foundations to provide full support for the entire
length of the pipe. At the joints , enough width and
depth, including bell holes, shall be made to permit
proper jointing. Blocking support of pipe shall not
�, 02615 - 3
am
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
no
Section 02615 - Page 2
1 .04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer ' s certificates of material
conformance.
B. Submit catalogue cuts of all materials to be incorporated
into the system.
1 .05 JOB CONDITIONS u.
A. Water System Control:
Im
1. All water mains and services installed on public or
private property that are connected directly or
indirectly to the Owner ' s water system shall be
subject to the control of the Owner.
2. Operation of all valves and hydrants under pressure
shall be done only by representatives of the Owner or •
by such responsible persons approved by the Owner.
3. The Owner and Engineer shall be notified at least 48
hours prior to the start of pressure testing, leakage
testing and disinfection.
1 .06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING am
A. Deliver, store and handle all materials in accordance with
their respective section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall conform to their respective section.
MW
B. All water mains 6 inches through 12 inches in diameter
shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) , AWWA C900 - Class 150.
40
02615 - 2
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Section 02615 - Page 1
SECTION 02615
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK UNITS
A. Construction of water distribution systems.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02226: Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
B. Section 02641: Valves
C. Section 02650: Disinfection of Water Distribution System
D. Section 02680: Testing Water Mains
1 .03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or
exceed minimum requirements as specified.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Materials shall be of the size , type and class as
shown on the Contract Drawings .
+, . 2. Installation of all water mains and appurtenances
shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600-77 and in
accordance with the material manufacturer ' s
recommendations , except as modified herein or as
directed by the Engineer.
02615 - 1
SITE UTILITIES
�s
Section 02540 - Page 3
F. Telephone wiring shall be Telephone Company standard
wiring with a one hundred (100) pair capacity.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all site utility systems in accordance with the
!*� Electrical Company, Telephone Company, Gas Utility Company
and the City of Northampton ' s specifications and
procedures .
END OF SECTION
PIP
on
02540 - 3
.,s
SITE UTILITIES
Section 02540 - Page 2
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02226: Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting
1 .03 LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A. All work shall be performed and completed in accordance
with regulations of local municipality and other county ,
state , national or utility company standards as they
apply.
B. Secure all necessary permits from and furnish proof of
acceptance by the municipal and state departments having
jurisdiction. Pay for all such permits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Gravity sewers from ten feet (10 ' ) beyond the building
shall be PVC (see Specification Section 02618 for PVC
piping) .
B. Water pipe from street to building shall be as specified
in Section 02615, Water Distribution Systems. The water
gate valve on the new water line shall meet the following
requirements :.
(Relocate existing valve and valve box. )
C. Natural gas line from the Utility Company 's gas main to
the building shall be plastic and shall be in accordance
with specifications of the Gas Company, Baystate Gas
Company. The gas line shall be installed from the gas
main to the gas meter by the Gas Company. Contractor to
pay for any fees and charges . Contractor to provide all
trenching and backfilling.
D. Electrical conduit shall be PVC conduit in accordance with
the Massachusetts Electrical Code . See Electrical
Specification Sections for wiring information.
E. Telephone conduit shall be PVC conduit of the same type as oft
the electrical site conduit .
ON
02540 - 2
on
SITE UTILITIES
Section 02540 - Page 1
SECTION 02540
SITE UTILITIES
�w
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Relocate the existing buried water service as shown in the
Contract Documents. Relocate the existing post indicator
valve and the existing gate valve as shown on the Contract
Documents .
Note: This relocation of all water lines and accessories
shall be done by the Plumbing Subcontractor , not
the Site Contractor , in accordance with the
Massachusetts Plumbing Code.
B. Relocate the existing sanitary sewer line from ten feet
(10 ' ) outside of the building to the new sanitary sewer
connection point at the new manhole as shown on the
Contract Drawings .
C. Relocate the existing gas line from the connection point
shown on the Drawings to the new meter location at the
outside of the building. All gas line work to the meter
shall be by the Gas Company, Baystate Gas Company. The
Contractor shall pay for all Gas Company charges for the
new service.
.' D. Furnish and install new buried electrical wiring in
conduit as shown in the Contract Documents .
E. Remove existing storm drainage and install new storm
drainage lines as shown on the Contract Drawings .
F. Furnish and install new telephone wiring in conduit from
the Hospital to the mobile .van pad.
02540 - 1
00
ASPHALT (BITUMINOUS) CONCRETE PAVEMENT
.m
Section 02513 - Page 6
e
H. New Paved Areas : Pitch to be shown on the Contract
Drawings.
3.06 PROTECTION ..�
A. Protect paving from damage due to construction and
vehicular traffic until final acceptance. oft
3.07 CLEANING
aw
A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon
completion of the work . Remove from site all excess
materials, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting oft
from paving operations.
B. Sweep pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations,
dirt, and other foreign materials immediately prior to
final acceptance.
END OF SECTION
4W
w
am
02513 - 6
an
ASPHALT (BITUMINOUS) CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Section 02513 - Page 5
approved by the Architect, and damaged portions removed
and replaced , and the entire surface thoroughly cleaned
before application of asphalt concrete.
3.05 INSTALLATION - ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. Remove loose and foreign materials from compacted
processed crushed gravel base immediately before
application of surface materials. Do not start work until
all other work which may damage the finish surface is
completed.
B. Install bituminous concrete pavement in two courses .
all Binder 2" (base course) and wearing course (top course) ,
1".
C. Apply tack coat on bituminous concrete binder course,
following acceptance by the Architect, at a rate of 0.05
to 0. 10 gallons per square yard. Allow to dry and cure as
required.
D. Place , spread, and strike off the bituminous concrete
mixture on a properly prepared and conditioned surface.
Inaccessible and small areas may be placed by hand. Place
the required grade, cross-section, and scheduled compacted
thickness.
E. Carefully make joints between old and new pavements, and
between successive day' s work, to ensure a continuous bond
between adjoining work. Construct joints to have the same
texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the
bituminous. concrete course.
*■ F. Begin rolling operations when the bituminous concrete
mixture will bear the weight of the roller without
excessive displacement . Compact areas inaccessible to
rolle-rs with vibrating plate compactors.
G. When during progress of work, field tests indicate that
installed compacted materials do not meet specified
requirements , remove defective materials , install new
materials , and retest at Contractor 's expense, as directed
by the Architect.
02513 - 5
ASPHALT (BITUMINOUS) CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Section 02513 - Page 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine sub-grades and installation conditions. Do not ..
start bituminous concrete paving work until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Proof roll the subgrade and do all necessary rolling and
compacting to obtain firm, even subgrade surface. Fill
and consolidate depressed areas . Remove incompatible
materials ; replace with clean fill , and compact as
specified in Section 02000.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with Asphalt Institute (AI ) MS-3 Asphalt Plant .K
Manual for material storage, control and mixing, and for
plant equipment and operation.
B. Transport bituminous concrete mixtures from the mixing
plant to the project site in trucks with tight , clean
compartments.
3.04 INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIALS
A. Install fill material and compacted structural gravel sub- .,
base materials. Max three (3) inches each layer total of
twelve (12) inches.
B. Install compacted processed crushed gravel base two (2)
inches thick over the new gravel sub-base.
C. Compact aggregate base materials until a uniformly smooth,
hard surface , complying with the lines , grades ,
elevations, and cross-sections shown has been established.
D. Compacted aggregate base may be used as a wearing surface
during construction operations. If used, base shall be
02513 - 4
ASPHALT (BITUMINOUS) CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Section 02513 - Page 3
w.
2. Install bituminous materials only when base is dry and
air temperature is 40 degrees F or above.
B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines
and grades, including crown, and cross-slopes , for each
course during paving operations.
C. Testing of Compacted Gravel : Contractor to hire and pay
for an independent testing laboratory to perform
compaction testing on the new gravel base. Submit testing
results to the Architect for approval. Compaction tests
.w to be in accordance with the Massachusetts Department of
Public Works Standards.
D. Provide temporary barricades as required for protection of
project work and public safety.
E. Protect adjacent work from damage, soiling and staining
during paving operations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Subgrade Fill : Compacted structural gravel, surface sub-
base twelve inches (12") thick with an additional base
layer of two .inches (2" ) thick processed crushed gravel.
B. Tack Coat : Asphalt emulsion SS-1, SS-1h , CSS-1, or CSS-
lh.
C. Bituminous Concrete: Class 1, bituminous concrete base,
type I-1, and bituminous concrete pavement , as specified
in the Massachusetts Department of Public Works Standard
Specifications for Highways and Bridges , 1973 . Total
"R pavement thickness to be three (3) inches.
D. Pavement Paint: Paint shall be suitable roadway marking
paint and shall be approved by the Architect . Color-
""' White.
ew
02513 - 3
.w
ASPHALT (BITUMINOUS) CONCRETE PAVEMENT
,w
Section 02513 - Page 2
1. Massachusetts Department of Public Works, Standard
Specifications for Highways and Bridges, 1973 :
a . Section 420 - Class I Bituminous Concrete Base
Course, Type I-1. ..
b. Section 460 - Class I Bituminous Concrete
Pavement .
2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM) .
3. American Association of State Highway and ...
Transportation Officials , (AASHTO) .
4. Asphalt Institute, (AI) . ..
C. Promptly notify Architect of unsatisfactory subgrade soil
conditions .
..
1 .03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: 00
1. Submit complete materials list of items proposed for
the work . Identify materials source.
s.
2. Submit pavement striping paint data.
1 .04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING am
A. Deliver traffic paint in manufacturer ' s original ,
unopened, and undamaged containers with labels intact and am
legible.
B. Store and handle products to prevent damage and
deterioration .
1 .05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A . Weather Limitation:
1. Do not install base course materials over wet or
frozen subgrade surfaces .
02513 - 2 «*
ASPHALT (BITUMINOUS) CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Section 02513 - Page 1
SECTION 02513
ASPHALT (BITUMINOUS) CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide bituminous concrete paving as shown and specified.
The work includes :
1. Furnishing and installing final subgrade preparation,
paving base and sub-base , as shown on the Contract
' Drawings .
2. Furnishing and installing parking lot paving, roadway
paving, and a one ( 1) inch overlay paving layer on all
of the existing paving , as shown on the Contract
Drawings .
3. Furnishing and installing new traffic directional
signage striping.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 02000: Site Work.
2. Section 02110 : Site Preparation.
3. Section 03001 : Concrete.
4. General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements .
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Section 02000 requirements .
B. Materials and methods of construction shall comply with
the following standards :
02513 - 1
s
FINISH GRADING
Section 02260 - Page 3
w
1. Six inches for seeded areas .
2. 24 inches for shrub beds.
B. Use top soil in relatively dry state. Place during dry
weather .
C. Fine grade topsoil eliminating rough and low areas to
ensure positive drainage. Maintain levels , profiles , and
contours of sub grades.
wv D. Remove stone, roots , grass , weeds , debris and other
foreign material while spreading, by means of a fine rake.
E. Manually spread top soil around building to prevent damage
which may be caused by grading equipment .
F. Lightly compact placed top soil .
3.03 SURPLUS MATERIAL
A. Remove surplus sub soil and top soil from site.
B. Leave stockpile areas and entire job site clean and finely
raked, ready to receive landscaping and grass seeding.
END OF SECTION
02260 - 3
40
FINISH GRADING
Section 02260 - Page 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 SUB-SOIL PREPARATION "
A. Rough grade sub soil systematically to allow for a maximum
amount of natural settlement and compaction. Eliminate
uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots,
branches , stones , etc. , in excess of one inch in size.
Remove sub soil which has been contaminated with petroleum
products .
B. Cut out areas, to sub-grade elevation, which are to
receive stabilizing base for paving and sidewalks.
C. Bring sub soil to required levels, profiles and contours.
Make changes in grade gradual . Blend slopes into level
areas.
D. Slope grade away from building minimum two inches in 10 .�
feet unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.
E. Cultivate sub grade to a depth of three inches where top
soil is to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas where
equipment , used for hauling and spreading top soil, has
compacted sub soil.
F. Compact sub soil to the following:
1. 1000 pounds/cubic foot, dry density, where topsoil is .�
to be placed.
2. 3000 pounds/cubic foot, dry density, where stabilizing
base for concrete paving is to be placed.
3. 3000 pounds/cubic foot, dry density, where stabilizing
base for concrete sidewalks is to be placed.
3.02 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Place topsoil in areas where seeding or sodding and
planting is to be performed. Place to the following
minimum depths, up to finished grade elevations :
02260 - 2
FINISH GRADING
Section 02260 - Page 1
SECTION 02260
FINISH GRADING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Finish grade sub-soil.
B. Cut out areas to receive stabilizing base course materials
for concrete paving and sidewalks .
C. Place finish grade and compact top soil.
1 .02 PROTECTION
A. Prevent damage due to the existing buildings, bench marks ,
pavement , utility lines and topography. Correct damage at
no cost to the Owner .
PART 2 PRODUCT
2 .01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Friable loam, free from sub-soil, roots , grass,
excessive amounts of weeds , stones and foreign matter;
acidity range (pH) of 5. 5 to 7. 5 ; containing a minimum of
4% and a maximum of 25% organic matter . Use topsoil
stockpiled on site if conforming to these requirement . If
the topsoil on the site is not of sufficient quantity,
then the Contractor shall supply additional topsoil , in
accordance with these requirements .
w.
02260 •- 1
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
Section 02226 - Page 10
1) Backfill material shall be placed in
horizontal layers not exceeding one foot
thick and be thoroughly compacted by
mechanical compaction. If backfill material
is suitable and the Contractor can
demonstrate adequate compaction ,
consolidation may be carried out by hydraulic
compaction.
D. Utility Protection:
1. Support and protect from injury all existing utility
lines and structures which are encountered, uncovered ..
or hazarded by excavation operations, which do not, in
the opinion of the Architect , require to be changed in
locations. If damaged or removed, restore to as good "*
condition as when found at Contractor 's expense.
2. Provide temporary channels of flow for all water
courses , and restore to original condition at
completion of backfilling.
3. Give written notice to owners of existing utilities or
structures in time for the to cooperate in protecting
their property.
4. Contractor shall hold the Owner harmless against:
a . Obstructions to flow of drains , ditches , or
streams .
b. Injury to electric , telephone lines , gas and water
lines .
no
END OF SECTION
g..
an
02226 - 10 so
as
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
u.e
Section 02226 - Page 9
C . If settlement or washout occurs before Final
Inspection, furnish , place and compact additional
material to resurface the low places as directed
by the Architect.
d. Maintain dust control at all times.
2. Heavy equipment shall not be allowed to pass over the
pipe until a fill of at least 2 foot depth has been
.w placed over the pipe . In any case , movement of
construction equipment and all other vehicles and
loads over and adjacent to any pipe shall be done at
the Contractor 's risk. When determined by the
Architect , any pipe that is damaged or disturbed
- through any cause, shall be replaced as directed by
the Architect, at the expense of the Contractor and at
no cost to the Owner.
3. Methods of Compaction:
a . Hand Compaction: Tamping by hand with flat hand
tampers .
b. Mechanical Compaction : Compaction by means of
vibratory or other mechanical tampers.
4. Backfilling and consolidation shall be by one of the
following procedures, as directed by the Architect ,
depending on the nature of the backfill material and
the location of the trench.
a . Cross -country conditions where reasonable
subsequent trench settlement can be tolerated:
1) Backfill material shall be placed in 2-foot
layers and consolidated by mechanical or
hydraulic compaction , or the repeated
traveling action of construction equipment .
The top layer shall be similarly compacted
and mounded as required to allow for
subsequent settlement . The surface shall be
maintained prior to fine grading and seeding ,
and thereafter repaired as necessary for the
duration of the maintenance period.
b. Roads and drives of paved areas where no
significant settlement can be tolerated - 95%
Modified Proctor Density Compaction:
,�„ 02226 - 9
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
Section 02226 - Page 8
2. If the bottom of the trench is soft and , in the
opinion of the Architect, cannot support the pipe or
structure , additional trench depth shall be excavated
as ordered by the Architect , and refilled with
specified crushed stone.
3. Where , in the opinion of the Architect, the natural
soil material is suitable for bedding the pipe , no
excavation and bedding will be required below the +•�
bottom of pipe.
4. Bedding Compaction:
a. Below pipe and structures: Compact to not less
than 95% of modified Proctor maximum density, at
or below optimum moisture content in conformance
with ASTM D1557.
b. Material shall be deposited evenly on both sides
of the pipe in tamped layers not exceeding 6
inches in depth until at least three-fourths the
depth of the pipe has been reached . For wide
trenches tamping shall be done for a distance on
each side of the pipe equal to at least the
diameter of pipe . Any pipe that is damaged or
moved out of alignment, regardless of cause, shall
be replaced or realigned at the Contractor ' s *
expense.
C. Backfill - General: 4 ,
1. Backfill excavations with Special Trench Backfill as
specified , shown on the Contract Drawings or as
directed by the Architect . Material shall be placed
and compacted to 95% standard proctor density from the
top of the Pipe Zone. Backfill to the surface of the
ground or the bottom of any special surface treatment , •
such as pavement subbase or topsoil.
a. Do not backfill against concrete walls or other
structures until they have attained sufficient
strength to safety resist the thrust of fill
materials .
b. Do not backfill with frozen materials.
02226 - 8
on
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
Section 02226 - Page 7
5. Maintenance of Trench :
a . Keep sides of excavation from slides, cave-ins.
Use any method including , but not limited to :
temporary sheeting, shoring, bracing, cribbing.
b. Furnish and install sheeting and shoring to
support the sides of all trenches and other
excavations . Remove sheeting and shoring as
excavation is filled.
C. Keep excavations free from water. Use any method
Aw including but not limited to : gravity flow ,
pumping , sumps . Maintain excavation in a dry
condition until backfill has been placed and
compacted a minimum of 18 inches above top of
pipe . In all cases , maintain dry trench at
backfill level.
6. Schedule:
a. Advance excavation operations ahead of pipe-laying
to allow for circumstances such as rock , other
utilities.
b. Limit excavations adhead of pipe-laying a maximum
of 200 feet , unless more is approved by Architect
in writing.
C . Confine excavation operations to reasonable limits
to facilitate traffic movement and reduce
inconvenience to property owner .
B. Bedding and Pipe Zone Backfill : The trenches for
pipelines shall have bottoms as shown on the Contract
Drawings conforming to the required grades . A11
excavations for pipelines shall be made to the depths
shown for pipe bedding.
1. If the bottom of trench becomes unsuitable for pipe
laying , due to Contractor ' s operations , he shall
provide extra excavation and backfill suitable to the
conditions at the area and bedding specified, at no
additional cost to Owner_ .
M
00 02226 - 7
40
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
Section 02226 - Page 6
1. Maintain , support and save from damage all public
utilities.
2. Allow reasonable time and space for Owner of private
utilities to cooperate in maintaining their
facilities. .�
3. Excavate test pits :
a. As directed by the Contract Drawings or as
directed by the Architect .
b. In advance of construction to determine precise
location of obstructions , utilities .
3 .03 PERFORMANCE
A. Excavation: Perform all earth excavation for construction
of pipe , appurtenances, structures , bedding and backfill.
Remove surface materials and drainage facilities: .A
1. Disposal of excavated material:
a . Store material suitable for backfill. Protect
from contamination .
b. All surplus earth , rock and other unsuitable or
unsatisfactory material shall be transported and
disposed of at an offsite location .
2. Cut and remove pavement to neat straight lines for
pavement restoration. Remove pavement to allow for a �.
minimum of 6 inches of undisturbed base on each side
of trench for pavement replacement .
3. Perform excavation in such manner and to such widths
as will give ample room for installing the pipe ,
appurtenances and structures , and for sheeting ,
bracing, pumping and draining.
4. Unauthorized Excavation : Unauthorized excavations
carried outside lines and grade shown on Contract
Drawings shall be filled by Contractor at no
additional cost to Owner as follows .
02226 - 6
�w
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
Section 02226 - Page 5
e. Location, size and description of property to be
replaced, including , but not limited to curbs ,
driveways , pavements , plantings , and lawn
furnishings.
f . Location of property markers, bench marks, USGS
Monuments , and ROW markers, within the Limits of
Construction which may be moved by the
Contractor 's operations .
2. After excavation , verify that pipes, structures and
appurtenances to be placed in trenches may be
installed in accordance with pertinent drawings and
specifications.
3. Before backfilling, verify:
a. Pipe, structures , and appurtenances have been
installed in accordance with pertinent drawings
and specifications.
b. Utilities are adequately continued, supported and
maintained without damage.
B. In the event of discrepancy or unsatisfactory condition,
immediately notify the Architect.
3 .02 PREPARATION
A. Notification: Before commencing excavation in any part of
w. the job, notify the following:
1. The Architect or the Owner 's representative.
! " 2. Adjacent and affected property occupants.
3. The Fire Department.
4. All public and private utilities whose facilities are
in the vicinity of the excavation . For gas ,
telephone, or electric lines , notify DIG SAFE one (1)
week before excavating.
B. Utility Protection and Changes : Where public and/or
private utilities are encountered:
02226 - 5
R*
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
war
Section 02226 - Page 4
1 .07 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Notify : DIG SAFE in the area , one ( 1) week prior to
starting excavation, for location of gas , telephone and
electric lines.
B. Notify : Other private and public utilities in the work
area.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS
■w
A. Bedding:
1. Sand : A natural run of bank sand graded, free of
lumps and frozen material . It shall not contain slag,
cinders, ashes, rubbish , vegetation, or other foreign
material . ,,,
B. Special Trench Backfill :
1. Run-of-Bank Gravel or Sand to bottom of gravel base
for the new bituminous asphalt paving areas .
PART 3 EXECUTION an
3 .01 INSPECTION
so
A. Prior to all work, carefully inspect the site and verify
that construction may properly commence.
1. Before excavation verify: '®
a. Work layout , horizontal and vertical , and
conformance of layout with Contract Drawings .
b. Limits of construction .
C. Surface drainage and driveway alignments , both
vertical and horizontal .
d. Utility locations , including, but not limited to:
aerial , pole - lines , buried , underground
transmission , local service and individual
connections .
02226 - 4
on
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
OR
Section 02226 - Page 3
C . Line of neat pavement cut: Do not vary more than
twelve (12) inches in 50 feet , and not more than
one ( 1) inch in ten ( 10) feet from a straight
horizontal line.
W* 2. Install gravel bedding under all new utility lines.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Comply with Massachusetts Department of Labor and
Industries , Industrial Safety Division.
2. Comply with Subpart P , "Excavations, Trenching, and
Shoring" of U.S . Department of Labor OSHA Regulations
for Construction .
3. Comply with rules , regulations , laws concerning
construction activity in roads of the applicable
jurisdiction.
1 .05 SUBMITTALS
A. Material for Backfilling:
1. Fine sand from zone off the site.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Load and haul away excavated material not suitable for
other uses at the site. Use haul routes approved by the
municipality having jurisdiction. Keep haul routes clean
and free of dust . Provide dump at Contractor ' s expense,
4W and obtain approval for its use from municipality having
jurisdiction.
B. Store and stockpile material suitable for backfilling
within contract limits . Use all stockpiled material as
soon as practical. Do not allow material to erode or wash
w. into trench , onto road or adjacent property.
02226 - 3
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
owl
Section 02226 - Page 2
B. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements .
1 .03 DEFINITIONS
A. Earth Excavation : The removal of all material not
classified as rock over two (2) cubic yards in size.
B. Rock : Rock is defined as limestone, sandstone, shale,
granite; or similar material in solid beds or masses in
its original or stratified position which, in the opinion
of the Architect , can be removed only by blasting ,
drilling wedging , or use of pneumatic tools , and all
boulders of two ( 2) cubic yards in volume or larger .
Removal of materials which can be loosened with a pick or
backhoe , frozen materials , soft laminated shale or
hardpan, concrete pavements , curbs, and similar materials
shall be defined as earth excavation.
C. Hand Trench Excavation: Excavations performed manually
exceeding two (2) cubic yards in any one operation . Hand
trench excavation may be required to protect trees ,
utilities , etc. or as specified , shown on the Contract
Drawings or as directed by the Architect.
D. Backfilling : The placement or replacement of all soil
material as specified, shown on the Contract Drawings or
as directed by the Architect.
1 .04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ■.
A. Allowable Tolerances :
1. Alignment of Excavation: To permit construction of
pipe, structures , and appurtenances to the tolerances
specified under pertinent drawings and specifications . +
a . Trench bottom vertical alignment : Do not
excavate less , or two (2) inches more at any point ,
below proposed pipes and other structures than
dimension shown on Contract Drawings .
b. Trench sides horizontal alignment : Do not
excavate less than dimension shown on Contract
Drawings.
02226 - 2
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
Section 02226 - Page 1
SECTION 02226
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK UNITS
A. Excavation , backfill and compaction within the building
limits and excavation and backfill for utility lines
within the building limits.
B . Provide and/or maintain erosion and sediment control
measures in accordance with State and Local Regulations.
C. Disposal of non-useable excavated materials, salvage of
suitable material for backfill and removal of excess
material not suitable for re-use.
D. Excavation of surface materials, including pavements.
E. Maintenance of excavations including sheeting, dewatering,
bridging and fencing as necessary.
F . Excavation and backfill of test pits, as required by the
Architect .
G. Protection of existing utilities.
H. Excavation, backfilling and compaction of all mechanical ,
plumbing and electrical lines within the building.
I . Furnishing and installation of sand for backfilling around
new utility lines .
J. Reuse existing owner 's stockpiled subsoil at the site as
necessary for backfilling operations .
1 .02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02000 : Site Work.
02226 - 1
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
w�
Section 02219 - Page 6
3 .06 SURPLUS MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus excavation materials from the project area.
B. Leave stockpile areas completely free of all excess fill .R
materials .
3 .07 DEWATERING
.�r
A. Contractor shall dewater the building site during
construction if required by site conditions.
END OF SECTION '
ee
02219 - 6 *
low
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
Section 02219 - Page 5
F . Cut out soft areas of existing sub-grade. Backfill with
gravel and compact to required density.
G. Backfill areas to grade, contours, levels and elevations.
w H. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow
maximum time for natural settlement and compaction.
I . Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not
exceeding 6 inches loose depth. Use a method so as not to
disturb or damage building drainage system and foundation
r dampproof ing.
J. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to
attain required compaction density.
K. Backfill simultaneously on each side of foundation walls
to equalize soil pressures . Do not backfill against
foundation walls until the main floor is in place.
L. Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop
on walls before floor slabs are placed, erect necessary
shoring to counteract imbalance. Leave in place until
their removal is approved by Architect .
_3.05 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION
A. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls: Gravel fill to top of
sub-grade elevation. Compact to 2 ,000 pounds/cubic foot
dry density.
B. Within Building Area : Sand or bank run sand fill to
underside of stabilizing base course for floor slabs .
Compact to 3,000 pounds/cubic foot , dry density.
C. Stabilizing Base Course Under Concrete Slabs Within
Building Area :
1. Four ( 4 ) inches gravel fill to underside of slabs.
Compact to 3 ,000 pounds/cubic foot , dry density.
D. Gravel areas under parking surfaces to provide compaction
required for stable parking surface installation.
* 02219 - 5
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
s�
Section 02219 - Page 4
B. Notify utility companies to remove and relocate lines
which are in the way of excavation. **
C. Maintain, re-route or extend as required, existing utility
lines to remain which pass through work area.
D. Pay costs for this work, except those covered by utility
companies .
aw
E. Protect utility services uncovered by excavation.
F. Remove abandoned utility service lines from areas of ..
excavation; cap, plug or seal such lines and identify at
grade.
G. Accurately locate and record abandoned and active utility
lines re-routed or extended, on Project Record Documents.
H. Excavations are not to interfere with normal 45 degree
bearing splay of any foundation.
I . Remove excess of unsuitable excavated sub-soil from site.
J. Removal of boulders or buried rock in excess of two (2)
cubic yards will be authorized as an extra; other work is
deemed to be within the scope of the Section.
3 .04 BACKFILLING
..r
A. Stockpile fill materials in areas on site acceptable to
Owner or stockpile off-site.
B. Do not start backfilling operations until concrete
foundations have been inspected.
C. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow,
ice and water , and that ground surfaces are not in a
frozen condition.
D. Do not backfill over existing sub-grade surfaces which are
porus , wet or spongy.
E. Compact existing sub-grade surfaces if densities are not
equal to that required for backfill materials .
02219 - 4 ..,►
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
Section 02219 - Page 3
w.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 FILL MATERIALS
A. Gravel : Angular pit run stone, free from shale, clay,
friable materials and debris; grade within the following
limits:
Sieve Size % Passing
1 Inch 95%
No . 4 0%
B. Sand: Clean natural river or bank sand ; free from silt ,
clay , loam , friable or soluble materials , and organic
matter ; graded within the following limits:
Sieve Size % Passing
No. 4 100%
No. 40 0%
C. Sub-Soil: Free from roots, rocks larger than 3 inches in
size and building debris.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION AND LAYOUT
A. Establish extent of excavation by area and elevation;
designate and identify datum elevation .
B. Set required lines and levels.
C . Maintain bench marks , monuments and other reference
points .
3 .02 UTILITIES
A . Before starting excavation, establish location and extent
of underground utilities occurring in work area.
'" 02219 - 3
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
Section 02219 - Page 2
submit test results to Architect for review. Compaction
tests to be taken at the rate of one (1) test for every
2,000 square feet of area.
B. If , during progress of work, tests indicate that compacted
materials do not meet specified requirements , remove
defective work , replace and re-test at no cost to the
Owner .
C. Ensure compacted fills are tested before proceeding with
placement of surface materials , 3000 psf, minimum.
1 .04 PROTECTION
A. Protect bench marks and existing structures , roads ,
sidewalks , paving and curbs against damage from equipment '
and vehicular or foot traffic.
B. Protect excavations by shoring or bracing, underpinning,
or other methods , as required to prevent cave-ins or loose
dirt from falling into excavations.
C. Notify Architect of unexpected sub-surface conditions and
discontinue work in area until Architect provides
notification to resume work.
D. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath
foundations from frost .
E. Grade around excavations to prevent surface water run-off
into excavated areas .
1 .05 ORIGINAL SOIL VERIFICATION MP
A . The Contractor will hire an independent Testing and Soils
Engineer to verify that the Contractor has dug the ow
excavation down to a level which has exposed the original
soil of the site (not fill ) . The independent Soils
Engineer shall submit a letter to the Architect and the .�.
Owner stating that the Contractor ' s structure excavation
will allow the building addition to be constructed on
original soil.
02219 - 2
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
Section 02219 - Page 1
SECTION 02219
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1 GENERAL
! " 1.01 GENERAL
A. Excavate for the building and all other required items
and remove surplus sub-soil and dispose of this subsoil
off-site.
B. Cap off and seal discontinued utility services and remove
portions of these lines within excavated areas .
C. Shore and brace excavations as required.
D. Place and compact fills to rough grade elevations for
building and site. Provide compacted fill within building
additions .
E. De -water excavations as necessary throughout the
construction period.
F. Backfilling of all excavations.
w 1 .02 RELATED WORK
A . Section 02000: Site Work.
B. Section 02110: Site Preparation .
C. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements .
1 .03 SITE COMPACTION TESTING
A. Testing of compacted fill materials will be performed by
an independent testing laboratory appointed and paid for
by the Contractor . Testing will be performed so as to
least encumber the performance of the work . Contractor to
02219 - 1
t
t
wool-
'.:.
E - 0TTZ0
NOISDSS 30 QNS
•SUOT4eaado xaoM agTS aoj aTge4Tns pup
stagap pup sTetaa4ew go aaag pup ueaTa 'aeala a4TS apinoad
• 4uawdinba pue sTo04 anouiaa JS4TWTI gaea4uoo UTg4TM
Seale ueala 'xaoM uotgeaedaad agzs Jo uot4aTduioa uodp •� """"
9NINVH13 i�0•£
•pag4tuiaad
qou st STetaa4eul peaeaID aTgT4sngwoo Jo buivanq ages-uo •�
• STagep
go aaag pup 'upaTo ' zeaTo 'sa4noa Tesodszp uze4uteW •g
•pa44tuiaad qou si uot4eTnumooV • stagap pup sletaa42W
a4seM Te go asodsip ATTebaT pue 1a4Ts uioa3 Ineg ' aTTdxoo4S •�
S'IVIESIVW SSS`dM 30 'IVSOdSIQ £0•£ r
• xaoM Mau Jo uoi4eTTe4sut pup butuiaoJ 4tuiaad
04 8oue4STp 4u9t3tjjns e butned 5ui4sixa xaeq 4nO •xaoM
5UT4STxa 4uaOeCpe 04 Mau uioaJ uot4tsue14 uana 'waojtun
aptnoad oq sautT 401ea4s 14eau ui butned pue 'sgano
but4sixa 4nD •uoT4ona4suo3 Mau agepouiui000e oq paainbaa
se 'Teia94eW aseq Ile butpnloui 'nuTAed buT4STxa anoutag •0 wit
• s9T4TTT4n butgsixe go uoi4eool
43exa OUTU11949p 04 paatnbaa se sadzd 4saq a4eneax3
•pea4ueaen5 4ou sT pue uotgeuiaoJui aoJ ATuo pagstuanj
ST uot4euiaoJut Bans TTV •algeltene AT4uasaad
saaanos 4saq ago uioal ST SaOtnaas pup sauiT A4zTt4n
£ abed - 0TIZ0 u01400S
NOIIV VdSdd SZI S
SITE PREPARATION
Section 02110 - Page 2
E. Provide necessary barricades for the protection of
workers , property users and the general public on a 24- «�
hour basis from personal injury.
1 .04 RELATED WORK
wo
A. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions,
Special Conditions and General Requirements .
B. Section 02000 - Site Work Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials and Equipment : As selected by the Contractor ,
except as indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION s�
3 .01 CLEARING
A. Remove existing concrete slabs and asphalt paving.
B. Clear and grub areas within contract limits as required
for site access and execution of work .
3 .02 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing site improvements within contract limits
as indicated. Include the following:
1. Pavements.
2. Lowering manhole structures as required to new
elevations .
3. Other items shown on the contract drawings that are
scheduled to be removed.
B. Existing Utilities:
1. Information on the drawings relating to existing
02110 - 2
SITE PREPARATION
Section 02110 - Page 1
SECTION 02110
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. Perform site preparation work as shown and specified.
1. Protect equipment , existing building services,
individuals.
2. Remove existing asphalt and concrete paving and steps
as necessary for the new addition, new utility lines ,
concrete sidewalks, concrete pads, new asphalt paving,
and other site improvements .
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Section 02000 - Site Work Requirements.
1 .03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform site preparation work before commencing site
construction .
B. Locate, protect, and maintain active utilities and site
improvements to remain.
C. Provide necessary barricades, coverings , and protection to
prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to
remain.
D. Restore to original grades and conditions , areas adjacent
to site disturbed or damaged as a result of site
preparation work.
au.
■ 02110 - 1
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
Section 02072 — Page 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Erect weatherproof closures for exterior openings .
B. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions as required to
prevent the spread of dust , fumes and smoke to other parts
of the building . On completion, remove partitions and
repair damaged surfaces to match adjacent surfaces .
C. Carry out demolition work to cause as little inconvenience
to adjacent occupied building areas as possible.
3 .02 DEMOLITION
A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to
accommodate new work , including that required for
connection to the existing building. Protect existing **�
foundations and supporting structural members .
B. Perform demolition in accordance with applicable
authorities having jurisdiction .
C. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required
at no cost to the Owner .
D. Remove and dispose of demolished materials from site upon
completion of work . Leave site in a condition that is .�
acceptable to Architect.
END OF SECTION �**
..a
02072 - 2
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
Section 02072 - Page 1
w
,., SECTION 02072
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
a..
PART 1 GENERAL
a. 1 .01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Remove designated sections of the existing masonry walls
of the building where necessary to install the new
structural steel and new wall openings. Also, patch these
areas after the completion of the structural steel.
B. Remove the designated building components where shown on
the Contract Drawings , such as interior finishes ,
architectural elements , mechanical , plumbing and
electrical systems .
C. Cap or re-route exposed utilities where required.
1 .02 PROTECTION
A. Do not interfere with the use of adjacent portions of the
«w building. Maintain free and safe passage to and from.
B. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately if
safety of structure appears to be endangered . Take
precautions to properly support the structure. Do not
resume operations until safety is restored.
C. Provide, erect and maintain barricades , lighting and guard
rails as required by applicable regulatory agencies to
protect occupants of building and workers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Except where noted otherwise , maintain possession of
materials being demolished. Immediately remove from site.
02072 - 1
ASBESTOS REMOVAL
Section 02052 - Page 1
SECTION 02052
ASBESTOS REMOVAL
�w
ON
PART 1 GENERAL
an 1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. All asbestos removal work in regard to this project, if
any is encountered , will be completed by a separate
contractor who will be working directly for the Owner .
Therefore , all asbestos removal work is not in this
Contract .
B. The General Contractor and his Subcontractors shall
coordinate with the Asbestos Removal Contractor to
successfully complete the project.
C . The General Contractor shall schedule the Asbestos Removal
Contractor 's asbestos removal operations by giving the
Asbestos Removal Contractor sufficient written notice so
that he can schedule the work .
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
02052 - 1
on
DEMOLITION
on
Section 02050 - Page 5
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied
or used facilities , except when authorized by
Architect.
2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to
existing utilities as acceptable to the Architect .
3.04 DISPOSAL OR SALVAGE OF MATERIALS
ai.
A. Remove demolition debris from site in locally approved
waste area .
B. Do not burn materials on site.
3.05 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all debris , rubbish and materials resulting from
cutting, demolition or patching operations.
B. Transport materials and legally dispose of off site.
W END OF SECTION
go
no
02050 - 5
DEMOLITION
Section 02050 - Page 4
I . Provide temporary weather protection as necessary to
prevent damage to existing facilities and discomfort to
persons in occupied areas.
J. Coordinate with Owner prior to start of work.
K. Provide a mechanical dust evacuation air exhaust system as
required so dirt and dust will not be spread into the
remainder of the building. 1W
3.03 DEMOLITION - GENERAL
A. Occupied areas to be demolished will be vacated and
discontinued in use prior to start of work .
B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of
areas to be demolished.
C. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding
purposes will be maintained by Owner in so far as
practicable.
D. The Owner will have salvage rights to any component from
the existing building. If the Owner wants to retain any
specific item, the Contractor shall turn it over to the
Owner after he removes it from the building.
E. Storage or sale of removed items not permitted on site.
F . Conduct operations to prevent damage by falling debris or
other causes to adjacent areas and other facilities as
well as persons. ..
1. Provide interior shoring , bracing or support to
prevent movement , settlement or collapse of
structures .
G. Promptly repair damage to remaining facilities, caused by
demolition as directed by the Architect , at no cost to the
Owner .
H. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain. Keep in
service and protect against damage during demolition.
02050 - 4 "
DEMOLITION
Section 02050 - Page 3
AW
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Use temporary enclosures and other methods necessary to
limit spread of dust , dirt and air pollution .
B. Clean adjacent areas and improvements of all dust , dirt
and debris caused by demolition operations .
C. Return areas to condition existing prior to start of work.
3.02 OPERATION PROCEDURES
VW A. Start and complete work as established by approved
schedule.
1. Operational procedures and sequence of work optional
*' with Contractor , provided that the construction
schedule is maintained.
ow B. Protect occupants from injury and discomfort.
C . Protect property to remain.
D. Conduct operations to insure minimum interference with
roads , walks , entrances, exits and other adjacent occupied
facilities or areas.
E. Construct temporary partitions in public areas of clean,
painted, minimum 1/2" thick plywood.
F. Provide covered passageways where necessary to ensure safe
passage of persons in or near areas of work .
G. Provide barricades and safety lights as required.
H . Provide temporary dustproof partitions where necessary to
prevent infiltration of dust into the work areas of the
building.
02050 - 3
DEMOLITION
w.
Section 02050 - Page 2
B. Use only firms or individual trades qualified to perform
work required under this Section . ..
1 .03 SUBMITTALS (See Section 01340)
A. Details of proposed methods and operations.
B. Notify the Owner ten (10) days in advance of schedule of
coordination for shut-off , capping and continuation of
utility services.
C. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure ..
uninterrupted progress of Owner 's operations .
1 .04 JOB CONDITIONS
wA
A. Perform preliminary investigations as required to
ascertain extent of work . Conditions which would be
apparent by such investigation will not be allowed as
cause for claims for extra costs , even if the work in
questions is not shown on the contract documents as a
specific scope of work item.
B. Before start of work , obtain and pay for all permits
required by all authorities having jurisdiction and notify
all interested utility companies . aw
C. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction for
work which affects existing exitways , exit stairs , means ,w
of egress , or access to, or exit from, areas .
1 . Review with and obtain approval of authorities for any
temporary construction which affects such area.
2. Obtain approval of fire authorities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. Use similar materials as required to repair and match
items .
02050 - 2
DEMOLITION
Section 02050 - Page 1
SECTION 02050
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor , materials , tools , equipment and
services for all demolition as indicated , in
accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades .
ow
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated ,
furnish and install supplementary or miscellaneous
�► items , appurtenances and devices incidental to or
necessary for a sound , secure and complete
installation.
"M 4. See the General Requirements sections of the
Specifications .
Wt 5. The General Contractor will be responsible for all
demolition for this project.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere :
1. Section 01045: Cutting and Patching.
2. Section 02052: Asbestos Removal.
3. General Conditions , Supplementary General Conditions ,
Special Conditions and General Requirements .
1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Conduct all demolition work in accordance with OSHA and
EPA requirements .
02050 - 1
0M
SUB-SURFACE EXPLORATIONS
w.
Section 02001 - Page 2
am
2M
B. The Contractor shall make every effort to verify the
locations of any existing utility lines by notifying Dig- No
Safe, investigating available records, consulting with the
Hospital , and any other possible means .
C. The Contractor shall dig the holes in a careful manner so am
as not to damage any unknown utility lines that are
discovered during the digging.
am
3 .02 BACKFILLING TEST PITS
A. The Contractor shall compact the soil during backfilling Am
of the test pits in accordance with other sections of
these Specifications.
Am
WK
END OF SECTION
4M
am
4W
4M
am
02001 - 2 •'°
ON
aw
SUB-SURFACE EXPLORATIONS
Section 02001 - Page 1
wi.
SECTION 02001
SUB-SURFACE EXPLORATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
erR 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor will be required to dig and backfill three
(3) test pits for the Architect at the beginning of the
project so that existing utilities and soil bearing
conditions can be verified. The Contractor will be
required to schedule this work with the Architect and the
Owner one ( 1) week in advance of the work being performed.
The test pits shall be backfilled the same day as they are
dug so as not to have a hazardous condition.
B. The Contractor will be required to photograph each test
pit with a minimum of three ( 3) different views and
furnish one ( 1) copy of these photographs to both the
A Owner and the Architect .
C. The Contractor will be required to notify Dig-Safe to
locate all utilities prior to the test pits being dug.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 DIGGING TEST PITS
•■ A. The Architect will locate the test pits in the field to
ascertain unknown site conditions .
""" 02001 - 1
SITE WORK
Section 02000 - Page 2
C. Perform site work operations and the removal of debris and
waste materials to assure minimum interference with
streets , walks and other adjacent facilities.
D. Obtain governing authorities written permission when
required to close or obstruct streets , walks and adjacent
facilities. Provide alternate routes around closed or
obstructed traffic ways when required by governing
authorities. •�.
E. Control dust caused by the work. Dampen surfaces as
required. Comply with pollution control regulations of
governing authorities.
F. Protect existing buildings, paving, and other services or
facilities on site and adjacent to the site from damage
caused by site work operations. Cost of repair and
restoration of damaged items at Contractor 's expense.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ..�
A. Materials and equipment : As selected by Contractor ,
except as indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 PREPARATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which site work is
performed. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
B. Consult the records and drawings of adjacent work and of
existing services and utilities which may affect site work
operations .
END OF SECTION
w�
02000 - 2 ..►
4M
SITE WORK
so
Section 012000 - Page 1
wo
00
SECTION 02000
SITE WORK
e
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The general site work requirements apply to all site work
operations . Refer to individual specification sections
for specific general, product and execution requirements.
1 .02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with all applicable local, state and federal
requirements regarding materials , methods or work , and
disposal of excess and waste materials.
B. Obtain and pay for all required inspections, permits and
.. fees . Provide notices required by governmental
authorities.
C. Provide necessary barricades for the protection of
workers , site users and the general public on a 24-hour
basis.
1 .03 PRODUCT CONDITIONS
A. When uncharted or incorrectly charted underground piping
w
or other utilities and services are encountered during
site work operations, notify the applicable utility
company immediately to obtain procedure directions.
Cooperate with the applicable utility company in
maintaining active services in operation.
B. Locate, protect and maintain bench marks, monuments ,
control points and project engineering reference points .
Re-establish disturbed or destroyed items at Contractor 's
expense .
02000 - 1
•e
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ti
NOR
L
- _;k
A x
wr
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
..a
Section 01740 - Page 2
1.04 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Obtain warranties or bonds , executed in duplicate by ••
responsible Subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers ,
within ten ( 10 ) days after the completion of the
applicable item of work. Except for items put into use ..,
with Owner ' s permission, leave date of beginning of time
of warranty until date of Substantial Completion is
determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form and contain full
information.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for
submittals. s`
1.05 TIME OF SUBMITTALS
am
A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into
service during construction with Owner ' s permission ,
submit documents within ten (10) days after acceptance.
B. Make other submittals within ten (10) days after date of
Substantial Completion , prior to final Application for
Payment.
C. For items of work when acceptance is delayed beyond date
of Substantial Completion , submit within ten ( 10) days �•
after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the
beginning of the warranty period.
.A
END OF SECTION
01740 - 2 „�,
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
Section 01740 - Page 1
SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
,w PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Preparation of Submittal of Warranties and Bonds.
B. Schedule of Submittals.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders.
B. General Conditions.
C. Section 01701: Contract Closeout Procedures.
D. Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Data.
E. Individual Specification Sections: Warranties and Bonds
required for specific products or work.
1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch three-ring
binders with cleanable, plastic covers.
B. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES AND BONDS" , with title of project , name ,
address , and telephone number of Contract, and name of
responsible principal.
C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the
Table of Contents of the Project Manual , with each item
identified with the number and title of the Specification
Section in which specified, and the name of product or
work item.
D. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed
to the Table of Contents listing . Provide full
information , using separate typed sheets as necessary.
List Subcontractor, supplier and manufacturer, with name,
address and telephone number of responsible principal.
01740 - 1
OR
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Section 01730 - Page 4
L. Provide list of original manufacturer ' s spare parts ,
current prices , and recommended quantities to be
maintained in storage.
M. Include test and balancing reports.
N. Additional Requirements : As specified in individual
Specification Sections.
END OF SECTION
..r
01730 - 4
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Section 01730 - Page 3
w
D. Additional Requirements : As specified in individual
Specification Sections.
1.06 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System : Include
description of unit system and component parts . Give
function , normal operating characteristics and limiting
conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering
data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial
number of replacement parts.
B. Panelboard Circuit Directories : Provide electrical
service characteristics , controls and communications.
.w
C. Include as-installed, color-coded wiring diagrams.
D. Operating Procedures : Include start-up, break-in and
routine normal operating instructions and sequences .
Include regulation , control , stopping , shut-down and
emergency instructions. Include summer , winter and any
special operating instructions.
E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and
guide for trouble-shooting, disassembly , repair and
reassembly instructions ; and alignment , adjusting ,
balancing and checking instructions.
F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of
lubricants required.
G. Include manufacturer 's printed operation and maintenance
instructions.
H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
I . Provide original manufacturer 's parts list, illustrations,
assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
J. Provide as installed control diagrams by controls
manufacturer .
K. Provide Contractor ' s coordination drawings , with as-
installed color-coded piping diagrams.
01730 - 3
as
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
..
Section 617341 - Page 2
4W
G. Drawings : Provide with reinforced punched binder tab.
Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text
pages. o"
1 .64 CONTENTS
so
A. Table of Contents : Provide title of project ; names ,
addresses and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer and
Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of
products and systems, indexed to content of volume.
B. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and
telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers , .�.
including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
C. Product Data : Mark each sheet to clearly identify
specific products and component parts , and data applicable
to installation; delete inapplicable information.
D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations
of component parts of equipment and systems, to show
control and flow diagrams . Do not use Project Record
Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Typed Text : As required to supplement product data ,
provide logical sequence of instructions for each
procedure, incorporating manufacturer' s instructions.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each.
1.65 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Building Products , Applied Materials and Finishes :
Include product data , with catalog number , size ,
composition and color and texture designations. Provide
information for reordering custom manufactured products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance : Include
manufacturer 's recommendations for cleaning agents and
methods , precautions against detrimental agents and
methods , and recommended schedule for cleaning and
maintenance.
C. Moisture Protection and Weather-Exposed Products: Include
product data listing applicable reference standards ,
chemical composition , and details of installation .
Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance and
repair.
01730 - 2
so
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
am
Section 01730 - Page 1
SECTION 01730
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Format and Contents of Manuals.
B. Schedule of Submittals.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
B. Section 01701: Contract Closeout Procedures.
C. Section 01720 : Project Record Documents.
D. Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds.
!* E. Individual Specification Sections: Specific requirements
for operation and maintenance data.
1.03 FORMAT
A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
B. Binders: Commercial quality, B-1/2 inch x 11 inch three-
ring binders with cleanable , plastic covers . When
multiple binders are used , correlate data into related
consistent groupings.
C. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title
ww "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" ; list title of
project and identify subject matter of contents.
D. Arrange contents by systems , under section numbers and
sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual.
E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and
system, with typed description of product and major
component parts of equipment.
w F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.
01730 - 1
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Section 01720 - Page 3
w
w.
4. Number and title of each Record Document.
5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative.
END OF SECTION
w
01720 - 3
me
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
am
Section 01720 - Page 2
am
from Documents used for construction . Provide files ,
racks and secure storage for Record Documents and samples.
C . Label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance
with Section number listings in Table of Contents of this
Project Manual. Label each Document "PROJECT RECORD" in
neat , large, printed letters.
D. Maintain Record Documents in a clean , dry and legible
condition . Do not use Record Documents for construction
purposes.
E. Keep Record Documents and samples available for inspection ..
by Architect.
1 .04 RECORDING .W
A. Record information on a set of edited mylar Drawings
supplied by the Contractor.
B. Provide ink marking pens, maintaining separate colors for
each major system, for recording information.
C. Record information concurrently with construction
progress . Do not conceal any work until required
information is recorded.
D. Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each
item to record actual construction, including:
1. Field changes of dimension and detail.
2. Changes made by modification.
3. References to related shop drawings and modifications.
1 .05 SUBMITTALS
A. At Contract closeout, deliver Record Documents and samples
under provisions of Section 01701.
B. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number. ,
3. Contractor 's name, address and telephone number.
01720 - 2 '""
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Section 01720 - Page 1
SECTION 01720
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples.
B. Submittal of Record Documents and Samples.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. General Conditions.
B. Section 01340 : Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
C. Section 01701: Contract Closeout Procedures.
D. Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Data.
E. Individual Specification Sections : Manufacturer ' s
Certificates and Certificates of Inspection.
1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. In addition to requirements of General Conditions ,
maintain at site for Owner one record copy of :
1. Contract Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and Other Modifications to the Contract.
S. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
6. Field Test Records.
7. Inspection Certificates.
8. Manufacturer's Certificates.
` B. Store Record Documents and samples in field office apart
W 01720 - 1
am
FINAL CLEANING
a.
Section 01710 - Page 2
D. Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished
condition; remove foreign substances. Polish reflective ••
surfaces to a clear shine.
E. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication.
F. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and
replace disposable filters when units have been operated
during construction; in addition, clean ducts , blowers and
coils when units have been operated without filters during
construction.
4W
G. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
H. Maintain cleaning until Substantial Completion.
I . Remove waste , debris and surplus materials from site.
Clean grounds , remove stains , spills and foreign
substances from paved areas and sweep clean. Rake clean
other exterior surfaces.
J. Clean and wax all resilient floors , and vacuum all
carpets .
K. Clean and wash all windows.
no
L. Clean all plumbing fixtures.
M. Clean the interior of all new electrical panels.
END OF SECTION
w
4M
..
01710 - 2 .»
FINAL CLEANING
�w
Section 01710 - Page 1
�w
SECTION 01710
FINAL CLEANING
w PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Final Cleaning of Project.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
�s
A. General Conditions.
B. Section 01701 : Contract Closeout Procedures.
C. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific cleaning for
product or work.
1.03 DESCRIPTION
A. Execute cleaning prior to inspection for Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Use materials which will not create hazards to health or
property, and which will not damage surfaces.
B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer
of material being cleaned.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING
w A. In addition to removal of debris and cleaning specified in
other Sections, clean interior and exterior exposed-to-
view surfaces.
B. Remove temporary protection and labels not required to
remain.
C. Clean finishes free of dust, stains , films and other
foreign substances.
„�, 01710 - 1
.o
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
.w
Section 01701 - Page 4
we
so
1 .08 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT d"
A. Submit application for final payment in accordance with
provisions of Conditions of the Contract. w
END OF SECTION
.A
.W
am
01701 - 4 •
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Section 01701 - Page 3
Section 01730.
D. Warranties and Bonds: Under provisions of Section 01740.
E. Keys and Keying Schedule : Under provisions of Section
08700.
F. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance
with Conditions of the Contract.
G. Consent of Surety to Final Payment.
H. Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed
Operations: In accordance with Supplementary Conditions.
1.07 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to Contract
Sum indicating:
1. Original Contract Sum.
2. Previous Change Orders.
3. Deductions for Uncorrected Work.
4. Penalties and Bonuses.
5. Deductions for Liquidated Damages.
6. Deductions for Reinspection Fees.
7. Other Adjustments to Contract Sum.
8. Total Contract Sum as Adjusted.
9. Previous Payments.
10. Sum Remaining Due.
B. Architect will issue a final Change Order reflecting
approved adjustments to Contract Sum not previously made
by Change Order.
ON
c 01701 - 3
Am
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
so
Section 01701 - Page 2
certification:
1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract
Documents.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract
Documents and deficiencies listed with Certificate of
Substantial Completion have been corrected.
4. Equipment and systems have been tested and adjusted.
5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
B. Should Architect ' s inspection find work incomplete, he
will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, listing
observed deficiencies.
C. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second
certification of final completion.
D. When Architect finds work is complete, he will consider
closeout submittals.
1.05 REINSPECTION FEES
A. Should status of completion of work require reinspection
by Architect due to failure of work to comply with
Contractor ' s claims on initial inspection , Owner will
deduct the amount of Architect compensation for
reinspection services from final payment to Contractor.
1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Evidence of Compliance of Requirements of Governing
Authorities:
1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificate of Inspection.
B. Project Record Documents : Under provisions of Section
01720.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Under provisions of
01701 - 2 **
10
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Section 01701 - Page 1
SECTION 01701
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Administrative Provisions for Substantial Completion and
for Final Acceptance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. General Conditions.
B. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
C. Section 01710: Final Cleaning.
D. Section 01720: Project Record Documents.
E. Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Data.
F. Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds.
1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
w
A. When Contractor considers work, or designated portion of
work, is substantially complete, submit written notice
with list of items to be completed or corrected.
B. Should Architect ' s inspection find work is not
substantially complete , he will promptly notify the
Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies.
C. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second
written notice of substantial completion.
D. When Architect finds work is substantially complete, he
will .prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion in
accordance with provisions of General Conditions.
1.04 FINAL COMPLETION
A. When Contractor considers work is complete, submit written
�� 01701 - 1
am
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
op
Section 81630 - Page 4
1 .08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submit three (3) copies of request for substitution.
B. Architect will review the Contractor ' s requests for
substitutions with reasonable promptness .
C. During the Bidding Period , Architect will record
acceptable substitutions in Addenda.
D. After Award of Contract, Architect will notify Contractor ,
in writing , of decision to accept or reject requested
substitution within fifteen (15) days.
E. For accepted products, submit shop drawings, product data
and samples under provisions of Section 01340.
END OF SECTION
..E
w.
01630 - 4 ..
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
Section 01630 - Page 3
B. Identify product by Specification Section and Article
numbers. Provide manufacturer ' s name and address , trade
" name of product and model or catalog number . List
fabricators and suppliers as appropriate.
" C. Attach product data as specified in Section 01340.
D. List similar projects using product, dates of installation
and names of Architect and Owner.
E. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with
specified product, listing variations and reference to
Specification Section and Article number.
F. Give quality and performance comparision between proposed
substitution and the specified product.
G. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with
specified product and the amount of net change to Contract
Sum.
H. List availability of maintenance services and replacement
materials.
I . State effect of substitution on construction schedule and
changes required in other work or products.
1 .07 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION
A. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that
Contractor has investigated proposed product and has
determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects
to specified product, or that the cost reduction offered
is ample justification for accepting the offered
substitution.
B. Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution as
for specified product.
C. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted
substitute, making such changes as may be required for
work to be complete in all respects.
D. Contractor certifies that cost data presented is complete
and includes all related costs under this Contract.
E. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to
substitution which may later become apparent.
"'"
01630 - 3
ae
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
Section 01630 - Page 2
of manufacturer .
B. Tabulate products by Specifications Section number, title
and Article number .
C. For products specified only by reference standards, give •
manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation and
reference standards.
D. Architect will reply in writing within fifteen (15) days
stating whether there is reasonable objection to listed
items . Failure to object to a listed item shall not
constitute a waiver of requirements of Contract Documents.
1.05 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS
A. During Bidding Period , Supplementary General Conditions
and Instructions to Bidders govern times for submitting
requests for substitutions under requirements specified in ..
this Section.
B. Requests for substitutions of products will be considered
only within thirty ( 30) days after the date of Owner-
Contractor Agreement . Subsequent requests will be
considered only in case of product unavailability or other
conditions beyond the control of the Contractor.
C . Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on
shop drawings or product data submittals without separate
formal request, when requested directly by Subcontractor
or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial
revision of Contract Documents.
D. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed
without written acceptance.
E. Only one ( 1) request for substitution for each product
will be considered. When substitution is not accepted,
provide specified product.
F. Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions.
1 .06 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Submit separate request for each substitution. Document
each request with complete data substantiating compliance
of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract
Documents.
01630 - 2 '�"
ON
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
w
Section 01630 - Page 1
SECTION 01630
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor ' s Options in Selection of Products.
B. Products List.
C. Requests for Substitution of Products.
1 .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders.
B. Supplementary General Conditions.
C. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
D. Section 01720: Project Record Documents.
* E. Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Data.
1.03 OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by
Description Only: Any product meeting those standards.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers
with a Provision for Substitutions : Submit a request for
substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named.
C. Products Specified by Naming Several Manufacturers :
Products of named manufacturers meeting specifications; no
options, no substitutions.
D. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No
option, no substitution allowed.
1 .04 PRODUCT LIST
A. Within thirty (30) days after the date of Owner-Contractor
Agreement, transmit three (3) copies of a list of major
products which are proposed for installation; include name
01630 - 1
..
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
Section 01620 - Page 2
C. Provide humidity control and ventilation for sensitive
products as required by manufacturer 's instructions.
D. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or
in neat groups of like items.
3.03 EXTERIOR STORAGE
A. Any and all exterior storage must be approved of by the
Hospital 's representative.
B. Provide substantial platforms , blocking or skids to
support fabricated products above ground; slope to provide
drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining.
C. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration ..
from exposure to the elements, cover with impervious sheet
material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
D. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of
water.
E. Prevent mixing of refuse of chemically injurious materials
or liquids.
3 .04 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE
A. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis.
B. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer 's
product storage requirements.
C. Verify that manufacturer-required environmental conditions °
are maintained continually.
D. Verify that surface products exposed to the elements are ,
not adversely affected, that any weathering of finishes is
acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents.
3.05 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT STORAGE "
A. For mechanical and electrical equipment in long term
storage, provide manufacturer ' s service instruction to �*
accompany each item, with notice of enclosed instructions
shown on exterior of package.
END OF SECTION
01620 - 2 "�
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
Section 01620 - Page 1
SECTION 01620
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Storage, General.
B. Enclosed Storage.
C. Exterior Storage.
D. Maintenance of Storage.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
B. Section 01610: Transportation and Handling.
C. Section 01720: Project Record Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE, GENERAL
A. Store products , immediately on delivery, in accordance
with manufacturer ' s instructions , with seals and labels
intact. Protect until installed.
B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide access for
maintenance of stored items and for inspection.
3 .02 ENCLOSED STORAGE
A. Store products subject to damage by the elements in
substantial weathertight enclosures.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges stated in
manufacturer 's instructions.
"'"
01620 - 1
no
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
wu
Section 01610 - Page 2
limitations on storage space; availability of personnel
and handling equipment.
C. Deliver products in undamaged, dry condition, in original
unopened containers or packaging with identifying labels
intact and legible. •�+
D. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of
equipment to identify equipment and contents or permit
easy accumulation of parts and to facilitate assembly.
E. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to assure:
1. Product complies with Contract Documents and reviewed
submittals.
2. Quantities are correct.
3. Accessories and installation hardware are correct.
4. Containers and packages are intact and labels legible.
5. Products are protected and undamaged.
3 .03 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products ,
including those provided by Owner, by methods to prevent
soiling and damage.
B. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent
marring and otherwise damaging products, packaging and
surrounding surfaces. *■
C. Handle products by methods to avoid bending or
overstressing. Lift large and heavy components only at ..
designated lift points.
END OF SECTION
01610 - 2 '"
ew
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
.w
Section 01610 - Page 1
SECTION 01610
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Packaging, Transportation.
B. Delivery and Receiving.
C. Product Handling.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
B. Section 01620: Storage and Protection.
C. Individual Specification Sections: Specific requirements
for packaging, shipping and handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
e
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 PACKAGING, TRANSPORTATION
A. Require supplier to package products in boxes or crates
for protection during shipment , handling and storage.
Protect sensitive products against exposure to elements
and moisture.
B. Protect sensitive equipment and finishes against impact,
abrasion and other damage.
3.02 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING
A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with
construction progress schedules . Allow time for
inspection prior to installation.
B. Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with work and
conditions at site; work of other Contractors; or Owner;
01610 - 1
MW
CONSTRUCTION CLEANING
Section 01569 - 2
E. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other
particles will not adhere to wet or newly-coated surfaces.
F. The General Contractor will be required to supply and
maintain floor mats in the public access corridors to
preserve the quality of said space. Any abnormal amount .�
of cleaning that becomes necessary to be performed by the
Hospital ' s maintenance staff will be back-charged to the
General Contractor .
3 .02 DISPOSAL
A. Remove waste materials , debris and rubbish from site
periodically and dispose of off-site.
END OF SECTION
r�
w.
r.
01569 - 2 ..
am
CONSTRUCTION CLEANING
Section 01569 - 1
SECTION 01569
CONSTRUCTION CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
*" A. Cleaning and disposal of waste materials , debris and
rubbish during construction.
1 .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. General Conditions of the Contract.
B. Section 01710: Final Cleaning.
C. Individual Specification Sections: Specific cleaning for
product or work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Provide covered containers for disposal of waste
materials, debris and rubbish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CLEANING
w� A. Maintain areas under Contractor 's control free of waste
materials , debris and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean
and orderly condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases , plenums ,
attics, crawl spaces and other closed or remote spaces ,
prior to closing the space.
C. Periodically clean interior areas to provide suitable
conditions for work.
D. Broom clean interior areas prior to start of surface
finishing and continue cleaning on an as-needed basis.
01569 - 1
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
Section 01500 - Page 3
w
C. Prohibit traffic and storage of waterproofed and roofed
surfaces on lawns and landscaped areas .
1. 10 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS (OPTIONAL)
A. Field Offices and Sheds : Optional.
1.11 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary materials , equipment , services and
construction prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of
temporary facilities. Restore existing facilities used
during construction to specified or to original condition.
END OF SECTION
a
01500 - 3
am
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
no
Section 01500 - Page 2
1 .05 WATER
A. Contractor will be allowed to use water in building for
temporary water . Connect to building ' s existing
facilities; extend branch piping with outlets located so
that water is available by use of hoses . Owner will pay
for water used.
1 .06 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Existing designated Hospital facilities may be used during
the construction period . Coordinate with Hospital
personnel.
1 .07 BARRIERS
w.
A. Provide as required to prevent public entry to
construction areas and to protect existing facilities and
adjacent properties from damage from construction
operations .
B. Provide barricades around trees and plants designated to
remain . Protect against vehicular traffic , stored
materials , dumping , chemically injurious materials and
puddling or continuous running water.
4W
1 .08 ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary weathertight closures of openings in ■*
exterior surfaces to provide acceptable working conditions
and protection for materials , to allow for temporary
heating ( if necessary ) , and to prevent entry of ,m
unauthorized persons.
B. Provide dustproof partitions and a negative air exhaust
system to prevent the spread of dust and debris during the ""
construction period.
1 .09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Provide temporary protection for installed products .
Control traffic in immediate area to minimize damage.
B. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections , jambs ,
sills and soffits of openings . Protect finishes, floors
and stairs from traffic, movement of heavy objects and
storage .
01500 - 2
ox
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
Section 01500 - Page 1
SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
ws 1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Electricity, Lighting.
B. Telephone Service.
„ C. Water.
D. Sanitary Facilities.
" E. Barriers.
F. Enclosures.
G. Protection of Installed Work.
H. Field Offices and Sheds.
1 .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
B. Section 01710: Final Cleaning.
1.03 ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING
A. Where available , connect to the Hospital ' s permanent
electrical service. Owner will pay costs of energy used.
Take measures to conserve energy.
B. Provide temporary lighting as per OSHA and other
applicable codes for construction operations.
.. 1.04 TELEPHONE SERVICE (OPTIONAL)
A. Provide telephone service, if desired, to field office.
01500 - 1
MM
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
am
Section 01370 - Page 2
am
am
E. Component listings shall each include a directly
proportional amount of Contractor 's overhead and profit . ..
F. For items on which payments will be requested for stored
products, list sub-values for cost of stored products with
taxes paid.
G. The sum of values listed shall equal total Contract Sum.
1 .05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA
A. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit
data justifying line item amounts in question .
B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy
of application. Show Application number and date , and
line item by number and description.
END OF SECTION
01370 - 2 '"
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Section 01370 - Page 1
�w
SECTION 01370
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Schedule of
Values.
1 .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. General Conditions of the Contract.
B. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
C. Section 01027: Applications for Payment.
1 .03 FORMAT
A. Type Schedule on A. I .A. Document G703 - Continuation Sheet
for Application and Certificate for Payment .
B. Contractor 's standard form or media-driven printout will
be considered on request.
C. Follow Table of Contents of Project Manual for listing
component parts. Identify each line item by number and
title of major Specification Sections.
1.04 CONTENT
A. List installed value for each major item of work and each
uw subcontracted item of work as a separate line item to
serve as a basis for computing values for Progress
Payments. Round off values to the nearest dollar.
B. For each major subcontract, list products and operations
of that subcontract as separate line items.
C. Include work allowances within the line item of work.
D. Coordinate listings with Progress Schedule.
01370 - 1
SHOP DRAWINGS , PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
Section 01340 - Page 3
B. Provide 8 x 4 inch blank space on each submittal for
Contractor and Architect stamp .
C. Apply Contractor 's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying
to review, verification of products, field dimensions and
field construction criteria , and coordination of
information with requirements of work and Contract
Documents .
D. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate
interrelation of the several items :
1. Finishes which involve Architect selection of colors,
textures or patterns .
2. Associated items which require correlation for
efficient function or for installation.
E. Submit number of opaque reproductions of shop drawings
Contractor requires , plus three ( 3) which will be retained
by the Architect.
riw
F. Submit number of copies of product data and manufacturer 's
instructions Contractor requires , plus three ( 3) copies
which will be retained by the Architect.
G. Submit number of samples specified in individual
Specification Sections .
1 .09 RESUBMITTALS
A. Make resubmittals under procedures specified for initial
submittals ; identify changes made since previous
submittal.
1 . 10 DISTRIBUTION
A. Duplicate and distribute reproductions of shop drawings ,
copies of product data and samples which bear Architect 's
stamp of approval to job site file, Record Documents file,
Subcontractors , Suppliers , other affected Contractors and
other entities requiring information.
END OF SECTION
01340 - 3
Im
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES AW
Section 01340 - Page 2
1 .05 SAMPLES
A. Submit full range of manufacturer ' s standard finishes
except when more restrictive requirements are specified,
indicating colors , textures and patterns, for Architect
selection.
B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of
products , including parts and attachments.
C. Approved samples which may be used in work are indicated
in the Specification Section. »
D. Label each sample with identification required for
transmittal letter .
1.06 MANUFACTURERS ' INSTRUCTIONS
A. Manufacturers ' instructions for storage , preparation ,
assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, balancing and
finishing.
ow
1 .07 CONTRACTOR REVIEW
A. Review submittals prior to transmittal ; determine and
verify field measurements, field construction criteria ,
manufacturer ' s catalog numbers , and conformance of
submittal with requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Coordinate submittals with requirements of work and of
Contract Documents.
C. Sign or initial each sheet of shop drawings and product
data and each sample label to certify compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Architect in
writing of time of submittal , of any deviations from
requirements of Contract Documents.
D. Do not fabricate products or begin work which requires
submittals until return of submittal with Architect
acceptance.
1 .08 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Transmit submittals in accordance with approved progress
schedule and in such a sequence to avoid delay in the work
or work of other Contracts.
01340 - 2
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
Section 01340 - Page 1
SECTION 01340
SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
PART 1 GENERAL
■* 1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Procedures for Submittals.
1 .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. General Conditions of the Contract.
B. Section 01310: Progress Schedules.
C. Section 01630: Substitutions and Product Options.
D. Section 01720: Project Record Documents.
E. Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Data.
1 .03 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Present in a clear and thorough manner . Title each
drawing with project and Contract name and number ;
identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet
number and detail , schedule or room number of Contract
Documents.
B. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or
critical features of work or products.
1 .04 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of
standard printed data to identify pertinent products ,
reference to Specification Section and Article number.
Show reference standards, performance characteristics and
capacities ; wiring and piping diagrams and controls ;
component parts , finishes , dimensions and required
clearances.
B. Modify manufacturer ' s standard schematic drawings and
diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide
information specifically applicable to the work. Delete
information not applicable.
01340 - 1
E - HT£TB
moisoas 3o GNa
•seTnpagoS ut uMogs suoT4oaCozd Aq pagedioT4ue suiajgozd
-4
i5UT TZM UT 4zodaz A14dmoad o4 s4uaTdioaz 4ona4suI •g
£ a5ed - OT£TO UOT409S
SS'InGaRos ssauooHd
mp
no
PROGRESS SCHEDULES
Section 01310 - Page 2
entire schedule.
E. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item,
and total percentage of work complete, as of the first day
of each month. ..�
F. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop
drawings , product data and samples, including Owner -
furnished products and dates reviewed submittals will be
required from Architect . Show decision dates for
selection of finishes . Show delivery dates for Owner-
furnished products.
1 .05 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES
A. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal,
and projected completion date of each activity.
B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, WX
major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes.
C. Provide narrative report to define problem areas ,
anticipated delays , and impact on Schedule . Report
corrective action taken , or proposed , and its effect,
including effect on changes on schedules of separate •
Contractors.
1 .06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit preliminary outline Schedules within twenty (20)
days after the date of Owner-Contractor Agreement for
coordination with Owner ' s requirements and work of
separate Contracts . After review , submit detailed
Schedules within fifteen ( 15 ) days , modified to
accommodate revisions recommended by Architect. .,
B. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application
for Payment.
C. Submit number of opaque reproductions which Contractor
requires , plus two (2) copies which will be retained by
Architect. go
1.07 DISTRIBUTION
A. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to job site file, no
Subcontractors, suppliers and other concerned entities.
oft
01310 - 2
w.
aw PROGRESS SCHEDULES
Section 01310 - Page 1
OR
SECTION 01310
PROGRESS SCHEDULES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Procedures for Preparation and Submittal of Construction
Progress Schedules and Periodical Updating.
1 .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
B. Section 01027: Applications for Payment.
C. Section 01200: Project Meetings.
D. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
1.03 FORMAT
A. Prepare Schedules as a horizontal bar chart with separate
bar for each major portion of work or operation ,
identifying first work day of each week.
B. Sequencing of Listings: The chronological order of the
start of each item of work.
C. Scale and Spacing : To provide space for notations and
revisions.
D. Sheet Size: Multiple of 8-1/2 x 11 inches.
1 .04 CONTENT
A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with
dates for beginning and completion of each element of
construction.
B. Identify each item by major Specification Section number.
C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically
grouped activities.
D. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of
01310 - 1
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01200 - Page 4
a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion
date.
b. Effect on other contracts of the project.
END OF SECTION
01200 - 4
as
pe PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01200 - Page 3
40
on
40 1 .04 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule regular periodic meetings, as required.
B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the work.
C. Location of Meetings: Project field office of Contractor.
w•
D. Attendance:
1. Architect and his professional consultants as needed.
2. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda.
3. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda.
E. Suggested Agenda:
1. Review of work progress since previous meeting.
2. Field observations, problems, conflicts.
3. Problems which impede Construction Schedule.
«. 4. Review of- off-site fabrication, delivery schedules.
5. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected
OR schedule.
6. Revisions to Construction Schedule.
7. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period.
8. Coordination of schedules.
.w 9. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required.
10. Maintenance of quality standards.
11. Pending changes and substitutions.
12. Review proposed changes for:
01200 - 3
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01200 - Page 2
D. Suggested Agenda:
1. Distribution and discussion of:
a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers.
b. Project Construction Schedules.
2. Critical work sequencing. ..
3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
4. Project coordination:
a. Designation of responsible personnel. •
5. Procedures and processing of:
a. Field decisions.
b. Proposal requests.
C. Submittals.
d. Change Orders.
e. Applications for Payment.
6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents.
7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents.
8. Use of premises:
a. Office, work and storage areas. ,
b. Owner 's requirements.
9. Construction facilities , controls and construction
aids .
10. Temporary utilities.
11. Safety and first aid procedures.
12. Security procedures.
13. Housekeeping procedures.
01200 - 2
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01200 - Page 1
+ter
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Representatives of Contractors , Subcontractors and
Suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and
authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
B. Architect may attend meetings to ascertain that work is
expedited consistent with Contract Documents and
construction schedules.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders.
B. Section 01310: Progress Schedules.
C. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
D. Section 01720: Project Record Documents.
E. Section 01730 : Operation and Maintenance Data.
1 .03 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS
A. Schedule within fifteen (15) days after the date of Notice
to Proceed.
B. Location : A central site , convenient for all parties ,
designated by the Contractor.
C. Attendance:
1. Owner 's Representative.
2. Architect and his Professional Consultants.
3. Contractor ' s Superintendent.
4. Major Subcontractors.
01200 - 1
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
Section 01120 - Page 4
3.08 CLEANING
40
A. In addition to cleaning specified in Section 01500 and
01569, clean Owner-occupied areas of work daily.
00
so
END OF SECTION
01120 - 4
w
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
Section 01126 - Page 3
with a neat transition to adjacent new finishes.
E. Install products as specified in individual Sections.
3 .04 TRANSITIONS
A. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing , make a
smooth and even transition . Patched work shall match
existing adjacent work in texture and appearance.
B. When finishes surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition
with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface
along a straight line at a natural line of division and
make a recommendation to Architect.
3 .05 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces
becoming one , rework floors , walls and ceilings to a
smooth plane without breaks, steps or bulkheads. Where a
change in plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs , submit
"' recommendation for providing a smooth transition to
Architect for review and request instructions from
Architect.
.w B. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor
finishes; refinish trimmed areas.
C. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in
Section 01045.
3 .06 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES
A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are
damaged , lifted , discolored or showing other
imperfections.
B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.
3.07 FINISHES
A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Sections.
B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over
entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish
entire surface to nearest intersections.
01120 - 3
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
Section 01120 - Page 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that demolition is complete and areas are ready for **
installation of new work.
B. Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing „u
conditions.
3 .02 PREPARATION
A. Cut , move or remove items as necessary for access to
alterations and renovations work; replace and restore at
completion. �.
B. Remove unsuitable materials not marked for salvage, such
as rotted wood, rusted metals, and deteriorated masonry
and concrete; replace materials as specified for finished
work .
C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from
concealed spaces.
D. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide ••
for proper installation of new work and new finishes.
E. Close opening in exterior surfaces to protect existing
work and salvage items from weather and extremes of
temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to
prevent condensation in exposed areas.
3 .03 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite ••
completion sequentially and to accommodate Owner
occupancy.
B. Project designated areas and finishes shall be complete in
all respects including operational mechanical and
electrical systems.
C. Remove, cut and patch work in a manner to minimize damage
and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to
original and specified conditions.
D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated
rooms and spaces to specified condition for each material ,
01120 - 2
.w,
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
Section 01120 - Page 1
SECTION 01120
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
w 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Procedural Requirements.
B. Rehabilitation and Renovations of Existing Spaces an
Materials .
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work, work sequence and Owner
occupancy.
B. Section 01045: Cutting and Patching.
C. Section 01500 : Construction Facilities and Temporary
Controls; temporary enclosures and protection of installed
work.
D. Section 01569: Construction Cleaning.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK
A. New Materials: As specified in individual Sections.
B. Match existing products and work for patching and
extending work.
C. Determine type and quality of existing products by
inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by
use of existing as a standard. Presence of a product,
finish or type of work requires that patching, extending
or matching shall be performed as necessary to make work
complete and consistent with existing quality and the
Specifications.
01120 - 1
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Section 01090 - Page 5
SJI Steel Joist Institute
1703 Parham Road, Suite 204
Richmond, Virginia 23229
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association
8224 Old Courthouse Road
Vienna, Virginia 22180
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc.
Box 326
Princeton, New Jersey 08540
UL Underwriters Laboratories , Inc.
333 Pfingston Road
Northbrook , Illinois 60062
END OF SECTION
++s
01090 - 5
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Section 01090 - Page 4
MIL Military Specification
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Avenue
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19120
,M
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers
221 North LaSalle Street
Chicago, Illinois 60601
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau
8224 Old Courthouse Road
Vienna, Virginia 22180
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association aw
2101 L Street, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20037
NFPA National Fire Protection Association an
Battery March Park
Quincy, Massachusetts 02269
NFPA National Forest Products Association
1619 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20036
PCA Portland Cement Association
5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, Illinois 60077
PS Product Standard
U.S . Department of Commerce
Washington, D.C. 20203
SDI Steel Deck Institute
Box 3812
St. Louis, Missouri 63122
SDI Steel Door Institute
712 Lakewood Center North
Cleveland, Ohio 44107
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
111 East Wacker Drive
Chicago, Illinois 60601
01090 - 4
MM
sw
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Section 01090 - Page 3
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race Street
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103
AWWA American Water Works Association
6666 West Quincy Avenue
Denver, Colorado 80235
wa AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute
2310 South Walter Reed Drive
Arlington, Virginia 22206
AWS American Welding Society
550 LeJeune Road
Miami , Florida 33135
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
933 Plum Grove Road
Schaumburg, Illinois 60195
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
3310 Harrison
White Lakes Professional Building
Topeka, Kansas 66611
FM Factory Mutual System
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
Norwood, Massachusetts 02062
FS Federal Specification
General Services Administration
Specifications and Consumer Information,
Distribution Section (WFSIS)
Washington Navy Yard, Building 197
Washington, D.C. 20407
GA Gypsum Association
1603 Orlington Avenue
Evanston, Illinois 60201
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
+ * 345 East 47th Street
New York, New York 10017
,■, IMIAC International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council
International Masonry Institute
815 15th Street, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20005
NO
01090 - 3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
are
Section 01090 - Page 2
ACI American Concrete Institute
Box 19150, Reford Station
Detroit, Michigan 48219
ADC Air Diffusion Council ..
230 North Michigan Avenue
Chicago, Illinois 60601
AI Asphalt Institute
Asphalt Institute Building
College Park, Maryland 20740
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
400 North Michigan Avenue, Eighth Floor
Chicago, Illinois 60611 ,.
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
1000 16th Street, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20036
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
30 West University Drive
Arlington Heights, Illinois 60004
ANSI American National Standards -Institute Ow
1430 Broadway
New York, New York 10018
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
1815 North Fort Myer Drive
Arlington, Virginia 22209
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, N.E.
Atlanta, Georgia 30329
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
345 East 47th Street
New York, New York 10017
ASPA American Sod Producers Association ,..
Association Building
Ninth and Minnesota
Hastings , Nebraska 68901
01090 - 2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Section 01090 - Page 1
SECTION 01090
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Applicability of Reference Standards.
B. Provision of Reference Standards at Site.
C. Acronyms Used in Contract Documents for Reference
Standards. Source of Reference Standards.
1 .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. General Conditions of the Contract.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. For products or workmanship specified by association,
trade or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of
the standard , except when more rigid requirements are
specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the Bid
date or date of Owner-Contractor Agreement when there are
no bids, except when a specific date is specified.
C. When required by individual Specification Sections, obtain
copy of standard. Maintain copy at jobsite during
submittals , planning and progress of the specific work
until Substantial Completion.
1 .04 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES
OR AA Aluminum Association
818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006
on
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
1000 Vermont Avenue, N.W.
No Washington, D.C. 20005
Am
01090 - 1
IM
CUTTING AND PATCHING
SM
Section 01045 — Page 4
we
am
B. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching
for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements and
sight-exposed surfaces. OR
C. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill .
Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval . MW
D. Restore work with new products in accordance with
requirements of Contract Documents.
E. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts , conduit and
other penetrations through surfaces.
F. At penetrations of fire-rated wall , ceiling , or floor
construction , completely seal voids with fire-rated
material, full thickness of the construction element.
G. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes . For
continuous surfaces , refinish to nearest intersection; for
an assembly, refinish entire unit. •
END OF SECTION
MW
..
01045 - 4 am
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Section 01045 - Page 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .01 GENERAL
A. Execute cutting , fitting and patching , including
excavation and fill , to complete work and to:
1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other
work .
2. Uncover work to install ill-timed work.
wr 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
4. Remove samples of installed work for testing.
5. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations
of mechanical, plumbing and electrical work.
3 .02 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to
damage or movement during cutting and patching.
B. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance
or work.
C. Beginning of cutting and patching means acceptance of
existing conditions.
3 .03 PREPARATION
A. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of
surroundings, devices and methods to protect other
portions of project from damage.
B. Provide protection from elements for areas which may be
exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of
water.
■o
3 .04 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and
which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and
l finishing.
01045 - 3
i
e
CUTTING AND PATCHING
«.
Section 01045 - Page 2
no
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration
which affects :
1. Structural integrity of any element of project. A.
2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant
element.
w®
3. Efficiency, maintenance or safety of any operational
element.
go
4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.
B. Include in request:
1. Identification of project. .•
2. Location and description of affected work.
3. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
4.- Description of proposed work and products to be used.
5. Alternatives to cutting and patching.
6. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. •.
7. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.
8. Date and time work will be executed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Those required for original installation.
B. For any change in materials , submit request for
substitution under provisions of Section 01630.
op
01045 - 2
on
CUTTING AND PATCHING
r
Section 01045 - Page 1
SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Complete all required cutting and patching of existing
construction work in order to install any of the elements
of the new construction work.
1.02 WORK BY THE HOSPITAL
A. The Hospital will be responsible for all of the concrete
core drilling of the existing concrete slabs and beams to
accommodate all new plumbing piping, heating, ventilating
and air conditioning lines, and electrical conduits . The
Contractor shall coordinate with the Hospital as to when
these core drilling penetrations will be necessary. The
Contractor shall also prepare a core drilling plan for
Architect/Engineer approval in terms of the structural
integrity of the building. This plan shall be prepared,
submitted and approved prior to any core drilling work
+ being started at the Hospital.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
B. Section 01120: Alteration Project Procedures.
C. Section 01630: Substitutions and Product Options.
r D. Individual Specification Sections:
1. Cutting and patching incidental to work of the
Section.
2. Advance notification to other Sections of openings
required in work of those Sections .
40
3. Limitations on cutting structural members.
01045 - 1
COORDINATION .r
Section 01040 - Page 2
1.05 COORDINATION OF SPACE
A. Coordinate use of project space and sequence of
installation of mechanical and electrical work which is
indicated diagramatically on Drawings. Follow routings ••
shown for pipes , ducts and conduits as closely as
practicable , with due allowance for available physical
space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize
space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other
installations , for maintenance and for repairs .
B. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the
construction. Coordinate location of fixtures and outlets
with finish elements.
1 .06 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
A. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate MW
sections in preparation for Substantial Completion.
B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to
site by various sections for correction of defective work ON
and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to
minimize disruption of Owner 's activities.
am
C. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in
Section 01701.
Wo
MW
END OF SECTION
01040 - 2
a.
wr
COORDINATION
Section 01040 - Page 1
�w
SECTION 01040
COORDINATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Coordination of the work of each Contract.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01010: Summary of Work.
B. Section 01045: Cutting and Patching.
C. Section 01200: Project Meetings.
D. Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
E. Section 01630: Product Options and Substitutions.
F. Section 01701: Contract Closeout Procedures.
1.03 DESCRIPTION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the various
Sections of the Specifications to assure efficient and
orderly sequence of installation of construction elements ,
with provisions for accommodating items to be installed
later . Coordinate under direction of the Owner ' s
Representative.
1.04 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section
01340.
B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent
responsibilities for installing , connecting to , and
placing in service such equipment.
C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure
compatibility of space, of operating elements and effect
on work of other sections.
01040 - 1
o
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
wA
Section 01028 - Page 4
MR
Am
C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
ON
ow
END OF SECTION
no
w.
01028 — 4
on
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
q
Section 01028 - Page 3
Contract Time or Contract Sum.
C. Promptly execute the change in work.
1.07 LUMP SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. will be based on Proposal Request and Contractor ' s lump
sum quotation or Contractor ' s request for Change Order as
approved by Architect.
1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER
A. For predetermined unit prices and quantities, Change Order
will be executed on a fixed-price basis .
B. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are
not predetermined , execute work under a Construction
Change Authorization . Changes in Contract Time or
Contract Sum will be computed as specified for time and
material Change Order.
1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER
A. Submit itemized account and supporting data after
completion of change, within time limits in Conditions of
the Contract.
B. Architect will determine the change allowable in Contract
4' Sum and Contract Time as provided in Conditions of the
Contract.
1.10 EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS
A. Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of
parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.
1.11 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Promptly revise Application for Payment forms to record
each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and
adjust Contract Sum as shown on Change Order.
B. Promptly revise Progress Schedules to reflect any change
in Contract Time; revise Sschedechage and resubmit.for
other items of work affect ed by he change
01028 - 3
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
Section 01028 - Page 2
1. Quantities of products, labor and equipment.
2. Taxes, insurance and bonds.
3. Overhead and profit. ,
4. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
5. Credit for deletions from Contract , similarly
documented.
D. Support each claim for additional costs and for work done •*
on a time and material basis with additional information:
1. Origin and date of claim. .,
2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom.
3. Time records and wage rates paid.
4. Invoices and receipts for products , equipment and
subcontracts .
1.05 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES
A. Architect may submit a proposal request which includes :
detailed description of change with supplementary or
revised Drawings and Specifications, the projected time
for executing the change with a stipulation of any
overtime work required , and the period of time during
which the requested price will be considered valid.
B. Contractor may initiate a change by submittal of a request
to Architect describing the proposed change with a
statement of the reason for the change , the effect on
Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation , ..
and a statement of the effect on work of separate
Contractors . Document any requested substitutions in
accordance with Section 01630. "*
1.06 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION/WORK DIRECTIVE CHANGE
A. Architect may issue a directive , signed by Owner ,
instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in the
work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
B. Directive will describe changes in the work and will
designate a method of determining any change in the
Am
01028 - 2
we
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
Section 01028 - Page 1
SECTION 01028
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
�w
A. Procedures for processing Change Orders.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner/Contractor Agreement : Monetary values of
established unit prices.
B. General Conditions.
C. Section 01027: Applications for Payment.
D. Section 01310: Progress Schedules.
E. Section 01630: Product Options and Substitutions.
F. Section 01701: Contract Closeout Procedures.
G. Section 01720: Project Record Documents.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit name of individual authorized to accept changes and
to be responsible for informing others in Contractor ' s
employ of changes in the work.
B. Change Order Forms: A. I .A. Document G701.
1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM AND CONTRACT TIME
A. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and
material basis. Provide full information required for
evaluation of proposed changes and to substantiate costs
of changes in the work.
�w
B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with
sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation.
C. On request , provide additional data to support
computations :
01028 - 1
ON
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
ww
Section 01027 - Page 2
E. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in
Section 01701. 4W
1 .05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submit three (3) copies of each Application for Payment at
times stipulated in Agreement.
1 .06 SUBSTANTIATING DATA �.
A. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit
data justifying line item amounts in question.
B. Provide one (1) copy of data with cover letter for each
copy of submittal . Show Application number and date, and
line item by number and description.
END OF SECTION
wr
..
aw
oft
01027 - 2
ON
s APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
Section 01027 - Page 1
ON
SECTION 01027
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
w PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications
for Payment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner/Contractor Agreement : Contract Sum, Amounts of
Progress Payments , Retainages and Times for Submittal.
B. General Conditions of the Contract.
C. Special Conditions.
D. Supplementary General Conditions.
E. Section 01701: Contract Closeout Procedures.
1.03 FORMAT
A. A. I . A. Document G702 - Application and Certificate for
Payment.
B. A. I .A. Document G703 - Continuation Sheet.
e 1.04 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION
A. Type required information.
ww B. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer .
C. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for
+ ► portion of work performed and for stored products.
D. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on
Continuation Sheet, listing Change Order Number and dollar
amount as for an original item of work.
01027 - 1
Oft
ALLOWANCES
Section 01020 - Page 4
1 .06 ADJUSTMENTS OF COSTS
u
A. Should net cost be more or less than the specified amount
of Allowance , the Contract Sum will be adjusted
accordingly by Change Order.
1. The amount of the Change Order will recognize any
changes in handling costs at the site , labor ,
installation costs , overhead , profit and other
expenses caused by the selection under the Allowance.
B. Submit any claims for anticipated additional costs at the
site or other expenses caused by the selection under the
Allowance, prior to execution of the work.
END OF SECTION
.R
01020 - 4 "'
00
ALLOWANCES
w
Section 01020 - Page 3
b. Accessories and attachments.
C. Supplier and installer as applicable.
d. Cost to Contractor, delivered to site or installed
as applicable.
e. Manufacturer ' s Warranties.
3. Transmit Owner ' s decision to the Contractor .
+�s 4. Prepare Change Orders.
B. Contractor 's Duties:
1. Assist Architect and Owner in determining qualified
suppliers or installers.
2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when
requested by Architect .
3. Make appropriate recommendations for considerations of
the Architect.
4. Notify Architect promptly of:
a. Any reasonable objections Contractor may have
against any supplier or party under consideration
for installation.
b. Any effect on the Construction Schedule
anticipated by selections under consideration.
1.05 CONTRACTOR ' S RESPONSIBILITY FOR PURCHASE, DELIVERY AND
INSTALLATION
A. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data and
samples as required.
B. Make all arrangements for delivery.
C. Upon delivery , promptly inspect products for damage or
defects.
D. Submit claims for transportation damage.
E. Install and finish products in compliance with
requirements of Specification Sections .
01020 - 3
pill, 11
ALLOWANCES
Section 01020 - Page 2
labor is specified to be part of the Allowance.
4. Other expenses required to complete the installation.
5. Contractor 's and Subcontractor 's overhead and profit .
C. The amount of each Allowance, for work specified in the
respective Specifications Sections, is as follows :
1. Allowance No. 1 - (Section 08700 - Hardware) :
The Contractor shall allow the sum of Eight Thousand
Dollars ($8,000.00) for all of the hardware covered in
the Hardware Section of the Specifications . The
Contractor should, however, include in his Base Price
all labor and materials that are necessary to install
the hardware . The material Allowance of Eight
Thousand Dollars ($8 , 000 . 00) shall be based on the
Contractor 's wholesale purchase cost from his supplier �.•
and shall be documented with paid invoices from the
hardware supplier.
2. Allowance No . 2 - ( Section 10500 - Toilet
Accessories) :
The Contractor shall allow the sum of One Thousand '*
Dollars ($1,000. 00) for all of the toilet accessories
covered in the Toilet Accessories Section of the
Specifications . The Contractor should , however , ..
include in his Base Price all labor and materials that
are necessary to install the toilet accessories . The
material Allowance of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000. 00)
shall be based on the Contractor 's wholesale purchase
cost from his supplier and shall be documented with
paid invoices from the materials supplier .
1.04 SELECTION OF PRODUCTS UNDER ALLOWANCES
A. Architect' s Duties:
1 . Consult with the Contractor in consideration of
products and suppliers and installers .
2. Make selection in consultation with the Owner. Obtain
Owner 's written decision designating:
a. Product, model and finish.
01020 - 2
Im
ALLOWANCES
go
Section 01020 - Page 1
SECTION 01020
r ALLOWANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Include in the Contract Sum all Allowances stated in the
Contract Documents .
B. Designate in the Construction Progress Schedule the
delivery dates for products specified under each
Allowance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Conditions of the Contract.
B. Section 01310: Construction Schedule.
C . Section 01370: Schedule of Values.
D. Each Specification Section Referenced Herein.
1.03 ALLOWANCES FOR PRODUCTS
.. A. The amount of each Allowance includes:
1. The cost of the product to the Contractor or
Subcontractor less any applicable trade discounts.
2. Delivery to the site.
3. Labor required under the Allowance.
4. Applicable taxes.
B. In addition to the amount of each Allowance, include in
the Contract Sum the Contractor 's costs for:
1. Handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating
and storage.
,* 2. Protection from the elements and from damage.
3. Labor for installation and finishing except where
40 01020 - 1
we
ALTERNATES
Section 01015 - Page 3
F. Alternate No. 6 :
Under Alternate No . 6 , the General Contractor will
complete all interior and exterior painting for this
�. project as shown in the Contract Documents . Under the
Base Bid, this painting work will be completed by the
Hospital and, therefore, there is no painting work for the
Contractor under the Base Bid.
G. Alternate No. 7:
Under Alternate No . 7 , the General Contractor will
complete all work related to the medical gas systems
( i . e. , oxygen and suction systems ) as shown in the
Contract Documents. Under the Base Bid, this medical gas
work will be completed by the Hospital and , therefore ,
there is no medical gas work for the Contractor under the
Base Bid.
END OF SECTION
�r
�w
±ae.
�w
w
01015 - 3
ALTERNATES
Section 01015 - Page 2
B. Alternate No. 2 :
Under Alternate No. 2, the addition on the basement level
would be made longer to accommodate a future Toilet Room
and a Waiting/Control Area . Under this Alternate , the
General Contractor would be required to complete the
building shell with inside finished floors, ceilings and
walls. The Contractor would also be required to install
all rough plumbing under the slab to accommodate the
future Toilet Room . Similarly , HVAC ducting and
electrical wiring would be roughed out above the ceiling
to accommodate the future development of the area. Under
the Base Bid , this new shell space would not be
constructed at all.
C. Alternate No. 3:
Under Alternate No . 3 , an additional skylight would be
added to the new (Hold/Interview) Room. The location and
details for this additional skylight is shown in the
Contract Documents. Under the Base Bid, only one (1) new ..
skylight will be in the project .
D. Alternate No. 4 :
Under Alternate No . 4 , the General Contractor will
construct an additional corridor extension to the basement
level for the mobile M.R. I . van. Under the Base Bid, no
work will be done by the General Contractor for the
corridor extension and, therefore, the work is not in the
project.
E. Alternate No. 5:
Under Alternate No. 5 , the Contractor will furnish and
install the new casework shown in the Medical Records
Room, west side, basement level. Under the Base Bid, this
new casework would not be installed at this point in time,
but the General Contractor should install wood blocking to
accommodate this cabinetry in the future. -"
01015 - 2
w
ALTERNATES
Section 01015 - Page 1
SECTION 01015
ALTERNATES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. This Section identifies each Alternate by number and
describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the
work, only when that Alternate is made a part of the work
by specific provisions in the Owner-Contractor Agreement .
1 .02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Bidding Documents : Method of quotation of the cost of
each Alternate, and the basis of the Owner 's acceptance of
Alternates.
B. Owner-Contractor Agreement : Incorporation of Alternates
into the work .
C. Sections of the Specifications as listed under the
respective Alternates .
D. Referenced -Sections of the Specifications stipulate
pertinent requirements for products and methods to achieve
the work stipulated under each Alternate.
E. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding
work as required to properly integrate the work under each
Alternate , and to provide the complete construction
required by Contract Documents .
1 .03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No . 1 :
Under Alternate No. 1, the addition on the basement level
would be longer to accommodate a new Toilet Room and a
Waiting/Control Area. This expanded version is shown in
the Contract Documents . Under the Base Bid, this new
space would not be constructed at all .
01015 - 1
40
PW
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01010 - Page 5
1 .08 OWNER' S RIGHT TO STOP WORK
A. If excessive noise becomes a problem with the physical
operations at the Hospital, the Owner will have the right
to ask the Contractor to stop all noise-making operations
until it is no longer a problem with the Hospital 's normal
schedule. There is a special concern with the Hospital 's
Radiology Department in terms of vibration caused by
drilling , saw-cutting, or air-hammering operations. If
the Radiology Department expresses any problems with the
Contractor 's construction operations , then the Contractor
will cease that operation until the Radiology Department ' s
' schedule will not be interrupted. The Contractor will not
be allowed any extra compensation for any Hospital -
requested noise-making operations to cease due to normal
Hospital operations .
END OF SECTION
01010 - 5
an
SUMMARY OF WORK
go
Section 01010 - Page 4
1 .05 CONTRACTOR' S USE OF PREMISES
A. The Contractor shall limit his use of premises for his
work , for storage and for access to allow for the
following:
1. Owner occupancy.
2. Work by the Hospital Engineering Department. «
3. Public usage of the corridors outside the work area.
..n
4. Public usage of the roadways outside of the work area.
B. Coordinate the use of the premises under the direction of
Cooley Dickinson Hospital 's Director of Facilities.
C. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping
of products under this Contract.
D. Move any stored products , under Contractor ' s control,
which interfere with operations of the Owner .
E. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work
areas needed for operations .
1.06 ITEMS TO BE SALVAGED FOR THE OWNER
A. Contractor shall salvage items from demolition as directed
by the Owner. These shall include at least the following:
1. Face brick to complete any required patching on the
existing building.
B. Items not desired by the Owner shall be demolished and/or
legally disposed of by the Contractor.
1.07 COORDINATION WITH THE HOSPITAL
A. All work shall be coordinated through the Hospital ' s
Director of Facilities who will be coordinating the work
for the Hospital.
01010 - 4
am
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01010 - Page 3
D. Use of Premises : The General Contractor shall restrict
his use of the Hospital grounds and facilities in
accordance with the directions given by the Cooley
Dickinson Hospital Director of Facilities , Mr . Ernest
Margeson.
E. Owner Occupancy: The Hospital will be in full operation
during the construction period. Therefore , the General
war Contractor shall make every effort not to disturb normal
Hospital operations .
F. Cooperation with Other Contractors Working Directly for
the Hospital :
1. The General Contractor shall make every effort to work
with and cooperate with the Hospital ' s Elevator .
Contractor and other Contractors working directly for
the Owner to complete the project in a timely and
harmonious manner . If the General Contractor feels
that he is being delayed or inconvenienced by the
Elevator Contractor , he should refer the matter to the
Hospital and the Architect for resolution.
w�
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders
B. Construction Forms and Contracts
C. General Conditions
D. Supplementary General Conditions
E. Special Conditions
40 1.03 CONTRACT METHOD
A. Construct the work under a single, fixed-price Contract.
w 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Construct the work in stages to accommodate the Owner 's
�* use of the premises during construction. Coordinate the
project's progress schedule with the Owner' s occupancy of
adjoining areas during construction.
01010 - 3
so
SUMMARY OF WORK
.*
Section 01010 - Page 2
ow
2. Owner-Furnished and Contractor-Relocated and Installed
Items :
a. Existing C. T. Scan X-ray window to be relocated.
b. Existing M.R. I . air bag to be relocated, including
ducting and accessories .
3. Owner-Furnished/Contractor-Installed Items:
a. Locker units.
b. X-ray film view boxes.
4. Work to be Completed by the Hospital:
a. All core drilling of the concrete slabs to
accommodate the new plumbing piping , heating ,
ventilating and air conditioning lines and +w
electrical conduits .
b. All painting for this project , unless the
Alternate to have the Contractor complete the
painting is accepted.
C. All medical gas work for this project, unless the
Alternate to have the Contractor complete the
medical gas work is accepted.
5. Work to be Completed by Other Contractors Working
Directly for the Hospital:
a. Installation of the new elevator including all
related elevator equipment .
b. Installation of new medical movable X-ray film *W
shelving.
C. Installation of new medical equipment.
C. Work Sequence: The General Contractor shall complete the
renovations as soon as possible, but no later than the
required completion date for the project.
01010 - 2
go
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01010 - Page 1
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .01 WORK COVERED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS/REQUIREMENTS
INCLUDED
A. Scope of Work : This project consists of all labor and
materials required for the construction of a new, two-
story addition for a replacement C.T. Scan Unit, and the
relocation of the mobile M.R. I . docking area for Cooley
* Dickinson Hospital , 30 Locust Street , Northampton ,
Massachusetts , as shown on the Contract Drawings .
B. The General Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing
all supplies and labor for the completion of the project
with the following exceptions:
1. Owner-Furnished and Installed Items for This Project :
a. Signage
b. Curtains and blinds.
C. Telephone systems; the Contractor , however , will
be required to furnish and install boxes and
conduit as shown in the Contract Documents.
d. Relocation of the existing air-cooled condenser
for the current C.T. area.
e. All asbestos removal (if required) .
f . Nurse call system; however the Contractor will be
ow required to furnish and install boxes and conduit
as shown on the Contract Drawings.
g. Removal and relocation of existing road gates and
00 road signage.
h. I .V. tracks , ceiling-mounted.
01010 - 1
d4
SIR
� .
�
�
`\§
L
� .
rL�
�
� .
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
O
L
�
�
�
� .
� .
�
�
� .
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
�w.
Page 2 of 2
hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day
the Contractor shall be in default seven (7) calendar
days after the time stipulated in the Contract for
completing the work.
4. The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between
the Contractor and the Owner because of the
impracticality and extreme difficulty of fixing and
ascertaining the actual damages which the Owner would in
such event sustain and said amount shall be retained from
time to time by the Owner from current periodic
estimates . The amount of such damages shall be Two
Hundred and Fifty Dollars ($250.00) per calendar day. `
END OF SECTION
wr
.M
..r
OR
50
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
4w
Page 1 of 2
aw
A. GENERAL
1. Include GENERAL CONDITIONS , SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL
CONDITIONS and all applicable parts of Division 1 as part
of this Section.
2. Examine all other Sections of the Specifications for
requirements which affect work under this Section whether
or not such work is specifically mentioned in this
Section.
3. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting
or affected by work of this Section. Cooperate with such
trades to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract.
B. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
1. It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and
between the Owner and Contractor , that the date of
beginning and the time for completion as specified in the
Agreement of the Work to be done hereunder are essential
conditions of this Contract; and it is further mutually
understood and agreed that the work embraced in this
Contract shall be commenced on a date specified in the
Notice to Proceed.
2. The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted
regularly, diligently and uninterruptedly at such a rate
of progress as will ensure a substantial completion
thereof within the time specified. It is expressly
understood and agreed by and between the Contractor and
.w the Owner that the time for completion of the same ,
taking into consideration the average climatic range and
usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality,
will not be impaired.
3. If the said Contractor shall fail, neglect or refuse to
substantially complete the work within the time herein
specified or any proper extension thereof granted by the
Owner , the Contractor does hereby agree , as a part
consideration for the awarding of the Contract, to pay
the Owner the amount specified, not as penalty, but as
liquidated damages for such breach of Contract as
49
got
W4
W4
all
01►
oft
O
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
:_
40
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 5 of 5
3. Add the following Clause 11. 1.4. 1 to 11. 1.4 :
11. 1 .4. 1 The Contractor shall furnish one copy to the
Owner of each Certificate of Insurance herein required
for each copy of the agreement which shall specifically
set forth evidence of all coverage required by
Subparagraph 11 . 1 . 1 , 11 . 1 . 2 , and 11 . 1 . 3 . The form of
Certificate shall be that of his insurance carriers. The
„ Contractor shall furnish to the Owner copies of any
endorsements that are subsequently issued amending
coverage limits.
END OF SECTION
�w
w
48
ON
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
ow
Page 4 of 5
wo
Products and Completed Operations ; Broad Form
Property Damage) :
1) Bodily Injury
$ 500,000 Each Occurence
$1 ,00.0,000 Annual Aggregate
2) Property Damage �*
$ 500,000 Each Occurence
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
3) Products and Completed Operations to be
maintained for one (1) year after final payment.
4) Property Damage Liability Insurance will provide
collapse coverage as applicable.
C. Contractual Liability
1) Bodily Injury
$1,000,000 Each Occurence
2) Property Damage ow
$ 500,000 Each Occurence
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate „m
d. Personal Injury With Employment Exclusion Deleted
1) $1,000.,000 Annual Aggregate ""
e. Comprehensive Automobile Liability
MW
1) Bodily Injury
$ 500,000 Each Person
$1,000,000 Each Occurence
2) Property Damage
..
$1,000,000 Each Occurence
4;
on
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 3 of 5
Sales and Use Taxes applicable in the Commonwealth of
Massachusetts . At the Contractor ' s request , Tax
Exemption Certificates will be furnished by the Owner to
the Contractor with respect to such tax exempt articles
as may be required under this Contract .
4. Delete 4. 7 . 1 and substitute the following:
4. 7 .1 The General Contractor will be responsible for
securing and applying for the Building Permit . The
General Contractor will also be responsible for all other
permits and inspection fees.
E. ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
1. Add the following Clause 9. 3 . 1. 1 to 9. 3. 1 :
9. 3. 1.1 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay
ninety percent (90%) of the amount due the Contractor on
account of progress payments . This retainage of ten
percent (10%) will be paid within thirty (30) days after
the acceptance of the work by the Owner.
F. ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE
1. 11. 1. 1 In the first line following the word "maintain",
insert the words "in a company or companies licensed to
do business in the state in which the project is
located".
2. 11 . 1. 1.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1. 1
shall be written for not less than the following , or
greater if required by law:
a. Worker ' s Compensation
1) State
2) Employer 's Liability
b. Comprehensive General Liability (Including Premises
Operations; Independent Contractor 's Protective;
46
00
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
am
Page 2 of 5
am
wo
objection to any such proposal. If adequate data on any
proposed manufacturer or installer is not available, the 00
Architect may state that action will be deferred until
the Contractor provides further data. Failure of the
Owner or the Architect to reply promptly shall constitute
notice of no reasonable objection. Failure to object to
a manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of
the requirements of the Contract Documents , and all
products furnished by the listed manufacturer must w
conform to such requirements.
2. Add the following Clauses 4.4. 4. 1 and 4. 4. 4. 2 :
4.4.4. 1 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner
and the Architect will consider a formal request for the
substitution of products in place of those specified only
under the conditions set forth in the General
Requirements of the Specifications (Division 1) .
4 . 4 . 4 . 2 By making requests for substitutions based on
Clause 4. 4.4.1 above, the Contractor:
a. Represents that he will provide the same warranty for
the substitution that he would for that specified.
b. Represents that he has personally investigated the
proposed substitute product and determined that it is
equal to or superior in all respects to that
specified.
C. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete
and includes all related costs under this Contract ,
but excludes costs under separate contracts , and '"
excludes Architect 's re-design costs , and waives all
claims for additional costs related to the
substitution which subsequently became apparent; and am
d. Will coordinate the installation of the accepted
substitute, making such changes as may be required
for the work to be complete in all respects. ow
3. Add the following Subparagraph 4. 6. 1. 1 to 4.6. 1 :
..t
4 . 6. 1.1 The Owner is exempt from payment of certain
ow
45
..,
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Page 1 of 5
A. GENERAL
1. A. I . A. Document A201 , Thirteenth Edition, August 1976,
"General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" ,
constitutes the General Conditions of the Contract.
2. Articles of A. I .A. General Conditions , listed under this
Section "Supplementary General Conditions" , are amended
by adding, substituting or omitting material as indicated
so herein .
3. All provisions of such Articles , not so specifically
amended herein, shall remain in full force and effect.
No
B. ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
go 1. Delete the last sentence in Subparagraph 1. 1. 1 .
in C. ARTICLE 3 - OWNER
1. Delete Subparagraph 3. 2. 5 in its entirety and substitute
. the following:
3 . 2 . 5 The Contractor will be furnished free of charge
five (5) copies of the Drawings and Project Manuals .
Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of
reproduction, postage and handling.
D. ARTICLE 4 - CONTRACTOR
1. Add the following Subparagraphs 4.4. 3 and 4.4 .4 to 4. 4 :
4.4.3 Not later than thirty (30) days from the Contract
date, the Contractor shall provide a list showing the
name of the manufacturer proposed to be used for each of
the products identified in the General Requirements of
the Specifications (Division 1) and, where applicable ,
! ' the name of the installing Subcontractor.
4. 4.4 The Architect will promptly reply in writing to
the Contractor stating whether the Owner or the
Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable
44
r�
arm
�e
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
t
40
13.23 if the Contractor does not proceed with the cor- having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government,
rection of such defective or non-conforming Work within such as a declaration of a national emergency making
a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Archi- materials unavailable, through no act or fault of the
tect, the Owner may remove it and may store the mate- Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employ-
rials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If ees or any other persons performing any of the Work
the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal under a contract with the Contractor, or if the Work
and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may should be stopped for a period of thirty days by the
upon ten additional days' written notice sell such Work Contractor because the Architect has not.issued a Certifi-
at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net cate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.7 or because
proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should the Owner has not made payment thereon as provided in
w have been borne by the Contractor, including compensa- Paragraph 9.7, then the Contractor may, upon seven addi-
tion for the Architect's additional services made necessary tional days' written notice to the Owner and the Archi-
thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs tect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner
which the Contractor should have borne, the difference payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss
,cal, shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, construC-
Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or tion equipment and machinery, including reasonable
thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover profit and damages.
such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to
the Owner. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER
13.2.6 The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good 14.2.1 If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt, or if he
all work of the Owner or separate contractors destroyed makes a general assignment for the benefit of his credi-
or damaged by such correction or removal. tors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his in-
" 13.2.7 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 13.2 shall be solvency, or if he persistently or repeatedly refuses or
construed to establish a period of limitation with respect fails, except in cases for which extension of time is pro-
to any other obligation which the Contractor might have vided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or
under the Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4.5 proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment
hereof: The establishment of the time period of one year to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or persistently
after the Date of Substantial Completion or such longer disregards lav%s, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders
period of time as may.be prescribed by law or by the of any public authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise
terms of any warranty required by the Contract Docu- is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the
ments relates only to the specific obligation of the Con- Contract Documents, then the Owner, upon certification
tractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such
the time within which his obligation to comply with the -action,may,without prejudice to any right or remedy and
Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor after giving the Contractor and his surety, if any, seven
on to the time within which proceedings may be com- days' written notice, terminate the employment of the
menced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect Contractor and take possession of the site and of all mate-
to his obligations other than specifically to correct the rials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and
Work. machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may
- finish the Work by whatever method he may deem
13.3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON-CONFORMING expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be en-
WORK titled to receive any further payment until the Work is
13.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non- finished.
conforming Work, he may do so instead of requiring its
removal and correction, in which case a Change Order 14.2.2 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds
will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Contract Sum the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation
where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall for the Architect's additional services made necessary
me he effected whether or not final payment has been made. thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If
ARTICLE 14 such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor
shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be
TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT paid to the Contractor or to the Owner, as the case may
14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application,
in the manner provided in Paragraph 9.4, and this obliga-
14.1.1 If the Work is stopped for a period of thirty days tion for payment shall survive the termination of the
under an order of any court or other public authority Contract.
go
40
AIA DOCUMENT A201• GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT rOR CONSTRUCTION• THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976
AIA9 - ® 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.0 20006 A201-1976 19
43
or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract The Contractor shall carry out such written orders
Sum will be the amount of the actual net cost as con- promptly.
firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits
covering related Work or substitutions are involved in ARTICLE 13
any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit
shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
with respect to that change. �*
13.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
12.1S If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents 13.1.1 If any portion of the Work should be covered con-
or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quantities-orig- trary to the request of the Architect or to requirements
inally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must,
Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for
quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial in-
equity to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable his observation and shall be replaced at the Contractor's
unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. expense. .w
12.2 CONCEALED CONDITIONS 13.1.2 If any other portion of the Work has been covered
12.2.1 Should concealed conditions encountered in the which the Architect has not specifically requested to ob-
serve prior to being covered, the Architect may request
performance of the Work below the surface of the ...
g to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Con-
or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing tractor. If such Work be found in accordance with the
structure be at variance with the conditions indicated by Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replace-
the Contract Documents, or should unknown physical ment shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to
conditions below the surface of the ground or should the Owner. If such Work be found not in accordance with
concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such
of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordi- costs unless it be found that this condition was caused
narily encountered and generally recognized as inherent by the Owner or a separate contractor as provided in
in work of the character provided for in this Contract, be Article 6, in which event the Owner shall be responsible
encountered, the Contract Sum shall be equitably ad- for the payment of such costs.
justed by Change Order upon claim by either party made
within twenty days after the first observance of the 13.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
conditions. 13.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work
12.3 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST rejected by the Architect as defective or as failing to con-
12.3.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for an form to the Contract Documents whether observed be-
increase in the Contract Sum s shall fore or after Substantial Completion and whether or not
give the Architect fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall ""
written notice thereof within twenty days after the occur- bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including
rence of the event giving rise to such claim. This notice compensation for the Architect's additional services made
shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to necessary thereby.
execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering 00
life or property in which case the Contractor shall pro- 13.2.2 If, within one year after the Date of Substantial
teed in accordance with Paragraph 10.3. No such claim Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or
shall be valid unless so made. If the Owner and the Con- within one year after acceptance by the Owner of desig-
tractor cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment in nated equipment or within such longer period of time as "'
the Contract Sum, it shall be determined by the Architect. may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any appli-
Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such cable special warranty required by the Contract Docu-
claim shall be authorized by Change Order. ments,any of the Work is found to be defective or not in
12.3.2 If the Contractor claims that additional cost is in- accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor no
volved because of, but not•limited to, (1) any written shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice
from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously
interpretation pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.8, (2) any
order by the Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Para- given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condi-
tion. This obligation shall survive termination of the
graph 3.3 where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) any Owner shall give such notice promptly
Contract. The O
written order for a minor change in the Work issued pur- after discovery O the condition.
suant to Paragraph 12.4, or (4) failure of payment by the
Owner pursuant to Paragraph 9.7, the Contractor shall 13.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site all por- '*A°
make such claim as provided in Subparagraph 12.3.1. tions of the Work which are defective or non-conforming
12.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK and which have not been corrected under Subparagraphs
4.5.1, 13.2.1 and 13.2.2, unless removal is waived by the
12.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor Owner. .,.�
changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the
Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time and 13.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct defective or non-
not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Docu- conforming Work as provided in Subparagraphs 4.5.1,
menu. Such changes shall be effected by written order, 13.2.1 and 13.2.2,the Owner may correct it in accordance *�
and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. with Paragraph 3.4.
18 A201-1976 AIA DOCUMENT AM- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION-THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976 I
® 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
42
11.3.6 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against ARTICLE 12
(1) each other and the Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,
sAl agents and employees each of the other, and (2) the CHANGES IN THE WORK
Architect and separate contractors, if any, and their sub-
. contractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, 12.1 CHANGE ORDERS
for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent 12.1.1 A Change Order is a written order to the Contrac-
eRl covered by insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph for signed by the Owner and the Architect, issued after
11.3 or any other property insurance applicable to the
W execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the
Work, except such rights as they may have to the pro-
ceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee. Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Con-
, The foregoing waiver afforded the Architect, his agents tract lime.The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may
and employees shall not extend to the liability imposed be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order
signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement there-
by Subparagraph 4.18.3. The Owner or the Contractor, as
appropriate, shall require of the Architect, separate con- with, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or
11111 tractors, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors by ap- the Contract Time.
propriate agreements, written where legally required for 12 1.2 The Owner,without invalidating the Contract, may
validity, similar waivers each in favor of all other parties order changes in the Work within the general scope of
enumerated in this Subparagraph 11.3.6, the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other
revisions, the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being
11.3.7 If required in writing by any party in interest, the adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall
Owner as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an insured be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed
loss, give bond for the proper performance of his duties. under the applicable conditions of the Contract Docu-
He shall deposit in a separate account any money so re- ments.
ceived, and he shall distribute it in accordance with such
agreement as.the parties in interest may reach, or in ac- 12.13 The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a
cordance with an award by arbitration in which case the change in the Work shall be determined in one or more
as procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 7.9. If after of the following ways:
such loss no other special agreement is made, replace- .1 by mutual acceptance of. a lump sum properly
ment of damaged work shall be covered by an appropri- itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating
ate Change Order, data to permit evaluation;
OR .2 by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or
11.3.8 The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust - subsequently agreed upon;
and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the -3 by cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon
parties in interest shall object in writing within five days by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or
after the occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this percentage fee;or
power,and if such objection be made,arbitrators shall be ,4 by the method provided in Subparagraph 12.1.4.
chosen as provided in Paragraph 7.9.The Owner as trustee
shall, in that case, make settlement with the insurers in 12.1,4 If none of the methods set forth in Clauses
accordance with the directions of such arbitrators. If dis. 12,1,3,1, 12.1.3.2 or 12.1.3.3 is agreed upon, the,Contrac-
tribution of the insurance proceeds by arbitration is re- tor, provided he receives a written order signed by the
quired, the arbitrators will direct such distribution. Owner, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved.
The cost of such Work shall then be determined by the
113.9 If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a Architect on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and
portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Com- savings of those performing the Work attributable to the
pletion thereof, such occupancy or use shall not com- change, including, in the use of an increase in the Con-
mence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Owner tract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit.
and Contractor and to which the insurance company or In such use, and also under Clauses 12.1.3.3 and 12.13.4
companies providing the property insurance have con- above, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such
sented by endorsement to the policy or policies.This in- form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized account-
surance shall not be cancelled or lapsed on account of ing together with appropriate supporting data for inclu-
such partial occupancy or use.Consent of the Contractor sion in a Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in
and of the insurance company or companies to such the Contract Documents cost shall be limited to the fol-
occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. lowing: cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of
delivery; cost of labor, including social security, old age
11.4 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE and unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits re-
11.4.1 The Owner,at his option, may purchase and main- quired by agreement or custom; workers' or workmen's
tain such insurance as will insure him against.loss of Vse compensation insurance; bond premiums; rental value of
of his property due to fire or other hazards, however equipment and machinery; and the additional costs of
caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the supervision and field office personnel directly attributable
Contractor for loss of use of his property, including con- to the change. Pending final determination of cost to the
sequential losses due to fire or other hazards however Owner,payments on account shall be made on the Archi-
caused, to the extent covered by insurance under this tect's Certificate for Payment.The amount of credit to be
Paragraph 11.4. allowed by the Contractor to the*Owner for any deletion
AIA DOCUMENT A291-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION-THIRTEENTH EDITION-AUGUST 1976
AIA0 - m 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, Ins NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., wASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 17
41
10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible mem- coverages afforded under the policies will not be can-
ber of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the celled until at least thirty days' prior written notice has
prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contrac- been given to the Owner.
tor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
Contractor in writing to the Owner and the Architect. 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing
102.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part and maintaining his own liability insurance and, at his �*
of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as
103 EMERGENCIES will protect him against claims which may arise from
10.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons operations under the Contram
or property, the Contractor shall act, at his discretion, to 113 PROPERTY INSURANCE
prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall pur-
compensation or extension of time claimed by the Con- chase and maintain property insurance upon the entire
tractor on account of emergency work shall be deter- Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This ,M,w
mined as provided in Article 12 for Changes in the Work. insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the
ARTICLE 11 Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the
Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and ex-
INSURANCE tended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for ..,
physical loss or damage including, without duplication of
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE coverage, theft,,vandalism and malicious mischief. if the
Owner does not intend to purchase such insurance for
11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such the full insurable value of the entire Work, he shall in-
insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below form the Contractor in writing prior to commencement
which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance
operations under the Contract, whether such operations which will protect the interests of himself,his Subcontrac-
be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone di- tors and the Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by ap-
rectly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by any- propriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged
one for whose acts any of them may be liable: to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by failure of
.1 claims under workers'or workmen's compensation, the Owner to purchase or maintain such insurance and to
disability benefit and other similar employee bene- so notify the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all
fit acts; reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. If not cov-
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, oc- eed under the all risk insurance or otherwise provided
cupational sickness or disease, or death of his in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall effect
employees; and maintain similar property insurance on portions of �.
3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sick- the Work stored off the site or in transit when such por-
ness or disease, or death of any person other than tions of the Work are to be included in an Application
his employees; for Payment under Subparagraph 9.32.
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal in- 11.3.2 The Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler
jury liability coverage which arg sustained (1) by and machinery insurance as may be required by the Con-
any person as a result of an offense directly or in- tract Documents or by law. This insurance shall include
directly related to the employment of such person the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontrac-
by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person; tors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work.
S claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, 11.3.3 Any loss insured under Subparagraph 11.3.1 is to
because of injury to or destruction of tangible be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the
property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may
and appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable
.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury or mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.3.8. The Con-
death of any person or property damage arising tractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any
out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any insurance moneys received by the Contractor, and by ap- ,
motor vehicle. propriate agreement, written where legally required for
validity, shall require each Subcontractor to make pay-
11.12 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall ments to his Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
be written for not less than any limits of liability specified 113.4 The Owner shall file a copy of all policies with the
in the Contract Documents, or required by law, which- p
ever is greater. Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur.
11.13 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 1133 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance
shall include contractual liability insurance applicable to for risks other than those described in Subparagraphs
the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 4.18. 11.3.1 and 11.3.2 or other special hazards be included in
the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if pos-
11.1.4 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner sible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall
shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change ..�
the Work.These Certificates shall contain a provision that Order.
AIA DOCUMENT A291 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION-THIRTEENTH EDITION-AUGUST 1976
16 A201-1976 AIA*- Q 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. IM
r.-
40
wI►
promptly make such inspection and, when he finds the 9.9.5 The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a
Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previ-
Contract fully performed, he will promptly issue a final ously made in writing and identified by the Contractor
Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of his as unsettled at the time of the final Application for Pay-
knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of ment.
his observations and inspections, the Work has been com- ARTICLE 10
0011 pleted in accordance with the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
be due the Contractor, and noted in said final Certificate, 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for
� Payment will constitute a further representation that the 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,
conditions precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and
final payment as set forth in Subparagraph 9.9.2 have been programs in connection with the Work.
fulfilled.
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
9.9.2 Neither the final payment nor the remaining re- 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take all reasonable precau-
rained percentage shall become due until the Contractor tions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable
submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
SRI bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness ,1 all employees on the Work and all other persons
connected with the Work for which the Owner or his who may be affected thereby;
,
property might in any way be responsible, have been paid 2 w w the-Work and all materials and d equipment to
or otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of surety, if any, to final be incorporated therein, whether storage on or
payment and (3), if required by the Owner, other data off the site, under the care, custody or control of
00 establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obliga- the Contractor under any of his Subcontractors or
tions, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens aris- Sub-subcontractors; and
ing out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form 3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, in-
as may be designated by the Owner. If any Subcontractor
40 refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the cluding trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to roadwRys,structures and utilities not designated for
the Owner to indemnify him against any such lien. If removal, relocation or replacement in the course
any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are of construction.
go made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all mon- 10.2.2 The Contractor shall.give all notices and comply
eys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging 'with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and
such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety
on fees. of persons or property or their protection from damage,
9.9.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final injury or loss.
completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as re-
of the Contractor or by the issuance of Change Orders quired by existing conditions and progress of the Work,
so affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, in-
the Owner shalt, upon application by the Contractor and cluding posting danger signs and other warnings against
certification by the Architect, and without terminating hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying
the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that owners and users of adjacent utilities.
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance for Work not fully completed or cor- 10.2.4 When the use or storage of explosives or other
rected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Contract hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the
Documents,and if bonds have been furnished as provided execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the
in Paragraph 7.5, the written consent.of the surety to the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the
payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work supervision of properly qualified personnel.
fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage
Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such or toss (other than damage or loss insured under Para-
am payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms graph 11.3) to any property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2
Para-
and conditions governing final payment, except that it and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,
shat( not constitute a waiver of claims. any Subcontractor, any Sub-subcontractor, or anyone di-
9.9.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a rectly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by any-
waiver of all claims by the Owner except those arising one for whose acts any of them may be liable and for
from: which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 102.1.2
.1 unsettled liens, and 10.2.1,3, except damage or loss attributable to the
r.. .2 faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone
Completion, directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by
3 failure of the Work to comply with the require- anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and
ments of the Contract Documents,or not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contrac-
.4 terms of any special warranties required by the tor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in
Contract Documents. addition to his obligations under Paragraph 4.18.
AIA DOCUMENT AM• GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976
AIA*• m 1976• THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 2mm A201-1976 1S
39
sequences or procedures, or that he has made any exam- .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com-
ination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac- pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum,
for has used the moneys previously paid on account of .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor,
the Contract Sum. .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com-
9.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS pleted within the Contract Time, or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accord-
9S.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Pay- ante with the Contract Documents. ""
ment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and 9.61 When the above grounds in Subparagraph 9.6.1 are
within the time provided in the Contract Documents.- removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld
9.5.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcon- because of them. ..
tractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such 9-7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for
tractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage Subcontractor's Work, the amount a rcentage actually e-
which said Subcon- Payment, through no fault of the Contractor,within seven
r
tained, if any, from payments to the Contractor on ac- days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Pay-
count of such Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall, ment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within
by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, re- seven days after the date established in the Contract
quire each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub- Documents any amount certified by the Architect or
subcontractors in similar manner. awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor may, upon
seven additional-days' written notice to the Owner and
9.5.3 The Architect may, on request and at his discretion, the Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount
furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, information owing has been received. The Contract Sum shall be in-
regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts creased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable
applied for by the Contractor and the action taken there- costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which shall be ef-
on by the Architect on account of Work done by such fected by appropriate Change Order in accordance with
Subcontractor. Paragraph 12.3.
9.5.4 Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have any 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys 9.8.1 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or
to any Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required a designated portion thereof which is acceptable to the
by law. Owner, is substantially complete as defined in Subpara-
graph 8.1.3, the Contractor shall prepare for submission
9.5.5 No Certificate for a progress payment, nor any to the Architect a list of items to be completed or cor-
progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occu- rected. The failure to include any items on such list does ..
panty of the Project by the Owner, shall constitute an not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete
acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Con- all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
tract Documents. When the Architect on the basis of an inspection deter-
9.6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. mines that the Work or designated portion thereof is sub- ..•
stantially complete, he will then prepare a Certificate of
•9.6.1 The Architect may decline to certify payment and Substantial Completion which shall establish the Date of
may withhold his Certificate in whole or in part, to the Substantial Completion, shall state the responsibilities of
extent necessary reasonably to protect the Owner, if in the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance,
his opinion he is unable to nake representations to the heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and
Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.2. If the Architect shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall com-
is unable to make representations to the Owner as pro- plete the items listed therein. Warranties required by the
vided in Subparagraph 9.4.2 and to certify payment in the Contract Documents shall commence on the Date of Sub-
amount of the Application,.he will notify the Contractor stantial Completion of the Work or designated portion ,*
as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of
the Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial
Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and the
for the amount for which he is able to make such rep- Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsi-
resentations to the Owner.The Architect may also decline bilities assigned to them in such Certificate.
to certify payment or, because of subsequently discov-
ered evidence or subsequent observations, he may nullify 9.8.2 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or desig-
the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment nated portion thereof and upon application by the Con-
previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in tractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall
his opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any,
,1 defective Work not remedied, for such Work or portion thereof, as provided in the Con- r.
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indi- tract Documents.
cating probable filing of such claims, 9.9 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop- 9.9.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is
erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon re-
equipment, ceipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will
AIA DOCUMENT A201• GLNERAL CONgnIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976
14 A201-1976 AIA* • 1976 • PIE AMF RICAN INSI17UTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
38
we
8.2.2 The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to pay-
commencement as defined in Subparagraph 8.1.2. He ment as the Owner or the Architect may require, and re-
shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate flecting retainage, if any, as provided elsewhere in the
forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within Contract Documents.
the Contract Time.
9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu-
4 8,3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME ments, payments will be made on account of materials or
8.3.1 If,the Contractor is delayed at any time in the prog- equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered
ress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or and suitably stored at the site and, if approved in ad-
eft the Architect, or by any employee of either, or by any vance by the Owner, payments may similarly be made
separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by for materials or equipment suitably stored at some other
changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, location agreed upon in writing. Payments for materials
unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather condi- or equipment stored on or off the site shall be con-
gn tions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties, ditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of
or any causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by de- sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner
lay authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by to establish the Owner's title to such materials or equip-
any other cause which the Architect determines may ment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, including
No justify the delay, then the Contract Time shall be ex- applicable insurance and transportation to the site for
tended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the those materials and equipment stored off the site.
Architect may determine. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work,
8.3.2 Any claim for extension of time shall be made in materials and equipment covered by an Application for
0110 writing to the Architect not more than twenty days after Payment will pass to the Owner either by incorporation in
the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be the construction or upon the receipt of payment by the
waived. In the case of a continuing delay only one claim Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all
is necessary. The Contractor shall provide an estimate of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances, -herein-
4" the probable effect of such delay on the progress of the after referred,to in this Article 9 as "liens"; and that no
Work. Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application
83.3 If no agreement is made stating the dates upon for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor,
40 which interpretations as provided in Subparagraph 2.2.8 or by any other person performing Work at the site or
shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall be al- furnishing materials and equipment for the Project, sub-
ject' lect to an agreement under which an interest therein or
lowed on account of failure to furnish such interpreta
an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or other-
lions until fifteen days after written request is made for
them, and not then unless such claim is reasonable. wise imposed by the Contractor or such other person.
8.3.4 This Paragraph 8.3 does not exclude the recovery 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
of damages for delay by either parry under other provi- 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after the re-
sions of the Contract Documents. ceipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either
aul issue a Certificate for Payment to the Owner, with a
ARTICLE 9 copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect
determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor in
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION writing his reasons for withholding a Certificate as pro-
9,1 CONTRACT SUM vided in Subparagraph 9.6.1.
9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Owner-Contractor 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will con-
Agreement and, including authorized adjustments thereto, stitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner,
based on his observations at the site as provided in Sub-
tor 2.2.3 and the data comprising the Application
is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contrac- p
for the performance of the Work under the Contract for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point
Documents. indicated; that, to the best of his knowledge, information
9,2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with
9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Con- the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the
tractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values Work for conformance with the Contract Documents
allocated to the various portions of the Work, prepared in upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subse-
' " such form and supported by such data to substantiate its quent tests required by or performed under the Contract
accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, un- Documents, to minor deviations from the Contract Docu-
less objected to by the Architect, shall be used only as a ments correctable prior to completion, and to any specific
basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. qualifications stated in his Certificate); and that the Con-
tractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.
9,3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT However, by issuing a Certificate for Payment, the Archi-
93.1 At least ten days before the date for each progress tect shall not thereby be deemed to represent that he has
payment established in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to
+0 the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized check the quality or quantity of the Work or that he has
Application for Payment, notarized if required, supported reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques,
AIA DOCUMENT A201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - THIRIEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1916
AIAS . Q+ 19,6 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW PORK AVENUE. N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 2M A201-1976 13
37
7.7 TESTS required if complete relief is to be accorded in the arbi-
7.7.1 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, tration. No person other than the Owner or Contractor
regulations or orders of any public authority having juris- shall be included as an original third party or additional '
diction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsi-
tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Architect bility is insubstantial. Any consent to arbitration involving
timely notice of its readiness so the Architect may observe an additional person or persons shall not constitute con-
such inspection, testing or approval. The Contractor shall sent to arbitration of any dispute not described therein or
bear all costs of such inspections, tests or approvals con- with any person not named or described therein. The
ducted by public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, foregoing agreement to arbitrate and any other agreement
the Owner shall bear all costs of other inspections, tests to arbitrate with an additional person or persons duly ..
or approvals. consented to by the parties to the Owner-Contractor
Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under the
7.7.2 If the Architect determines that any Work requires prevailing arbitration law. The award rendered by the
special inspection, testing, or approval which Subpara- arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered
graph 7.7.1 does not include, he will, upon written au- upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court
thorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to having jurisdiction thereof.
order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the
Contractor shall give notice as provided in Subparagraph 7.9.2 Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed
7.7.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure in writing with the other party to the Owner-Contractor
of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Con- Agreement and with the American Arbitration Associa-
tract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs there- tion, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. The
of, including compensation for the Architect's additional demand for arbitration shall be made within the time
services made necessary by such failure; otherwise the limits specified in Subparagraph 2.2.12 where applicable, •*!
Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change and in all other cases within a reasonable time after the
Order shall be issued, claim, dispute or other matter in question has arisen, and
in no event shall it be made after the date when institu-
7.7.3 Required certificates of inspection, testing or ap- tion of legal or equitable proceedings based on such
proval shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly claim, dispute br other matter in question would be
delivered by him to the Architect. barred by the applicable statute of limitations.
7.7.4 If the Architect is to observe the inspections, tests 7,93 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor
or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he will shall carry on the Work and maintain its progress during
do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of ally arbitration proceedings, and the Owner shall con-
supply. tinue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance
7.8 INTEREST with the Contract Documents.
7.8.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract ARTICLE 8
Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is
due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing TIME
or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing at 8,1 DEFINITIONS
-the place of the Project.
7,9 ARBITRATION 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is the
7.9.1 All claims, disputes and other matters in period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for
p question Substantial Completion of the Work as defined in Sub-
between the Contractor and the Owner arising out of, or paragraph 8.1.3,including authorized adjustments thereto.
relating to, the Contract Documents or the breach there-
of, except as provided in Subparagraph 2.2.11 with re- 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date
spect to the Architect's decisions on matters relating to established in a notice to proceed. If there is no notice to
artistic effect, and except for claims which have been proceed, it shall be the date of the Owner-Contractor
waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as Agreement or such other date as may be established
provided by Subparagraphs 9.9.4 and 9.9.5, shall be de- therein.
cided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction g,13 The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or
Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the
Association then obtaining unless the parties mutually
agree otherwise. No arbitration arising out of or relating Architect when construction is sufficiently complete, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner
to the Contract Documents shall include, by consolida-
tion, joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, his can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion
employees or consultants except by written consent con- thereof for the use for which it is intended.
taining a specific reference to the Owner-Contractor 8.1.4 The term-day as used in the Contract Documents
Agreement and signed by the Architect, the Owner, the shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically MIN
Contractor and any other person sought to be joined. No designated.
arbitration shall include by consolidation, joinder or in
any other manner, parties other than the Owner, the 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
Contractor and any other persons substantially involved 8.2.1-All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are
in a common question of fact or law, whose presence is of the essence of the Contract.
AIA DOCUMENT A2111 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976
12 A201-1976 AIAO- m 1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1725 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
w
36
WA
separate contracts in connection with other portions of and charge the cost thereof to the contractors responsible
so the Project or other work on the site under these or similar therefor as the Architect shall determine to be just.
Conditions of the Contract. If the Contractor claims that
delay or additional cost is involved because of such ARTICLE 7
action by the Owner, he shall make such claim as pro-
vided elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
6.12 When separate contracts are awarded for different
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
portions of the Project or other work on the site, the term 7.1 GOVERNING LAW
ON Contractor in the Contract Documents in each case shall
mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner- 7.1.1 The'Contract shall be governed by the law of the
Contractor Agreement. place where the Project is located.
,. 6.1.3 The Owner will provide for the coordination of the 7.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
work of his own forces and of each separate contractor 7.2.1 The Owner and the Contractor each binds himself,
with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives
therewith as provided in Paragraph 6.2. to the other party hereto and to the partners, successors,
ww
6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY assigns and legal representatives of such other party with re-
spect to all covenants, agreements and obligations con-
6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate tained in the—Contract Documents. Neither party to the
contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole
00 and storage of their materials and equipment and the without the written consent of the other, nor shall the
execution.of their work,and shall connect and coordinate Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to
his Work with theirs as required by the Contract Docu- him hereunder, without the previous written consent of
ments. the Owner.
w 6.2.2 If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for 73 WRITTE,[V NOTICE
proper execution or results upon the work of the Owner 7,3,1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly
or any separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to served if delivered in person to the individual or member
proceeding with the Work, promptly report to the Archi- of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for_
tect any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other whom it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by regis-
work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution 'tered or certified mail to the last business address known
and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall to him who gives the notice.
on constitute an acceptance of the Owner's or separate con-
tractors' work as fit and proper to receive his Work, ex- 7.4 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES
cept as to defects which may subsequently become appar- 7,4.1 Should either parry to the Contract suffer injury or
rent in such work by others. damage to person or property because of any act or omis-
6.2.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work sion of the other party or of any of his employees, agents
shall be bome by the party responsible therefor. or others for whose acts he is legally liable, claim shall be
made in writing to such other party within a reasonable
6.2.4 Should the Contractor wrongfully cause damage to time after the first observance of such injury or damage.
the work or property of the Owner, or to other work on
the site, the Contractor shall promptly remedy such dam- 7S PERFORMANCE BOND AND LIBOR AND
age as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
75.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Con-
"! ' 6.25 Should the Contractor-wrongfully cause damage to tractor to furnish bonds covering the faithful performance
the work or property of any separate contractor, the Con- of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising
tractor shall upon due notice promptly attempt to settle thereunder if and as required in the Bidding Documents
with such other contractor by agreement, or otherwise to or in the Contract Documents.
resolve the dispute. If such separate contractor sues or
initiates an arbitration proceeding against the Owner on 7.6 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
account of any damage alleged to have been caused by 7,6.1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract
the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor Documents and the rights and remedies available there-
who shall defend such proceedings at the Owner's ex- under shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any
pense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise im-
arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and posed or available by law.
shall reimburse the Owner for all attorneys' fees and
court or arbitration costs which the Owner has incurred. 7,6.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect
63 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty
afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any
63.1 If a dispute arises between the Contractor and sepa- such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or
rate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be
as required by Paragraph 4.15, the Owner may clean up specifically agreed in writing.
AIA DOCUMENT A201• GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•THIRTEENTH EDITION•AUGUST 1976
40 AIA9• O 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 11
35
and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or
or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone reasonable objection.
for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of S.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with any such
whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or the
hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to ne- Architect has made reasonable objection under the provi- .w
gate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obli- sions of Subparagraph S.2.1. The Contractor shall not be
gation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any required to contract with anyone to whom he has a rea-
party or person described in this Paragraph 4.18. - sonable objection.
4.18.2 In any and all claims against the Owner or the S.2.3 If the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objec-
Architect or any of their agents or employees by any tion to any such proposed person or entity, the Contrac-
employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone for shall submit a substitute to whom the Owner or the
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone Architect has no reasonable objection, and the Contract
for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnifi- Sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in
cation obligation under this Paragraph 4.18 shall not be cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate
limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or Change Order shall be issued; however, no increase in
type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or the Contract Sum shall be allowed for any such substitu-
for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under workers' tion unless the Contractor has acted promptly and re-
or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or sponsively in su¢mitting names as required by Subpara-
other employee benefit acts. graph S.2.1.
4.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Para- 5.2.4 The Contractor shall make no substitution for any
graph 4.18 shall not extend to the liability of the Archi- Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the
tect, his agents or employees, arising out of (1) the prepa- Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such
ration or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, substitution.
surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or (2) 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS •
the giving of or the failure to give directions or instruc- •
tions by the Architect, his agents or employees provided 5.3.1 By an appropriate agreement, written where legally
such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the required for validity, the Contractor shall require each
injury or damage. Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be per-
ARTICLE 5 formed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Con-
tractor by the terms of the Contract Documents,and to as-
SUBCONTRACTORS sume toward the Contractor all the obligations and re-
sponsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents,
5.1 DEFINITION assumes toward the Owner and the Architect. Said agree-
5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a di- ment shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner
rect contract with the Contractor to perform any of the and the Architect under the Contract Documents with re-
Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to spect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor
throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in num- so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such
ber and masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifi-
or his authorized representative. The term Subcontractor cally provided otherwise in the Contractor-Subcontractor
does not include any separate contractor or his subcon- agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress
tractors. against the Contractor that the Contractor, by these Docu-
5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a "'tents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the
direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to per- Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into
form any of the Work at the site. The term Sub-subcon- similar agreements with his Sub-subcontractors. The Con-
tractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents tractor shall make available to each proposed Subcon-
as if singular in number and masculine in gender and tractor, prior to the execution of the Subcontract, copies
means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representa- of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor
tive thereot will be bound by this Paragraph 5.3, and identify to the
Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER Subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract
CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK Documents. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make cop-
5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Docu- ies of such Documents available to his Sub-subcontractors.
ments or the Bidding Documents, the Contractor, as soon ARTICLE 6
as practicable after the award of the Contract, shall fur-
nish to-the Owner and the Architect in writing the names WORK BY OWNER OR-BY
of the persons or entities (including those who are to fur- SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Oft
nish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)
proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work. 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND
The Architect will prompt4y reply to the Contractor in TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform work re- •„
after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any lated to the Project with his own forces, and to award
10 A201-1976 A1A AIAU.N0 197 THENAMERICANDON INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 707 SC NEWTYORKIOAVENUE, K THIRTEENTH EDITION*AUGUST 1976 D.C. AM
34
ule for the Work. The progress schedule shall be related portions of the Work shall be in accordance with ap-
to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con- proved submittals.
tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and
practicable execution of the Work. 4.13 USE OF SITE
4.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site
4.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the
4.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encum-
Owner one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, ber the site with any materials or equipment.
Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in 4.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK
good order and marked currently to record all changes
t"w made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, 4.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting,
Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to fitting or patching that may be required to complete the
the Architect and shall be delivered to him for the Owner Work or to make its several parts fit together properly.
�w upon completion of the Work. 4.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any
4.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any
4.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise
and other data specially prepared for the Work by the altering any work, or by excavation. The Contractor shall
Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier not cut or otherwise alter the work of the Owner or any
or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. separate contractor except with the written consent of the
Owner and of such separate contractor. The Contractor
4.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any
performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and separate contractor his consent to cutting or otherwise
other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate altering the Work
a material, product or system for some portion of the
Work. 4.15 CLEANING UP
4.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate . 4.15.1 The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises
materials, equipment or workmanship and establish free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish
standards by which the Work will be judged. caused by his operations. At the completion of the Work
he shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from
4.12.4 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit, and about the Project as Wvll as all his tools, construc-
with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to tion equipment, machinery and surplus materials.
cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner 4.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up at the comple-
or any separate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product tion of the Work, the Owner may do so as provided in
Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents. Paragraph 3.4 and the cost thereof shall be charged to the
4.12.5 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Contractor.
Product Data and Samples, the Contractor represents that 4.16 COMMUNICATIONS
he has determined and verified all materials, field meas-
+� 4.16.1 The Contractor shall forward all communications
urements, and field construction criteria related thereto, to the Owner through the Architect.
or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated
the information contained within such submittals with 4.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Docu- 4.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license
ments. fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement
4.12.6 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsi- of any patent rights and shall save the. Owner harmless
biliy for any deviation from the requirements of the from loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall
'* Contract Documents by the Architect's 4pproval of Shop be responsible for all such loss when a particular design,
Drawings, Product Data or Samples under Subparagraph process or the product of a particular manufacturer or
2.2.14 unless the Contractor has specifically informed the manufacturers is specified, but if the Contractor has rea-
Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of sub- son to believe that the design, process or product speci-
mission and the Architect has given written approval to fied is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible
the specific deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to
from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop the Architect.
Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Architect's 4.18 INDEMNIFICATION
me approval thereof. 4.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Con-
4.12.7 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in tractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and
writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data the Architect and their agents and employees from and
or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by against all claims,damages, losses and expenses, including
the Architect on previous submittals. but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or result-
ing from the performance of the Work, provided that
4.12.8 No portion of the Work requiring submission of a any such claim,damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable
Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be com- to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury
menced until the submittal has been approved by the to or destruction of tangible property (other than the
Architect as provided in Subparagraph 2.2.14. All such Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom,
AIA DOCUMENT A211- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976
AIA9 . ®1976 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 173S NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 9
33
the Architect for any damage resulting from any such fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper
errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Docu- execution and completion of the Work which are custom-
ments. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the arily secured after execution of the Contract and which
Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where are legally required at the time the bids are received.
required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or 4.7.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply
Samples for such portion of the Work. with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful or-
4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES ders of any public authority bearing on the performance
4.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, of the Work.
using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely. re- 4,7,3 It is not the responsibility of the Contractor to
sponsible for all construction means, methods, tech- make certain that the Contract Documents are in accord-
niques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating ante with applicable laws, statutes, building codes and ~'
all portions of the Work under the Contract. regulations. If the Contractor observes that any of the
4.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any re-
for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontrac- spect, he shall promptly notify the Architect in writing, s.
tors and their agents and employees, and other persons and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by ap-
performing any of the Work under a contract with the propriate Modification.
Contractor. 4.7.4 If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to
4.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved from his obli- be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regula- **�
gations to perform the Work in accordance with the tions, and without such notice to the Architect, he shall
Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of assume full responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs
the Architect in his administration of the Contract, or by attributable thereto.
inspections, tests or approvals required or performed un- 4.8 ALLOWANCES
der Paragraph 7.7 by persons other than the Contractor. 4.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum
4.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items
4.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- covered by thes* allowances shall be supplied for such. ,..
ments, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and but the Contractor will not be required to employ persons
machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other against whom he makes a reasonable objection.
facilities and services necessary for the proper execution 4.j3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- '
and completion of the Work, whether temporary or per- ments:
manent and whether or not incorporated or to be incor- .1 these allowances shall cover the cost to the Con
porated in the Work. tractor, less any applicable trade discount, of the
4.4.2 The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict dis- materials and equipment required by the allowance
cipline and good order among his employees and shall not delivered at the site, and all applicable taxes;
employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not .2 the Contractor's costs for unloading and handling
skilled in the task assigned to him. on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, prof-
4S WARRANTY it and other expenses contemplated for the original
allowance shall be included in the Contract Sum and
4S.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the not in the allowance;
Architect that all materials and equipment furnished .3 whenever the cost is more than or less than the
under this Contract will be new unless otherwise speci- allowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted ac-
fied, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from cordingly by Change Order, the amount of which
faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract will recognize changes, if any, in handling costs on
Documents. All Work not conforming to these require- the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit
ments, including substitutions not properly approved and and other expenses.
authorized, may be considered defective. If required by 4.9 SUPERINTENDENT
the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evi-
dence as to the kind and quality of materials and equip- 4.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superin-
ment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of tendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attend-
Paragraph 13.2. ante at the Project site during the progress of the Work.
The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and all
4.6 TAXES communications given to the superintendent shall be as
4.6.1 The Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use binding as if given to the Contractor. Important commu-
and other similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof nications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communi-
provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted at cations shall be so confirmed on written request in each
the time bids are received, whether or not yet effective. case.
4.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
4.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- 4.10.1 The Contractor, immediately after being awarded
ments, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the build- the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's
ing permit and for all other permits and governmental and Architect's information an estimated progress sched-
AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976
8 A201-1976 AIAO • Q 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
32 ow
Itw '
2.2,16 The Architect will conduct inspections to deter- 3.2,S Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu-
mine the dates of Substantial Completion and final com- ments, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge,
pletion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the all copies of Drawings and Specifications reasonably nec-
Owner's review written warranties and related documents essary for the execution of the Work.
required by the Contract and assembled by the Contrac-
tor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon 3.2.6 The Owner shall forward all instructions to the
compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 9.9. Contractor through the Architect.
2.2.17 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect 3.2.7 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and
will provide one or more Project Representatives to responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and
assist the Architect in carrying out his responsibilities at especially those in respect to Work by Owner or by
the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of Separate Contractors, Payments and Completion, and In-
authority of any such Project Representative shall be as surance in Articles 6,9 and 11 respectively.
w� set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract 3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
Documents. 33.1 If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work as
2.2.18 The duties, responsibilities and limitations of au- required by Paragraph 13.2 or persistently fails to carry
thority of the Architect as the Owner's representative dur- out the Work in accordance with the Contract Docu-
'111111110 ing construction as set forth in the Contract Documents ments, the Owner, by a written order signed personally
will not be modified or extended without written con- or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner
sent of the Owner, the Contractor and the Architect, in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work,
or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has
4" 2.2.19 In case of the termination of the employment of been eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to
the Architect, the Owner shall appoint an architect stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part
against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objet- of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the
tion whose status under the Contract Documents shall be Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the
that of the former architect. Any dispute in connection extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3.
with such appointment shall be subject to arbitration. 3.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
ARTICLE 3 3.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out
go the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
OWNER and fails within seven days after receipt of written notice
• from the Owner to commence and continue correction
3.1 DEFINITION of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness,
the Owner may, after seven days following receipt by the
3.1,1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such Contractor of an additional written notice and without
in the Owner-Contractor Agreement and is referred to prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good
throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in num. such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change
ber and masculine in gender. The term Owner means the Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then
Owner or his authorized representative. or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting
3.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED such deficiencies, including compensation for the Archi-
OF THE OWNER tect's additional services made necessary by such default,
neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and the
3.2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, amount charged to the Contractor are both subject to the
at the time of execution of the Owner-Contractor Agree- prior approval of the Architect. If the payments then or -
ment, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover
he has made financial arrangements to fulfill his obliga- such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to
tions under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evi- the Owner,
dente is furnished, the Contractor is not required to
execute the Owner-Contractor Agreement or to com- ARTICLE 4
mence the Work.
3.2.2 The Owner shall furnish all surveys describing the
CONTRACTOR
physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility Iota- 4.1 DEFINITION
tions for the site of the Project, and a legal description of
the site. 4.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as
such in the Owner-Contractor Agreement and is referred
3.23 Except as provided in Subparagraph 4.7.1, the to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, ease- number and masculine in gender. The term Contractor
ments, assessments and charges required for the construc- means the Contractor or his authorized representative.
tion,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for per- 4.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
manent changes in existing facilities.
4.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare
3.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control the Contract Documents and shall at once report to the
shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable prompt- Architect any error, inconsistency or omission he may dis-
ness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work, cover. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or
AIA DOCUMENT A201- GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION- THIRTEENTH EDITION- AUGUST 1976
AIA9 - m 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 7
31
through the Architect. The Architect will have authority show partiality to either, and will not be liable for the
to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided result of any interpretation or decision rendered in good
in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified faith in such capacity.
by written instrument in accordance with Subparagraph 2,2,11 The Architect's decisions in matters relating to
2'2'18' artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of
2.2.3 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appro- the Contract Documents.
priate to the stage of construction to familiarize himself 2.2.12 Any claim, dispute or other matter in question ..
generally with the progress and quality of the Work and between the Contractor and the Owner referred to the
to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in ac- Architect, except those relating to artistic effect as pro-
cordance with the Contract Documents. Howevei, the vided in Subparagraph 2.2.11 and except those which have
Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or con- been waived by the making or acceptance of final pay-
tinuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quan- ment as provided in Subparagraphs 9.9.4 and 9.9.5, shall
tity of the Work. On the basis of his on-site observations be subject to arbitration upon the written demand of Bi-
as an architect, he will keep the Owner informed of the ther party. However,no demand for arbitration of any such
progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the claim, dispute or other matter may be made until the
Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered
Contractor. a written decision, or (2) the tenth day after the parties
2.2.4 The Architect will not be responsible for and will have presented their evidence to the Architect or have ..
not have control or charge of construction means, meth- been given a reasonable opportunity to do so, if the
ods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety Architect has not rendered his written decision by that
precautions and programs in connection with the Work, date.When such a written decision of the Architect states
and he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure (1) that the decision is final but subject to appeal, and
to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract (2) that any demand for arbitration of a claim, dispute or
Documents. The Architect will not be responsible for or other matter covered by such decision must be.made
have control or charge over the acts or omissions of the within thirty days after the date on which the party mak-
Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their agents or em- ing the demand receives the written decision, failure to .�
ployees, or any other persons performing any of the demand arbitration within said thirty days' period will re-
Work. suit in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding
upon the Owner and the Contractor. If the Architect
2.2.5 The Architect shall at all times have access to the renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been ..�
Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. The initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence but
Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the X011 not supersede any arbitration proceedings unless the
Architect may perform his functions under the Contract decision is acceptable to all parties concerned.
Documents. 2.2.13 The Architect will have authority to reject Work
2.2.6 Based on the Architect's observations and an evalu- which does not conform to the Contract Documents.
ation of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Whenever, in his opinion, he considers it necessary or
Architect will determine the amounts owing to the Con- advisable for the implementation of the intent of the
tractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such Contract Documents, he will have authority to require '
amounts,as provided in Paragraph 9.4. special inspection or testing of the Work in accordance
2.2.7 The Architect will be the interpreter of the require- With Subparagraph 7.7.2 whether or not such Work be
ments of the Contract Documents and the judge of the then fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither ..
performance thereunder by both the Owner and Con- the Architect's authority to act under this Subparagraph
tractor. 2.2.13, nor any decision made by him in good faith either
to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall give
2.2.8 The Architect will render interpretations necessary rise to any duty or responsibility of the Architect to the ..
for the proper execution or progress of the Work, with Contractor, any Subcontractor, any of their agents or
reasonable promptness and in accordance with any time employees, or any other person performing any of the
limit agreed upon. Either party to the Contract may make Work.
written request to the Architect for such interpretations. 2.2.14 The Architect will review and approve or take
2.2.9 Claims, disputes and other matters in question be- other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals
tween the Contractor and the Owner relating to the exe- such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but
cution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the only for conformance with the design concept of the
Contract Documents shall be referred initially to the Work and with the information given in the Contract .�
Architect for decision which he will render in writing Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable
within a reasonable time. promptness so as to cause no delay. The Architect's ap-
2.2.10 All interpretations and decisions of the Architect proval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of
shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably in- an assembly of which the item is a component. �+»
ferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writ- 2.2.15 The Architect will prepare Change Orders in ac-
ing or in the form of drawings. In his capacity as inter- cordance with Article 12,and will have authority to order
preter and judge, he will endeavor to secure faithful per- minor changes in the Work as provided in Subparagraph
formance by both the Owner and the Contractor,will not 12.4.1.
AIA DOCUMENT AM• GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976
6 AM-1976 AIA6 • O 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 173S NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
..t,
30
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
I
ARTICLE 1 1.2.2 By executing the Contract,the Contractor represents
that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS local conditions under which the Work is to be per-
- formed, and correlated his observations with the require-
1.1 DEFINITIONS ments of the Contract Documents.
1,1,1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include
The Contract Documents consist of the Owner-Contrac- all items necessary for the proper execution and comple-
for Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General, tion of the Work. The Contract Documents are comple-
Supplementary and other Conditions), the Drawings, the mentary, and what is required by any one shall be as
Specifications, and all Addenda issued prior to and all binding as if required by all.Work not covered in the Con-
Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A tract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent
Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract therewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being
signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a written necessary to produce the intended results. Words and ab-
interpretation issued by the Architect pursuant to Sub- breviations Which have well-known technical or trade
paragraph 2.2.8, or (4) a written order for a minor change meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord-
in the Work issued by the Architect pursuant to Paragraph ante with such recognized meanings.
12.4. The Contract Documents do not include Bidding 1.2.4 The organization of the Specifications into divisions,
Documents such as the Advertisement or Invitation to sections and articles, and the arrangement of Drawings
Bid, the Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Con- shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work
tractor's Bid or portions of Addenda relating to any of
among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of
these, or any other documents, unless specifically enu= Work to be Performed by any trade.
merated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.
1,1,2 THE CONTRACT - 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construe- 1.3.1 All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof
tion. This Contract represents the entire and integrated furnished by the Architect are and shall remain his prop-
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes all erty.They are to be used only with respect to this Project
prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either and are not to be used on any other project. With the
written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified exception of one contract set for each party to the Con-
only by a Modification as defined in Subparagraph 1.1.1. tract, such documents are to be returned or suitably
The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create accounted for to the Architect on request at the comple-
any contractual relationship of any kind between the Ar-
chitect lion of the Work Submission or distribution to meet offi-
"' and the Contractor, but the Architect shall be gial regulatory requirements or for other purposes in
entitled to performance of obligations intended for his connection with the Project is not to be construed as
benefit, and to enforcement thereof. Nothing contained publication in derogation of the Architect's common law
in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual copyright or other reserved rights.
relationship between the Owner or the Architect and any ARTICLE 2
Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor.
1,1.3 THE WORK ARCHITECT
The Work comprises-the completed construction required 2.1 DEFINITION
by the Contract Documents and includes all labor neces-
sary to produce such construction, and all materials and 2.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to
equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing
construction. architecture identified as such in the Owner-Contractor
• 1.1.4 THE PROJECT Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number and masculine in
The Project is the total construction of which the Work gender. The term Architect means the Architect or his
performed under the Contract Documents may be the authorized representative.
whole or a part.
2,2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
1,2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT 2,2,1 The Architect will provide administration of the
1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed in not less Contract as hereina#ter described.
than triplicate by the Owner and Contractor. If either the
Owner or the Contractor or both do not sign the Condi- 2.2.2 The Architect will be the Owner's representative
tions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, or any of during construction and until final payment is due. The
the other Contract Documents, the Architect shall iden- Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The
tify such Documents. Owner's instructions to the Contractor shall be forwarded
AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• THIRTEENTH EDITION•AUGUST 1976
AIA*• 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 5
29
Payment, Failure of ................9.5.2,9.6.1.3.9.7,9.9.7,14 SUBCONTRACTORS .............................S
Payment, Final ......................2.2.12,2.2.16,9.9,13.3.1 Subcontractors,Definition of ............................5.1 .ws
Payments, Progress ..........7.8,7.9.3,9-5.5,9.8.2,9.9.3,12.1.4 Subcontractors, Work by ...............1.2.4,2.2.4,4.3.1,4.3.2
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ...........................9 Subcontractual Relations ......................53
Payments to Subcontractors .................9.5.2,9.5.3,9.5.4, Submittals ....................1.3,4.10, 4.12, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2,
9.6.1.3, 11.3.3, 14.2.1 9.3.1,9.8.1,9.9.2,9.9.3
Payments Withheld .. ..9.6 Subrogation, Waiver of ..............................11.3.6 +
Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond ..7.5 Substantial Completion ......2.2.16,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.2,9.8,13.2.2
Permits, Fees and Notices ............. .......3.2.3,4.7,4.13 Substantial Completion, Definition of ............. .....8.1.3
PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF ..............10 Substitution of Subcontractors ....................5.2.3,5.2.4
Product Data, Definition of ...........................4.12.2 Substitution of the Architect ..........................2.2.19
21
Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples and ...2.2.14,4.2.1,4.12 Substitutions of Materials .... ....................4.5,12.1.4
Progress and Completion ....................2.2.3,7.9.3,8.2 Sub-subcontractors,Definition of .......................5.1.2
Progress Payments ...........7.8,7.9.3,9.5.5,9.87,9.9.3,12.1.4 Subsurface Conditions ...............................12.2.1
Progress Schedule .................................4.10 Successors and Assigns ................................7.2
Project, Definition of .................................1.1.4 Supervision and Construction Procedures .1.2.4,2.2.4,4.3,4.4,10
Project Representative ...............................2.2.17 Superintendent, Contractor's ......................4.9,10.2.6
Property Insurance ...................................113 Surety, Consent of ..............................9.92,9.9.3
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ..............10 Surveys .......................................3.22,4.18.3
Regulations and Laws .....1.3,2.1.1,4.6,4.7,4.13,7.1,1022,14 Taxes ................................................4.6 ,w
Rejection of Work ........................22.13,4.5.1,132 Termination by thy Contractor .........................14.1
Releases of Waivers and Liens ....................9.9.2,9.9.4 Termination by the Owner .........................
Representations .............122,4.5,4.12.5,9.4.2,9.6.1,9.9.1 Termination of the Architect .........................2.219 .
' 14
Representatives ............................2.1,2.2.2,2.2.17, TERMINATION Of THE CONTRACT •••..•..••..
2.2.18,3.1,4.1,4.9,5.1,9.3.3 Tests .................................22.13,433,7.7,9.4 2
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work .....2.2.4,4.32, Time •.........•..•..••.•••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••8
6.1.3,62,9.8.1 Time, Definition of ................
Retainage .......................9.3.1,952,9.82,9.92,9.93 Time,Delays and Extensions of ...........8.3,12.1,12.3,13.2.7
Review of Contract Documents Time Limits,Specific ............. ...22.8,2.2.12,32.1, 3.4, w.
by the Contractor ........................122,4.2,4.73 4.10,5.3,6.22,7.9.2,82,8.32,8.3.3,'92,93.1,
Reviews of Contractor's Submittals by 9.4.1,95.1,9.7,11.1.4,11.3.1,11.3.8,113.9,
Owner and Architect .....22.14,4.10,4.12,52.1,5.2.3,92 12.2,12.3,13.2.2,13.2.5,13.2.7,14.1,14.2.1
Rights and Remedies ......1.1.2,2.2.12,2.2.13,3.3,3.4,5.3,6.1, Title to Work ...................................9.3.2,9.3.3 .�
63, 7.6,7.9,8.3.1,9.6.1,9.7,10.3,12.1.2,12.2,1322,14 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK .............13
'• Royalties and Patents .................................4.17 Uncovering of Work ............................. ....13.1
Safety of Persons and Property .........................10.2 Unforseen Conditions ........................ ....8.3,12.2
Safety Precautions and Programs ..................22.4,10.1 Unit Prices ...................................1 .1. ,12.15
Z 3
Samples, Definition of ...............................4.123 Use of Documents .......................1.1.1,1.3,325,53 w
Samples,Shop Drawings, Product Data and .....2.2.14,4.2,4.12 Use of Site .....................................4.13,6.2.1
Samples at the Site, Documents and ....................4.11 Values,Schedule of ....................................92
Schedule of Values .......:....•.....•...:.............9.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor ....7.6.2,8.3.2,9.95,11.3.6
Schedule, Progress ...................................4.10 Waiver of Claims by the Owner ......7.6.2,9.9.4,11.3.6,11.4.1
Separate Contracts and Contractors .....4.142,6,11.3.6,13.1.2
Waiver of Liens ......................................9.9.2 .r+
Shop Drawings, Definition of ..........................4.12.1 Warranty and Warranties ....2.2.16,45,9.3.3,9.8.1,9.9.4,13.2.2
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples ... 2.2.14,4.2,4.12 Weather Delays .........................8.3.1
Site, Use of ......................................4.13,6.2.1 Work, Definition of ......... ........ ...............1.13
. .
Site Visits,Architect's ................2.2.3,2.25,2.2.6,2.2.17, Work by Owner or by Separate Contractors ................6
7.7.1,7.7.4,9.4.2,9.6.1,9.9.1 Written Consent ......2.2.18,4.14.2,7.2,7.6.2,9.8.1,9.9.3,9.9.4
Site Inspections .............1.2.2,22.3,2.2.16,7.7,9.8.1,9.9.1 Written Interpretations ...............1.1.1,1.2.4,22.8,1232
Special Inspection and Testing ....................2.2.13,7.7 Written Notice .....2.2.8.2.2.'12,3.4,4.2,4.7.3,4.7A,4.9,4.12.6,
Specifications ...............................1.1.1,1.2.4,13 4.12.7, 4.17, 5.2.1, 73, 7.4, 7.7, 7.9.2, 8.1.2, 8.3.2, 8.3.3,
Statutes of Limitations ....................7.9.2,13.22,13.2.7 9.4.1, 9.6.1, 9.7, 9.9.1, 9.95, 10.2.6, 11.1.4, 11.3.1, 11.3.4,
Stopping the Work ......................3.3,9.7.1,10.3,14.1 11.35,11.3.7,11.3.8,12.2,12.3,132.2,13.25,14
Stored Materials ............6.2.1,9.3.2,102.1.2,11.3.1,13.25 Written Orders ...................3.3,4.9,12.1.4,12A.1,13.1
wu
AIA DOCUMENT AM • GENERAL CONOITIONS OF THE CONTRACT fOR C^NSTRUCTION•THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976
4 AM-1976 AIAV • O 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 201106
28
tw►
6,4.17,4
2. .18.3,6.2.2,7.6.2,9.4.2,
Decisions of the Architect ......2.2.9 through 2.2.12,6.3,7.7.2, 4.19.9.4,9.9.5,10.2.5,11.1.2,11.3.6
7.9.1,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.6.1,9.8.1,12.1.4,12.3.1,14.2.1
Defective or Non-Conforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection Limitations of Time, General .....2.2.8, 2.2.14, 3.2.4,4.2, 4.7.3,
4.12.4,4.15,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.4,7.7,8.2,9.5.2,9.6,
and Correction of ....2.2.3,2.2.13,3.3,3.4,4.5,6.2.2,6.2.3,
9.6.1.1,9.9.4.2,13 y g 9.9t 11,3.4,12.1.4,12.4,13.2.1,13.2.2,13.25
Definitions ........1.1, 2.1,3.1,4.1, 4.12.1 through 4.12.3, 5.1, Limitations of Time, Specific ...........2.2.8, 2.2.12, 3.2.1, 3.4,
6.1.2,8.1,9.1.1, 12.1.1, 12.1.4 4.10,5.3,6.2.2,7.9.2,8.2,8.3.2,8.3.3,9.2,9.3.1,9.4.1,9.5.1,
Delays and Extensions of Time ..........................83 9.7,11.1.4,11.3.1,11.3.8,11.3.9,1222,12.3,13.2.2,
2.2.9, 2.2.12, 2.2.19, 6.2.5, 6.3, 7.9.1 13.2.5, .9.2.7, 14.1,14.2.1
Disputes ................ Limitations, Statutes of ...................7.9.2, 13.2.2, 13.2.7
Documents and Samples at the Site . ...................4.11 •,.•..,•..,.•, ,•,11A
Drawings and Specifications, Use and Loss of Use Insurance ...
Ownership of ......................1.1.1, 1.3, 3.2.5, 5.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and ......1.1.3,4.4,4.5, 4.12,4.13,
Emergencies .........................................103 4.15.1, 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 9.3.3,11.3.1, 13.2.2, 13.2.5, 14
Employees, Contractor's .....4.3.2, 4.4.2,4.8.1, 4.9, 4.18, 10.2.1 Materials Suppliers .........
.4.12.1, 5.2.1, 9.3.3
through 10.2.4, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.1.1 Means,Methods,Techniques, Sequences and ,2.2.4, 4.3.1, 9.4 2
Equipment, Labor, Materials and ....1.1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, Procedures of Construction ..........
4.15.1,6.2.1, 9.3.2,9.3.3,11.3, 13.2.2,13.2.5, 14 Minor Changes in the Work ................1.1.1,2.2.15,12.4
Execution and Progress of the Work ....1.1.3,1.2.3,2.2.3,2.2.4, MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ::::::::::: ::::::......1.1.1
2.2.8,4.2,4.4.1,4.5,6.2.2,7.9.3,8.2, Modifications, Definition of .
8.3, 9.6.1, 10.2.3, 10.2.4, 14.2 Modifications to the Contract ........1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.2.2;2.2.18,
4.7.3,7.9.3,12
Execution, Correlation and Intent of the a
Contract Documents .........................1.2, 4.7.1 Mutual Responsibility .. .•., ,,,,
Extensions of Time ................................8.3, 12.1 Non-Conforming Work, Acceptance of Defective or .. :13.3.1
Failure of Payment by Owner ......................9.7,14.1 Notice,Written ..........2.2.8,2.2.12,3.4,42,4.7.3,4 7 4,4.9,
Failure of Payment of Subcontractors ..9.5.2,9.6.1.3,9.9.2,14.2.1 4.12.6,4.12.7,4.17,5.2.1,7.3,7.4,7.7,7.9.2,8.1.2,8.3.2,
Final Completion and Final Payment ..2.2.12, 2.2.16,9.9, 13.3.1 8.3.3,9.4.1,9.6.1,9.7,9.9.1,9.9.5,10.2.6,11.1.4,11.3.1,
Financial Arrangements, Owner's ......................3.2.1 11.3.4,11.3.5,11.3.7,11.3 8,12.2.12.3:13.2.2,13.2.5,14
...11.3.1 Notices, Permits, Fees and •4.7,10.2.2
go Fire and Extended Coverage insurance ............
Governing Law .......................................7.1 Notice of Testing and Inspections ,•,,,
7.
Guarantees (See Warranty
Notice to Proceed .... 8.1.2
and Warranties) ........2.2.16,4.5,9.3.3,9.8.1,9.9.4,13.2.2 Observations,Architect's On-Site ........2.23,7.7.1,7.7.4,9A.2
indemnification .. ...4.17, 4.18, 6.25, 9.9.2 Observations, Contractor's ..................12,4.2 .2.1,4.73
Identification of Contract Documents ..................1.2.1 Occupancy ..... .................8.13;9.55,11.3.9
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers ...........5.2.1 On-Site Inspections by the-'Architect ........2.23,2.2.16,9.4.2,
9.8.1,9.9.1
information and
Services Required of the Owner ........3.2,6,9,11.2,113 On-Site Observations by the Architect .......2.2.3,2.2.6,2.2.17,
Inspections ...............2.2.13,2.2.16,4.3.3,7.7,9.8.1,9.9.1 . .4 2 9.
77.1 77 ,94 ,961, 91
Instructions to Bidders .. .........1.1.1,7.5 Orders, Written ............... 33,4.9,1 .4•�•. 1.1•
.................
21
OWNER 3
Instructions to the """"
Contractor ..........2.2.2, 3.2.6,4.8.1, 7.7.2, 12.1.2, 12.1.4 Owner, Definition of ................... .............3.1
INSURANCE ......................................9.8.1,11 Owner, Information and Services Required of the . ..3.2,6.13,
Insurance, Contractor's Liability ........................11.1
6.2,9,11.2,11.3
..11.4 Owner's Authority .............2.2.16,4.8.1, 7.7.2,9.3.1,9.3.2,
Insurance, Loss of Use ............•-••••••••••••• „ , „ ,
Insurance, Owner's Liability ...... 9.8.1,.11.3 8 1212 72.14
.......... 112 - 3.21
Insurance, Property ...,...••••••••••••••••••••••••••••113 Owner's Financial Capability ... .••11.2
Insurance, Stored Materials .....................9.32,11.3.1 Owner's Liability Insurance ...
Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy ....11.3.9 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors ..........1.12,95.4
Insurance Companies, Settlement With ................ Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work ..............3.4,132.4
Intent of Owner's Right to Clean Up ....... ........ ......4.152,63
the Contract Documents ...1.2.3,22.10,2.2.13,2.2.14,12.4 Owner's Right to Perform Work and to Award 6.1
Interest .......................7.8 Separate Contracts ......................... .....142
•i•n s •• .1.1.1, 2.2.7 22.8, 22.10, 12.4 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ...............
Interpretations, Written ........
Labor and Materials, Equipment ....1.1.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.12, 4.13, Owner's Right to Stop the Work ..........,, ,,, ,,,,,,,,33
4.15.1,6.2.1,9.3.2,9.3.3,11.3,13.2.2,132.5,14 Ownership and Use of Documents ........1.1.1,1.3,3.25,5.2.3
Labor and Material Payment Bond ......................7.5 Patching of Work, Cutting and ........... •••4,6
Labor Disputes ........ ............8.3.1 Patents, Royalties and ........ 7S
41 22
4171
Laws and Regulations ..............1.3,2.1.,4.6,4.7,4.13,7.1, Payment Bond, Labor and Material .... 9.2, 9.3,9.4,95.3,
7.7, 1022, 14 Payment,Applications for .... 2
Liens ....... ...........................9.3.3, 9.92, 9.9.4.1 9.6.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.9.3,14.2
Limitations of Authority .....2.2.2, 2.2.17, 2.2.18, 11.3.8, 12.4.1 Payment,Certificates for ........... .2.2.6,2.2.16,9.4,9.5.1,
Limitations of liability ......22.10,22.13,22.14,33,420 4.7.3, 955,9.6.1,9.7.1,9.82,9.9.1,9.9.3,12.1 A,142.2
AIA DOCUMENT AM• GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION•THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976
AIA� • m 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A2�1-T976 3
27
INDEX
Acceptance of Defective or Non-Conforming Work ..6.2.2,133 Cleaning Up .....................................4.15, 6.3
Acceptance of Work ..................9.5.5,9.8.1,9.9.1-,9.9.3 Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to..3.2.1,4.2,
Access to Work ................................2.2.5, 6.2.1 4.7.1,4.10, 5.2.1,6.2.z., 7.5,9.2, 11.1.4, 11.3.4
Accident Prevention ..............................2.2.4,10 Commencement of the Work, Definition of ....... .....8.1.2
Acts and Omissions ........2.2.4,4.18.3,7.4,7.6.2,8.3.1,10.25 Communications .....................2.2.2, 3.2.6, 4.9.1, 4.16
Additional Costs, Claims for ..................... .....12.3 Completion,
Administration of the Contract ....................2.2, 4.3.3 Conditions Relating to ...2.2.16,4.11,4.15,9.4.2,9.9,13.2.2
All Risk Insurance ..................................11.3.1 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND ..........................9
Allowances ...........................................4.a Completion, Substantial ....2.2.16, 8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.2, 9.8,13.2.2
Applications for Payment ........ .........2.2.6,9.2,93,9.4, Compliance with Laws ................1.3,2.1.1,4.6,4.7,4.13,
9.5.3,9.6.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.9.3,14.2.2 7.1,7.7,10.2.21
Approvals ......... ....2.2.14, 3.4, 4.3.3, 45, 4.12.4 through Concealed Conditions ................................. wv
4.12.6,4.12.8,4.18.3,7.7,9.3.2 Consent,
Arbitration ................22.7 through 2.2.13, 2.2.19, 6.2.5, Written ...2.2.18,4.14.2, 7.2,7.6.2,9.8.1,9.9.2,9.9.3,11.3.9
. 7.9,8.3.1,11.3.7,11.3.8 Contract,Definition of ............................2...4.33
ARCHITECT ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,* 2 Contract Administration ,
Contract Award and Execution, Conditions .2 wr
Architect,Definition of .................................2.1 .4.7.1 4.10 5.2 7.5 9.2 11.1.4 113.4
Architect, Extent of Authority ....2.2, 3.4,4.12.8, 5.2, 6.3, 7.7.2, Relating to ........ ,
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ........................
8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.3.1,9.4,9.5.3,9.6,9.8,9.9.1,9.9.3,12.1.1, .......1
12.1.4,12.3.1,12.4.1,13.1,13.2.1,13.25,14.2 Contract Documents,
Copies Furnished and Use of ...............1.3,3.2.5, 5.3
Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility .....2.2.2 Contract Docu ts Definition of .....................1.1.1
through 2.2.4,2.2.10 through 2.2.14,2.2.17,2.2.18, '
Contract Sum, Definition
4.3.3,4.12.6,5.2.1,9.4.2,9.5.4,9.5.5,12.4 . .....................•.,..••••.••.•..
Architect's Additional Services ..3.4, 7.7.2, 13.2.1, 13.25, 14.22 Contract Termination ..Definition n.of .............. ....1 4 Contract Time, 1
Architect's Approvals ......22.14,3.4,4.5,4.12.6,4.12.8,4.183 CONTRACTOR .. •.•.•..•.•..8.1.4 w
Architect's Authority to Reject Work ....22.13,45,13.12, 13.2 contractor, Definition of ..........................4.1 6.12
Architect's Copyright .............. ............. ... ..1.3 .....4.3.2,4.4.2,4.8.1 4.9 4.18,10.2.1 —
Architect's Decisions ..........2.2.7�through 2.2.13, 6.3, 7.7.2, Contractor's Employees . ,
7.9.1,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.6.1,9.8.1,12.1.4,123.1 N through 102.4:10.2:6:10.3:11.1.1
Contractor's Liability Insurance .. ..11.1
Architects Inspections ..............2.2.13, 2.2.16, 9.8.1, 9.9.1 Contractor's Relationship with
Architect's Instructions ..........2.2.13,2.2.15,7.7.2,12.4,13.1 Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces .........3.2.7,6
Architect's Interpretations .........2.2.7 through 2.2.10, 12.3.2 Contractor's Relationship with
Architect's On-Site Observations ......2.2.3,2.2.5,2.2.6, 2.2.17, Subcontractors .........1.2.4, 5.2, S.3, 9.5.2, 113.3, 11.3.6
7.7.1,7.7.4,9.4.2,9.6.1,9.9.1 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect ........1.1.2,2.2.4, as
Architect's Project Representative ..............2.2.17, 2.2.18 2.2.5,2.2.10,2.2.13,4.3.3,4.5,4.7.3,4.12.6,4.18,11.3.6
Architect's Relationship with Contractor .....1.1.2, 2.2.4, 2.2.5, Contractor's Representations ............1.2.2,45,4.125,9.33
2.2.10,2.2.13,43.3,45,4.7.3,4.12.6,4.18,11.3.6 Contractor's Responsibility for
Architect's Relationship with Those Performing the Work .....4.3.2, 4.18, 10
Subcontractors ..................1.1.2, 2.2.13,,9.5.3,95.4 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents ....1.2.2,4.2, 4.73
Architect's Representations .................9.4.2, 9.6.1, 9.9.1 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work ... ...... ....9.7
Artistic Effect .......................1.2.3,2.2.11,2.2.12,7.9.1 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract .......... .14.1
Attorneys' Fees ...........................4.18.1,6.2.5,9.92 Contractor's Submittals ...............2.2.14,4.10, 4.12, 5.2.1,
Award of Separate Contracts .........:................6.1.1 5.2.3,9.2,9.3.1,9.8.1,9.9.2,9.9.3 �**
Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Contractor's Superintendent 4.9, 10.2.6
Portions of the Work ..............................52 Contractor's Supervision and
Bonds, Lien ...... .... .. . ............ .9.9.2 Construction Procedures ..........1.2.4, 2.2.4, 4.3, 4.4, 10
Bonds, Performance, Labor and material Payment ....7.5, 9.9.3 Contractual Liability Insurance ........................11.1.3
Building Permit ........................................4.7 Coordination and
Certificate of Substantial Completion ...................9.8.1 Correlation ....1.2.2, 1.2.4, 4.3.1, 4.10.1, 4.12.5, 6.1.3, 6.2.1
Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval ...........7.7.3 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications ..1.3,3.2.5,53
Certificates of Insurance ........................9.3.2, 11.1.4 Correction of Work .....................3.3, 3.4, 10.2.5, 13.2
Certificates for Payment ....2.2.6, 2.2.16, 9.4,9.5.1, 9.55, 9.6.1, Cost, Definition of ......... ........12.1.4
.................
9.7.1,9.8.2,9.9.1,9.9.3,12.1.4,14.2.2 Costs ......3.4, 4.8.2, 4.15.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 6.2.5, 6.3, 7.7.1,
Change Orders ..........1.1.1, 2.2.15, 3.4, 4.8.2.3, 5.2.3, 7.7.2, 7.7.2,9.7,11.3.1,11.3.5,12.1.3,12.1.4,12.3,13.1.2,13.2,14
8.3.1, 9.7, 9.9.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, Cutting and Patching of Work ......................4.14,6.2
12.1,13.1.2,13.25,13.3.1 Damage to the Work ................6.2.4,6.2.5,9.6.1.5,9.8.1,
Change Orders, Definition of ........................12.1.1 10.2.1.2, 10.3, 11.3, 13.2.6
CHANGES IN THE WORK ....................2.2.15.3.11.1.12 Damages, Claims for ............6.1.1, 6.2.5, 7.4, 8.3.4, 9.6.11
Claims for Additional Cost or Time ....8.3.2, 8.3.3, 12.2.1, 123 Damages for Delay ..........................6.1.1, 8.3.4,9.7
Claims for Damages ..............6.1.1, 62.5, 7.4, 8.3, 9.6.1.1 Day, Definition of ....................................8.1.4
�w.
AIA DOCUMENT A201 • GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT fOR CONSTRUCTION• THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976
2 A201-1976 AIAO • ® 1976 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
26 AM
THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
AIA Document A201
General Conditions of the Contract
for Construction
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION
WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICATION
1976 EDITION
TABLE OF ARTICLES
-1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8..TIME
t. 9. ,PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
2. ARCHITECT •
3. OWNER 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND,. :
PROPERTY -
4. CONTRACTOR 11. INSURANCE
5. SUBCONTRACTORS 12. CHANGES IN THE WORK
6. WORK BY OWNER OR BY 13. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION
SEPARATE CONTRACTORS OF WORK
7. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14. TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT
This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America.
Copyright 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,19(p6,1%7, 1970, 0 1976 by The American Institute of Architects,
173,New York Avenue, N.W.,Washington,D.C.20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its pro-
visions without permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecution.
AIA DOCUMENT AM• GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION• THIRTEENTH EDITION• AUGUST 1976
AIAe• ®1916 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE Of ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A201-1976 1
25
nip
t
,!
a"
w�
.�r
•R
I
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1 7P
ARCHITECT'S Owner p
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS Architect ❑ AMIN
Consultant ❑
Contractor ❑
Field ❑
AIA DOCUMENT G710 (instructions on reverse side) Other ❑
PROJECT: ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL
(name,address) INSTRUCTION NO:
OWNER: DATE OF ISSUANCE:
TO: ARCHITECT:
(Contractor)
CONTRACT FOR: ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: t.
The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accord-
ance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Prior to proceeding
in accordance with these instructions, indicate your acceptance of these instructions for minor change to
the Work as consistent with the Contract Documents and return a copy to the Architect. ,.
Description: •
Attachments: (Here insert listing o/documents that support description.)
ISSUED: ACCEPTED:
BY BY
to
Architect Contractor Date _
AIA DOCUMENT 0710 • ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS • MARCH 1979 EDITION • AIAG ®`
01979 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 9735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 6710-1979
24
se
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
AIA DOCUMENT 0705
e This certificate is issued as a matter of information only and confers no rights upon the addressee. It does not amend, extend
or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed below.
Name and Address of Insured
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
0111
Covering (Project Name and location) A
B
ORB C
Addressee: r 1
(Owner) D
E
•• L J F
This is to certify that the following described policies, subject to their terms, con tions and exclusions, have been issued to
4W the above named insured and are in force at this time.
TYPE OF INSURANCE CO. POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS OF LIAIILUN IN THOUSANDS
CODE NUMBER DATE EACH AGGR E GATE
OCCURRENCE
T. (a) Workers' Compensation
Statut0
(b) Employer's Liability S Each Accident
2. Comprehensive General
Liability including: Bodily Injury $ $
❑ Premises-Operations
[D independent Contractors Property Damage S $
❑ Products and Completed
Operations
❑ Broad Form Property Bodily Injury $ $
Damage and.Property •
❑ Contractual Liability Damage Combined -
❑ Explosion and Collapse
Hazard
k/I
❑ Underground Hazard 'Applies to Products and Completed $
❑ Personal In' with Operations Hazard (Personal
Employm t Exclusion Injury)
Deleted
3. Comprehen a Automo I Bodily Injury
i•::i;::;:;:;•:i t:iy
-liability (Each Person)
❑ Owned Bodily Injury $
❑ Hired (Each Accident)
❑ Non-Owned Property Damage S `
Bodily Injury $
and Property
Itr 1 Damage Combined
.: .:..:...............
4. Excess Liability Bodily Injury $ $
❑ Umbrella Form and Property
❑ Other than Umbrella Damage Combined
11111111 5. Other(Specify)
1. Products and Completed Operations coverage will be maintained for a minimum period of ❑ 1 ❑ 2 year(s) after final
payment.
2. Has each of the above listed policies been endorsed to reflect the company's obligation to notify the addressee in the event
of cancellation or non-renewal? ❑ Yes ❑ No
CERTIFICATION
I hereby certify that I am an authorized representative of each of the insurance companies listed above, and that the cover-
ages afforded under the policies listed above will not be cancelled or allowed to expire unless thirty (30) days written notice
has been given to the addressee of this certificate.
gal
Name of Issuing Agency Signature of Authorized Representative
OR Address Date of Issue
AIA DOCUMENT GM - CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE - NOVEMBER 1978 EDITION - AIA® - ®1978 C705--1978 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YOB:,. AVENUE,N.W.,WASHINC70N, D.C.20006
SB!
23
CERTIFICATE OF V
OWNER ® AM
SUBSTANTIAL ARCHITECT
CONTRACTOR
COMPLETION FIELD ❑
AIA DOCUMENT.0744 OTHER ❑ �""
PROJECT: ARCHITECT: .�
(name,address)
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER:
TO (Owner): CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT FOR:
L I CONTRACT DATE:
DATE OF ISSUANCE: J
PROJECT OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL INCLUDE:
The Work performed under this Contract has been reviewed and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial
Completion of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby established as
which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents,except as stated below.
DEFINITION OF DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Architect when
construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner can occupy or utilize the
work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended, as expressed in the Contract Documents.
A list of items to be completed or corrected, prepared by the'Contractor and verified and amended by the Architect, is
attached hereto. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all
Wort:in accordance with the Contract Documents.The date of commencement of warranties for items on the attached list willf''
be the date of final payment unless otherwise agreed to in writing.
ARCHITECT BY DATE
The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within days
from the above Date of Substantial Completion. ""`
CONTRACTOR BY DATE ..
The Owner accepts the Work or designated portion thereof as substantially complete and will assume full possession thereof
at (time) on (date),,..
OWNER BY DATE
.»
The responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work
and insurance shall be as follows:
(Note—Owner's and Contractor's legal and insurance counsel should determine and review insurance requirements and coverage;Contractor
shall secure consent of surety company,it anyJ
AIA DOCUMENT 6701 • CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION • APRIL 1978 EDITION • AIAO .�
01478•THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTs.1735 NEW YORK AVE.. N.W..WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006 C704 19;
77
h
IPA
.: < u:
<
Z o
U
x
4*
W
V
L
W r
L)N
J
N Q
N
r
d
` uJ F- o O U
o n < Z �c�
Z O W
O Zoec W
zQr- ooc
Q U ° Q,.,p<+
V
U i W '-0Z~ �
ow < H .U<
< U
U < v>>
` a z Z;
2 LL ix Z cY 661 664 �W000
Z) �a,�„?p
U
O
� D
Q o
_ H
<D
a U �Z
L
Y ..Z
O W
0 3 �<+ _ �-
Z L`.rJ DLn
on
Ln
- �-�
C Y
cc r w W3
H -° °' - - _-5z
W . CL v D
z �
,n n, y " D u
' "
vp
L
r
#} of = y ro—
CJ
Z _ o v
H Z W 5
Z
4,d l
21
N CC
O Z Z v O A
O N O z O = v c A
< U
o000D0
a v o 'o O vs
N C e0 ep 61 � fp #w
V O W (V 7
O o N V < E r
v () O ~ U
Cie pC < t d > O
O O = W H- .n V O w w
< < « O M C r V N W E a 4!
E r v W Y O Pry < W a .D �p V cc
to O a O
E `o y O p 3 0 "' V < A V E W O d N�
0 Vl v f•1 + W `- V
�- 60 o c '° oN omLn _ .- Odd o ° �_
V `< w c� 0 C G yd v U C L N C W 67 Z
Z d Z c ` W ° E + co .~J.. =+ V y'"'' Z ° W = L L m
Ec -� oU0 Ec �0 E 0 E A W ►- � �' '0 " N � � co
C O < r, < T X < d W d V H CL
Q —° .. ? c u IU IUD o w a. < � Z ,aa E ►' a W � c �+
o V �. d E Z
� c Z � Te � � %n w < O O z -c - m
_ 'fl
d O p W O O W �_ < 41 w m V V 7
G C O Z V CG �o F- V fC ;� Z C >. CUC >,.0 O
Q < U � e�iric ui .o cCO+ inv� Z � < � 4 m +-Ub
cc
�' CC :d;� 3 °
L O
V OC V ,N
W <
i� O
Z-6 s O CMG
f4 00 O OA ` - -- O.0 C �O a
lv6 O •N $A d U C '1-
W Lo °C
�
s A arm Cc dV ,
Z
Z < E o .a 4.6
LW
ce. V O 'c
4,W a
V-a a w u
> 0 -6. =
� orE
010-0 O� yy��� pD
.yam: = V — 0 T� o A'�
too m
ox 0-M
0 cc
O v=i iii c d A L d'v N ` °�' .°•'_ <
U oc A N C m u is Q d d t= v•� a, !'A C Q .. O Q vc �'^ G ycto cc W 3mLc;.
o� Z W. p -0o s a� aco10CVc3 O LN �L V
V Z 0 v �., ON y r c ovc u ad
3 oC Z Z �O 0 .0 co ie y fi•— oc r ' O 0` 0
E=- c ►-. rVV V j. .
�. Z L ►� Q 7 y y Z Yi. A=�+
Q p O V U V a < 2 Z. ,_° 0;� v O is Q c-o =r,.,• �.az
20
CHANGE Distribution to:
ORDER OWNER p -
ARCHITECT ❑ _
40 A/A DOCUMENT 0701 CONTRACTOR 13-..
FIELD D
OTHER ❑
PROJECT: CHANGE ORDER NUMBER:
(name, address)
INITIATION DATE:
Ir TO (Contractor):
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO: -
CONTRACT FOR:
J CONTRACT DATE:
You are directed to make the following changes in this Contract:
4"
Not valid until signed by both the Owner and Architect.
Signature of the Contractor indicates his agreement herewith, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
-The original (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Cost) was ..
Net change by previously authorized Change Orders ................................... S
The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Cost) prior to this Change Order was .......... $
'The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Cost)-will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged)
bythis Change Order ......................................................... $
The new(Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Cost)including this Change Order will be ... $
The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by ( ) Days.
The Date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is
Authorized:
ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR OWNER
� Address .
Address Address
0lI0 BY BY BY
DATE DATE DATE
AIA DOCUMENT 6701 • CHANGE ORDER • APRIL 1978 EDITION • AIAG • O 1978 --1978
THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 NEW YORK AVE.,•N.W..WA.SHINCT0,4.D.C.20006
19
Ell
ARTICLE 21
OTHER CONDITIONS OR PROVISIONS
.»
am
.w
This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.
OWNER CONTRACTOR
AIA DUCUMLNT A187 • AUKKfVIAI11) OWNIK-('()NIKA(:I()K A(,KILMINI • 11(,11111 LUIIION • APKII. 1978 • AIA«
(0 IWU • 1111. AMLKI(AN INS11111 L UI AK(.IIIII.(.1b, 1731 NI.W YUKA AVI NUL, N.W, WAWIIN(:IUN, U.C. A" A107-1978 8
w4
18
tasl -
and maintained by the Contractor to protect him from 18.2 The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be
claims under workers' or workmen's compensation acts changed only by Change Order.
and other employee benefit acts, claims for damages be- 18,3 The cost or credit to the Owner from a change in
cause of bodily injury, including death, and from claims the Work shall be determined by mutual agreement.
for damages, other than to the Work itself, to property
which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's ARTICLE 19
operations under this Contract, whether such operations CORRECTION OF WORK
qtr be by himself or by any Subcontractor or anyone directly
or indirectly employed by any of them. This insurance 19.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct any Work
shall be written for not less than any limits of liability rejected by the Architect as defective or as failing to con-
specified in the Contract Documents, or required by law, form to the Contract Documents whether observed before
AAr whichever is the greater, and shall include contractual or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabri-
liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obliga- cated,installed or completed, and shall correct any Work
tions under Paragraph 10.11. Certificates of such insur- found to be defective or nonconforming within a period
ance shall be filed with the Owner prior to the com- of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion of
mencement of the Work. the Contract or within such longer period of time as may
17.2 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable
maintaining his own liability insurance and, at his option, special warranty required by the Contract Documents.The
may maintain such insurance as will protect him against provisions of this Article 19 apply to Work done by Sub-
"I claims which may arise from operations under the Con- contractors as well as to Work done by direct employees
tract. of the Contractor.
17.3 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall pur-
chase and maintain property insurance upon the entire ARTICLE 20
Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT
insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the
Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the 20.1 If the Architect fails to issue a Certificate for Pay-
Work and shall insure against the perils of fire and ex- ment for a period of thirty days through no fault of the
tended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for . Contractor,or if the Owner fails to make payment thereon
physical loss or damage including,without duplication of for a period of thirty days, the Contractor may, upon
coverage, theft, vandalism, and malicious mischief. seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and
17.4 Any loss insured under Paragraph 17.3 is to be ad- the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from
justed with the Owner and made payable to the Owner the Owner payment for all Work executed and for any
proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment,
as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, tools,and construction equipment and machinery, inplud-
subject to the requirements of any mortgagee clause. Ing reasonable profit and damages applicable to the
17.5 The Owner shall file a copy of all policies with the Project.
Contractor before an exposure to loss may occur. 20.2 If the Contractor defaults or persistently fails or
17.6 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the
each other for damages caused by fire or other perils to Contract Documents or fails to perform any provision of
go the extent covered by-insurance obtained pursuant to the Contract, the Owner may, after seven days' written
this Article or any other property insurance applicable to notice to the Contractor and without prejudice to any
the Work,except such rights as they may have to the pro- other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies
ceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as trustee. and may deduct the cost thereof, including compensation
#r The Contractor shall require similar waivers in favor of the for the Architect's additional services made necessary
Owner and the Contractor by Subcontractors and Sub- thereby, from the payment then or thereafter due the
subcontractors. Contractor or,at his option,and upon certification by the
Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,
10 ARTICLE 18 may terminate the Contract and take possession of the
CHANGES IN THE WORK site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construc-
tion equipment and machinery thereon owned by the
18.1 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may Contractor and may finish the Work by whatever method
order Changes in the Work consisting of additions, dele- he may deem expedient,and if the unpaid balance of the
tions, or modifications, the Contract Sum and the Con- Contract Sum exceeds the expense of finishing the Work,
tract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes such excess shall be paid to the Contractor, but if such
in the Work shall be authorized by written Change Order expense exceeds such unpaid balance, the Contractor
!!�! ' signed by the Owner and the Architect. shall pay the difference to the Owner.
etr
AIA DOCUMENT A107 - ABBREVIATED OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - EIGHTH EDITION - APRIL 1978- AIA*
7 A107-1978 Q 1978 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE Of ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
" 17
12.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work 15.2 Payments may be withheld on account of (1) defec-
shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. tive work not remedied, (2) claims filed, (3) failure of the
ARTICLE 13 Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors
or for labor, materials, or equipment, (4) damage to the
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner or another contractor, or (5) persistent failure to
13.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract
place where the Project is located. Documents. ..
13.2 All claims or disputes between the Contractor and 153 When the Architect agrees that the Work is sub-
the Owner arising out of, or relating to, the Contract stantially complete, he will issue a Certificate of Substan-
Documents or the breach thereof shall be decided by teal Completion.
arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry 15.4 Final payment shall not be due until the Contractor
Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association has delivered to the Owner a complete release of all liens
then obtaining unless the parties mutually agree other- arising out of this Contract or receipts in full covering all
wise. Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed labor, materials and equipment for which a lien could be
in writing with the other party to the Owner-Contractor filed, or a bond satisfactory to the Owner indemnifying
Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association him against any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after
and shall be made within a reasonable time after the dis- all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the
pute has arisen. The award rendered by the arbitrators Owner all moneys the latter may be compelled to pay in
shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable
accordance with applicable law in any court having juris- attorneys' fees.
diction thereof. Except by written consent of the person 15S The making of final payments shall constitute a
or entity sought to be joined, no arbitration arising out waiver of all claims by the Owner except those arising
of or relating to the Contract Documents shall include, from (1) unsettled liens, (2) faulty or defective Work ap-
by consolidation, joinder or in any other manner, any pearing after Substantial Completion, (3) failure of the
person or entity not a party to the agreement under which Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract
such arbitration arises, unless it is shown at the time the Documents, or (4) terms of any special warranties re- .w
demand for arbitration is filed that (1) such person or quired by thg Contract Documents. The acceptance of
entity is substantially involved in a common question of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the
fact or law, (2) the presence of such person or entity is Contractor except those previously made in writing and
required if complete relief is to be accorded in the arbi- 'identified by the Contractor as unsettled at the time of the w.
tration, (3) the interest or responsibility of such person or final Application for-Payment.
entity in the matter is not insubstantial,and (4) such per- ARTICLE 16
son or entity is not the Architect or any of his employees
or consultants. The agreement herein among the parties PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
to the Agreement and any other written agreement to 16.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,
arbitrate referred to herein shall be specifically enforce- maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and
able under the prevailing arbitration law, programs in connection with the Work. He shall take all
ARTICLE 14 reasonable precautions for the safety of,and shall provide
all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or
TIME loss to (1) all employees on the Work and other persons
14.1 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents who may be affected thereby, (2) all the Work and all
are of the essence of the Contract. The Contractor shall materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, and
expedite the Work and achieve Substantial Completion (3) other property at the site or adjacent thereto. He shall
within the Contract Time. give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordi-
14.2 The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work is nances, rules,regulations and orders of any public author-
the date certified by the Architect when construction is ity bearing on the safety of persons and property and their
sufficiently complete so that the Owner can occupy or protection from damage, injury or loss. The Contractor
utilize the Work for the use for which it is intended. shall promptly remedy all damage or loss to any property
143 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Sub-
progress of the Work by changes ordered in the Work, contractor, any Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or �+
by disputes,labor dis , fire, unusual delay indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for
P yin transportation,
adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, whose acts any of them may be liable, except damage or
loss attributable to the acts or omissions of the Owner or
unavoidable casualties, or any causes beyond the Con- Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by ow
tractor's control, or by any other cause which the Archi• either of them or by anyone for whose acts either of them
tect determines may justify the delay, then the Contract
Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reason-
may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negli-
able time as the Architect may determine. gence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the
Contractor are in addition to his obligations under Para- .r
ARTICLE 15 graph 10.11..
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ARTICLE 17
15.1 Payments shall be made as provided in Article 4 and INSURANCE ,
Article 5 of this Agreement. 17.1 Contractor's liability insurance shall be purchased
AIA DOCUMENT A117• ABBREVIATED OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • EIGHTH EDITION - APRIL 1978 • AIAO
0 1978 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A107-1978 6
16
execution and completion of the Work, whether tempo- obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to
rary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to any party or person described in this Paragraph 10.11. In
be incorporated in the Work. any and all claims against the Owner or the Architect or
10.3 The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict dis- any of their agents or employees by any employee of the
cipline and good order among his employees and shall Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indi-
not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not rectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts
skilled in the task assigned to him. any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation
10.4 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the under this Paragraph 10.11 shall not be limited in any
Architect that all materials and equipment incorporated way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages,
in the Work will be new unless otherwise specified, and compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor
that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and or any Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's com-
pensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee
defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. benefit acts. The obligations of the Contractor under this
All Work not conforming to these requirements may be Paragraph 10.11 shall not extend to the liability of the
considered defective. Architect, his agents or employees, arising out of (1) the
A11• 10.S Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu- preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, re-
ments, the Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use ports,surveys,change orders, designs or specifications, or
and other similar taxes which are legally enacted at the (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or in-
time bids are received, and shall secure and pay for the structions by the Architect, his agents or employees pro-
building permit and for all other permits and govern- vided such giving or failure to give is the primary cause
mental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the of the injury or damage.
proper execution and completion of the Work.
10.6 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply ARTICLE 11
ww with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful SUBCONTRACTS
orders of any public authority bearing on the performance 11.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a
of the Work,and shall promptly notify the Architect if the direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the
Drawings and Specifications are at variance therewith. Work at the site.
10.7 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner 11.2 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Docu-
for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontrac- ments or in the Bidding Documents, the Contractor, as
tors and their agents and employees, and other persons soon as practicable after the award of the Contract, shall
performing any of the Work under a contract with the furnish to the Architect in writing the names of Subcon-
Contractor. tractors for each of the principal portions of the Work.
10.8 The Contractor shall review,approve and submit all The Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor to
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by Whofn the Architect or the Owner may have a reasonable
the Contract Documents. The Work shall be in accord- objection. The Contractor shall not be required to con-
ance with approved submittals. - . tract with anyone to whom he has a reasonable objection.
10.9 The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises Contracts between the Contractor and the Subcontractors
free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish shall (1) require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the
caused by his operations. At the completion of the Work Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound
he shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Docu-
and about the Project as well as his tools, construction ments, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obli-
equipment, machinery and surplus materials. gations and responsibilities which the Contractor,by these
Documents,assumes toward the Owner and the Architect,
10.10 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license and (2)allow to the Subcontractor the benefit of all rights,
fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement remedies and redress afforded to the Contractor by these
of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless Contract Documents.
from loss on account thereof.
ARTICLE 12
10.11 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Con-
WORK BY
tractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and OWNER OR
the Architect and their agents and employees from and SEPARATTE E CONTRACTORS
against all claims,damages,losses and expenses,including 12.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform work re-
"" but not limited to attorneys' fees arising out of or result- laced to the Project with his own forces, and to award
ing from the performance of the Work, provided that any separate contracts in connection with other portions of
such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to the Project or other work on the site under these or simi-
bodily injury,sickness, disease or death,or to injury to or lar Conditions of the Contract. If the Contractor claims
'I"MI destruction of tangible property. (other than the Work it- that delay or additional cost is involved because of such
self) including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and action by the Owner, he shall make such claim as pro-
(2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or vided elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone 12.2 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate
directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction
for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of and storage of their materials and equipment and the
whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified execution of their work,and shall connect and coordinate
hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to his Work with theirs as required by the Contract Docu-
negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or ments.
AIA DOCUMENT A1B7 • ABBREVIATED OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - EIGHTH EDITION • APRIL 1978 - AIA9
S A107-1978 0 1978• THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
' " 15
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 7 tion of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Architect will determine the amounts owing to the Con-
tractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in accord-
7.1 The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement ance with Article 15.
with General Conditions,Supplementary and other Condi- 8,5 The Architect will be the interpreter of the require-
tions,the Drawings,the Specifications,all Addenda issued ments of the Contract Documents. He will make decisions ..,
prior to the execution of this Agreement, and all Modifi- on all claims, disputes or other matters in question be-
cations issued by the Architect after execution of the tween the Contractor and the Owner, but he will not be
Contract such as Change Orders, written interpretations liable for the results of any interpretation or decision ren-
and written orders for minor changes in the Work. The dered in good faith. The Architect's decisions in matters .
intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items' relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the
necessary for the proper execution and completion of the intent of the Contract Documents. All other decisions of
Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and the Architect, except those which have been waived by
what is required by any one shall be as binding as if re- the making or acceptance of final payment, shall be sub- �»
quired by all. Work not covered in the Contract Docu- ject to arbitration upon the written demand of either
ments will not be required unless it is consistent therewith party. _
and reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to g.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work
produce the intended results. which does not conform to the Contract Documents, f.
7.2 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall 8.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other
create any contractual relationship between the Owner or appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such
the Architect and any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor. as Shop Drawings;Product Data and Samples, but only for
73 By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents conformance with the design concept of the Work and
that he has visited the site and familiarized himself with with the information given in the Contract Documents.
the local conditions under which the Work is to be
performed. ARTICLE 9
7.4 The Work comprises the completed construction re- OWNER
quired by the Contract Documents and includes all labor 9.1 The Owner shall furnish all surveys and a legal de-
necessary to produce such construction, and all materials scription of the site.
and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in
such construction. 9.2 Except as provided in Paragraph 10.5, the Owner �*
shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements,
ARTICLE 8 assessments and charges required for the construction,use
or occupancy of permanent structures or permanent
ARCHITECT changes in existing facilities. .�
8.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Con- 9.3 The Owner shall forward all instructions to the Con-
tract and will be the Owner's representative during con- tractor through the Architem
struction and until final payment is due. 9.4 If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work or
8.2 The Architect shall at all times have access to the persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with
Work wherever it is in preparation and progress. the Contract Documents, the Owner, by a written order,
83 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropri- may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any por-
ate to the stage of construction to familiarize himself gen- tion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
erally with the progress and quality of the Work and to eliminated; however, this right of the Owner to stop the
determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accord- Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the
ance with the Contract Documents. However, the Archi- Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con-
tect will not be required to make exhaustive or continu- tractor or any other person or entity.
ous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of ARTICLE 10 .�
the Work. On the basis of his on-site observations as an CONTRACTOR
architect, he will keep the Owner informed of the prog-
ress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner 10.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, ■
against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Con- using his best skill and attention and he shall be solely
tractor. The Architect will not have control or charge of responsible for all construction means, methods, tech-
and will not be responsible for construction means, meth- niques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating
ods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety all portions of the Work under the Contract.
precautions and programs in connection with the Work, 10.2 Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Con-
and he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure tract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for
to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equip.
Documents. ment and machinery,water, heat, utilities, transportation,
8.4 Based on the Architect's observations and an evalua- and other facilities and services necessary for the proper
AIA DOCUMENT A107 • ABBREVIATED OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • EIGHTH EDITION • APRIL 1978 • AIA9
®1978• THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A107-1978 4
14
+! ARTICLE 4
PROGRESS PAYMENTS
4.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment
issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Con-
tractor as provided in the Contract Documents for the period ending the day of the
month as follows:
(Here insert payment procedures and provision for retainage,it anyJ
ttMtt
4.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the
rate entered below, or in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing at the place of the Project.
(Here insert any rate of interest agreed upon.)
(Usury laws and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the
Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the Protect and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Specific
legal advice should be obtained with respect to deletion,modification,or other requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.)
ARTICLE 5
FINAL PAYMENT
5.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be paid by the Owner to the
Contractor when the Work has been completed, the Contract fully performed,and a final Certificate for Payment
has been issued by the Architect.
ARTICLE 6
ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
6.1 The Contract Documents, which constitute the entire agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, are
listed in Article 7 and,except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement,are enumerated as follows:
(List below the Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract,/General,Supplementary,and other Conditions], the Drawings, the Specifications, and
any Addenda and accepted alternates,showing page or sheet numbers in all cases and dates where applicable-)
1811 '
go
AIA DOCUMENT A707 • ABBREVIATED OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • EIGHTH EDITION • APRIL 1978 • AIAO A107_1978 3
Q 1978 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006
13
wa•
ARTICLE 1
THE WORK
1.1 The Contractor shall perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents for
(Here insert the caption descriptive of the Work as used on other Contract Documents.)
am
we
ow
use
ARTICLE 2
TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION am
2.1 The Work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced
and,subject to authorized adjustments,Substantial Completion shall be achieved not later than
(Here insert any special provisions for liquidated damages relating to /allure to complete on time.)
,
e•r
ARTICLE 3
CONTRACT SUM
3.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the performance of the Work, subject to additions and
deductions by Change Order as provided in the Contract Documents,the Contract Sum of
wra
3.2 The Contract Sum is determined as follows:
(State here the base bid or other lump sum amount,accepted alternates,and unit prices,as applicable.)
ww
asn
INK
AIA DOCUMENT A167 • ABBREVIATED OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • LIC11711 EUIIION - APRIL 14178 • AIAO
®1978• THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVLNUE, N.W., \VASIIIN(;JUN, l).C. 230A A107-1978 2
12
I�I1►
THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
AIA Document A107
See
Abbreviated Form of Agreement Between
Owner and Contractor
For CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS OF LIMITED SCOPE where
„, the Basis of Payment is a STIPULATED SUM
1978 EDITION
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES;CONSULTATION WITH
AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION
This document includes abbreviated General Conditions and should not be used with other General Conditions.
It has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America.
AGREEMENT
' made as of the day of in the year of Nineteen
Hundred and
BETWEEN the Owner:
and the Contractor:
the Project:
the Architect:
•I+ The Owner and the Contractor agree as set forth below.
Copyright 1936,1951,1958,1961,1963,1%6,1974,m 1978 by the American Institute of Architects, 1733 New York Avenue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20006.
Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States
and will be subject to legal prosecution.
AIA DOCUMENT A107 • ABBREVIATED OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT • EIGHTH EDITION • APRIL 1978 • AIA*
Q 1978 • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE Of ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 A107-1978 1
11
low
�
�
�
�
�
� .
�
�
CONTRACT AND CONSTRUCTION FORMS
�
�
�
�
� .
� .
�
�
� .
� .
�
FORM FOR BID PROPOSAL
Page 3 of 3
aw
City, State and Zip Code
Date: Telephone No. :
w.
NOTE : This proposal must bear the written signature of the
bidder. If the bidder is a partnership, the proposal
must be signed by a partner . If the bidder is a
corporation, the proposal must be signed by a duly
authorized officer or agent of such corporation.
The Contractor shall furnish with this Bid Proposal a list of
all Subcontractors he intends to use on the project as listed
below:
Masonry
Structural Steel
Gypsum Wallboard
Roofing and Flashing
Painting
Sprinkler System
Plumbing
HVAC
Electrical
END OF BID PROPOSAL
4
10
NOMMOMMMOMW
WM
FORM FOR BID PROPOSAL
am
Page 2 of 3
D. Labor:
The undersigned certifies that he is able to furnish labor
that can work in harmony with all other elements of labor
employed or to be employed on the work.
E. Time for Completion:
The undersigned agrees to execute a General Contract
according to the terms of his bid and to commence work within
five ( 5 ) days after execution of said Contract and to
Substantially Complete all of the work required by the
Contract Documents on or before August 1, 1995. Other than
renovation work which can be started immediately ,
construction in-ground shall start on March 1, 1995. The
interim period of time from Contract signing to March 1, 1995
shall be utilized for renovation work , the submittal and
processing of shop drawings, and the ordering of materials .
F. General Warranty: �e
The undersigned certifies that he shall furnish a one (1)
year warranty on all materials and labor from the date of the
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
Im
G. Contract:
The undersigned agrees that , if he is selected as the so
Contractor , he will execute a Contract in accordance with the
terms of his bid and furnish all required insurance
certificates , and , if requested , furnish a labor and
materials performance bond.
Name of Bidder
Signature and Title
Business Address ..
40
FORM FOR BID PROPOSAL
Page 1 of 3
TO THE AWARDING AUTHORITY
A. Base Bid:
The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and
equipment required for the construction of a New Addition and
M.R. I . Unit for Cooley Dickinson Hospital, 30 Locust Street ,
Northampton, Massachusetts, in accordance with the Contract
Documents as prepared by Healthcare Architects Inc . , 64
Gothic Street , Northampton, Massachusetts, for the Contract
Price specified below, subject to additions and deductions
according to the terms and conditions of the Contract.
The Proposed Contract Price is:
Dollars ($ )
B. Addenda:
This Bid includes Addenda numbered and
C. Alternates:
For Alternate No. 1 : Add $ Subtract $
For Alternate No. 2 : Add $ Subtract $
For Alternate No. 3 : Add $ Subtract $
For Alternate No. 4 : Add $ Subtract $
For Alternate No. 5 : Add $ Subtract $
For Alternate No. 6 : Add $ Subtract $
For Alternate No. 7 : Add $ Subtract $
~` For Alternate No . Add $ Subtract $
as
ON 8
.r
.w.
0"
."
Aft
.n
..
mm
Oft
.w
•■e
4
S:
' PROPOSAL FORMS
g,
00
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
ON
Page 5 of 5
After execution of the Contract and acceptance of the
bond by the Owner , the check or bid bond accompanying the
proposal of the successful bidder shall be returned.
G. ALTERNATES
1. All bidders shall include a price for each Alternate.
The prices given shall be total prices and shall include
all costs for bonding, insurance, overhead and profit and
any other costs . If no change in the Base Bid is
required, enter "No Change".
H. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS
1. No interpretations of the meaning of the Drawings ,
Specifications or other documents will be made to any
bidder orally. Every request for such interpretation
shall be in writing, addressed to: Healthcare Architects
Inc. , 64 Gothic Street, Northampton, Massachusetts 01060,
and, to be given consideration, must be received at least
five (5) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of
bids .
2. Any and all interpretations and any supplemental
instructions will be in the form of written Addenda to
the Specifications and, if issued, will be sent to all
prospective bidders at the respective addresses furnished
me for such purposes. Failure of any bidder to receive any
Addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder
from any obligation under his bid as submitted.
3. All Addenda so issued shall become a part of the Contract
Documents .
go END OF SECTION
Am
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
am
Page 4 of 5
go
am
for renovation work , the submittal and processing of shop
drawings, and the ordering of materials. ..,
6. The Awarding Authority may reject as informal, bids which
are incomplete, conditional or obscure, or which contain
additions not called for , erasures not properly Oft
initialed, alterations or irregularities of any kind; or
the Awarding Authority may waive such formalities.
ON
7. The right is reserved by Cooley Dickinson Hospital, the
Awarding Authority, to reject any or all bids if it is in
its interest to do so.
..►
F. CONTRACT AWARDS
1. ( If requested) , a bond, in the sum of the full amount of
the proposal with a surety company satisfactory to the
Owner , as surety will be required for the faithful
performance of the Contract, or the assignment of a
savings bank book in lieu of such surety company bond in
the full amount of the Contract . If such performance
bond is requested, the premiums will be paid for by the
Owner . "u
2. If requested, the party to whom the Contract is awarded
will be required to present forthwith the name of the ^
surety company to be offered and to execute a Contract
and furnish a bond duly executed by a satisfactory surety
company, within the limit stated in the proposal , after
notification that the Contract is ready for signature.
3. In case the party to whom the Contract is awarded shall
fail or neglect to execute a Contract or , if requested,
furnish a satisfactory bond within the time specified,
the Owner may determine that the bidder has abandoned the
Cont"Tact and thereupon the proposal and acceptance shall
be null and void, and the certified check or bid bond
accompanying the proposal shall be forfeited to and
retained by said Owner as liquidated damages for such dft
failure or neglect, and to indemnify said Owner for any
loss which may be sustained by failure of the bidder to
execute a Contract and furnish a bond as aforesaid.
IM
6 Ma
40
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Page 3 of 5
certified check , drawn on a national bank or trust
company for not less than five percent (5%) of the
Base Bid Price, payable to Cooley Dickinson Hospital ,
said security to be returned to the bidder unless
forfeited under the conditions herein stipulated.
The security should be enclosed in the sealed
envelope containing the bid. Such security shall be
returned to all except the three lowest, responsible
and eligible bidders within five (5) days , Saturdays ,
Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after formal
opening of the bids.
b. The remaining security will be returned to the three
lowest , eligible bidders within three days after the
Owner and the accepted bidder have executed a
Contract. If no Contract has been so executed within
thirty (30) days after the date of opening of bids,
the bid security will be returned at. any time
thereafter upon demand of the bidder so long as he
has not been notified of the acceptance of his bid.
C. If all bids are rejected, all bid securities will be
returned forthwith.
3. Bids may be withdrawn at any time prior to the designated
w time for the opening of bids. No bid may be withdrawn
within forty-five (45) days, Saturdays, Sundays and legal
holidays excluded, after the actual date of opening
thereof.
4. Bids will be compared on the basis of lump sum and
Alternate prices stated in the Proposal. In the event
'o that there is a discrepancy between the lump sum price
written in figures and words , the price written in words
shall govern.
ON
5. The bidder shall agree to commence work within five (5)
days , Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded ,
-40 after execution of a Contract , and to Substantially
Complete the work required by the Contract Documents on
or before August 1 , 1995 . Other than renovation work
which can be started immediately, construction in-ground
so shall start on March 1, 1995. The interim period of time
from Contract signing and March 1, 1995 shall be utilized
+w 5
am
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
.wA
Page 2 of 5
Opening.
C. EXISTING CONDITIONS
1. Bidders are required to submit their proposals upon the
following express conditions, which shall apply to and
become part of every bid received, viz :
Bidders must satisfy themselves by personal ..
examination of the location of the proposed
work , by any such other means as they may
desire, as to actual conditions and requirements
of work .
2. The locations of existing structures and related items
are shown on the Drawings in accordance with the best
available information in the Owner 's possession. The
completeness and accuracy of said information are not
guaranteed and the Contractor shall have no excessive
expense due to encountering any existing structures or
pipes.
D. SPECIAL JOB REQUIREMENTS "-
1. All components, materials, parts and labor executed under
this Contract shall be warrantied for a period of not .�
less than one ( 1) year from the Date of Substantial
Completion , except for equipment or materials having
warranties in excess of one (1) year. ,
2. A Site Inspection/Walk-Through will be held, beginning
in the Engineering Office of Ernest Margeson, at Cooley
Dickinson Hospital on Wednesday, November 2, 1994 , at
9:00 a .m.
E. GENERAL BIDS
1. All bids must be upon the blank form for proposal annexed
hereto, give the price for each item of work proposed ,
both in words and figures, and be signed by the bidder .
2. Bid Security:
a. Each bid must be accompanied by a bid bond, cash or
4 *
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
w+s
Page 1 of 5
so
04 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
A. GENERAL
1. Cooley Dickinson Hospital , hereinafter called the
Awarding Authority, will receive sealed bid proposals for
the supply and installation of all required labor and
materials for the construction of a New Addition and
M. R. I . Unit for Cooley Dickinson Hospital , 30 Locust
Street , Northampton , Massachusetts , on the respective
40 forms herein.
2. Sealed bids for the General Contract will be received at
the office of Healthcare Architects Inc . , 64 Gothic
Street , Northampton, Massachusetts , until 12:00 Noon,
local time, on or before November 10, 1994 . After such
time, all bids will be privately opened and taken under
advisement.
3. Any bids may be withdrawn prior to the respective times
scheduled above for opening of such bids or authorized
postponement thereof. No bid may be withdrawn for forty-
- five (45) days , Saturdays , Sundays and legal holidays
excluded , after opening of the bids. No telephone or
telegraphic bid, change in bid, or withdrawal of bid will
be received or recognized.
so B. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
1. Bidders may obtain two (2) complete sets of Drawings and
Specifications at the office of Healthcare Architects
' Inc. , 64 Gothic Street, Northampton, Massachusetts 01060,
upon deposit of $50.00 for each set , in the form of a
certified check made payable to Cooley Dickinson
Aw Hospital . Additional sets may be obtained at the cost of
reproduction , which is non-refundable . The Contract
Documents will be mailed upon request for a $ 15 . 00
mailing charge (made payable to Healthcare Architects
Inc. ) , which is non-refundable.
2. The full amount of the Plan deposit will be refunded to
all bidders returning Drawings and Specifications in good
condition within ten (10) days after the date of the Bid
3
.�
*.+
•�
. e
..�
•�
,....� __
OR
All,
rt,17
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
AM
INVITATION TO BID
No
Page 2 of 2
am
In inviting bids, the Awarding Authority reserves the right to
waive any formalities and to reject any or all bids if it is in *�+
its interest to do so.
All bids shall remain in effect for forty-five (45) days ,
Saturdays , Sundays and legal holidays excluded, after opening of
the bids.
Bid Award for the Contract will be determined by approximately
December 1, 1994 . The successful bidder must agree to commence
work within five (5) days of the execution of a General Contract
and Notice to Proceed and to Substantially Complete all of the
work required by the Contract Documents on or before August 1,
1995 . Other than renovation work which can be started
immediately, construction in-ground shall start on March 1, 1995.
The interim period of time from Contract signing to March 1, 1995 A.
shall be utilized for renovation work , the submittal and
processing of shop drawings, and the ordering of materials .
A Site Inspection/Walk-Through will be held, beginning at the
Engineering Office of Ernest Margeson , at Cooley Dickinson
Hospital on Wednesday, November 2, 1994, at 9: 00 a.m.
COOLEY DICKINSON HOSPITAL
Northampton, Massachusetts
w.
2
..",
.As
INVITATION TO BID
Page 1 of 2
w
INVITATION TO BID
The Cooley Dickinson Hospital, hereinafter called the Awarding
Authority, invites sealed bids for the supply and installation of
all required labor and materials for the construction of a New
Addition and M.R. I . Unit for Cooley Dickinson Hospital , 30 Locust
Street , Northampton, Massachusetts 01060, in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications as prepared by Healthcare Architects
Inc. , 64 Gothic Street, Northampton, Massachusetts 01060.
Sealed bids for the General Contract will be received at the
office of Healthcare Architects Inc . , 64 Gothic Street ,
Northampton, Massachusetts 01060, until 12 :00 Noon, local time ,
on or before November 10, 1994. After such time, the bids will
be privately opened and taken under advisement .
00 Bidders may obtain two ( 2 ) complete sets of Drawings and
Specifications at the office of Healthcare Architects Inc . , 64
Gothic Street, Northampton, Massachusetts , upon deposit of $50.00
for each set , in the form of cash or check made payable to Cooley
Dickinson Hospital. Additional sets may be obtained at the cost
of reproduction. The Contract Documents will be mailed upon
request for a $15.00 mailing charge (made payable to Healthcare
Architects Inc. ) , which is non-refundable.
The full amount of the deposit will be refunded to all bidders
returning Drawings and Specifications in good condition within
ten (10) days after the date of the Bid Opening.
The Contract Documents may be examined at the following place
during normal business- hours after issuance of the Documents:
- Healthcare Architects Inc. , 64 Gothic Street , Northampton ,
Massachusetts
Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid deposit in the form of
cash , a certified check, or a treasurer 's or cashier 's check , or
a bid bond issued by a responsible bank or trust company, made
payable to Cooley Dickinson Hospital .
The amount of such bid deposits shall be five percent (5%) of the
Base Bids.
+ 1
4"
MR
INVITATION TO BID
sm
am
Section 15785: Cat Scan Room Air g°
Conditioning Units . . . . . . . 15785-1 - 15785-5
Section 15791: Steam Duct Coils . . . . . . . . . 15791-1 - 15791-3
Section 15835 : Terminal Heat Transfer *�
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15835-1 - 15835-4
Section 15855: Air Handling Units With
Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15855-1 - 15855-6 ..
Section 15870: Power Ventilators . . . . . . . . 15870-1 - 15870-3
Section 15885: Air Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15885-1 - 15885-4
Section 15890 : Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15890-1 - 15890-6
Section 15910: Ductwork Accessories . . . . . 15910-1 - 15910-5
Section 15936 : Air Outlets and Inlets . . . 15936-1 - 15936-4
Section 15974: Temperature Controls . . . . . 15974-1 - 15974-10
Section 15991 : Testing and Balancing . . . . 15991-1 - 15991-2
Section 16001: Electrical General
Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16001-1 - 16001-3
Section 16111: Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -
. . . . . . 16111-1 16111-5
Section 16120 : Wire and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . 16120-1 - 16120-4
Section 16130: Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16130-1 - 16130-3
Section 16141 : Wiring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . 16141-1 - 16141-4 �*
Section 16180: Equipment Wiring Systems . 16180-1 - 16180-3
Section 16190 : Supporting Devices . . . . . . . 16190-1 - 16190-4
Section 16195: Electrical Identification. 16195-1 - 16195-2
Section 16440 : Disconnect Switches . . . . . . 16440-1 - 16440-2
Section 16470: Panelboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16470-1 - 16470-3
Section 16480 : Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 16480-1 - 16480-4
Section 16510: Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . 16510-1 - 16510-3 "
iv
I"
go
Section 08210• Wood Doors 08210-1 - 08210-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section 08360 : Rolling Overhead Doors . . . 08360-1 - 08360-4
Section 08520: Aluminum Storefront System 08520-1 - 08520-3
40 Section 08700 : Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08700-1 - 08700-2
Section 08800: Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08800-1 - 08800-3
Section 09111 : Metal Stud Framing System. 09111-1 - 09111-3
ON Section 09260: Gypsum Wallboard Systems . 09260-1 - 09260-3
Section 09261 : Gypsum Wallboard Sheathing 09261-1 - 09261-2
Section 09510: Acoustical Ceilings . . . . . . 09510-1 - 09510-3
Section 09650 : Resilient Flooring . . . . . . . 09650-1 - 09650-5
PX Section 09690: Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09690-1 - 09690-6
Section 09826 : Troweled-On Surfacing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09826-1 - 09826-3
NO Section 09900 : Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09900-11/ 09900-6
Section 10260: Corner Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . 10260-1✓
Section 10500: Toilet Accessories . . . . . . . 10500-1 - 10500-2
Section 10522: Fire Extinguishers, V
no Cabinets and Accessories . 10522-1 - 10522-4
Section 10850: Louvers . . . . . . . . . . . .`.. . . . . . 10850-1 - 10850-3
Section 10950: Air Inflatable Enclosure
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10950-1 - 10950-2
Section 12531 : Cubicle Track . . . . . . . . . . ./.' 12531-1 - 12531-2
Section 13090: Radiation Protection 13090-1 - 13090-4
Section 15300: Fire Protection Work . . . . . 15300-1 - 15300-13
Section 15400: Plumbing Provisions . . . . . . 15400-1 - 15400-13
Section 15410 : Plumbing Piping . . . . . . . . . . 15410-1 - 15410-14
Section 15411: Gas and Vacuum Systems . . . 15411-1 - 15411-11
Section 15430 : Plumbing Specialties . . . . . 15430-1 - 15430-5
Section 15440: Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . 15440-1 - 15440-6
Section 15010: HVAC General Provisions . . 15010-1 - 15010-12
Section 15100: Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15100-1 - 15100-3
Section 15140 : Supports and Anchors . . . 15140-1 - 15140-5
Section 15190: Mechanical Identification. 15190-1 - 15190-3
Section 15260: Piping Insulation . . . . . . . . 15260-1 - 15260-4
Section 15290: Ductwork Insulation . . . . . . 15290-1 - 15290-4
Section 15520 : Steam and Steam Condensate
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15520-1 - 15520-5
Section 15526 : Steam and Steam Condensate
Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15526-1 - 15526-3
Section 15536: Refrigeration Piping . . . . . 15536-1 - 15536-5
Section 15671: Air Cooled Condensing
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15671-1 - 15671-6
44
.W
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section 02000: Sitework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02000-1 - 02000-2
Section 02001 : Sub-Surface Explorations . 02001-1 - 02001-2 ..
Section 02050: Demolition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02050-1 - 02050-5
Section 02052 : Asbestos Removal . . . . . . . . . 02052-1
Section 02072: Minor Demolition for
Remodeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02072-1 - 02072-2
Section 02110: Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . 02110-1 - 02110-3
Section 02219: Structure Excavation
and Backfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02219-1 - 02219-6
Section 02226 : Trenching, Backfilling
and Compacting . . . . . . . . . . . 02226-1 - 02226-10
Section 02260: Finish Grading . . . . . . . . . . . 02260-1 - 02260-3 4W
Section 02513 : Asphalt (Bituminous)
Concrete Pavement . . . . . . . . 02513-1 - 02513-6
Section 02540: Site Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . 02540-1 - 02540-3
Section 02615: Water Distribution
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02615-1 - 02615-7
Section 02618 : Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02618-1 - 02618-3
Section 02641 : Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 02641-1 - 02641-3
Section 02650: Disinfection of Water
Distribution System . . . . . . 02650-1 - 02650-5
Section 02680: Testing Water Mains . . . . . . 02680-1 - 02680-3
Section 02690: Sanitary Sewage Systems . . 02690-1 - 02690-5
Section 02951 : Seeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02951-1 - 02951-3
Section 03001 : Concrete Work . . . . . . . . . . . . 03001-1 - 03001-6
Section 04000: Unit Masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04000-1 - 04000-9
Section 05120 : Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . 05120-1 - 05120-3
Section 05300: Metal Decking . . . . . . . . . . . . 05300-1 - 05300-3
Section 05999: Miscellaneous Metals . . . . . 05999-1 - 05999-4
Section 06100: Rough Carpentry . . . . . . . . . . 06100-1 - 06100-3
Section 06200: Finish Carpentry . . . . . . . . . 06200-1 - 06200-3
Section 06410: Cabinetwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06410-1 - 06410-5
Section 07212 : Rigid Insulation . . . . . . . . . 07212-1 - 07212-3
Section 07213.01 : Fibrous Batt
Insulation . . . . . . . . . 07213.01-1 - 07213.01-2
Section 07255: Cementitious Fireproofing. 07255-1 - 07255-4
Section 07531 : Elastomeric Sheet Roofing. 07531-1 - 07531-5
Section 07600: Flashing and Sheet Metal . 07600-1 - 07600-2
Section 07820: Aluminum Skylight Windows. 07820-1 - 07820-2
Section 07900: Joint Sealants . . . . . . . . . . . 07900-1 - 07900-4
Section 08110 : Standard Steel Doors 08110-1 - 08110-3
Section 08111 : Hollow Metal Frames . . . . . . 08111-1 - 08111-3 '"
ON
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INVITATIONTO BID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
' INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
PROPOSAL FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
CONTRACT AND CONSTRUCTION FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -. 24
GENERAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 - 43
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 - 48
SPECIALCONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 - 50
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01010: Summary of Work . . . . . . . . . . 01010-1 - 01010-5
Section 01015: Alternates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01015-1 - 01015-3
Section 01020 : Allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01020-1 - 01020-4
Section 01027 : Application for Payment . . 01027-1 - 01027-2
Section 01028: Change Order Procedures . . 01028-1 - 01028-4
Section 01040: Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01040-1 - 01040-2
Section 01045: Cutting and Patching . . . . . 01045-1 - 01045-4
Section 01090 : Reference Standards . . . . . . 01090-1 - 01090-5
Section 01120: Alteration Project
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 01120-1 - 01120-4
Section 01200: Project Meetings . . . . . . . . . 01200-1 - 01200-4
Section 01310 : Progress Schedules . . . . . . . 01310-1 - 01310-3
Section 01340: Shop Drawings, Product
Data and Samples . . . . . . . . . 01340-1 - 01340-3
Section 01370 : Schedule of Values . . . . . . . 01370-1 - 01370-2
Section 01500: Construction Facilities
and Temporary Controls . . . 01500-1 - 01500-3
Section 01569: Construction Cleaning . . . . 01569-1 - 01569-2
Section 01610: Transportation and
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01610-1 - 01610-2
Section 01620: Storage and Protection . . . 01620-1 - 01620-2
Section 01630 : Product Options and
Substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . 01630-1 - 01630-4
Section 01701 : Contract Closeout
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01701-1 - 01701-4
Section 01710: Final Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 01710-1 - 01710-2
Section 01720: Project Record Documents . 01720-1 - 01720-3
Section 01730 : Operation and Maintenance
Data . . 01730-1 - 01730-4
Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds . . . . . 01740-1 - 01740-2
OR
0"
i
GENERAL DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR:
New Addition and M.R. I. Unit
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Northampton, Massachusetts
on
W
AS PREPARED BY:
Healthcare Architects Inc.
64 Gothic Street
Northampton, Massachusetts 81868
(413) 585-1512
DATE:
October 1994 H OF Ep ARC
GENE CT Q a
J. Na 4100 N
i ° OWAKO SK,J : O 1 ao R
vaum
��0• • _
w •••'y LARRY ri. orb FC/ST"tRE \ate;;S/o ie
AL
• NC 301"
s r y * 10 9 y
g, ;c a•. . �..
'k-
NA L
1
1
1
7
7
7
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
1
l
GENERAL DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR:
New Addition and M.R.I. Unit
Cooley Dickinson Hospital
Northampton, Massachusetts
AS PREPARED BY: • gy
Healthcare Architects Inc.
64 Gothic Street
Northampton, Massachusetts 81066 .,
(413) 585-1512
Al
DATE:
October 1994 ��N 0 �q {6p6D Arch'
S""
gBENE CT
o �. n Nat 4100
OWAKO r O •
• •.' _ M161W�K nor 9fC/STER��
�NAI E i
1011 9y
�ayA l
S k
sr
'' a mow